Home

HP 200 User's Manual

1. Assigns the circuit group specific node identifier portion of the AppleTalk address The AppleTalk router uses multiple AppleTalk addresses one address for each port to which the router is directly connected The AppleTalk address that is the network number and node identifier pair must be unique for each node within the AppleTalk internet You can explicitly assign a node identifier or you can allow the AppleTalk router to assign its own node identifier Regardless of the method used it is strongly recommended that you enable Probe to ensure a unique node identifier Default 0 AppleTalk assigns the node identifier Range 1 to 253 decimal Displays a screen with parameters for creating a Node list For information about creating a Node list refer to Node low and Node high For information about assigning the Node list to a filter refer to Dest Node low and Source Node low Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering AppleTalk source or destination nodes when creating a Node list a Enter the AppleTalk node identifier in this field and leave the Node high field blank if you are filtering a single AppleTalk source or destination node Enter the lowest AppleTalk node identifier in this field and enter the highest node identifier in the Node high field if you are filtering a range of AppleTalk source or destination nodes For additional information refer to Node high earlier
2. community optional is the name of the SNMP community that grants access to that node If you omit the name public is used If you include a name the address must also be included Example rgetda 15 2 1 94 Displays the DE Cnet router inter area routing table for the node whose IP address is 15 2 1 94 Area routes for 1 1 The fields in the table are as follows Dst Cst Hop Next IF Hop 1 0 0 0 0 0 10 15 3 2 2 3 7 7 1 15 2 60 6 2 3 1 4 9T Dst lists the destination DEC net area Cst contains the circuit cost to Dst Hop lists the number of router hops to Dst Next Hop lists the DEC net area and node number of the next hop router IF lists the number the router assigned to the network interface for Next Hop spuewuop TON 16 61 16 62 Using the Network Control Language Accessing Bridging and Routing Tables Rgetdn Displaying the DE Cnet Router Level 1 Routing Table Use NCL s Rgetdn command to format and display the DEC net router level 1 node or intra area routing table for a local or remote HP router Syntax rgetdn X X X X community X X X X optional is the IP address of the local or remote router in dotted decimal notation If you omit this field an IP address on the local router will be used community optional is the name of the community that grants access to that node If you omit the name public is used If you include a name the IP address must also be included
3. Enter the IP address of the interface in dotted decimal notation if you want a single interface to send all EGP RIP or OSPF updates to the import route filter Leave the field blank if you want the EGP RIP or OSPF filter to universally accept updates from all interfaces Sets a export or import route filter to recognize EGP RIP or OSPF as the protocol used for receiving routing information Default RIP 7 27 L sPULHLd dl 020 01d PUHU EGP RIP OSPF Transit Area Transmit Broadcast All Ones All Zeros Internet Protocol IP Parameters Parameters and Options Exterior Gateway Protocol EGP Routing Information Protocol RIP Open Shortest Path First Protocol OSPF Identifies the OSPF area through which traffic to Neighbor ID is forwarded Enter the area ID in dotted decimal notation Identifies the interface specific network and or subnet transmit broadcast address Default All Ones Uses Subnet Mask or a default mask if a subnet mask is not defined and places all ones in the host portion of the address Uses Subnet Mask or a default mask if a subnet mask is not defined and places all zeroes in the host portion of the address Explicit Broadcast Displays a field for entering a broadcast address in dotted decimal notation For Type External Type 1 External Type 2 Type Static Route 7 28 more information about entering addresses in dotted decimal notation refer to
4. X X X X optional is the next hop IP address in dotted deci mal notation of the map to show If you omit this field all cur rently configured IP maps are shown Before using the command this way make sure that page mode is enabled as it is by default so that the resulting display will scroll one screen at a time with a prompt for MORE Page mode and how to get more are described on page 16 14 Figure 16 4 shows an example of an Ipmap display DEFAULT_CONFIG 6 Jun 1993 2 25 26 IP map information for next hop X X X X Map state connected Queued packets 9 Circuit WANI Connect time this connection instance 36 seconds Non Mapped data DISALLOWED over this mapped connection Outbound phone number used 4 4 Total Connect time for this map 1 36 minutes seconds Total number of times connections have been made Z Packet Totals Transmitted 4 Received 4 Dropped Z IP Networks accessable using next hop X X X X Y Y LY Z Z 2 2 DEKE DEDEDE HE HE DE IE IE IE IE DE HE HE HE IE DE IE DE HE HE HE HE IE IE IE IEE DE DE DEM IE IE IE HE HE HE HE IE IE IE IE IE I IK HE HEIE DE DEDEDE IDI IE IE IE DEDEDE DE IK DEFAULT_CONFIG Figure 16 4 Sample IP Map Display 16 89 9T spuewuop TON 16 90 Using the Network Control Language Controlling IP M apped Circuits for V 25 bis The display of pmap information will vary based on the state of the map when you execute Ipmap In a
5. icmp_rx frag_error contains the number of ICMP destination unreachable messages with a Code field value of 4 indicating that a datagram could not be fragmented received by interface ip address Such messages indicate that an IP datagram previously routed through interface ip address cannot be handled by a subsequent router icmp_rx param_problem contains the number of ICMP parameter problem messages received by interface ip address Such messages report faulty IP datagram headers 18 65 18 66 Management Information Base Variables ip IP Information Base icmp_rx redirect contains the number of ICMP redirect messages received by interface ip address Such messages inform the recipient of amore optimum IP route icmp_rx ttl contains the number of ICMP time exceeded messages received by interface ip address Such messages are generated when a datagram s hop count reaches 0 icmp_rx xsum_error contains the number of received ICMP messages dropped by interface ip interface because of a faulty ICMP checksum icmp_tx dest_unreachable contains the number of ICMP destination unreachable messages transmitted by interface ip address Such messages indicate that the originating node cannot route or deliver datagrams icmp_tx echo_reply contains the number of ICMP echo reply messages transmitted by interface ip address Such messages test whether a destination node is reachable icmp_tx frag_error contains the number of ICMP destinat
6. isplay the IPX Service Advertising Protocol SAP table page 16 45 isplay the IP routing table page 16 45 isplay the source routing Routing Information Field RIF cache page 16 68 D D D D D D D Display the DECnet Level 2 routing table area routes page 16 61 D D D D D D D isplay the source routing Routing Information Field RIF cache page 16 70 All of the above commands display their output on the console screen To output the display to a printer or file instead place the command syntax within the Print command described on page 16 19 The commands for IP tables marked with an asterisk above are described in an earlier section Accessing the Internet Management Information Base starting on page 16 40 but are listed here for completeness The command for the OSPF routing table marked with two asterisks above is described in a later section of this chap ter Managing the Open Shortest Path First Protocol but are listed here for completeness 16 54 Using the Network Control Language Accessing Bridging and Routing Tables Rgetat Displaying the AppleTalk Configuration Table Use NCL s Rgetat command to format and display the AppleTalk router configuration table for a local or remote HP router Syntax rgetat X X X X community X X X X optional is the IP address of the local or remote router in dotted decimal notation If you omit this field an IP address on the
7. sec 14 4 Options V 25 bis Network M apping Parameters and Options Designates the router through which to access the target network This is the next hop router address configured under IP static routes Enter the IP address of the next hop router in dotted decimal notation Is the phone number to the next hop router You can assign up to 15 numbers to the same router If the first number fails the remaining numbers will be retried in sequence until a connection is made The last successful number used will be the first tried when the next call is attempted Each number will be tried as many times as specified in the Connect retry count parameter Thus with three phone numbers entered and a Connect retry count set to 3 the router will try up to nine times to establish a connection Is any additional phone number such as an internal extension required to reach the next hop router identified by the Remote station number parameter Sets the minimum time to leave the v 25 bis circuit up if other virtual circuits are queued waiting for a v 25 bis port to become available If no other virtual circuits are waiting then the v 25 bis Minimum connect duration and Connect inactivity time parameters are used Default 10 Range 1 through 60 Part Il General Operating Reference 15 Using the Statistic Screens 15 2 Using the Statistic Screens This chapter provides a reference to the statistics screen outputs a
8. t23_tmout contains the number of T23 timer expirations The T23 timer starts when a CLEAR REQUEST packet is issued and terminates when a CLEAR CONFIRMATION or CLEAR INDICATION packet is received If such a packet is not received within T23 seconds typically 180 seconds the CLEAR REQUEST is reissued Virtual Circuits data_rx contains the number of DATA packets received by X 25 virtual circuit svc DATA packets contain user data data_tx contains the number of DATA packets transmitted by X 25 virtual circuit svc DATA packets contain user data dropped tx contains the number of packets dropped by X 25 virtual circuit cct because of resource limitations no buffer space available or the virtual circuit was down reset_cfm_rx contains the number of RESET CONFIRMATION packets received by X 25 virtual circuit svc A RESET CONFIRMATION packet acknowledges that the previously requested reset action has been implemented reset_cfm_tx contains the number of RESET CONFIRMATION packets transmitted by X 25 virtual circuit svc A RESET CONFIRMA TION packet acknowledges that the previously requested reset action has been implemented reset_rx contains the number of RESET INDICATION packets received by X 25 virtual circuit svc A RESET INDICATION packet informs the recipient that the remote node has reset the send and receive packet sequences to 0 Management Information Base Variables x25 X 25 Information Base reset_tx contains the n
9. 1 aaa a 17 122 tcp Transmission Control Protocol Event Messages 17 124 telnet Telnet Event Messages 0 00002 17 125 tftp TFTP and Fget Event Messages 000 17 126 timep Time Protocol Event Messages 0 4 17 133 X 25 Event Messages 1 aaa a 17 135 xrx XNS Router Event Messages aaau aaa aaa 17 147 zmodem Zmodem Event Messages oaaae 17 149 Management Information Base Variables alarm Alarm Information Base oaaae 18 3 at AppleTalk Information Base oaaae 18 4 atmib AppleTalk MIB Information Base 004 18 9 buf Buffers Information Base aaan aaa 18 12 cct Circuits Information Base oaaae 18 14 chassis Chassis Information Base aaua aaa aaa 18 43 config Configuration Information Base 18 47 dev Device Information Base oaaae 18 52 decnet DE Cnet Configuration Information Base 18 53 dis Data Link Services Information Base 18 55 drs DECnet Circuit Group Information Base 18 58 echo Echo Service Information Base 18 60 ego EGP Information Base 0 0 00000 ae 18 61 hw Hardware Information Base 000004 18 63 ip IP InformationBase 2 0 00 02 18 64 ipx IPX InformationBase 2 200002 ee eee 18 68 isdn ISDN V 25 bis Information Base 04 18 70 key Key Information Base 000 0002 e eae 18 74 Ib Bridge In
10. DSR lost connection closed Meaning Action A live connection has been dropped by the terminal adapter dropping DSR The router will immediately go into a state where the connection can be re established either by waiting for an incoming call making more data available for transmission or by sending a CRN command The action depends on the configuration Check any adapter connections or logs Dup ph next hop X X X X amp Y Y Y Y Meaning Action A duplicate phone number was found between IP map records The map records that have the same number have IP next hop addresses of X X X X and Y Y Y Y Remove the duplicate phone numbers This is a major error and the configuration beyond the duplicate will not be read Enable requested on cctcct Meaning The circuit named in the object field of the event message is requesting to be enabled 17 29 Event Log Messages cct Circuit Event Messages entity already disabled Meaning An already disabled circuit identified in the object field of the event message has received NCL s Disable command entity already enabled Meaning An already enabled circuit identified in the object field of the event message has received NCL s Enable command entity disabled Meaning The circuit named in the object field of the event message has been disabled in response to NCL s Disable command entity enabled Meaning The circuit named in the
11. Default 20 seconds Range 6 to 40 Limits the number of hops an ARE frame traverses through the hop route before it is dropped by the receiving circuit group For example if a circuit group is configured for Max Hops of 3 then ARE frames arriving on that circuit group with three or more hops are dropped instead of forwarded Default 7 Range 1 to 7 Positions the filtered bit pattern within either the MAC level or data link level header The first most significant bit of either the MAC level or data link level header is referenced as bit 0 Enter the starting location of the filtered bit pattern with reference to the most significant bit of the header For example an Ethernet multicast address is designated by setting the lowest order bit in the highest order byte of the Ethernet address Consequently the following are valid Ethernet multicast addresses 010000009999 OF 0000009999 To filter multicast addresses you would examine the multicast bit by entering 7 at Offset Precedence Priority Protocol ID Org Code high Protocol ID Org Code low Options Options Options Bridge Parameters Parameters and Options Assigns a priority values to a filter the higher the precedence the greater the priority You can construct up to 31 filters per bridge circuit group The Precedence value is used when an incoming packet meets multiple filter rules In such an instance the filter with the highest priority is appli
12. Event Log Messages X 25 Event Messages Table 17 3 Diagnostic Field Codes Continued 4T s pess Ww 601 344 Code Point to Point Service Continued 48 Time expired 49 for incoming call 50 for clear indication 51 for reset indication 52 for restart indication 53 63 Notassigned 64 Call setup call clearing or registration problem 65 Facility registration code not allowed 66 Facility parameter not allowed 67 Invalid called address 68 Invalid calling address 69 Invalid facility registration length 70 Incoming call barred 71 No logical channel available 72 Call collision 73 Duplicate facility request 74 Nonzero address length 75 Nonzero facility length 76 Facility not provided when expected 77 Invalid CCITT specified DTE facility 78 79 Notassigned 80 Miscellaneous 81 Improper Cause code from DTE 82 Misaligned octet 83 Inconsistent Q bit setting 84 111 Notassigned 112 International problem 113 Remote network problem 17 143 17 144 Event Log Messages X 25 Event Messages Table 17 3 Diagnostic Field Codes Continued Code Point to Point Service Continued 114 International protocol problem 115 International link out of order 116 International link busy 117 Transit network facility problem 118 Remote network facility problem 119 International routing problem 120 Temporary routing problem 121 Unknown DNIC 122 Maintenance action 123 127 Notassigned 241 Ca
13. IPX Parameters Conti nued From Previous Page 11 16 11 16 11 17 11 17 11 18 11 18 11 18 11 19 11 19 Source Host high Source Host low Source Network high Source Network low Source Route Token Ring Source Socket high Source Socket low Target Net WAN SAP Period AcceptNETBIOS Bcasts from net Action Auto Enable No Yes Drop Accept Advertise Ignore IPX Protocol Parameters Parameters and Options Parameters and Options Enables or disables local client access to remote NETBIOS servers Default Yes Disables client access to the internet and effectively restricts NETBIOS clients to those services offered by local servers Enables NETBIOS client access to the internet NETBIOS broadcasts generated by clients are broadcast across all IPX router interfaces save those specifically configured not to accept NETBIOS broadcasts Determines the outbound filtering action applied to a SAP Service Advertising Protocol filter when the contents of a packet field fall within the range established by a matching set of low and high parameters Default Drop for most filters Default Advertise for Network Number Server Type filters Action parameter options are not the same for all filters The following options may be available depending on the type of filter you are creating TT Discards a packet meeting the filter rule Relays a packet meeting the filter r
14. If you wish to see branches descending from an object in the MIB use the List command again with either the name from the first column of figure 16 3 or the object identification code from the third column of figure 16 3 for one of the fields in identifier 16 36 Using the Network Control Language Accessing the Management Information Base The following paragraphs describe how to use the List command to step through branches of the MIB using the buf information base as an example see figure 16 2 above To begin with buf after displaying the objects shown in figure 16 3 you would enter at the NCL prompt list buf or list 11 Note in figure 16 3 that 11is the object identification code for buffers It can be substituted for the name buf In response the console displays formatted data like the following 1 map 0002code 1 There is only a single branch descending from buf To see branches descending from 1 you would enter list buf 1 or list 11 1 fromthe code shown in the last response In response the console displays formatted data like the following msg map 0002code 0 pkt map 0002code 1 To see branches descending from pkt you would enter list buf 1 pkt or list 11 1 1 In response the console displays formatted data like the following init map 0004code 1 a free map 0004code 2 0 min map 0004code 3 miss map 0004code 4 Q size map 0004code 5 Z corrupt
15. Receiver overflow detected 4T Meaning The Local Area Network Controller or the Link Level Controller for the circuit identified in the object field of the event message has dropped a received packet because of lack of space in the Receiver FIFO buffer Remote clearing s pess Ww 607 344 Meaning The remote end of a point to point circuit is in the process of resetting Remote connection refused by local Meaning The router has rejected a call request from the remote end Remote disconnect after local FRM R Meaning The remote end of a point to point circuit has disconnected after receiving a frame reject packet from the local end of the circuit Remote disconnect confirmed Meaning A local LLC2 circuit has received a positive confirmation of a previously issued disconnect Remote disconnect received Meaning A local LLC2 circuit has issued a disconnect to a remote circuit and this disconnect has been received Same as Remote clearing in this section Remote disconnect retries exhausted Meaning A local LLC2 circuit has issued a disconnect to a remote circuit and the number of retries has been exhausted after N2 Retry Counter times of trying Remote disconnect timeout Meaning A local LLC2 circuit has issued a disconnect to a remote circuit and this disconnect has timed out and become idle 17 45 Event Log Messages cct Circuit Event Messages Remote disconnected
16. zmodem For Zmodem commands See page 16 98 ospf For the commands beginning with ospf See page 16 72 other For the remaining commands not listed for any of the above all For the entire set of NCL commands Examples help help rget help zmodem help all 16 10 Using the Network Control Language Managing Router Operations and Resources Log Viewing the Entire Event Log or Selected Message Categories Use NCL s Log command to display any of the following a Theevent log messages generated since the last boot a The entire event log that is stored in RAM up to 1000 lines a The events whose severity is Warning Performance or Major The events that contain a search string that you specify This command displays the current log events once and then returns you to the NCL prompt Log Lists the contents of the event log generated since the last boot Log Filter Lists only the log events whose severity is Warning Performance and Major that have occurred since the last boot Log string Lists only those log messages having the text string that you designate and which have occurred since the last boot Log a Specifier Lists the specified message types contained in the entire event log The maximum number of events that can be stored in RAM is 1000 To output the display of aLog command to a printer or file instead of the screen place the command within the Print command see page 16 19 For an a
17. 2 Circuit Group Backup Members Circuit Name 3 Circuit Group Pool Members Circuit Name A 12 A Parameter Finder 6 Bridge 6 Bridge Auto Enable Forwarding Table Size STP Priority MaxAge Flood Interval sec Bridge ID Hex Hop Count Reduction Table Age Interval min Spanning Tree Enable Hello Time Forward Delay Internal LAN ID Hex Loop Detection Time ms Group LAN ID 1 Lists 1 MAC Address Lists List Name 1 List Members MAC Address low MAC Address high 2 Ethernet Type Lists List Name 1 List Name Ethernet Type low Ethernet Type high 3 SAP Lists List Name 1 List Members SAP low Sap high A 13 J pu 4 JTO pureed A Parameter Finder 6 Bridge Continued A 14 1 Lists Continued 4 Protocol ID Org Code Lists List Name 1 List Members Protocol ID Org Code low Protocol ID Org Code high 2 Circuit Groups Circuit Group Name Cost LAN ID Hex M ax hops Learning Bridge Translational Bridge STP Priority Src Rte Block STE Traffic Priority 1 Traffic Filters Precedence MAC dest low M AC dest high Effect MAC source low MAC source high Effect DL Format DL Format 802 2 SNAP Protocol ID Org Code low Protocol ID Org Code high Effect Ethertype low Ethertype high Effect 6 Bridge Continued 2 Circuit Groups Continued 1 Traffic Filters Continued DL Format 802 2 LLC DSAP low high Effect SSAP low high Effect DL Form
18. 2 2 0 20 02 00 2 A 23 9 SNMP SESSIONS 2 ye PS eae eee SES RE eas A 25 10 Xerox Routing Service 2 2 a A 26 11 IPX Routing Service 2 2 ee A 28 12 AppleTalk Router 2 ee A 31 13 X 25 Network Service uuaa aaa A 33 14 V 25 bis Network Mapping 0 20008 A 35 Index Introduction How To Use the Dictionary of Configuration Parameters Introduction Operator s Reference Part is a dictionary reference of the Parameters found in the Configuration Editor which is accessable from the Main menu or by using the 7 M hot key combination in Quick Configuration DEFAULT_CONFIG Main Menu Quick Configuration Quick Remote 1 Statistics Screen Menu Access to the Z Network Control Language Interpreter Configuration 3 Configuration Editor Editor 4 Event Log 5 LOGOUT 6 T PRESS for help Down Up lt to exit lt RETURN gt to select Accessing the Configuration Editor from the Main M enu Operator s Reference Part is divided into fourteen chapters corresponding to the options listed in the Configuration menu DEFAULT_CONFIG Configuration Editor System 1 Software 1 Lines 4 Circuits 4 Circuit Groups 4 Bridge 1 DoD Internet Router 9 DECNET IV Routing Service B SNMP Sessions B 10 Xerox Routing Service B 11 IPX Routing Service B 12 AppleTalk Router B 13 X 25 Network Service B 14 V 25 bis Network Mapping
19. 32b Connection timed out 32c Unknown netw ork requested 32d Connection refused 32e Connection reset locally 32f Connection reset by peer 320 Interface not found 330 Bad packet checksum 331 Packet too big 332 Unsupported options encountered 333 Unsupported flag encountered 334 Received ill formed reset 335 Received ill formed segment 336 Received ill formed acknowledgment 337 Received duplicate acknowledgment 338 Received duplicate segment 339 Received segment out of sequence 33a Send window closed 33b Send retransmit ring buffer overflow 33c Receive window closed 33d Receive resequencing queue overflow 33e Unknown network message code 33f Unknown network message type 340 Internal fatal error 17 83 4T s pess Ww 601 u44 Event Log Messages egp Exterior Gatew ay Protocol Event Messages IP entity not ready Meaning The IP entity is not currently available Action Wait for IP to initialize Neighbor ip address acquired Meaning EGP has acquired a new neighbor Neighbor ip address down Meaning The EGP neighbor reachability algorithm has declared i p address in the down state In this state EGP allocates resources to the neighbor and responds to Request Cease and Hello commands Neighbor ip address unacquired Meaning The EGP neighbor reachability algorithm has declared i p address in the idle state In this state EGP allocates no resources to the neighbor and responds
20. 4 Packet Type Lists List Name 1 List Members Packet Type low Packet Type high 2 Network Interface Definitions Network Number Circuit Group RIP Supply RIP Listen RIP Interface Cost Encapsulation Type WAN SAP Period mins A 28 A Parameter Finder 11 IPX Routing Service Continued 2 Network Interface Definitions Continued Accept NETBIOS Bcasts from net Deliver NETBIOS Bcasts to net Source Route Token Ring SAP driven RIP supply RIP and SAP split horizon Random load balancing IPXWAN 1 SAP Network Level Filter Definitions Action Network Number Hex Server Type Hex 2 SAP Server Level Filter Definitions Action Server Type Hex Server Name 3 NETBIOS Broadcast Static Routes Dest Network Hex NetBIOS Resource Name 4 Traffic Filters Precedence Dest Network low high Effect Dest Host low high Effect Dest Socket low high Effect Source Network low high Effect Source Host low high Effect Source Socket low high Effect Packet Type low high Effect Action 3 Static Route Definitions Target Net Next Hop Host Next Hop Net RIP Table Cost A 29 J pu 4 JTO pureed A Parameter Finder 11 IPX Routing Service Continued 4 Internal Network Number and Router Name Internal Network Number Internal Router Name A 30 A Parameter Finder 12 AppleTalk Router 12 AppleTalk Router Auto Enable AARP Mapping Table Size Routing Table Size Zone
21. 6 Suo ouueiegd que6y dNNS Send Event Options Messages As Traps Yes No Session Mode Session type 9 4 Read Read Write SNMP Agent Parameters Parameters and Options Leave this field blank if no access of any type is allowed by either this console or any remote network managers even if other parameters are set to enable the agent You must enter an address to have access Enter the address of a network management station in dotted decimal notation To have access to this router s agent a station s IP address must match the setting of this parameter and in the case of queries not receiving trap reports the community name it uses must match the setting of Community Name Enter the IP address 0 0 0 0 if you want to permit any network entity using Community Name to query the agent This setting is valid only for records with Session type of Regular queries Note In the configuration of a record for a Session type of Trap you must enter the IP address of the management station to receive trap reports If you leave the Node Address field blank as it is by default no access of any type will be allowed by either this console or any remote network managers even if other parameters are set to enable the agent You must enter an address to have access Enables or disables the generation of enterprise specific traps The Send Event Messages As Traps parameter is displayed when the Trap optio
22. 7 27 To Protocol 7 27 token ring service 3 5 Traffic Priority 6 22 transferring configuration 16 98 16 104 transferring NCL display 16 98 16 104 Transit Area 7 28 Transitional Bridge 6 22 Translational Bridge 6 22 translational bridging TRNSB 6 5 transmission rate data 1 4 Transmit Broadcast 7 28 TRNSB 6 22 TT output line 3 3 Type 7 28 for IP import route filters 7 28 of static route 7 28 Type high 6 22 Type high Ethernet 6 22 Type low 6 23 U UDP 15 15 UDP Checksum Off 7 29 UDP datagram disposition 7 6 UDP TCP Dest Port high 7 29 UDP TCP Dest Port low 7 29 UDP TCP Source Port high 7 30 UDP TCP Source Port low 7 30 UK PSS 13 10 UPAP 4 28 Upper Circuit Name 13 12 Use Bitmap 13 11 Use DXI v3 2 4 27 Use Heartbeat Poll 4 27 Use SNAP 4 28 Use UPAP 4 28 User ID of Remote Station 4 28 user password See Password V W v 25 bis map entry 16 87 16 90 v 25 bis net fail LED 17 56 Value hex 7 13 VC inactivity time sec 14 4 version operating code 16 23 16 95 vertical frequency rate 1 8 VT 100 terminal 16 98 VT 100 terminal emulation 1 9 WAN net fail LED 17 56 WAN Protocol 8 14 WAN SAP Period 11 19 Warning event log 1 6 wild card 16 34 16 39 Window Size 4 28 X Z X 121 Address 13 12 x 25 16 33 X 25 parameters Broadcast 13 4 PVC 13 11 SVC 13 12 Use Bitmap 13 11 Xcvr Sig
23. Received a bad 16 bit CRC on hex header Meaning Indicates that a hex header received by the router had a bad CRC That is the packet was damaged in transit Note There is no 32 bit CRC defined for hex headers Action Check the serial line for a poor connection or source of noise 17 151 Event Log Messages zmodem Zmodem Event Messages Terminal connection broken Meaning Indicates that the serial port between the router and the host has been disconnected Timeout on initialization response Meaning The router issued an initialization response and did not receive an acknowledgement within ten seconds Action Check that the host is running the Zmodem protocol Timeout waiting for remote status Meaning The router issued a status request that was not responded to after six attempts that were spaced at ten second intervals Action Check that the host is running the Zmodem protocol Too many bytes before SOF Meaning Indicates that the Zmodem start of a frame character was not received within a reasonable amount of characters Either the packet was corrupted during transmission or the host was running another protocol Action Check the serial line for a poor connection or source of noise Also verify that the host is running Zmodem Transfer terminated by remote Meaning Indicates that the host machine has terminated the Zmodem connection to the router Action Check for log messages on the host
24. a Leave this field blank and enter the IPX socket number in the Socket low field if you are filtering a single IPX source or destination socket Enter the highest IPX socket number in the range if you are filtering a range of IPX source or destination sockets For additional information refer to Socket low later in this chapter To learn how to assign a Socket list to a filter refer to Dest Socket low and Source Socket low 11 15 TT sSJ PULLed 030 01d Xdi Socket low Options Source Host high Options Source Host low Options IPX Protocol Parameters Parameters and Options Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering IPX source or destination sockets when creating a Socket list a Enter the IPX socket number in this field and leave the Socket high field blank if you are filtering a single IPX source or destination socket Enter the lowest IPX socket number in this field and enter the highest socket number in the Socket high field if you are filtering a range of IPX source or destination sockets For additional information refer to Socket high earlier in this chapter To learn how to assign a Socket list to a filter refer to Dest Socket low and Source Socket low Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering an IPX packet based on the contents of its source host field Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter IPX sourc
25. badseg contains the number of faulty received TCP segments badsum contains the number of received TCP segments that contained a bad checksum value Management Information Base Variables tcp TCP Information Base dupack contains the number of duplicate acknowledgment segments dupseg contains the number of duplicate received TCP segments erract contains the total number of error messages sent by TCP hashcolls contains the number of times hashing of the TCP port information produced a collision with a previous port hashhits contains the number of times the hash was successful when matching TCP ports ST hashmiss contains the number of times the hash was missed during aTCP port search mem_err contains the number of memory errors mem_use contains the number of bytes of memory required for TCP operations seg UOnBUWOjU quowumbeuep net_dropped contains the number of TCP segments dropped because of an invalid data path net_notcb contains the number of times the hash table search of active TCP ports failed and reset of the connection was attempted no mem contains the number of instances TCP could not function because of lack of memory resources nopact contains the number of times a received TCP segment required no action pkts_ rcv contains the number of TCP segments received by the router during TCP sessions pkts_snt contains the number of TCP segments transmitted by the router during TCP sessions
26. ospf errs Displays the number of errors a colon and the type and name of each error in two columns Some of the possible OSPF errors in this table may also appear as event messages in the event log For acomplete listing of OSPF messages see ospf OSPF Event Messages in chapter 17 ERRORS from 4 Oct 94 13 29 03 The time is now 4 Oct 94 18 05 26 0 IP Bad OSPF pkt type 0 IP Bad IP Dest 0 IP Bad IP proto id 0 IP Pkt svc my IP addr 0 OSPF Bad OSPF version 0 OSPF Bad OSPF checksum 0 OSPF Bad Intf area id 0 OSPF Area mismatch 0 OSPF Bad virt link info 0 OSPF Auth type area type 0 OSPF Auth key area key 0 OSPF Packet is too small Using the Network Control Language Managing the Open Shortest Path First Protocol Ospf Intf Displaying the Status of the OSPF Interfaces Use NCL s Ospf Intf command to format and display the status of the interfaces on this router over which OSPF is running Syntax ospf intf Example Area 0 0 0 0 IP Address Type State Cost Pri DR BDR 190 190 190 10 Bcast DR 1 5 190 190 190 10 190 190 190 13 The fields in the table are as follows Area lists the area ID for the attached network interface IP Address lists the IP address of this interface in dotted decimal notation a Type is the kind of network to which the interface attaches as follows Bcast Broadcast PtoP Point to Point Virt Virtual link 9T spuewuop TON 16 73 16 74 Using
27. seg UONBUWUOjU quowumbeuep inhderrors contains the number of IDP datagrams discarded because of errors in their IDP headers Such errors include faulty checksums format errors and transport control hop count errors inreceives contains the total number of all IDP datagrams including those received in error received from all interfaces inunknownprotos contains the number of IDP datagrams discarded because of an incorrect or corrupted value in the Protocol Type field in the IDP header outdiscards contains the number of valid output IDP datagrams discarded because of insufficient router resources lack of buffer space outnoroutes contains the number of IDP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination outrequests contains the number of IDP datagrams generated by local IDP user protocols including Error 18 69 18 70 M anagement Information Base Variables isdn ISDN V 25 bis Information Base isdn ISDN V 25 bis Information Base The isdn information base contains variables for V 25 bis lines through a terminal adapter manual or automatic dialing The structure is the following isdn V 25 bis adapter the terminal adapter branch see subheading ccttbl V 25 bis circuit table vari ables the terminal adapter variables listed below cct the circuit number as an index mapping the IP mapping branch ipmapping vari ables the IP mapping variables listed belo
28. 1 DoD Internet Router DECNET IV Routing Service B SNMP Sessions B Xerox Routing Service B IPX Routing Service B Access to V 25 bis parameters for AppleTalk Router 8 IP virtual circuit switching amp 25 Network Service 9 V 25 bis Network Mapping B Enter Selection B for Previous Menu Figure 14 1 Access to Lines Circuits and Circuit Group Parameters V 25 bis Network Mapping Parameters Enable the router to choose an available port for establishing a v 25 bis connection with a remote router Used when you want the router to be able to contact more than one next hop router Page Circuits Parameters 14 3 Connect Retry 14 3 Connect wait time 14 3 Hold down time 14 4 IP Next Hop 14 4 Remote station number 14 4 Subaddress 14 4 VC inactivity time V 25 bis Network Mapping Parameters and Options Parameters and Options Connect retry count Sets the number of times per phone number that the router tries to establish a connection if the initial call attempt fails The range is 1 try only once to 30 Where multiple phone numbers are specified they will be used in a circular fashion For example if you set Connect retry count to 3 the router makes up to three call attempts for each outbound phone number you provide If the router is unsuccessful in establishing a connection the internal record of connect attempts is reset to zero and an error log message is sent to the error l
29. 12 6 DDP Type Lists 12 6 Default Zone Name 12 7 Dest Sock low 12 9 List Name 12 11 Multicast DLCI 4 5 Network Number low 12 12 Node Lists 12 13 Seed Router 12 14 Source Node low 12 16 Source Route Token Ring 12 17 Zone Name 12 18 ARE 6 13 6 16 18 80 Index 1 xepul 2 Index Area 8 4 Area high 8 4 Area low 8 4 area list DE Cnet 8 4 Area Max Cost 8 5 Area Max Hops 8 5 8 5 ARP Group Address 4 5 Circuits 4 5 multicast DLCI 4 5 table 16 41 unpredictable results 7 20 ASB Flood 7 8 at AppleTalk 16 32 atmib 16 32 Atping 16 4 authentication key 7 21 Authentication Type 7 8 Auto Enable 11 5 13 4 AppleTalk 12 5 Bridge 6 5 Circuits 4 5 DE Cnet 8 5 global 1 4 6 6 IP 7 9 X 25 4 5 XNS 10 4 Automatic Reboot 1 4 B bandwidth 4 2 Bandwidth Reservation 4 6 Baud Rate 1 4 1 9 Bcast Routing Timer 8 6 Beginning Day 1 4 Beginning Month 1 5 Bit Char 1 5 bitmap table 4 22 Block STE 6 6 boot 1 4 1 9 16 5 BOOTP 7 25 BPDU 6 11 6 16 Bridge Flood multicast DLCI 4 6 Bridge ID hex 6 6 Bridge parameters Action 6 5 Aging Timer 6 5 Block STE 6 6 Bridge ID Hex 6 6 Circuit Group Name 6 7 Default Conversion Type 6 7 DSAP low 6 8 Flood Interval sec 6 10 Forward Delay 6 10 Hello 6 12 High Value hex 6 12 Hop Count Reduction 6 12 LAN ID Hex 6 13 Length 6 13
30. Accessing the Management Information Base Examples list Displays a list of router resident managed objects the items in the Managed Objects Table page 16 32 list ip Displays the ip IP router MIB branch See the Managed Objects Table page 16 32 for others list buf 2 Displays a list of the MIB variables for buffers for slot 2 of a Router 650 list 11 2 Same as preceeding example except uses object identification codes DEFAULT_CONFIG 38 Jun 1994 15 54 55 SESSION 1 MGR MODE mgr map 882 code 0 dev map 8992 code 1 cect map 8882 code 2 1b map 8902 code 3 svc map 8902 code 9 buf map B8892 code 11 Mem map 8892 code 13 name map 8882 code 14 timer map B8892 code 15 alarm mMap 8882 code 16 hu map 8892 code 38 lbmib mMap 882 code 31 config map 8892 code 35 bootp map B8892 code 37 key map 8882 code 38 rok map 8882 code 51 dls map 8882 code 55 testmode map 8892 code 56 log map 8882 code 57 DEFAULT_CONFIG Figure 16 3 Example of a List Display The first column in figure 16 3 names the higher level objects within the router The second column map contains a hexadecimal number 2 that corresponds to the decimal number 1 in the 1 field of some of the variables Different values appear for the HP Router 650 The third column code contains the object identification code that corresponds to the object name in the first column
31. Action Check for Telnet sessions running TFTP Missing local file name Meaning The local file name or command was not included with the Zput command Action The local file name to transfer must be entered For example the configuration file 17 149 Event Log Messages zmodem Zmodem Event Messages Missing remote file name Meaning The remote file name was not included with the Zput command Action The remote file name to transfer into must be entered NCL ERR invalid command ignored Meaning This is a generic error indicating that either the command was mistyped or that manager capability is required to use the command F or Zmodem this occurs with Zget if you did not use the manager password when you started the console session Unable to allocate memory for zmodem protocol Meaning The buffer space required for the zmodem protocol transfers is not available currently This indicates that all the router memory is currently in use for other tasks or for the routing table Action Wait for the router traffic load to decline then try again Logged and Displayed Zmodem Event Messages The following messages appear in the log file and in the console display For messages that appear only in the console display see page 17 149 Bad escape sequence received x Meaning Indicates that an unknown escape sequence was received by the router Either the packet was corrupted during transmission or th
32. Action Check your IP mapping configuration for errors unable to read ip map record Meaning Unable to read the V 25 bis P mapping configuration Action Check your IP mapping configuration for errors Unexpected remote reset to local Meaning This message occurs at one end of a point to point link when the connection is first being established One end of the link usually comes up before the other end The first end subsequently receives a reset request from the other end when it comes up The side that comes up first displays the above message which always appears in tandem with the Responded to reset service continued event message Unexp ring ind will rcv inbound call Meaning Router already received an incoming call message and just got another one The incoming call will be accepted if it doesn t fail any user 17 55 Event Log Messages cct Circuit Event Messages specified call restrictions placed on inbound calls This is an unlikely event and may indicate an error by the connected adapter Note In V 25 bis mode the WAN Net Fail LED lights if the connected adapter does not respond with CTS True within 20 seconds of the router raising DTR The Net Fail LED turns off if the adapter subsequently does respond In manual adapter mode the WAN Net Fail LED lights if a connection does not come up within the connect wait time on the first attempt to establish an outbound connection The LED turns off if a
33. Circuit Type Frame Relay DLCI Encoding Type DLC Encoding length Maximum packet size Provide InARP M ax Link Latency ms M anagement Type A Parameter Finder 4 Circuits Continued Circuit Type Frame Relay Continued Management Type ANSI Annex Dor LMI Poll Interval seconds Intervals between Full Polls M onitored Events Events for Error Alarm Timer Management Type LMI Switch or Annex D Switch Provide Update Status M aximum Poll Interval seconds M onitored Events Events for Error 1 Permanent Virtual Circuits DLCI 2 Multicast Support ARP multicast DLCI AppleTalk multicast DLC Bridge Flood multicast DLC DECNet multicast DLCI OSI multicast DLCI General multicast DLCI 3 Bandwidth Reservation Percent of queue reserved for high priority pkts Percent of queue reserved for normal priority pkts Percent of queue reserved for low priority pkts Circuit Type SMDS M in Frame Spacing Individual Address Group Address ARP Group Address Extended 32 bit CRC M ax Pkt Size Use SNAP Use DXI v3 2 A 9 J pu 4 JTO pureed A Parameter Finder 4 Circuits Continued Circuit Type SM DS Continued Use Heartbeat Poll Heartbeat Polling Interval Heartbeat Down Count M ax Link Latency ms O none 1 Bandwidth Reservation Percent of queue reserved for high priority pkts Percent of queue reserved for normal priority pkts Percent of queue reserved for low priority pkts Circuit Type Pt to Pt Protocol PPP LQM T
34. Establishing LLC2 connection Meaning Indicates the progress of a circuit configured for LLC2 quality of service the router is trying to establish the LLC2 connection with a peer over the WAN circuit Circuit auto configuring Meaning This circuit was configured to auto detect WAN parameters like Quality of Service HDLC addresses and compression the router is attempting to negotiate these parameters Detected carrier enabling cct Meaning The router has detected the carrier signal on the WAN circuit the circuit will become operational Invalid Configuration QOS must be LLC2 Meaning Auto configuring has detected a remote bridge but the router s QOS configuration option is not set to LLC2 or auto configure Action Use the LLC2 or auto configure option to configure the QOS for the Point to Point WAN circuit 17 70 Event Log M essages dis Data Link Services Event Messages Invalid Configuration Pt to Pt address must be DCE Meaning Auto configuring has detected a remote bridge but the router s Pt to Pt address configuration option is not set to DCE or auto configure Action Use DCE or auto configure as the Pt to Pt address for the Point to Point WAN circuit Invalid Configuration Mismatching QOS Meaning The QOS configuration option for the Point to Point WAN circuit is not the same on the local and remote device Action Change to QOS configuration option to be the same or to use auto co
35. If you are defininga LAN interface Ethernet or IEEE 802 x you must specify the encapsulation method supported by the attached network 802 2 Select this option for hosts supporting 802 2 over 802 3 LAN interfaces The 802 2 structure is encapsulated as shown and is further encapsulated within a medium specific 802 x packet SNAP Assigns an extension of 802 2 encapsulation for hosts supporting SNAP The SNAP structure is encapsulated within a medium specific 802 x packet Export Action Used in export route filters to control the flow of routing information between protocols Default PROPAGATE IGNORE Suppresses route advertising PROPAGATE Advertises the route L sPUeLLd dl 020 01d PUHU From Autonomous System From Gatew ay From Interface From Peer From Protocol 7 12 Options Yes No Yes No Options EGP RIP OSPF Internet Protocol IP Parameters Parameters and Options Note The Metric field appears after selecting PROPAGATE Metric lets you assign a RIP cost to the propagated route For more information refer to Metric later in this chapter Lets you identify a specific autonomous system from which RIP updates are received Leave this field blank if you want the EGP import route filter to be universal that is applicable to all foreign autonomous systems a Enter the system s NIC assigned identification number if you want the filter to apply to a specific au
36. MORE Page mode and how to get more screens are described on page 16 14 To output the display of the configuration file to a printer or file instead of your console screen see the Print command on page 16 19 Syntax config Using the Network Control Language Managing Router Operations and Resources Crash Displaying the Crash and Reboot History Use NCL s Crash command to display the times and reasons for the last four occasions the router was rebooted or restarted For the HP Router 650 Crash also displays this information for each of the interface modules To output the display to a printer or file instead of your console screen see the Print command on page 16 19 Syntax crash Date Setting or Displaying the Date and Time Same as Time Command 9T spuewruop TON 16 8 Using the Network Control Language Managing Router Operations and Resources Disable Disabling Configured Entities Use NCL s Disable command to remove a routing service a circuit an X 25 point to point virtual circuit or another configured software object from service You cannot use Disable to disable a line On the HP Router 650 you can also enable a previously disabled interface module slot You need to identify the object by its management information base MIB variable name or object identification code See Managed Objects Table on page 16 32 and the List command on page 16 35 for object names codes and pathna
37. The Pkt Window parameter in the Circuits configuration is outside the legal range of 1through 127 Action bad Point to Point Service packet window value Meaning The Negotiated Packet Window parameter in the X 25 Virtual Circuits screen for Point to Point Service is outside the legal range of 1 through 127 Action bad PDN Service packet window value Meaning The Negotiated Pkt Window parameter in the X 25 Address Map for PDN service is outside the legal range of 1 through 127 Action call accepted from DTE x121 address Meaning An incoming call was accepted from remote DTE address x121 address 17 135 Event Log Messages X 25 Event Messages call attempt cct ip address Meaning A call has been made to the destination with IP address ip address on circuit cct call attempt on virtual cct Meaning A call has been made on the virtual circuit named vi rtual cct call cct ip address Meaning A DDN or PDN call has been established with the remote host or gateway identified by ip address cct identifies the X 25 DDN or PDN circuit and identifies the logical connection number call cleared on svc C mm D nn Meaning A call has been properly cleared on point to point virtual circuitsvc C mm contains the decimal contents of the Cause field octet 4 of the supervisory header of the packet that cleared the call D nn contains the decimal contents of the Diagnostic Code field
38. The SMDS Bridge Table Smds_bridge_table is out of space The SMDS Bridge Table contains the mapping between remote station addresses and remote SMDS addresses 17 123 Event Log Messages tcp Transmission Control Protocol Event Messages tcp Transmission Control Protocol Event Messages These messages are generated by the system variable tcp bad configuration using defaults Meaning TCP has rejected user supplied protocol parameters TCP will initialize using default parameters Action Modify the configuration to accept default parameters configuration complete Meaning TCP has completed configuration using valid user supplied parameters no configuration using defaults Meaning TCP has completed configuration using default parameters in the absence of user Supplied parameters 17 124 Event Log M essages telnet Telnet Event Messages telnet Telnet Event Messages These messages are generated by the system variable telnet port 23 connected to ip address Meaning A Telnet virtual terminal connection between the router and ip address has been established through the well known Telnet port port 23 disconnected from ip address Meaning A Telnet virtual terminal connection between the router and ip address has been disconnected 17 125 4T s pess oWw 601 343 Event Log Messages tftp TFTP and Fget Event Messages tftp TFTP and F get Event Messages These eve
39. The variables are listed alphabetically under two branches Interface drop contains the total number of IDP datagrams dropped for whatever reason by interface if rx contains the total number of IDP datagrams received by interface if tx contains the total number of IDP datagrams transmitted by interface if 18 101 ST seg UONBUWUOjU Juawpeuenw 18 102 M anagement Information Base Variables xrx Xerox XNS Information Base ulp contains the total number of IDP datagrams delivered by the router to an upper level protocol for example RIP Echo Error for processing Protocol errsdestbadsock contains the number of destination host generated Error Protocol packets with an Error Number of 2 that were relayed by the router This error number indicates that the destination host received an IDP packet addressed to an unknown socket errsdestchksum contains the number of destination host generated Error Protocol packets with an Error Number of 1 that were relayed by the router This error number indicates that the destination host received an IDP packet that contained a faulty or corrupted checksum errsdesthdrlen contains the number of packets rejected by a destination host because the packet header was of insufficient length errsdestnoresrcs contains the number of destination host generated Error Protocol packets with an Error Number of 3 that were relayed by the router This error number indicates that the
40. displays Enter new password new is 1to 14 alphanumeric characters for the manager or user type you selected Passwords are case sensitive INTERNET and internet are not equivalent The console displays Enter new password again new is the same new password you typed above Syntax To change an existing password password type mgr current new new The console displays Which password is changing type is either m for manager or u for user password The console displays Enter current manager password if a manager password exists mgr is the current manager password required if existing to change either password The console displays Enter current password current is the password currently set for the type you selected The console displays Enter new password new is 1to 14 alphanumeric characters for the manager or user type you selected Passwords are case sensitive INTERNET and internet are not equivalent The console displays Enter new password again new is the same new password you typed above Using the Network Control Language Managing Router Operations and Resources Syntax To remove a password from protecting the router password type mgr current Return Return The console displays Which password is changing type is either m for manager or u for user password The console displays Enter cur
41. page 16 19 Invoke Quick Configuration without leaving NCL page 16 20 Reboot the remote router at the indicated IP address page 16 21 Command Repeat Stamp Stats Summary Telnet X X X X Test mac_addr count delay Time mm dd yy hh mm ss Using the Network Control Language Managing Router Operations and Resources Function Continually repeat the last NCL command until another key is pressed page 16 22 Display software version information page 16 23 Invoke the Statistics Screens menu without leaving NCL page 16 24 Display the Quick Configuration summary without leaving NCL page 16 25 Establish an IP virtual terminal connection to another node page 16 27 Send an 802 2 Test packet to another node page 16 28 Set or display the router s current date and time page 16 29 9T spuewuop TON 16 3 16 4 Using the Network Control Language Managing Router Operations and Resources Repeating the Previous NCL Command Use the exclamation mark the 1 key to repeat the previous NCL command once or a number of times Syntax repetitions repetitions optional specifies how many times to repeat the previous command If you do not specify a number it is repeated only once Example get lb etherlg recv Repeats the Get command for an updated bridge packet count Atping Sending an AppleTalk Echo Protocol Request Message Use NCL s Atping command to send an AppleTalk Echo Proto
42. rcv_full contains the number of times TCP segments were dropped because the receive window was closed 18 93 18 94 M anagement Information Base Variables tcp TCP Information Base rehashes contains the number of times the TCP port table was rehashed This happens when a connection is closed or when the control block hash table requires rehashing reseq contains the number of packets resequenced by the router reseq drop contains the number of elements dropped because of resequencing reseq full contains the number of times TCP had a full resequencing queue reseq_ mgr contains the number of resequenced packets linked to form a larger packet retx contains the number of packets retransmitted by the router retx_full contains the number of times the TCP retransmit buffer was full rx_bytes contains the number of bytes received by the router during TCP sessions segoos contains the number of segments received out of sequence sess cur contains the current number of TCP connections sess tot contains the number of TCP connections since the router last booted snd_full contains the number of times the TCP send window was full toobig contains the number of times a TCP segment was not sent because the receive window size was too small tx_bytes contains the number of bytes transmitted by the router during TCP sessions Management Information Base Variables telnet Telnet Information Base telnet Telnet Infor
43. sec 4 14 Events for Error 4 14 Extended 32 bit CRC 4 14 Group Address 4 15 Hearbeat Down Count 4 15 Hearbeat Polling Interval 4 15 Individual Address 4 15 Interval Between Polls 4 15 IP Address 4 15 LAN Address 4 15 LCP Active Open 4 17 LCP Auto Restart 4 17 Link Idle Time T3 4 17 LQM Time secs 4 17 Management Type 4 18 Max channels to aggregate 4 19 Max Link Latency ms 4 19 Maximum Packet Size 4 20 Min Frame Spacing 4 20 Minimum connect duration sec 4 21 Modulus 4 21 Monitored Events 4 22 Multicast Support 4 22 Password of Remote Station 4 23 Perchannel bandwidth 4 23 Permanent Virtual Circuit 4 23 Point to Point Address 4 23 Poll Interval seconds 4 24 Provide InARP 4 24 Quality of Service 1 5 4 24 Relay Timer T1 4 26 Remote Address 1 5 4 25 Remote signal amp sense timeout Sec 4 26 Remote Signal and Sense 4 25 Remote Station Number 4 26 Send CIC on all allowed INCs 4 26 Server Password 4 27 Server User ID 4 27 Subaddress 4 27 Use DXI vV3 2 4 27 Use Heartbeart Poll 4 27 Use SNAP 4 28 Use UPAP 4 28 User ID of Remote Station 4 28 Xcvr Signal Polling 4 29 Clear button 16 15 Clock Source 3 3 Clock Speed 3 3 3 4 clock speed limit RS 232 cable 3 4 clock at boot 1 9 Community Name 9 3 Compression 4 9 compression limitation 4 9 Conditional Circuit Group 7 9 Config 16 6 16 32 Configuration edi
44. source ports Enter the port number in this field and leave the UDP TCP Source Port high field blank if you are filtering a single UDP or TCP source port Enter the lowest port number in this field and enter the highest source port number in the UDP TCP Source Port high field if you are filtering a range UDP or TCP source ports If you want to use an IP port list to establish a range of UDP or TCP source ports enter the name of the IP port list in this field and leave the UDP TCP Source Port high field blank For more information refer to UDP TCP Source Port high earlier in this chapter To learn how to create a Port list refer to Port low and Port high earlier in this chapter DECnet Parameters 8 2 DECnet Parameters Overview Overview System 1 Software 1 Lines 4 Circuits 4 Bridge 1 8 COO OS OU IN SNMP Sessions 19 Xerox Routing DEFAULT_CONFIG Configuration Editor Circuit Groups 4 DoD Internet Router 9 DECNET IV Routing Service 8 lt Access to DECnet parameters B Service 11 IPX Routing Service B 12 AppleTalk Router B 13 X 25 Network Service B 14 V 25 bis Network Mapping 8 Enter Selection B for Previous Menu Figure 8 1 Access to DECnet Parameters DE Cnet Parameters Implements the Digital Network Architecture DNA session control layer which corresponds to the session layer of the International S
45. ss to specify the seconds that are currently set If you omit the time entirely the time is not changed If you omit both arguments the current date and time are displayed and not changed Examples time 10 29 93 14 15 00 Sets the time and date to 2 15 PM on October 29 1993 9T time 11 20 92 Sets the date to November 20 1992 time 23 00 00 Sets the time to 11 PM time Displays current date and time spuewuop TON 16 29 16 30 Using the Network Control Language Accessing the Management Information Base Accessing the Management Information Base The management information base the MIB is the repository of all variables gathered and used by the router as well as accessible to the router s console and to other devices in the network using SNMP The MIB s hierarchical structure can be represented as an inverted tree such as the one shown on the next page for the buffers buf object Note Using the Network Control Language Accessing the Management Information Base High Level buf managed object l 1 H Intermediate Level managed objects msg pkt CEFET ee ee ie init free min miss size init free min miss size Figure 16 2 buf Information Base Structure MIB variables The Get List and Reset commands use MIB pathnames for access to the MIB structure For more details on the MIB structure itself and how to specify a pathname to a MIB variable refer to Accessing the Managem
46. the Link Control Protocol LCP is brought down and all active network control protocols are also brought down If the LCP Auto Restart option is enabled then the router attempts to restart LCP missed XX Echo Replies link is down Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit XX Echo Request time periods elapsed without an Echo Reply packet being received from the remote station The link is declared down the Link Control Protocol LCP is brought down and all Network Control Protocols are also brought down If the LCP Auto Restart option is enabled the router attempts to bring LCP up again missed XX LQRs link is down Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit XX Link Quality Monitor LQM time periods elapsed without a Link Quality Report LQR packet being received from the peer remote station The link is declared down the Link Control Protocol LCP is brought down and all Network Control Protocols are also brought down If the LCP Auto Restart option is enabled the router attempts to bring LCP up again 17 37 Event Log Messages cct Circuit Event Messages Net sequence num receive recovery Meaning The network is now properly sending keep alive sequence numbers for the identified circuit Next hop IP X X X X has no ph Meaning All map items must have at least one configured phone number The map record with with IP next hop address X X X X has no configured phone Action Add a phone number to the IP to
47. the name server table delete_cnt contains the number of objects deleted from the name server table find_cnt contains the number of name server table accesses that resulted in successful resolutions list_cnt This counter is not currently implemented It should always contain 0 update _cnt contains the number of updates to name server table entries 18 85 18 86 M anagement Information Base Variables pm Port Module Manager Information Base pm Port Module Manager Information Base The pm port module manager information base contains variables that describe port interface modules that may be installed in the HP Router 650 pm total_ports_modules slot vari ables module specific branch and variables Examples of pathname constructions are pm slot vari able pm total_ports_modules or 53 1 Chassis total_ports_ modules the current number of operational port modules in the chassis Management Information Base Variables pm Port Module Manager Information Base Module Example get pm slot2 state state The current state of the port module The following values are possible 0 Dead 1 Absent 2 Hard Reset 3 Soft Reset 4 Selftest Pass 5 Selftest F ail 6 Downloading 7 Booting 8 Alive 9 Running ST seg UOnBUWOjU quowumbeuep hwid the type of port module in the slot The following values are possible 0 Empty Slot i e No Card 1 Ethernet Port Module 2 Sync
48. 1 80000001 a 1 7 B Z BBBBABAZ a B B B TOTAL a 1 B i PRESS r for reset Down Up lt to exit Figure 15 9 XNS Router Statistics Screen Using the Statistic Screens XNS Router Statistics Screen Categories on the XNS Router Statistics screen are the following NAME Receive Transmit Deliver Dropped TOTAL Lists the network interface address in 8 digit hexadecimal format Lists the number of XNS datagrams received by the network interface Lists the number of XNS datagrams transmitted by the network interface Lists the number of XNS datagrams delivered by the router to an upper layer protocol for processing Lists the number of XNS datagrams dropped by the network interface Dropped datagrams include but are not limited to datagrams with faulty checksums and datagrams with faulty header information Lists the total for each of the above counts for all XNS network interfaces ST SONSNEIS SU823 19S 15 21 16 Using the Network Control Language Using the Network Control Language Managing Router Operations and Resources Managing Router Operations and Resources The commands available in this category are the following Command 1 repetitions Atping x x wait Boot Browse Config Crash Date mm dd yy hh mm ss Disable identifier Edit Enable identifier Exit Help type Log specifier Logi page Password Ping X X X X count wait Print
49. 157 Z 15 9 129 97 a i a B 3 15 190 129 97 a 7 7 B 4 15 11 129 97 a B B i TOTAL 489 107 316 157 PRESS r for reset Down Up lt to exit Figure 15 6 DoD IP Router Statistics Screen 15 14 Using the Statistic Screens DoD IP Router Statistics Screen Categories on the DoD IP Router Statistics screen are the following NAME Receive Transmit Deliver Dropped TOTAL Lists each network interface address in dotted decimal notation Lists the number of IP datagrams received by the network interface Lists the number of IP datagrams transmitted by the network interface Lists the number of IP datagrams addressed to the IP router and delivered by the router to one of three upper layer protocols for processing The three protocols are ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol TCP Transmission Control Protocol and UDP User Datagram Protocol To see the counts of received and transmitted ICMP datagrams detailed by message type you can use NCL s Get command Lists the number of IP datagrams dropped by the network interface Dropped datagrams include but are not limited to datagrams with faulty checksums and datagrams requiring absent protocols The interface also drops datagrams as directed by source address filters and destination address filters that were established during the configuration process Lists the total for each of the above counts for all IP network interfaces 15 15
50. 180 Invalid packet received during NAS select 181 Call opened while the local DCE was waiting for a reply to a CALL REQUEST from DTE and a RESET CONFIRM ATION from the local DTE 192 Call cleared because of local pre emption by a higher precedence connection 193 Call cleared because of remote pre emption by a higher precedence connection 194 Requested precedence is too high 195 PVC take up collision 196 Remote end point of the PVC is not initialized with the specified LCN 197 Hunt groups are not used 198 Hunt group number is not valid 199 No portin hunt group is available 200 SVC was killed by MC command 201 PVC was reset by M C command 202 Call redirection took too long or too many tries 205 Call cut off because the precedence level was too low Code BFE Information 224 Entering emergency mode 225 Leaving emergency mode 226 Emergency window is open 227 Call failed because address translation information is required 228 Call failed because emergency window was not open xrx ccg New Rt to xrxnet via ipx address Meaning Note Event Log M essages xrx XNS Router Event Messages xrx XNS Router Event Messages 4T These event messages are generated by the system variable xrx the Xerox XNS router s pess Ww 601 343 The XNS routing module generates a new event message whenever it learns a new route or updates an existing route The new route is specified by xrxnet whi
51. 20 Quick Configuration 3 3 16 20 Quick Remote 16 20 Random load balancing 11 13 Rboot 16 21 Receive Broadcast 7 24 redirect output 16 93 Relay Auto Enable 7 24 Relay Time T1 4 26 Remote Address 1 5 4 25 7 25 Remote Area 8 12 Remote ASN 7 25 Remote DTE Address 13 11 Remote LAN Address 4 25 Remote Node 8 12 Remote Signal and Sense 4 25 Remote signal and sense timeout 4 25 4 26 Remote Station Number 4 26 14 4 Remote WAN Address 8 12 Repeat 16 22 repeat command 16 4 Reset 16 39 response time sensitivity 4 19 Retransmission Time Out 7 25 Retransmit Interval 7 25 Retry Counter N2 4 26 RFC 1156 16 40 Rget 16 52 Rgeta 16 41 Rgetat 16 55 Rgetata 16 57 Rgetatr 16 58 Rgetb 16 59 Rgetd 16 60 Rgetda 16 61 Rgetdn 16 63 Rgeti 16 42 Rgetif 16 68 Rgetir 16 64 Rgetis 16 66 Rgetm 16 53 Rgetms 16 43 Rgetmw 16 49 Rgetr 16 45 Rgets 16 47 Rgetw 16 50 Rgetxr 16 70 rif 18 80 Ring Interface 3 5 RIP 7 13 RIP and SAP split horizon 11 14 RIP Interface Cost 7 25 10 10 11 14 RIP Listen 7 26 10 10 11 14 RIP Network Diameter 7 25 RIP Supply 7 26 10 11 11 14 RIP Table Cost 11 14 RIP updates 7 12 rok 16 32 Router ID 7 26 Router Priority 8 12 Routing Table Size 12 14 RS 232 cable clock speed 3 4 S SAP high 6 18 SAP low 6 18 SAP driven RIP supp
52. 4 A Parameter Finder 2 Software 3 Lines 2 Softw are Protocol 3 Lines Physical Access M ethod Physical Access Method CSMA CD Connector Physical Access Method FDDI Bridge Type Physical Access Method SYNC Connector Clock Source Clock Speed Physical Access Method TOKEN RING Connector Ring Interface 1 Circuit Name Circuit Name A 5 4 pu J Ja _uwe1eg 4 Circuits Circuit Name Auto Enable Quality of Service Circuit Type Circuit Type Ether 802 3 A Parameter Finder 4 Circuits LAN Address XCVR signal polling Circuit Type PPP over V 25 bis LQM Time secs Echo Requiest Time secs Desired Link Quality M in Frame Spacing Extended 32 bit CRC M ax Pkt Size IP Address LCP Active Open LCP Auto Restart M ax Link Latency ms Use UPAP Compression 1 Adapter record Connect when Call restrictions Minimum connect duration sec Connect retry count Connect wait time sec Connect inactivity time sec Send CIC on all allowed INC s Delay after connect failure min Per channel Bandwidth 4 Circuits Continued Circuit Type PPP over V 25 bis Continued 1 Adapter record Continued Min channels to aggregate Max channels to aggregate Channel Management 1 Outbound call number Remote station Number Subaddress 2 Allowed inbound call numbers Allowed Number Subaddress 3 Local number Used for collision avoidance Remote Station Number Subaddress 2 Bandwidt
53. 4 ae a See 2A Ga A aa BPE AS Oe Awd 4 Organization x fui avec we we eds Aoki Boye nies a BBO ad 4 Other HP Router Manuals 000000 eee 5 Introduction Part1 Dictionary of Configuration Parameters 1 Global and Session Parameters OVERVIOW 5s ara Rant De ee Ge eer a RR eae es 1 2 Parameters and Options 0000 ee eee 1 4 Software Parameters OVEIVIEW a3 tear eh EE Ba oe ke ear ge Oe Ba eae BS 2 2 Parameters and Options 2 0 0 es 2 3 Lines Parameters OVERVIEW 3 3 rari iB Eee Seer a Rae ed 3 2 Parameters and Options 2 0002 3 3 Circuit Parameters OVEIVIOW sts ear Ne a he Ea ee ee Beare eae Pee ae BS 4 2 Parameters and Options 2 0 02 4 5 Circuit Group Parameters OVERVIEW 3 5 ear Suni ead eae od AP E a o e es 5 2 Parameters and Options 20000 ee eee ee 5 3 Bridge Parameters OVEIVICW oe neari Noi al SE oe a er ge ee PP ea ead 6 2 Parameters and Options 0000 eee es 6 5 10 11 12 13 14 Internet Protocol IP Parameters OVERVIEW fae wane en See Salad eet tee Pie Sie 7 2 Parameters and Options 2 000 ee 7 6 DE Cnet Parameters OVERVIEW md renon i ake ee ede te SPA geen RRS oe LIES 8 2 Parameters and Options 20 00 ee eee 8 4 SNMP Agent Parameters OVERVIEW cl ates ee PE ee Pal eae ee ee 9 2 Parameters and Options 0 0000 ee 9 3 Xerox Network Systems XNS Router Parameters OVERVIEW Y coll we O
54. 7 19 Metric 7 19 Mode for routing or bridging choice 7 19 Mode for time protocol options 7 19 MTU Discovery Option 7 20 Neighbor ID 7 20 Network Address 7 20 Network Mask 7 20 Next Hop for static routes 7 20 NextHop Address for IP traffic filters 7 20 Non Local ARP Source 7 21 Normal ARP 7 21 Offset 7 21 Password 7 21 Poisoned Reverse Split Horizon 7 21 Polling Mode 7 22 Polling Timer 7 22 Poll Interval 7 22 Precedence 7 22 Preference 7 23 Priority Internet Protocol IP Parameters Overview Page IP Parameter 7 23 Propagate to EGP 7 23 Propagate to RIP 7 23 Propagate to OSPF 7 23 Protocol 7 24 Proxy ARP 7 24 Receive Broadcast 7 24 Relay Auto Enable 7 25 Remote Address 7 25 Remote ASN 7 25 Retransmission Time Out 7 25 Retransmit Interval 7 25 RIP Interface Cost 7 25 RIP Network Diameter 7 26 RIP Listen 7 26 RIP Supply 7 26 Router ID 7 26 Source Route Token Ring 7 26 Stub Area 7 27 Subnet Mask 7 27 Suppress Authentication Traps 7 27 Tag 7 27 To Interface 7 27 To Protocol 7 28 Transit Area 7 28 Transmit Broadcast 7 28 Type for filtering 7 28 Type for static routing 7 29 UDP Checksum Off 7 29 UDP TCP Dest Port high 7 28 UDP TCP Dest Port low 7 30 UDP TCP Source Port high 7 30 UDP TCP Source Port low L sPULHLd dl 1090 30 1q 72U493U Action Accept Drop Action on circuit group enable disable disable enable enable disable Acquisition Mode Active Passive A
55. 8 0 00 UTA ON E Enter Selection B for Previous Menu Figure 1 1 The Configuration Menu Operator s Reference To find a parameter description turn to the chapter corresponding to the Configuration menu option containing that parameter Then locate the pa rameter by finding it in its alphabetic order You can also locate the parame ter description by using the page parameter listing at the beginning of each chapter Within each chapter the parameters are listed alphabetically with descrip tions of their functions and associated options For example the following sample of dictionary entries describes the Quality of Service and Remote Ad dress parameters and include The parameter names Any applicable options for parameter settings A description of each parameter and each parameter option Any default settings Operator s Reference Example of Dictionary Entries in Operator s Reference Quality of Service Specifies the link level control It always must remain set to LLC1 the default for 802 3 802 5 and PPP circuits Parameter Name Default LLC1 _ Default Setting for Quality of Service LLC1 Datagram service best effort delivery Ze LLC2 Reliable service provides link level control that includes error detection and error recovery by retransmission Results in these additional parameters Options for the lity of Servi z Do eor Retry Counter Retry Timer Selecting the LLC2
56. Appendix D Network Addresses Note When an interface serves multiple networks use an explicit broadcast address and set the Broadcast Address to 255 255 255 255 Used with IP import route filters to enable the filtering of two types of OSPF external metrics Default External Type 1 Metrics are equivalent to the standard OSPF link state metric Metrics are greater than the cost of any path internal to the autonomous system Using External Type 2 metrics assumes that the inter autonomous system routing is the major cost of packet routing Specifies the type of static route being configured Default Static Route Displays a screen for creating a default static route to another router for a specific network or when creating multiple default routes through different routers to a network Up to four default routes to a specific network can be defined All interfaces in the static route must support ARP requests Internet Protocol IP Parameters Parameters and Options Adjacent Host Displays a screen for defining an adjacent host route Adjacent hosts are systems on UDP Checksum Off UDP TCP Dest Port high UDP TCP Dest Port low No Yes Options Options a locally attached network Select Adjacent Host when the network or a particular host does not respond to ARP requests Enables or disables UDP checksum processing for the network interface Default No Enables checksum processing to provide backward c
57. Cost 8 9 Max Hops 8 9 Max Nodes 8 9 Node 8 10 Node high 8 10 Node low 8 10 Packet Type low 8 11 Precedence 8 11 Remote WAN Adadress 8 12 Source Area low 8 12 Source Node high 8 13 WAN Protocol 8 14 Default Conversion Type 6 7 Default Route Listen 7 10 Default Route Listen prerequisite 7 10 Default Route Supply 7 10 Default Route Supply prerequisite 7 10 Default Zone Name 12 7 Defense Data Network DDN 13 10 Delay after connect failure min 4 12 Deliver NETBIOS Bcasts to net 11 6 Desired Link Quality 4 12 Dest Host high 10 5 11 6 Dest Host low 10 5 11 6 Dest IP Address 7 10 Dest Net high 12 7 Dest Net low 12 8 Dest Network Hex 11 7 Dest Network high 8 6 10 5 11 7 Dest Network low 8 7 10 6 11 7 12 8 Dest Node low 8 8 12 9 Dest Sock high 12 9 Dest Sock low 12 9 Dest Socket high 10 6 11 8 Dest Socket low 10 7 11 8 Destination Network 12 10 destination node field 12 10 destination socket field 12 10 Disable 16 8 DL Format 6 7 Index 7 xepul 8 Index DLCI 4 23 4 24 7 10 DLCI Encoding Length 4 13 DLCI Encoding Type 4 13 dls 16 32 driver 16 32 Drop If Next Hop is Down 7 10 drs 16 32 DSAP high 6 8 6 9 DSAP low 6 8 DSU 4 15 DSU CSU 4 27 DTR 4 10 duplicate station address 4 16 DXI 4 27 E echo 16 33 Echo Request Times sec 4 14 Edi
58. Default No Prevents the router from initiating calls to other routers and remote terminal devices Allows the router to initiate calls to other routers and remote terminal devices Identifies the supplier of X 25 services Default TELENET The Defense Data Network DDN provides end to end connectivity between the router and a remote host or gateway equipped to support DDN Standard Service DDN service is used only by TCP IP to transmit IP datagrams over the DDN PDN subscription service PDN subscription service PDN subscription service Same as TELENET X 25 Service Parameters Parameters and Options TRANSPAC PDN subscription service Use Bitmap Displays the Bitmap hex field and allows you to construct a 32 bit status word for specifying certain low level attributes of the interface between the router and the X 25 service provider Table 13 1 page 13 13 X 25 PDN Parameter Bitmap Argument Values shows you how to construct the status word Enter the status word in eight digit hexadecimal format Pkt Size Determines the maximum number of bytes in the information field of an X 25 level 3 packet Default 128 Range 1 to 2048 Note Current buffer size limitations prevent upper level redirecting protocols from presenting packets larger than 1600 bytes to X 25 Consequently the actual maximum size of the information field that will actually be transmitted by X 25 even if Pkt Size is set to 2048 is 1600 bytes Pkt Window
59. Definition Priority Hello Interval Dead Interval Retransmit Interval Poll Interval 1 Neighbors IP Address Priority A Parameter Finder A 19 J pu 4 JTO pureed A Parameter Finder 7 DoD Internet Router Continued 5 EGP Configuration Auto Enable 1 EGP Neighbors Local Mode local Address Remote ASN Remote Address Aquisition M ode Polling Mode Hello Timer Polling Timer 6 TCP Configuration Number of Connections Transmit Window Size Receive Window Size Open Close Timeout ms Activity Timeout ms Minimum Retransmit Interval Auto Enable 7 TFTP Configuration M ax Retransmissions Retransmission Time Out Connection Close Time Out Auto Enable Allow Router to Accept Files 1 Client Address es Internet Addresses 8 Time Protocol Configuration Auto Enable Mode 9 BOOTP Configuration Relay Auto Enable M ax relay hops A 20 7 DoD Internet Router Continued 9 BOOTP Configuration Continued 1 BOOTP Request Destinations Dest IP Address 10 Import Route Filters Network Address Network Mask Import Action From Protocol RIP OSPF EGP From Protocol RIP From Gateway From Interface Preference If Import Action Accept From Protocol OSPF Type Tag Preference If Import Action Accept From Protocol EGP From Peer From Autonomous System Preference If Import Action Accept 11 Export Route Filters Network Address Network Mask Export Action From Protocol To Protocol To Protocol RIP To Inter
60. Dest high 7 15 IP Dest low 7 16 IP filters per interface 7 22 IP Next Hop 14 4 IP parameters Action on circuit group enable disable 7 6 Address Mask Reply 7 6 ASB Flood 7 8 Auto Enable 7 9 Default Route Supply 7 10 Drop If Next Hop is Down 7 10 Effect 7 10 Encapsulation Type 7 11 Export Action 7 11 From Gateway 7 12 From Interface 7 12 From Protocol 7 12 Header 7 13 Host Cache 7 14 IP Source high 7 16 IP Source low 7 17 Max Relay Hops 7 19 Max Retransmissions 7 19 Index 11 xepul Metric 7 19 MTU Discovery Option 7 19 Next Hop 7 20 Offset 7 21 Poisoned Reverse Split Horizon 7 21 Preference 7 22 Propagate to RIP 7 23 Receive Broadcast 7 24 RIP Interface Cost 7 25 RIP Supply 7 26 SNAP 7 11 Source Route Token Ring 7 26 To Interface 7 27 To Protocol 7 27 Transmit Broadcast 7 28 Type 7 28 UDP Checksum Off 7 29 UDP TCP Dest Port low 7 29 UDP TCP Source Port high 7 30 UDP TCP Source Port low 7 30 Value hex 7 13 IP Port high 7 16 IP Port low 7 16 IP Source high 7 16 IP Source low 7 17 IPX 16 32 Action 11 5 Auto Enable 11 5 Circuit Group 11 6 Deliver NETBIOS Bcasts to net 11 6 Dest Network Hex 11 7 Dest Network high 11 7 Dest Socket high 11 8 E ffect 11 9 Encapsulation Type 11 9 Host Number high 11 10 Network Number high 11 11 Network Number lo
61. Determines the maximum number of outstanding unacknowledged packets Default 2 Range 1 to 127 Precedence Enables or disables a request for Level 0 precedence Default Deflt Deflt Disables precedence requests Negot Enables a request for Level 0 precedence in all outgoing calls PVC Enables or disables permanent virtual circuits PVCs Default No No Disables permanent virtual circuits Yes Enables permanent virtual circuits When PVC is enabled the Low PVC LCN and High PVC LCN parameters take effect Quality of Service Determines the quality of service You must set this parameter to X 25 for LAPB circuits Remote DTE Address Specifies the network supplied decimal number X 121 address identifying the interface between the remote peer and the X 25 network 13 11 T sSJIpPUL LLd N S SZ X SVC T1 Upper Circuit Name X 121 Address 13 12 No Yes X 25 Service Parameters Parameters and Options Enables or disables switched virtual circuits SVCs Default Yes Disables switched virtual circuits Enables switched virtual circuits When SVC is enabled the Low SVC LCN and High SVC LCN parameters take effect Sets the T1 time interval in tenths of a second determining how long a frame can remain unacknowledged Default 30 Range 1 to 9999 Typically a T1 value in excess of three seconds is required only if your network connection has a substantial path delay for instance if the connectio
62. Device Required CIC Setting Ascend Multiband Adapters Yes or No General Datacom 914 ADR Yes Hitachi ISDN Adapter No Motorola DU170 Yes NEC ISDN No Northern Telecom NT4X25AG Yes if device not set for auto answer Assigns the password used by the router when it logs in to the remote Point to Point peer Enter the password as an ASCII string of less than 16 characters Assigns the name user ID used by the router when logging into the remote Point to Point peer Enter the name as an ASCII string of less than 16 characters Identifies the slot in which the port corresponding to the specified Physical Access Method is installed Applies only to ports on interface modules installed in an HP Series 600 router Range 2 5 Accepts a subaddress extension used at the remote site to access the remote router Leave this field blank if a subaddress is not required This field can accept up to 40 digits but the actual number of characters you enter could be limited to your terminal s capabilities Use only numeric symbols in the subaddress Selects which version of the Data eXchange Interface DXI to use Default No Selects DXI Version 2 1 Enables DXI Version 3 2 DXI specifies the interface between the multiprotocol router and a DSU CSU DXI version 3 2 includes a heartbeat polling mechanism to verify the line from the router to the DSU Heartbeat polling is implemented by sending a short message on a regular interval to the DSU a
63. Displays the values of the enterprise specific MIB variable branch from the foreign node 15 8 2 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 is the path to the private enterprise MIB branch N is the corporate identifier provided by the Internet Assigned Number authority n n n is the object identification path assigned by the equipment manufacturer 9T spuewuop TON 16 53 Command Ospf Rtab Rgeta Rgetat Rgetata Rgetatr Rgetb Rgetd Rgetda Rgetdn Rgeti Rgetir Rgetis Rgetr Rgetrif Rgetxr Using the Network Control Language Accessing Bridging and Routing Tables Accessing Bridging and Routing Tables Some NCL commands work with the SNMP agent and the IP routing application to provide access to application specific bridging routing and configuration tables maintained by local or remote HP routers The commands available in this category are the following Function isplay IP s OSPF routing table Covered in a later section page 16 80 isplay the IP address translation table page 16 41 isplay the AppleTalk configuration table page 16 55 isplay the AppleTalk Address Resolution Protocol AARP table page 16 57 isplay the AppleTalk routing table page 16 58 isplay the bridge forwarding and filtering table page 16 59 isplay DECnet configuration table page 16 60 isplay the DECnet Level 1 routing table node routes page 16 63 isplay the IP address table page 16 42 isplay the IPX routing table page 16 64
64. Example rgetdn 15 2 1 94 Displays the DEC net router intra area routing table for the node 15 2 1 94 Dst Cst Hop Next IF Hop 1 0 0 0 0 2 15 1 2 2 4 4 1 4 1 The fields in the table are as follows Dst lists the destination node number Cst contains the circuit cost to Dst Hop lists the number of router hops to Dst Next Hop lists the DE Cnet node number of the next hop router IF lists the number the router assigned to the network interface for Next Hop Using the Network Control Language Accessing Bridging and Routing Tables Rgetir Displaying the IPX Routing Table Use NCL s Rgetir command to format and display the IPX routing table for alocal or remote HP or Wellfleet router Syntax rgetir X X X X community X X X X optional is the IP address of the local or remote router in dotted decimal notation If you omit this field an IP address on the local router will be used community optional is the name of the SNMP community that grants access to that node If you omit the name public is used If you include a name the IP address must also be included Example rgetir 15 2 1 94 Displays the IPX routing table for the node whose IP address is 15 2 1 94 Dst Next Hop Mtr T P Age IF 000b1021 080009000411 0 D L 101 2 000b1022 0800090333ab 0 D L 9 3 000b2022 080009000882 1 R R 4 1 The fields in the table are as follows Dst lists the IPX network number of the destination in 8 digit hexade
65. FSI register did not become free net_fail Indicates whether net fail LED is lit for the circuit octets rx_ok Contains the number of error free octets received octets_rx_per_sec contains the number of octets that this circuit has received in the last second ST octets tx_ok Contains the number of error free octets transmitted octets_tx_per_sec contains the number of octets that this circuit has transmitted in the last second peak_frames_rx Contains the peak number of frames that this circuit has received in any given second since reboot seg UOnBUWOjU quowumbeuep peak_frames tx Contains the peak number of frames that this circuit has transmitted in any given second since reboot peak_octets rx Contains the peak number of octets that this circuit has received in any given second since reboot peak_octets tx Contains the peak number of octets that this circuit has transmitted in any given second since reboot rmt_state Contains the ring management state rr_on_rov Contains the number of ring resets issued in response to receive ring overrun errors source mac Contains the source address of the received transmitted frame total_rx_error Contains the number of receive errors total_tx_error Contains the number of transmit errors 18 21 18 22 M anagement Information Base Variables cct Circuits Information Base tx_congestion Contains the number of times where a buffer wasn t available to transmit a fram
66. G HEWLETT PACKARD Operator s Reference Dictionary of Configuring Operating and Reporting F eatures HP AdvanceStack Routers Hewlett Packard Series 200 400 and 600 Routers Operator s Reference Copyright Hewlett Packard Company 1994 All rights reserved This document contains pro prietary information which is protected by copyright No part of this document may be photocopied repro duced or translated into an other language without the prior written consent of Hewlett Packard Publication Number 5962 8305 E0794 Edition 1 J uly 1994 Printed in Singapore Product Numbers and Software Version This guide provides informa tion for Hewlett Packard routers running software with the following version numbers A 08 series B 08 series C 08 series Earlier and later software versions may operate differ ently than described in this manual Warranty The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice HEWLETT PACKARD COMPANY MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL IN CLUDING BUT NOT LIM ITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER CHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PAR TICULAR PURPOSE Hewlett Packard shall not be liable for errors con tained herein or for inciden tal or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material Hewlett Packard assumes no responsibility for the use or re
67. Idx Name Age Hop Type IF 00010000 02608c1bbfc3 0451 01 Larry 130 1 24 2 The fields in the table are as follows Net Address lists the server IPX network and station ad dress in hexadecimal format Sock lists the IPX socket for the server in hexadecimal format Idx lists the small index integer that distinguishes multiple servers with the same Net Address and Sock 9T Name lists the IPX servers name abbreviated to the first 15 characters and Age lists how many seconds since a SAP advertisement of this server was received spuewruop TON Hop lists the number of hops to the destination specified in Net Address 16 65 16 66 Using the Network Control Language Accessing Bridging and Routing Tables Type lists the service type supplied by the named server as follows 0 Unknown 3 Print Server 4 File Server 5 Job Server 9 Archive Server 24 Remote Bridge Server 47 Advertising Print Server e IF lists the number the router assigned to the circuit group used to reach the server Using the Network Control Language Accessing Bridging and Routing Tables Rgetrif Displaying the Source Routing RIF Cache Use NCL s Rgetrif command to format and display the source routing Routing Information Field RIF cache Syntax rgetrif X X X X X X X X isthe IP address of the local or remote router in dotted decimal notation Example rgetrif 15 2 1 94 Displays the source routing RIF cache for the node whose IP ad
68. If you include a name the IP address must also be included Examples rgetms 7 Displays the values of the Internet MIB User Datagram Protocol UDP branch on this router 1 3 6 1 2 1 7 1 0 1 3 6 1 2 1 7 2 05 1 3 6 1 2 1 7 3 05 1 3 6 1 2 1 7 4 0 number of UDP datagrams delivered to UDP users 9T number of received UDP data grams for which there was no application at the destination port number of undeliverable UDP datagrams spuewuop TON number of transmitted UDP datagrams 16 43 16 44 Using the Network Control Language Accessing the Internet Management Information Base rgetms 6 13 192 32 2 194 Displays the Internet MIB Transmission Control Protocol TCP connection table from the node whose IP address is 192 32 2 194 TCP connection state local IP address for the TCP connection local port number for the TCP connection remote IP address for the TCP connection remote port number for the TCP connection 1 3 6 1 2 1 6 13 1 1 192 32 2 194 23 192 32 1 1 3 6 1 2 1 6 13 1 2 192 32 2 194 23 192 32 1 1 3 6 1 2 1 6 13 1 3 192 32 2 194 23 192 32 1 1 3 6 1 2 1 6 13 1 4 192 32 2 194 23 192 32 1 1 3 6 1 2 1 6 13 1 5 192 32 2 194 23 192 32 1 167 167 167 167 167 1665 1665 1665 1665 1665 Rgetr Displaying the MIB IP Routing Table Use NCL s Rgetr command to format and display the Internet MIB IP routing table for
69. LCN is a decimal number identifying the switched virtual circuit Default 1 Range 0 to 4095 Note PVC LCN ranges and SVC LCN ranges must not overlap Specifies the maximum number of connections simultaneously established with IP Address The X 25 PDN service clears any incoming calls exceeding this limit Similarly the X 25 PDN service makes no attempt to place out going calls that would exceed this limit The establishment of multiple connections with a single destination may improve throughput by increasing the window size Default 2 1 2 3 4 Specifies the maximum period that a call can remain idle After the expiration of max idle timer the router clears the call This parameter is intended to minimize CPU and network overhead during periods of low datagram traffic If Min Idle Time secs is set to 0 this parameter is ignored Default 120 Range 0 to 9999 Note If the IP router uses the Routing Information Protocol RIP you should set the Max Idle Time parameter to a value greater than 30 seconds the RIP update period to prevent call clear thrashing Max Link Latency ms 0 none Max Queue Size Min Frame Spacing Min Idle Time secs MTU Size X 25 Service Parameters Parameters and Options Determines how many bytes can be queued on a WAN link expressed in milliseconds For a detailed description refer to Max Link Latency ms O none on page T Sets the maximum size in packets of
70. MFS dflt 2 Meaning The configuration record for circuit cct contains a faulty value in the Minimum Frame Spacing field The router has defaulted to a value of 2 Action Modify Minimum Frame Spacing in the configuration Invalid N2 dflt 16 Meaning The configuration record for circuit cct contains a faulty value in the Retry Counter N2 field The router has defaulted to a value of 16 Action Modify Retry Counter N2 in the configuration No buffers available for deadlock processing Meaning Indicates a degenerative line condition resulting in the lack of receive buffers at both the line source and termination No V 35 circuits configured Meaning Circuits designated by the Circuit Name parameter in the line record have not been configured Action Modify the configuration to ensure that it includes circuit records for all circuits 17 101 Event Log Messages line Lines Event Messages Sync circuit assigned to multiple lines Meaning One or more line records contains references to the same point to point circuit Action Modify the configuration to ensure that all line and circuit records are consistent Too many lines assigned to V 35 connector Meaning The configuration contains an excessive number greater than two of line records for a single connector Action Modify the configuration to ensure that no more than one line record references a specific physical connector Too many V3
71. Match Ethernet Type high Options Bridge Parameters Parameters and Options Enter athe lowest DSAP in this field and the highest DSAP in the DSAP high field if you are filtering a range of destination service access points Enter the name of a SAP list in this field and leave the DSAP high field blank if you are establishing a range of destination service access points with a filter list For more information refer to DSAP high To learn how to create a SAP list refer to SAP low and SAP high later in this chapter Determines whether frames are dropped or relayed filtered based on the contents of a frame field and a range established by a matching set of low and high filter parameters The frame field and corresponding low and high filter parameters are listed in the following table 9 Frame Field Bridge Parameter y DSAP DSAP low and DSAP high J w Ethertype E thertype low and Ethertype high s5 Protocol ID Org 1 Code Protocol ID Org Code low and high MAC dest MAC dest low and MAC dest high MAC source MAC source low and MAC source high SSAP SSAP low and SSAP high Type Type low and Type high Default Ignore Applies the filtering action drop accept log if the contents of the frame field do not fall within the range established by the matching low and high filter parameters Applies no filtering action if the contents of the frame field falls wi
72. Meaning A PVC information element indicated that this PVC has received an X off indication Data will not be transmitted over this particular PVC until it receives an xon indication This message is only relevant if the Data Link Connection Management type is LMI Annex D does not use the Xoff Xon indication XXX is the DLCI associated with the PVC which has received the Xoff indication PVC XXX received xon indication Meaning A PVC information element indicated that this PVC has received an Xon indication Generally this message follows the X off indication This frees the PVC for data transfer XXX is the DLC associated with the PVC which has received the xon indication PVC XXX status change to Active Meaning For the indicated frame relay circuit a PVC has changed state to active This is due to a full status message or update status message from the management interface XXX is the DLC associated with the PVC for which the change has occurred PVC XXX status change to Inactive Meaning For the indicated frame relay circuit a PVC has changed state to inactive This is due to a full status message or update status message from the management interface XXX is the DLCI associated with the PVC for which the change has occurred PVC IE out of order f or dici XXX Meaning For the indicated frame relay circuit a full status message was received for which the PVC status information elements were not in ascending order
73. Meaning A TFTP Read request from a system with IP address i p address for file filename was received SENT ERR to ip address error msg follows Meaning We sent a TFTP error PDU during the file transfer with the system whose IP address is ip address The error number is TFT P specific and its meaning can be found in RFC 783 The message string that was sent back in the error PDU follows this message in the event log TFTP Entity not enabled request denied Meaning The F get or Fput request requires that TFTP be configured and enabled Action Check that TFTP is configured and enabled TFTP_ip_ctrl_id not valid for FGET OS request Meaning The IP entity is not in a state to accept requests from upper layers so the Fget command could not be executed 17 131 Event Log Messages tftp TFTP and Fget Event Messages Action Check that IP is configured correctly and is enabled TFTP REBOOTING THE SYSTEM FOR FGET OS MEMORY Meaning The operating system needs more memory than the current configuration can supply TFTP is rebooting to reclaim memory and try again TFTP Received pkt on deleted connection Meaning A stray duplicate or retransmitted packet has been received after the full transmission related to that packet has been received and TFTP completed Indicates the possibility of network congestion transfer of filename aborted Meaning The TFTP entity was disabled during a transfer The transf
74. Messages The event messages are generated by the system varaible Ib the learning bridge Circuit Group ccg Blocking Meaning The spanning tree algorithm has placed circuit group ccgin the blocking state A circuit group in this state does not participate in frame relay The spanning tree algorithm however does include blocked ports in its calculation of the active topology Circuit Group ccg Disabled Meaning The spanning tree algorithm has placed circuit group ccgin the disabled state A circuit group in this state does not participate in frame relay The spanning tree algorithm does not include disabled ports in its calculation of the active topology Circuit Group ccg Forwarding Meaning The spanning tree algorithm has placed circuit group ccgin the forwarding state A circuit group in this state is participating in frame relay Circuit Group ccg Learning Meaning The spanning tree algorithm has placed circuit group ccgin the learning state A circuit group in this state is participating in frame relay and has enabled the learning function Circuit Group ccg Listening Meaning The spanning tree algorithm has placed circuit group ccgin the listening state A circuit group in this state is preparing to participate in frame relay 17 96 Event Log M essages lb Bridge Event Messages 4T entity disabled Meaning The bridge has been disabled in response to NCL s Disable command entity
75. Minimum Connect Duration Per Channel Bandwidth Send CIC on Allowed INC s Note If the V 25 bis circuit is configured as a backup circuit then the connection will not be enabled unless all primary circuits become disabled Enables a standard link layer protocol or a Wellfleet proprietary protocol Pass Thru Default Standard Required for a circuit connecting to an HP remote bridge Displays a screen with parameters for allowing any type of synchronous protocol SDLC HDLC or LAPB to be bridged from the pass through circuit to a predefined destination station MAC address that terminates the point to point link Vv For additional information refer to Local LAN Address and Remote LAN Address Refer to Multicast Support on page 4 22 sSJIPUL Led N2119 4 11 Delay after connect failure min Don t Retry on connect failure Disabl e on connect failure Desired Link Quality Circuit Parameters Parameters and Options Sets the time in minutes elapsing before the router attempts to make another outbound connection This time interval comes into effect only when the router fails to establish a connection and only after the Connect retry count has been exhausted The parameter has no effect on a connection failing after successfully connecting Default Retry immediately Range 0 1 to 30 minutes Other options DON t Retry on connect failure Disable on connect failure Prevents the rout
76. OSPF Transmit bad Meaning OSPF was unable to transmit a packet 17 110 OSPF TRANS IF NBR ID ip address Event X Meaning Event Log M essages ospf OSPF Event Messages States Y gt Z The transit interface or neighbor ip address has received an event X that caused it to pass through a state change from state Y to state Z The following events can cause state machine changes for interfaces or neighbors Events Received by Events Received by Neighbors Hello Received Start Two Way Received Adjacency OK Negotiation Done Bad LS Request Exchange Done Seq Mismatch Loading Done One Way Reset Adjacency Kill Neighbor Inactivity Timer Lower Level Down Interfaces Interface UP Wait Timer Backup Seen Neighbor Change Loop Indication Unloop indication Interface Down The associated states that affected neighbors or interfaces can pass through are States Associated with Neighbors Down Attempt Init 2Way Exch Start Exchange Loading Full SC Virtual States Associated with Interfaces Down Loopback Waiting P to P DR Backup DR DR Other 17 111 4T s pess Ww 601 u44 Event Log Messages pm Port Module M anager Event M essages pm Port Module Manager Event Messages These event messages are generated by the system variable pm which is the port module manager for the HP Router 650 Can t allocate re boot message restart impossible Meaning T
77. OSPF routing pools from including manually configured routes and routes obtained from EGP and OSPF allows the OSPF routing pool to include manually configured routes and routes obtained from RIP and EGP Enables or disables the all subnet broadcast ASB feature An ASB datagram is one with a destination IP address equal to the broadcast address for an entire subnet For example if a network interface is attached to a subnet with the address 128 10 2 1 and subnet mask 255 255 255 0 any datagram on this network with a destination address of 128 10 255 255 is considered an ASB datagram When the IP router receives an ASB datagram on one IP network interface it floods it out on the IP network interface to that subnet ASB datagrams are flooded one per physical interface so a port with more than one network interface definition is flooded with one ASB datagram only This is typically used with HP Data Terminal Concentrator to HP Data Terminal Concentrator communication Default No Disables the ASB Flood feature Enables the ASB Flood feature Enables or disables password authentication Default Simple Password No Authentication Disables password authentication 7 8 Internet Protocol IP Parameters Parameters and Options Simple Password Enables password authentication Auto Enable Circuit Group Connection Close Time Out Conditional Circuit Group Cost Dead Interval Note If the Area ID is not specified or is a
78. P F bit set to zero 0 P F bit set to the same value as the regardless of the P F settinginthe P F bitin the received frame received frame 1 FRMR ON RR If X 25 sends an FRMR on the line If X 25 sends an FRMR on the line the reception of an RR frame the reception of any frame other causes another FRMR to be sent than an SABM DISC or FRMR to All other frames except SABM clear the condition is ignored DISC and FRMR are ignored 0 FORCE FRMR If X 25 sends an FRMR on the line If X 25 sends an FRMR on the line the reception of any frame other than an SABM DISC or FRMR causes another FRMR to be sent the reception of any frame other than an SABM DISC or FRMR is ignored Table 13 2 CUG Communication with Devices Outside of the Closed User Group Type of Subscription Service Incoming and outgoing services Outgoing service only Operation Permitted Calls to and from device outside of the group Outgoing Access setto Yes Incoming service only Outgoing service only Outgoing Access set to No Calls to device outside the group Calls from devices outside the group No calls to or from devices outside the group 13 15 T sSJIpPUL LLd N S SZ X 14 V 25 bis Network Mapping 14 2 V 25 bis Network M apping Overview Overview woONOMAUNE Configuration Editor DEFAULT_CONFIG System 1 Software 1 Lines 4 Circuits 4 Circuit Groups 4 Bridge
79. Storing the Configuration or NCL Command Output to a PC Host File Use NCL s Zput command to download the router configuration or NCL command output to a file on a PC connected to the router as a console Preparation 1 2 Start PROCOMM PLUS Ensure that the PROCOMM PLUS Auto downloading feature for the Zmodem protocol is set to on Press the key combination to display the PROCOMM PLUS SETUP UTILITY screen Select PROTOCOL OPTIONS Select ZMODEM PROTOCOL OPTIONS In the resulting menu en sure that item C Auto downloading is set to on If itis set to off follow the instructions on the screen to change the setting Press to return to PROTOCOL OPTIONS HP Router 650 applications only Do this step if the router uses an F 1047 80002 cable to directly connect the router console port to a 9 pin port on a PC with no modem or adapter involved Otherwise skip this step and go to step 8 a Select GENERAL OPTIONS b Inthe resulting menu set item C Abort Xfer if CD lost to No Follow the instructions on the screen to change the setting Press to return to PROTOCOL OPTIONS The PROCOMM PLUS Zmoden file transfer utility default expects the Carrier Detect line to be on high before starting the file trans fer The cabling described here and only this cabling arrangement does not supply Carrier Detect CD to the PC This is the reas
80. System Session menu item A Parameter Finder 1 System 1 System Name Auto Enable Automatic Reboot Timezone Daylight Time Rule Daylight Time Rule User defined Beginning month Ending month Beginning day Ending day System Contact System Location 1 System Session Event Filter Level Session Mode User Telnet Typographical Conventions Parameter names appear as gt System Name Auto Enable a Numbered menu items appear as 7 ri 1 System for Main menu items 7 i 1 System Session for submenu items g a Parameters that appear only when a certain condition is met are listed under a line describing that condition For example Begin ning month Ending month Beginning day and Ending day appear only when the Daylight Time Rule parameter is set to User defined as shown below Daylight Time Rule User defined Beginning month Ending month Beginning day Ending day A 3 A Parameter Finder 1 System 1 System System Name Auto Enable Automatic Reboot Timezone Daylight Time Rule Daylight Time Rule User defined Beginning month Ending month Beginning day Ending day System Contact System Location 1 System Session Event Filter Level Session Mode Terminal Screen Refresh Rate Session Mode User Baud Rate Flow Control Parity Bit Char Stop Bits Connection inactivity time min M odem connection time sec M odem lost receive ready time msec M odem disconnection time sec A
81. Table 6 1 Suggested Spanning Tree Parameter Values 9 Hello Max Forward Time Age Delay 1 gt 4 gt 3 9 2 gt 6 gt f ra 3 gt 8 gt 55 A g 4 gt 10 gt 6 g 5 gt 12 gt 6 gt 14 gt 8 7 gt 16 gt 9 8 gt 18 gt 10 9 gt 20 gt 11 10 gt 22 gt 13 If you enable source routing the spanning tree algorithm is always enabled regardless of the value assigned to the Spanning Tree E nable parameter Forwarding Table Size specifies the maximum size of the forwarding table The forwarding table contains the list of end station addresses learned by the bridge plus all source address filters and destination address filters The value entered for the Forwarding Table Size parameter sets the maximum size of the table There are seven options for Forwarding Table Size 0 2048 64 4096 512 8192 1024 default Src Rte SSAP high SSAP low 6 20 Bridge Parameters Parameters and Options Ye wn N to Options Options To specify forwarding table size refer to your network topology drawing and estimate the number of end stations serviced by the bridge then double this figure Finally select the next highest value from the available responses For more information on the Forwarding Table parameter refer to page 6 11 Enables or disables source routing Default No Enables source routing for the current circuit Disables source routing for the current circuit Sets the upper b
82. Table Maintenance Protocol RTMP rtmp_req_rx contains the total number of RTMP REQUEST packets received by the AppleTalk router rtmp_rsp_tx contains the total number of RTMP RESPONSE packets transmitted by the AppleTalk router Management Information Base Variables atmib AppleTalk MIB Information Base Zone Information Protocol ZIP zip_geticlzones rx contains the total number of ZIP GETLOCALZONES packets received by the AppleTalk router zip_getIclzones tx contains the total number of ZIP GETLOCALZONES packets transmitted by the AppleTalk router zip_geticlzonesreply rx contains the total number of ZIP GETLOCALZONESREPLY packets received by the AppleTalk router ST zip_geticlzonesreply_tx contains the total number of ZIP GETLOCALZONESREPLY packets transmitted by the AppleTalk router zip_getnetinfo_rx contains the total number of ZIP GETNETINFO packets received by the AppleTalk router zip_getnetinfo_tx contains the total number of ZIP GETNETINFO packets transmitted by the AppleTalk router seg UOnBUWOjU quowumbeuep zip_getzonelist_rx contains the total number of ZIP GETZONELIST packets received by the AppleTalk router zip_netinforeply rx contains the total number of ZIP NETINFOREPLY packets received by the AppleTalk router zip_netinforeply tx contains the total number of ZIP NETINFOREPLY packets transmitted by the AppleTalk router zip_reply_rx contains the total number of ZIP REPLY packets received by
83. The above hotswap operation applies only to the HP Router 650 16 26 Using the Network Control Language Managing Router Operations and Resources Telnet Establishing a Virtual Terminal Connection Use NCL s Telnet command to establish a Transmission Control Protocol TCP virtual terminal connection to a remote node allowing you to interact with the remote nodes interface This router must have IP routing and a Telnet session configured This router supports a maximum of four simultaneous TCP connections The remote node must have Telnet service Syntax telnet X X X X X X X X isthe IP address of the remote node in dotted decimal notation Example telnet 15 3 0 97 Once a connection is established Telnet passes keystrokes from your router to the remote node m Ifthe remote system is another HP router you will see the system name of the remote node as the NCL prompt at the bottom of the display You can use the same commands that you use on your own router You can use NCL s Exit command to exit NCL and access the Main menu on the remote router To disconnect select Logout from the Main menu At Do you want to disconnect Y N answer Y for yes The remote node and Telnet are disconnected and you will see your own system name on the the display a Ifthe remote system is not another HP router then type the appropri ate commands to interact with that system Disconnect Telnet when you are finished When
84. Then switch off the file logging function when the output waits at the end Syntax print help print help rget print help other print help all print time print date 9T print summary print browse print config print crash spuewruop TON print stamp print log print log filter 16 19 16 20 Using the Network Control Language Managing Router Operations and Resources print list identifier print log string print get identifier print rget Commands beginning with rget and print ospf with ospf are described in later sections of this chapter Quick Invoking Quick Configuration Use NCL s Quick command to switch to Quick Configuration as if you had chosen Quick Configuration from the Main menu but without leaving NCL For information on Quick Configuration refer to the User s Guide When you exit Quick Configuration you will return to the NCL prompt rather than to the Main menu Syntax quick Quickr Invoking Quick Remote Use NCL s Quickr command to switch to Quick Remote as if you had chosen Quick Remote from the Main menu but without leaving NCL For information on Quick Remote refer to the User s Guide When you exit Quick Remote you will return to the NCL prompt rather than to the Main menu Syntax quickr Note Using the Network Control Language Managing Router Operations and Resources Rboot Rebooting a Remote Router Use the NCL Rboot command to reboot
85. Timer min 6 5 Auto Enable 6 6 Block STE 6 6 Bridge ID hex 6 7 Circuit Group Name 6 7 Circuit Name 6 7 Cost 6 7 Default Conversion Type Continued Next Page Bridge Parameters Overview Page Bridge Parameters Conti nued From Previous Page 6 7 6 7 6 8 6 8 6 9 6 9 6 10 6 10 6 10 6 11 6 11 6 11 6 12 6 12 6 12 6 12 6 13 6 13 6 13 6 13 6 13 6 14 6 14 6 14 6 15 6 15 6 15 6 16 6 16 6 16 6 17 6 17 6 17 6 17 Default Conversion Type DL Format DSAP high DSAP low Effect Ethernet Type high Ethernet Type low Flood Interval sec Forward Delay Forwarding Table Size Group LAN ID Header Hello Time High Value hex Hop Count Reduction Internal LAN ID Hex LAN ID Hex Length List Name Loop Detection Time Hex Low Value hex MAC Address high MAC Address low MAC dest high MAC dest low MAC source high MAC source low Max Age Max Hops Offset Precedence Priority Protocol ID Org Code high Protocol ID Org Code low Continued Next Page 6 3 9 sSI JULIed pug 6 4 Bridge Parameters Overview Page Bridge Parameters Continued From Previous Page 6 18 Protocol Type 6 18 SAP high 6 18 SAP low 6 18 Set Hop Count Reduction 6 19 Spanning Tree Enable 6 20 Src Rte 6 20 SSAP high 6 20 SSAP low 6 21 STP Priority 6 21 Table Age Interval 6 22 Traffic Priority 6 22
86. Transitional Bridge 6 22 Type high 6 23 Type low Bridge Parameters Parameters and Options Parameters and Options Action Determines the disposition of frames meeting the filter rule Default Drop Drop Discards a frame meeting the filter rule Accept Relays a frame meeting the filter rule High Priority Assigns the first priority to all incoming bridged packets from the LAN circuit meeting the filter rule This gives packets a higher priority than bridged and routed packets not meeting the filter rule To select this option the Traffic Priority parameter must be set to Normal Low Priority Assigns last priority to all incoming bridged packets meeting the filter rule This gives packets a lower priority than any bridged and routed packets from the LAN circuit not meeting the filter rule Aging Timer min Sets a time interval in minutes for aging the source route SR entries ina forwarding table Default 5 minutes Disable 0 The Aging Timer controls how frequently the source route entries are checked for removal from the bridge forwarding table Each time a frame is forwarded to a station its entry in this table is time stamped If the entry is not accessed for a time period equaling twice this time the entry is removed from the table A value of zero disables the timer and aging is no longer performed Any source routing station that is moved from one ring to another must be timed out before it can again com
87. V 25 bis mapping record New DLCI XXX added over existing one Meaning For the indicated frame relay circuit a PVC was marked as new in the PVC status message before it was removed using the management interface The old PVC is deleted and this new one is put in its place No buffers to reconnect to remote Meaning The circuit indicated in the object field of the event message cannot establish a connection because of insufficient buffer space No Pool circuits config for X X X X Meaning A P mapped circuit was configured but no pool circuits were configured for the circuit group associated with this static route X X X X is the IP address of the associated static route This configuration error prevents the V 25 bis to IP map from working The IP map is left disabled and the associated IP address will not be reachable using this map A result is that all IP addresses accessed by this map will not be accessible Attempting to enable the map with the NCL Enipmap command results in the NCL error message Disabled no pool ccts cfg for X X X X X X X X is the ip address of the next hop associated with the map Action Configure the circuit group with V 25 bis pool circuits 17 38 Event Log M essages cct Circuit Event Messages Not receiving seq num on MI enquiry 4T Meaning For the indicated frame relay circuit the other side of the frame relay interface is issuing status enquiry messages with last received ke
88. Versions 1 and 2 are compatible this software complies with Version 2 OSPF Bad virtlink info Meaning The OSPF entity has interpreted information from a non backbone source as incorrectly appearing on the backbone OSPF BDR ip address Meaning OSPF is performing the designated router algorithm with respect to interface i p address DR and BDR indicate the results of the algorithm OSPF Choosing DR INTF ip address Meaning OSPF is performing the designated router algorithm and is in the process of choosing a designated router on the interface at i p address OSPF DR ip address Meaning OSPF has selected the router at i p address to be the designated router OSPF Entity enabled Meaning The OSPF entity has initialized correctly and has reached the enabled state 17 109 Event Log Messages ospf OSPF Event Messages OSPF Packetis too small Meaning OSPF has received a packet that is too small OSPF Packetsize gt IP length Meaning OSPF has received a packet exceeding the allowable IP datagram length OSPF Received on down IF Meaning OSPF has received a packet on an interface that was considered to be down OSPF TQ_IFCHECK Interface if_name ip address is down Meaning When the OSPF entity was enabling it found the specified interface in the down state OSPF periodically checks the status of its interfaces and therefore is capable of recognizing state changes
89. Window Negotiated Pkt Size A 33 J pu 4 JTO pureed A Parameter Finder 13 X 25 Network Service Continued 2 DDN IP Service Lower Circuit Name Precedence M ax Queue Size M ax Conns Dest M in Idle Time secs M ax Idle Time secs Upper Circuit Name Internet Address 3 HP Point to Point Service Lower Circuit Name M ax Queue Size Local DTE Address 1 X 25 Virtual Circuits Circuit Name Remote DTE Addr Connection ID Flow Ctrl Flow Ctrl Negot Negotiated Pkt Window Negotiated Pkt Size Permanent Circuit A 34 A Parameter Finder 14 V 25 bis Network Mapping 14 V 25 bis Netw ork Mapping 1 Phone to IP mapping IP Next Hop Connect retry count Connect wait time sec Hold down time sec VC inactivity time sec 1 Outbound call number Remote Station Number Subaddress J pu 4 JTO pureed Index l 1 16 4 32 bit encapsulation 4 15 802 2 LLC 6 8 802 2 SNAP 6 8 A A 08 code 16 21 16 23 AARP Mapping Table Size 12 6 Accept NETBIOS Bcasts from net 11 5 Acquisition Mode 7 6 Action 6 5 7 6 8 4 10 4 11 5 Action on circuit group enable disable 7 6 Adapter Record 4 5 A 6 A 8 Address Mask Reply 7 6 Address Resolution 7 7 AEP 16 4 Aging Timer min 6 5 Alarm 16 32 Alarm Timer 4 5 Allowed inbound call numbers A 7 Annex D switch 4 19 ANSI Annex D 4 19 ANSI terminal 16 98 AppleTalk AARP Mapping Table Size 12 6 Checksum 12 6 Circuit Group
90. X 25 Event Messages in chapter 3 Parameter F inder A Parameter Finder How To Use the Parameter Finder The parameter finder is a tool you can use to help determine the menu path to any parameter in the Configuration Editor by listing each parameter according to its position in the Configuration Editor hierarchy The parameters are grouped according to the menu items under which they occur in the main screen of the Configuration Editor DEFAULT_CONFIG Configuration Editor Example used in illustration e a System 1 on the facing page Software 1 Lines 4 Circuits 4 Circuit Groups 4 Bridge 1 DoD Internet Router DECNET IV Routing Service SNMP Sessions B 19 Xerox Routing Service B 11 IPX Routing Service B 12 AppleTalk Router 9 13 X 25 Network Service B 14 V 25 bis Network Mapping B woONOMAUNE Enter Selection B for Previous Menu Figure A 1 The Main Screen of the Configuration Editor For example in 1 system 1 shown above and in the menu tree on the facing page Automatic Reboot and System Contact are just two of several parameters you ll find as soon as you select the 1 System menu item Beginning month is a parameter that you will find only when the Daylight Time Rule parameter is set to User defined a Event Filter Level is a parameter that you will find only if you access the 1
91. XNS source networks a Leave this field blank and enter the XNS network number in the Source Network low field if you are filtering a single XNS source network Enter the highest XNS host number in the range if you are filtering a range of XNS source networks Leave this field blank and enter the name of the Network list in the Source Network low field if you want to use a Network list to establish the upper and lower range of XNS source network numbers For additional information refer to Source Network low later in this chapter F or more information about Host lists refer to Network Number high and Network Number low earlier in this chapter OT Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering an XNS packet based on the contents of its source network field Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter XNS source networks SJIPULLd Ooy SNX Enter the XNS network number in this field and leave the Source Network high field blank if you are filtering a single XNS source network Enter the lowest XNS network number in this field and enter the highest host number in the Source Network high field if you are filtering a range of XNS source networks Enter the Network list name in this field and leave the Source Network high field blank if you want to use a Network list to establish the upper and lower range of network numbers For additional information refer to Source Netw
92. a remote router having version A 08 or later operating code Any changes made in the configuration or password since the remote router was last booted will take effect Syntax rboot X X X X community X X X Xis the IP address in dotted decimal notation of a port on the remote router community is the SNMP community name to which the above port is assigned If the remote router has no password the router reboots immediately If the remote router has a manager password you will be prompted to enter the password before the reboot begins Enter remote password When the remote router reboots you will see the message Reboot Successful If no message is received the remote router may have a version of operating code that predates version A 08 and does not support the Rboot command If the reboot does not occur you may see one of the following messages Password Incorrect which means that the manager password for the remote router was incorrect 9T Timeout no SNMP response recvd A community name may be required SNMP is not configured or an incorrect IP address may have been used spueuauo5 TON 16 21 16 22 Using the Network Control Language Managing Router Operations and Resources Repeat Continuing to Repeat the Previous NCL Command Use NCL s Repeat command to repeat the previous NCL command over and over until you press any key to stop The frequency interval is configurable using the Screen
93. acceptable length xrx CG ccg Del Rt to dest_net via next_hop_net next hop_ gw 17 148 where ccg is the name of the circuit group on which the route was learned dest_nd is the destination network to which the router referred next_hop_net is the directly connected network that was to be used to get to the next hop router next_hop gw is the XNS or IPX address of the router that was the next hop for traffic destined for dest_net Event Log M essages zmodem Zmodem Event Messages zmodem Zmodem E vent Messages 4T These event messages are NCL error codes that can occur when using the Zmodem commands Zput and Zget soBessop 6o7 WweAW Display Only Zmodem Event Messages These messages are not listed in the event log They appear only on the console display F or messages that are also logged see page 17 150 Command only allow ed from the Console Port Meaning The Zmodem commands are allowed only from the console port Telnet sessions cannot use them The Configuration Editor is in use by another session Meaning Indicates that the a transfer of the configuration file is not allowed because the Configuration Editor is currently accessing it Action Check for Telnet sessions running the Configuration E ditor The Configuration file is being TFTP d by another session Meaning Indicates that a transfer of the configuration file is not allowed because it is currently being transferred using TFTP
94. also contains variables that describe the rejection of certain packets by the DECnet router The structure is the following drs cg circuit group specific branch see subheading ccg circuit group name variables listed below total the aggregate rejection branch see subheading vari ables listed below The pathnames are constructed as follows drs cg ccg vari able drs total vari able The variables are listed alphabetically under the two branches Circuit Group Specific drop contains the number of packets dropped by circuit group ccg trans_pkts_recv contains the number of data packets received by circuit group ccg trans_pkts_sent contains the number of data packets sent by cir cuit group ccg Management Information Base Variables drs DECnet Circuit Group Information Base Aggregate Rejection aged_pkt_loss contains the number of packets dropped by the DECnet router because the packet had transited too many routers prior to reaching its destination The maximum number of routers that a packet can transit is determined by the Area Max Hops and Max Hops parameters Area Max Hops specifies the number of routers that a packet can transit before reaching its destination area Max Hops specifies the number of routers within an area that a packet can transit before reaching its destination node node_unreach contains the number of packets dropped by the DECnet router because the destination node while within range was unreacha
95. and Poll commands or of Update responses Although the EGP protocol allows both neighbors to be active protocol efficiency is enhanced when one neighbor is active and the other is passive Default Both Places the local router in Active mode Allows the neighboring routers to arbitrate a mutually agreeable neighbor reachability algorithm 7 21 L sPULHLd dl 020 01d PUHI Polling Timer Poll Interval Precedence Preference 7 22 Passive Options Options Internet Protocol IP Parameters Parameters and Options Place the local router in Passive mode Specifies the time interval in seconds between EGP Poll commands Default 120 seconds 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 330 360 390 420 450 480 seconds Allows the router to send additional Hello packets at a reduced rate even though no Hello packets were received for more than the Dead Interval seconds Default 20 20 40 80 100 120 140 160 200 seconds Assigns a priority value for filtering a packet The higher the precedence the greater the priority Default 1 You can construct up to 31 filters per IP interface The Precedence value is used when an incoming IP packet meets multiple filter rules In such an instance the filter with the highest priority is applied to the frame In the event of two filters with equal precedence the first configured filter takes precedence Assigns a weighted value used by the TCP IP router to
96. application to be used Any service that you enable can be used on any port Page Softw are Parameter 2 3 Protocol Software Parameters Parameters and Options Parameters and Options Protocol Adds or deletes the protocol service you want to enable or disable on the router Default Bridge Options Bridge DoD IP Router DECnet Router Xerox XNS Router IPX Router AppleTalk Router Cc SJIPULLd JemMyYOosS 2 3 Lines Parameters Lines Parameters Overview Overview DEFAULT_CONFIG Configuration Editor System 1 Software 1 p Lines 4 Access to Lines Parameters Circuits 4 Circuit Groups 4 Bridge 1 DoD Internet Router DECNET IV Routing Service B SNMP Sessions B 10 Xerox Routing Service B 11 IPX Routing Service 12 AppleTalk Router 9 13 X 25 Network Service 9 14 V 25 bis Network Mapping B woONOMAUNE Enter Selection B for Previous Menu Figure 3 1 Access to Lines Circuits and Circuit Group Parameters Line Parameters Describe the physical level 1 connections between the router and local area networks and or long haul transmis sion facilities The lines for the ports are initially established with default attributes configured Page Line Parameters 3 3 Bridge Type 3 3 Circuit Name 3 3 Clock Source 3 4 Clock Speed 3 4 Connector 3 4 Physical Access Method 3 5 Ring Interface Bridge Type Encapsu
97. at ipx address Meaning The Service Advertising Protocol learned a node has been deleted The node is specified by server which is a character string truncated after eleven digits and by the full IPX address i px address which is shown in hexademimal notation the first eight digits are the network address and the last twelve digits are the host address CG ccg NetBIOS Bcast Rt ee ignored bad name Meaning A NetBIOS broadcast static route configured on the IPX interface has an invalid NetBIOS Resource Name configured It may be too long or may contain nonhexadecimal characters following for example The route is being ignored The circuit group associated with this network interface is ccg and ee is the number of the invalid NetBIOS static route entry configured CG ccg NetBIOS Bcast Rt ee ignored bad net Meaning 17 92 A NetBIOS broadcast static route configured on the IPX interface has a destination network Dest Network parameter of 00000000 or FFFFFFFF The route is being ignored The circuit group associated with this network interface is ccg and eeis the number of the invalid NetBIOS static route entry configured Event Log M essages ipx IPX Router Event Messages CG ccg New Rt to ipxnetvia ipx address Meaning The IPX routing module generates a new event message whenever it learns a new route or updates an existing route The new route is specified by i pxnet which is the destination n
98. because the DECnet router has failed to receive three consecutive hello packets from this node Adj Down CG ccg Version Skew Adj aa nnnn Meaning An adjacent system accessible through circuit group ccg whose Area and Node Address is aa nnnn has been declared DOWN because the system s DE Cnet routing software predates Version 2 0 0 Adj Rej CG ccg node aa nnnn Endnode Table Full Meaning An adjacent node accessible through circuit group ccg whose area and node address is aa nnnn is declared down The node information could not fit in the current adjacent endnode table Adj Rej CG ccg node aa nnnn Router Table Full Meaning An adjacent node accessible through circuit group ccg whose area and node address is aa nnnn is declared down The node information could not fit in the current adjacent router table Adj Up CG ccg Adj aa nnnn Meaning The adjacent node whose area and node address is aa nnnn is declared up Area Reach Chg Area aa Reachable Meaning The previously unreachable area whose area address is aa has become reachable 17 75 Event Log Messages drs DECnet Event Messages Area Reach Chg Area aa Unreachable Meaning The previously reachable area whose area address is aa has become unreachable CG Down CG ccg Sync lost node aa nnnn Meaning The circuit group manager has declared circuit group ccg which accesses node aa nnnn to be unavailable CG Up CG ccg
99. bridges do not need unique identifiers Identifies the circuit group connecting the bridge and the attached LAN or network device Enter the name of the circuit group providing the connection Identifies the circuit not the circuit group carrying the traffic specified by Protocol Type Assigns a relative cost value to the circuit group Cost is meaningful only if you have enabled the spanning tree algorithm Move to the next field to accept the default value 100 if the spanning tree algorithm is not enabled Cost reflects the relative speed of the media lower costs are for high speed media and higher costs are for low speed media Use Cost to direct network traffic to higher speed media There are 14 options for Cost Default 100 100 1 40 80 250 10 50 90 500 30 70 65535 30 70 Assigns the default frame type for conversion This parameter determines whether the TRNSB converts frames to 802 3 or the Ethernet V2 format This rule is altered for any stations configured in the Alternate Conversion list Configure the frame type used by most if not all stations on your 802 3 Ethernet LAN Default 802 3 Sets the conversion type to 802 3 Sets the conversion type to Ethernet V2 Enables the construction of more complex filters combining MAC level source and destination address filtering with protocol specific filtering Default MAC only Prepares MAC level source and destination filters MAC level source and destination filte
100. by DLCI XXX identifies the first out of order PVC information element 17 42 QOS quality of service addr DCE BIDTE compression Yes No Meaning Received a connect delay indication DLC Meaning Event Log M essages cct Circuit Event Messages 4T Follows the circuit in auto detect mode message and indicates the current Quality of Service Point to Point Address and Compression parameter settings soBessop 6o7 WweAR The terminal terminal adapter issued a delay call to the router The router will retry the call after the delay time requested Received a connectindication CNX Meaning The router has received a connect indication This terminal adapter response is not needed by the router because it uses DSR to indicate when a call has been established Received a connect fail indication CFI Meaning Action Received call Meaning The router has received a Call Failure indication from the terminal adapter Depending on the configuration the router will attempt the connection again automatically Check for any logged adapter errors to find out why the call failed and correct errors as necessary The router has received an incoming call Received call dropped number not allow ed Meaning Action The router received an incoming call but dropped it because the number did not match any allowed incoming number No user action required However if for t
101. connection is established on a subsequent retry unknown char X in phone number Meaning The phone number configured for terminal adapter has unexpected characters These characters will not be used when making or receiving the call unknown char X in recv phone number Meaning The received phone number has unexpected characters The router will ignore them Action Check the terminal adapter configuration unknown char X in recv sub address Meaning The received sub address has unexpected characters The router will ignore them Action Check the terminal adapter configuration unknown char X in sub address Meaning The sub address configured has unexpected characters These characters will not be used when making or receiving the call 17 56 Unsupported IE value XXX found Meaning Unsupported NLPID found XXX Meaning Event Log M essages cct Circuit Event Messages 4T For the indicated frame relay circuit a valid status update or full status message was received with an unrecognized or unsupported Information Element 1E XXX identifies Information Element identifier code in question s pess Ww 601 344 For the indicated frame relay circuit a received data packet that included a NLPID value that was not recognized The NLPID identifies the encapsulated data type Packets received with unknown NLPIDs are discarded XXX identifies the NLPID value received V 25 bis to IP dup ne
102. contains the number of direct memory access bus errors that do not exceed the abort threshold log_dma_par_err contains the number of direct memory access parity errors that do not exceed the abort threshold log frm_cpy_err contains the number of times the token ring adapt er while in the receive repeat mode recognized a frame addressed to its specific address but found the address recognized indicator bits not equal to zero This indicates a possible line hit or duplicate address log_line_err contains the number of times the token ring adapter while in the receive repeat mode recognized a line error A line error is recorded when 1 a code violation exists between the starting and ending delimiters of a frame 2 a code violation exists in a token or 3 a frame check sequence error exists log_lost_frm contains the number of times the token ring adapter while in the transmit stripping mode failed to receive the end of a frame that it had previously transmitted log_rx_congest contains the number of times the token ring adapter while in the repeat mode recognized a frame addressed to its specific address log token_err contains the number of times a token ring adapter in an active monitoring station detected an error with the token protocol The errors may be the following A token with a nonzero priority has the monitor count bit equal to one indicating a circulating high priority token A frame has the monitor cou
103. detected a discrepancy in the circuit group record ccg Action Modify the configuration bad ip address ip address Meaning The IP address i p address probably a broadcast address is invalid Action Modify the configuration to repair ip address bad mask mask ip address Meaning IP has detected a discrepancy between an IP address i p address and its associated subnet mask mask Action Modify the configuration to repair i p address and or mask bad mtu nn on circuit cct Meaning Circuit cct will not support the minimum IP Maximum Transmission Unit MTU 17 86 Event Log M essages ip IP Event Messages Bad rx bcast bcaston ip address 4T Meaning The configuration contains an invalid receive broadcast address on the interface designated by i p address Action No action is required as IP will use a default broadcast address Note that the Configuration Editor guards against this error This message should be seen only if a user has attempted to modify the configuration without using the Configuration Editor s pess Ww 601 344 Bad tx bcast bcaston ip address Meaning The configuration contains an invalid transmit broadcast address on the interface designated by i p address Action No action is required as IP will use a default broadcast address Note that the Configuration Editor guards against this error This message should be seen only if a user has attempted to modify the config
104. following Function Display the value of a branch of MIB variables from a remote HP router page 16 49 Display the value of an individual MIB variable from a remote HP router page 16 50 These commands are described below They display their output on the console screen To output the display to a printer or file instead of the console screen place the command syntax as shown below for each command within the Print command described on page 16 19 Using the Network Control Language Accessing a Remote Management Information Base Rgetmw Displaying the Values of a Remote Variable Class Use NCL s Rgetmw command to display the values of the variables in a branch of the enterprise specific section of the MIB of aremote HP or Wellfleet router Syntax rgetmw identifier X X X X community identifier is the object identification path identifying a branch of MIB variables Do not include the path for the private enterprise 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 1 1 since itis assumed X X X X optional is the IP address of the remote router in dotted decimal notation If you omit this field an IP address on the local router would be used community optional is the name of the SNMP community that grants access to that node If you omit the name public is used If you include a name the IP address must also be included 9T spuewuop TON 16 49 Using the Network Control Language Accessing a Remote Management Information
105. following a PPP the industry standard Point to Point Protocol page 18 35 a Frame Relay page 18 22 bad_frames rx contains the aggregate number of erroneous frames received by circuit cct cable type contains a code indicating the type of cable detected on the port for circuit cct as follows 0 loopback hood 4 RS 232 V 24 V 28 cable 1 V 35 cable 5 n a 2 RS 422 449 V 36 cable 6 n a 3 X 21 cable 7 nocable dis ret_rx contains the number of frames received by circuit cct that were later returned by the data link service DLS software Within the router software architecture DLS resides between the driver soft ware and the application software It performs such services as Management Information Base Variables cct Circuits Information Base multiplexing demultiplexing and encapsulation deencapsulation DLS can return frames for numerous reasons many of which are application specific for example because of unknown internal service access points ISAPs because of user specified filtering requirements contained within the configuration or because of lack of enabled entities for example IP IPX etc dis_ring_cnt contains the current number of packets received by circuit cct and transferred to the data link service DLS receiver queue frames_rx_ok contains the number of frames received without error by circuit cct ST frames _rx_per_sec contains the number of frames that this circuit has received in the last
106. from the network indicating forward congestion since the circuit was created ST seg UOnBUWOjU quowumbeuep 18 27 18 28 Management Information Base Variables cct Circuits Information Base exmib fr ccttbl entry fecn cct ddd 36 26 2 1 4 cct ddd where cct indicates the circuit and ddd indicates the dlci f_rcvd Is the number of frames received over this circuit since it was created exmib fr ccttbl entry f_rcvd cct ddd 36 26 2 1 8 cct ddd where cct indicates the circuit and ddd indicates the dlci f_sent s the number of frames sent from this circuit since it was created exmib fr ccttbl entry f_sent cct ddd 36 26 2 1 6 cct ddd where cct indicates the circuit and ddd indicates the dlci index Is the circuit corresponding to the Frame Relay interface exmib fr ccttbl entry index cct 36 26 2 1 1 cct where cct indicates the circuit change Is the value of sysUpTime when last there was a change in the circuit state exmib fr ccttbl entry change cct ddd 36 26 2 1 11 cct ddd where cct indicates the circuit and ddd indicates the dlci octets Indicates the number of octets received over this circuit since it was created exmib fr ccttbl entry o_rcvd cct ddd 36 26 1 9 cct ddd where cct indicates the circuit and ddd indicates the dlci Management Information Base Variables cct Circuits Information Base o_sent Indicates the number of octets sent from this circuit since it was created exmib fr
107. ge 7 37 0 TQAseLsdbAge 9 11 0 TQIntLsa 10 19 0 TQLsa 12 27 0 9T spuewuop TON 16 81 Using the Network Control Language Managing the Open Shortest Path First Protocol The fields in the table are as follows a Type is the type of timer as follows TQAck TQAseLsa TQAseLsdbAge TQHelloTimer TQIntLsa TQIntLsdbAge TQLsaLock TQRetrans TQSumLsa TQSumLsdbAge Used to send delayed acknowledge messages When the Dijkstra algorithm will be run on external link state advertisements recalculating the shortest path first tree using the external link information When the external link state database entries will be aged recalculating the database checksum and checking the age of the entries When a Hello packet will be sent When the Dijkstra algorithm will be run on internal link state advertisements recalculating the shortest path first tree with respect to the internal areas and nets When the internal link state database entries will be aged recalculating the database checksum and checking the age of the entries When a link state advertisement could be sent after the minimum allowable time between successive advertisements Used to send pending retransmissions of unanswered OSPF packets When the Dijkstra algorithm will be run on summary link state advertisements recalculating the shortest path first tree using summary link information When the summary link state database entries wil
108. has been made to the configuration file by using the Configuration Editor enable entity failed Meaning The manager could not enable entity which can be any item listed for the preceding message Action Contact your HP support provider 17 103 4T 607 344 s pess Ww Event Log Messages mgr M anager Event Messages cct circuit name reserved as a backup circuit Meaning The specified circuit was not auto enabled because it was reserved as a backup circuit No memory for session startup Meaning There is insufficient memory available for the indicated activity Action Contact your HP Service provider No memory for temp session Meaning There is insufficient memory available for the indicated activity Out of message buffers Meaning There is insufficient memory available for the indicated activity Action Contact your HP Service provider passw ord s removed via Clear button Meaning The router s Clear button was detected The passwords protecting console or Telnet access to the router have been removed 17 104 Event Log M essages ospf OSPF Event Messages ospf OSPF Event Messages 4T These event messages are generated by the system variable ospf the Open Shortest Path First internet routing protocol s pess Ww 601 343 DD Extern option mismatch Meaning The Hello external stub option specified does not match the configured option DD Nbr
109. has received an Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP Destination Unreachable message from i p address The message contains a Code field value of 0 indicating that the network designated by ip address is unreachable icmp quench from ip address Meaning IP has received an Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP source quench message from ip address 17 88 Event Log M essages ip IP Event Messages icmp redirect from ip address 4T Meaning IP has received an Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP redirect message from i p address icmp Unsolicited Echo Reply from X X X X s pess Ww 601 343 Meaning Indicates a reply from IP address X X X X to a Ping that was not sent by the local router A packet may have been duplicated on the network Action If this message occurs frequently investigate the source of the replies for operating problems insufficient memory Meaning The router cannot provide sufficient memory for IP operations invalid operation for state Meaning IP received an otherwise valid command that was inappropriate to its current state netw ork disabled on ip address Meaning IP has disabled the network interface i p address ip Source Routing not enabled Token Ring only Meaning The Source Route parameter is set to Yes but the IP network interface does not use a token ring End node source routing is thus not enabled for this IP interface Action Modify t
110. high Dest Net low Dest Node high Dest Node low Dest Sock high Dest Sock low Effect List Members List Name Network Lists Network Network Max Network Min Network high Node high Node ID Node Lists Node low Precedence Probe Routing Table Size Seed Router Socket Lists Socket high Continued on Next Page 12 3 CL Jle1 ddy SJIPUL Ld 12 4 AppleTalk Parameters Overview Page AppleTalk Parameters Continued From Previous Page 12 15 12 15 12 15 12 16 12 16 12 17 12 17 12 17 12 18 12 18 12 18 Socket low Source Net high Source Net low Source Node high Source Node low Source Route Token Ring Source Sock high Source Sock low Zone Filter Zone Name Zone Table Size Action Accept Accept and Log Drop Drop and Log Auto Enable No Yes AppleTalk Parameters Parameters and Options Parameters and Options Determines the filtering action taken when the contents of a AppleTalk datagram field meet the criteria established for a filter rule Default Drop and Log Relays a datagram meeting the filter rule Relays a datagram meeting the filter rule and records the action in the event log Discards a datagram meeting the filter rule and records the action in the event log Discards a datagram meeting the filter rule Note The Drop and Log and Accept and Log actions should be used judiciously The processing
111. in this IP packet was incorrect or unknown IP Bad OSPF pkt type Meaning An incoming OSPF packet contains an unknown or incorrect OSPF packet type IP Pktsrc my IP addr Meaning The source address in the IP packet was found to be the same as the address configured for the OSPF entity 17 106 Event Log M essages ospf OSPF Event Messages LS Req Bad pkt 4T Meaning OSPF has received a bad link state request LS Req Empty request s pess Ww 601 344 Meaning OSPF has received an empty link state update request LS Req Nbr state low Meaning The state of a neighbor sending a link state request is too low to honor That is the router will drop the Ls Req and Ls U pdate packets from the neighbor whose state is below Exchange in the following list Full Loading Exchange Exch Start 2 Way Init Attempt Down LS Req Unknown nbr Meaning An unknown neighbor has sent a link state request to the OSPF entity LS Update Bad LS chksum Meaning The checksum calculated for the contents of this incoming link state update packet does not agree with the specified value LS Update less recent rx Meaning The OSPF entity has received a link state advertisement that is less recent than the current internal copy 17 107 Event Log Messages ospf OSPF Event Messages LS Update Nbr state low Meaning The OSPF entity has received a link state update from a neighbor ina state t
112. list to establish the upper and lower range of IPX destination network numbers S19 2UWIe1ed 030 01d Xdi For additional information refer to Dest Network low later in this chapter For more information about Network lists refer to Network Number high and Network Number low later in this chapter Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering an IPX packet based on the contents of its destination network field Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter IPX destination networks Enter the IPX network number in this field and leave the Dest Network high field blank if you are filtering a single IPX destination network 11 7 Dest Socket high Options Dest Socket low 11 8 Options IPX Protocol Parameters Parameters and Options Enter the lowest IPX network number in this field and enter the highest network number in the Dest Network high field if you are filtering a range of IPX destination networks Enter the Network list name in this field and leave the Dest Network high field blank if you want to use a Network list to establish the upper and lower range of destination network numbers For additional information refer to Dest Network high earlier in this chapter For more information about Network lists refer to Network Number high and Network Number low later in this chapter Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering an IPX pa
113. local Meaning The router has received and processed a disconnect request from the remote end Remote reset to local Meaning The router has received a reset request from the remote end remote station has logged in to Server Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit the remote station has successfully logged in to the system remote station rejected ATCP Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit the remote station has rejected the AppleTalk control Protocol ATCP No AppleTalk traffic may occur over the link until the remote station is ready to accept the AT Control Protocol remote station rejected BNCP Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit the remote station has rejected the Bridge Network Control Protocol BNCP No bridge traffic may occur over the link until the remote station is ready to accept the Bridge Network Control Protocol remote station rejected DRSCP Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit the remote station has rejected the DE Cnet Routing Service Control Protocol DRSCP No DRS traffic may occur over the link until the remote station is ready to accept the DRS Control Protocol Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit the remote station has rejected the Bridge Network Control Protocol BNCP No bridge traffic may occur over the link until the remote station is ready to accept the Bridge Network Control Protocol 17 46 Event Log M essages cct Circuit Event Messages remote stati
114. lower boundary of the range for filtering an Ethernet frame based on the contents of its Ethernet Type field Enter the Ethernet Type in this field and leave the Type high field blank if you are filtering a single Ethernet Type Enter the lowest Ethernet Type value in this field and enter the highest Ethernet Type in the Type high field if you are filtering a range of Ethernet Types 9 For more information refer to Type high above To learn how to apply an Ethernet Type list to a filter refer to Ethernet Type low and Ethernet Type high earlier in this chapter sSI JULIed pug 6 23 Internet Protocol IP Parameters Internet Protocol IP Parameters Overview Overview DEFAULT_CONFIG Configuration Editor System 1 Software 1 Lines 4 Circuits 4 Circuit Groups 4 Bridge 1 DoD Internet Router DECNET IV Routing Service SNMP Sessions B 10 Xerox Routing Service B 11 IPX Routing Service 12 AppleTalk Router 9 13 X 25 Network Service 9 14 V 25 bis Network Mapping B woONOM AUN Ee Enter Selection B for Previous Menu Figure 7 1 Access to IP Parameters IP Parameters Enable use of the Internet TCP IP protocol suite for establishing routing for IP datagrams from a source to a destination over one of several available paths Page IP Parameter 7 6 Action 7 6 Action on circuit group enable disable 7 6 Acquisi
115. lt low Icn yy using yy for both Meaning Action The high LCN logical channel number is lower than the low LCN configured for an X 25 circuit The value given by the low LCN yy will be used for both LCNs soBessop 6o7 WweAW Modify the configuration to configure Low LCN and High LCN parameters correctly high Icn low Icn gt max Icns xx using yy for high Icn Meaning Action The difference between the high LCN logical channel number and low LCN values is greater than the maximum number of LCNs allowed for the circuit The high LCN will be adjusted downward to yy to allow the maximum number of LCNs to be configured Modify the configuration to configure Low LCN and High LCN parameters correctly high LCN XXXX gt 4095 now High YYYY amp Low ZZZZ Meaning Action The High LCN value XXXX entered by the user exceeded the maximum value allowed of 4095 The High LCN value has been adjusted downwards to YYYY and the Low LCN value has been adjusted downwards to ZZZZ to bring them within legal range For example if the Low LCN value entered bythe user was 5000 and the High LCN value entered by the user was 5010 then the Low LCN and High LCN values are adjusted downwards to 4085 and 4095 respectively Thus the actual number of LCNs desired by the user in this case 5010 5000 10 remains unchanged 4095 4085 10 Modify the configuration ioctl error xx occurred in state y
116. module and insert a new port module or re enable the existing port module using the NCL Enable command Port Module slot slot critical failure detected Meaning The router software has detected a critical failure on the port module in the specified slot A crash record will be uploaded possibly indicating the reason for the failure If the system has Auto Enable set the port module will automatically be restarted Port Module slot slot presence mismatch Meaning Action The router software has detected an improperly seated port module The port module is not completely inserted into the backplane which may lead to unexpected router behavior Verify that the port module is properly inserted and reboot if the module must be re inserted Port module slot slot removed and not re installed Meaning Action 17 114 The router software has detected an inconsistency in the presence of a port module in the indicated slot after a reset Cycle the power to the router Event Log M essages pm Port Module Manager Event M essages Port Module slot slot state state incorrect for enable 4T Meaning The port module in the specified slot is not in the correct state to be enabled It may already be enabled Action Attempt to disable the port module or perform a hot swap s pess Ww 601 u44 Port M odule slot slot state mismatch Meaning The router software has detected an inconsistency with sta
117. needs phone to connect Meaning Action The V 25 bis circuit has been configured to be enabled when the circuit first comes up However no outbound phone number has been configured Therefore this circuit will only be able to connect when a call comes in No user action is required unless you did not intend to configure the circuit this way Connection established Meaning The connection with the remote side has been established Connection establishment timeout Meaning Action An outbound connection attempt has failed and used up its retry count or an inbound connection has timed out The circuit will be brought down New inbound connections will be allowed However oubound connections will not be allowed until the retry delay time has expired Increase the retry count and or connection time as necessary Also check other event messages to see if other events occured that caused the failure Connection inactivity timeout Meaning Action A live connection has timed out due to inactivity The connection will be closed and reopened when data is available or when an incoming call arrives No action required unless you want the connection to remain active longer If so then increase the inactivity time or change the connection to enable on cct up Connection retry in progress Meaning 17 24 An outbound connection attempt has failed for reasons other than a timeout The retry count ha
118. number of 802 2 Logical Link Control LLC XID Exchange Identification commands received by circuit cct XID commands request LLC service type and receive window capacity data from a remote host The value contained in this variable should equal the value contained in xid_rsp_tx xid_cmd_tx contains the number of 802 2 Logical Link Control LLC XID commands issued on circuit cct The value contained in this vari able should be 0 as should the value of xid_rsp_rx Management Information Base Variables dis Data Link Services Information Base xid_rsp_rx contains the number of 802 2 Logical Link Control LLC XID responses received by circuit cct Receipt of an XID response requires the previous transmission of an XID command The value contained in this variable should be 0 as should the value of xid_cmd_tx xid_rsp_tx contains the number of 802 2 Logical Link Control LLC XID responses issued on circuit cct XID responses reply to XID commands and provide LLC service type and receive window capacity data The value contained in this variable should equal the value contained in xid_cmd_rx 18 57 ST seg UOnBUWOjU quowumbeuep 18 58 M anagement Information Base Variables drs DECnet Circuit Group Information Base drs DE Cnet Circuit Group Information Base The DECnet routing service drs information base contains variables that describe transmission and reception activities across each DECnet circuit group it
119. object field of the event message successfully initialized or has been enabled with the NCL s Enable command Error in Configuration record Meaning The established configuration for the frame relay circuit is in error Action Modify the configuration to establish a valid frame relay circuit Excessive collisions Meaning The LAN circuit named in the object field of the event message has dropped a frame after it has detected collisions on 16 successive transmission attempts Action If message occurs frequently investigate the causes of LAN congestion Excessive errors interface disabled Meaning For the indicated frame relay circuit when the DTE receives a designated number of errors within a designated number of events the 17 30 Event Log M essages cct Circuit Event Messages interface is considered unstable and is taken down This message indicates that this situation has occurred 4T Free pkt buffs available V 25 bis clipping disabled Meaning The the backlog has been relieved Packet buffers can again be queued on V 25 bis circuits as necessary s pess Ww 601 344 Free pkt buffs low V 25 bis clipping enabled Meaning The amount of memory used for packets is low The router will drop some of the oldest packets queued on V 25 bis mapped circuits that are waiting to be established Action This should only happen if many IP mapped circuits are waiting to come up If this only occurs infreq
120. octet 5 of the same packet The values are listed in tables 17 2 and table 17 3 at the end of this X 25 section call established on svc Meaning A call has been properly established on point to point virtual circuit svc A call is established by a call request incoming call call accepted or call connected packet sequence call fail on cct C CAUSE D DIAGNOSTIC Meaning The call made on virtual circuit cct has failed C Cause contains the decimal contents of the Cause field octet 4 of the supervisory header of the packet that failed D Diagnostic contains the decimal contents of the Diagnostic Code field octet 5 of the same packet The values are listed in tables 17 2 and table 17 3 at the end of this X 25 section 17 136 Event Log M essages X 25 Event Messages clr cct ip address C mm D nn 4T Meaning An established DDN or PDN call to the remote host or gateway identified by ip address has been cleared cct identifies the X 25 DDN or PDN circuit and identifies the logical connection number C mm contains the decimal contents of the Cause field octet 4 of the supervisory header of the packet that cleared the call D nn contains the decimal contents of the Diagnostic Code field octet 5 of the same packet The values are listed in tables 17 2 and table 17 3 at the end of this X 25 section s pess Ww 607 344 clr call from DTE x121 address address not found Meaning The incomin
121. of Internet standard M IB variables page 16 43 Display the MIB IP routing table page 16 45 Display the value of an individual Internet standard M IB variable page 16 47 These commands are described below They display their output on the console screen To output the display to a printer or file instead of the console screen place the command syntax as shown below for each command within the Print command described on page 16 19 Using the Network Control Language Accessing the Internet Management Information Base Rgeta Displaying the MIB IP Address Translation Table Use NCL s Rgeta command to format and display the Internet MIB IP address translation ARP table also termed the ARP cache table for a local or a remote network node Syntax rgeta X X X X community X X X X optional is the IP address of the local or remote node in dotted decimal notation If you omit this field an IP address on the local router will be used community optional is the name of the SNMP community that grants access to that node If you omit the name public is used If you include a name the IP address must also be included Example rgeta Displays the Internet MIB IP address translation ARP table for this router IP Addr Physical Addr IF 192 32 1 68 080009297080 1 192 32 1 69 0800090b8ce5 1 192 32 2 74 0800094478a4 2 192 32 3 01 080009a4005e 3 The fields in the table are as follows IP Add
122. of the circuit seg UONBUWOjU quowumbeuep rr_rx contains the number of RR Receiver Ready packets received by X 25 circuit cct An RR packet either indicates the readiness to receive DATA packets or acknowledges the receipt of DATA packets rr_tx contains the number of RR Receiver Ready packets transmit ted by X 25 circuit cct An RR packet either indicates the readiness to receive DATA packets or acknowledges the receipt of DATA packets t20_tmout contains the number of T20 timer expirations The T20 timer starts when a RESTART REQUEST packet is issued and termi nates when a RESTART CONFIRMATION packet is received If a RE START CONFIRMATION is not received within T20 seconds typically 180 seconds the RESTART REQUEST is reissued t21_tmout contains the number of T21 timer expirations The T21 timer starts when a CALL REQUEST packet is issued and terminates when a CALL CONNECTED CLEAR INDICATION or INCOMING CALL packet is received If such a packet is not received within T21 seconds typically 200 seconds a CLEAR REQUEST is issued 18 111 18 112 M anagement Information Base Variables x25 X 25 Information Base t22_tmout contains the number of T22 timer expirations The T22 timer starts when a RESET REQUEST packet is issued and terminates when a RESET CONFIRMATION or RESET INDICATION packet is received If such a packet is not received within T22 seconds typically 180 sec onds the RESET REQUEST is reissued
123. of traffic in other routing protocols Any packet types for which there is no level specified are automatically assigned to the Normal level Incoming packets configured for Low priority have third priority for outgoing bridged transmission and have a lower priority than traffic in other routing protocols Note If you assign differing priorities to different packet types within the same circuit group then the Traffic Priority filter must be set to Normal In this case any packet type that is not assigned to have Low Priority or High Priority will have Normal priority Enables or disables TRNSB Source Route Translation Bridging on the Bridge Configuration menu TRNSB translates frames between source route bridging SRB circuit groups and transparent bridging TB circuit groups Default No Enables TRNSB Disables TRNSB Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering an Ethernet frame based on the contents of its Ethernet Type field Leave this field blank and enter the Ethernet Type value in the Type low field if you are filtering a single Ethernet Type Type low Options Bridge Parameters Parameters and Options a Enter the highest Ethernet Type in the range if you are filtering a range of Ethernet Types For more information refer to Type low below To learn how to apply an Ethernet Type filter list refer to Ethernet Type low page 6 10 and Ethernet Type high page 6 9 Sets the
124. only to a Request command or a node or operator generated initialization Neighbor ip address up polling disabled Meaning The EGP neighbor reachability algorithm has declared i p address in the up state In this state EGP allocates resources to the neighbor and responds to all commands and requests EGP is in the passive state it does not issue poll commands Neighbor ip address up polling enabled Meaning The EGP neighbor reachability algorithm has declared i p address in the up state In this state EGP allocates resources to the neighbor and responds to all commands and requests EGP is in the active state it issues poll commands 17 84 Event Log M essages egp Exterior Gateway Protocol Event Messages Source address equal to destination Meaning The configuration contains identical values for the Local Address and Remote Address parameters Action Modify the configuration to ensure the accuracy of local and remote addresses 17 85 4T s pess Ww 601 u44 Event Log Messages ip IP Event Messages ip IP Event Messages These event messages are generated by the system variable ip the DoD Internet Router arp ip address1 ip address2 Meaning IP has added a new entry learned through the Address Resolution Protocol ARP to its address translation table i p address1 is the host address i p address2 is the network interface address bad cg ccg on ip address Meaning IP has
125. or a spanning tree explorer STE frame The packet is dropped 17 49 Event Log Messages cct Circuit Event Messages SR max hops exceeded in Specifically Routed Frames Meaning The maximum number of hops for a source routed packet seven was exceeded in a specifically routed frame SRF The packet is dropped SR max RDs exceeded in explorer packet Meaning The maximum number of route descriptors RDs for a source routed packet eight was exceeded in an all routes explorer ARE frame or a spanning tree explorer STE frame The packet is dropped SR max RDs exceeded in SRF packet Meaning The maximum number of route descriptors RDs for a source routed packet eight was exceeded in a specifically routed frame SRF The packet is dropped SR out cg cg for SRF Meaning The specifically routed frame SRF is being forwarded through the same interface on which it was received This can occur if the loop detection time is configured too low to detect an ARE loop if the network is reconfiguring due to a link failure or if the router is rebooted Action Increase the Loop Detection Time parameter SR out of buffers Meaning No packet buffer was available to allocate for flooding an all routes explorer ARE frame out through an interface It could not be flooded SR possible ARE loop Meaning A possible all routes explorer ARE loop has been detected This can occur if the loop detection time is con
126. order 25 Reverse charging not available 33 Incompatible destination 41 Fast select not available 57 Ship absent Code DTE generated 129 Number busy 131 Invalid facility request 133 Network congestion 137 Out of order 139 Access barred 141 Not obtainable 145 Remote procedure error 147 Local procedure error 149 RPOA out of order 153 Reverse charging not available 161 Incompatible destination 169 Fast select not available 185 Ship absent 17 141 4T s pess Ww 601 344 17 142 Event Log Messages X 25 Event Messages Table 17 3 Diagnostic Field Codes Code Point to Point Service 0 No additional information 1 Invalid P S 2 Invalid P R 3 15 Notassigned 16 Packet type invalid 17 For state r1 18 For state r2 19 For state r3 20 For state p1 21 For state p2 22 For state p3 23 For state p4 24 For state p5 25 For state p6 26 For state p7 27 For state d1 28 For state d2 29 For state d3 30 31 Notassigned 32 Packet not allowable 33 Unidentifiable packet 34 Call on one way logical channel 35 Invalid packet type on permanent SVC 36 Packet on unassigned logical channel 37 Reject not subscribed to 38 Packet too short 39 Packet too long 40 Invalid general format identifier GFI 41 Restart or registration packet with non zero values in inappropriate bits 42 Packet type not compatible with facility 43 Unauthorized interrupt confirmation 44 Unauthorized interrupt 45 Unauthorized reject 46 47 Notassigned
127. refer to the instruction manual for your terminal adapter Default Not Used Determines how many bytes can be queued on a WAN link expressed in milliseconds based on the following equation LA lateng in ms i in bit 1000 x link speed in 9 t se9 bytes queued Default 1000 ms You can use this parameter for applications that are sensitive to response time in order to avoid connection time out periods SJIPUL Ld N41 4 19 Max Pkt Size or Maximum Packet Size Min Channels to Aggregate Min Frame Spacing 4 20 Circuit Parameters Parameters and Options Note Because this parameter uses the Clock Speed of the WAN circuit configured in the Lines configuration to calculate the maximum number of bytes queued to the WAN circuit be sure to enter the Clock Speed accurately even when an External Clock source is used During router boot sequence an event is logged to show the calculated latency cap and the parameters in effect If Max Link Latency is set to zero 0 there is no latency limit As packets are queued for transmission over the WAN circuit the router counts the number of bytes in the queued packets Before a packet is added to the queue the router checks to make sure that the number of bytes in the packet plus the current number of bytes queued does not exceed the latency cap If the sum exceeds the cap the packet is dropped When a packet is dropped the latency_tx MIB variable is
128. request is cleared the router waits Call Retry Timer secs before sending another call request to the destination Any IP datagrams received for the destination during this period are dropped by the router Circuit Name Circuit Type LAPB Closed User Group Connection ID No Yes Options X 25 Service Parameters Parameters and Options Call Retry Timer secs is activated in the event of an failed call attempt and prevents a potential thrashing situation that may occur when the IP router directs a stream of datagrams to a busy or unreachable destination With the timer enabled set at a non zero value the X 25 PDN service drops received datagrams and transmits another call request at the expiration of the timer With the timer disabled set to 0 the X 25 PDN service sends call request packets for every datagram received from the IP router until the call is accepted T S GZ X Default 60 Range 0 to 9999 sSJIPUL LLd N Accepts an ASCII character string identifying the LAPB circuit name Determines the circuit type Always set to LAPB ignore all other protocol options when configuring LAPB circuits Determines whether the lower circuit is connected to a port subscribing to CUG Closed User Group For additional information refer to Table 13 2 Default No Disables CUG security and access into or out of the router is controlled only by the X 25 features supported by the PDN subscriptio
129. required to log such events in the RAM based event log consumes CPU cycles and can result in the loss of incoming DDPs Consequently the log actions should generally be used only to record anomalous events Enables or disables the AppleTalk router when the router boots The AppleTalk specific Auto Enable parameter works in conjunction with the global Auto Enable parameter found on the Global Parameters screen in the System configuration menu When the global Auto Enable parameter is set to No the AppleTalk router is unconditionally disabled Then to enable AppleTalk routing after the router boots you will have to use the NCL Interpreter s Enable command When the global Auto Enable parameter is set to Yes the setting of the AppleTalk specific Auto Enable parameter determines whether the AppleTalk router is enabled Default Yes CL Disables the AppleTalk router if the global Auto Enable parameter is enabled Then to enable it after the router boots you must use the NCL Interpreter s Enable command meLeiddy Enables the AppleTalk router if the global Auto Enable parameter is also enabled SJIPUL Ld 12 5 AARP Mapping Table Size Checksum Cost6 Options N to Ye wn Circuit Group Name DDP Type Lists DDP Type high Options AppleTalk Parameters Parameters and Options Specifies the number of entries in the AppleTalk router s address resolution mapping table Estimate the number o
130. router and dropped Note Using the Statistic Screens In the factory default state the Circuit Per Second Bridge and Buffers Usage statistics are available The individual routing service statistics are available when the corresponding routing services are enabled by the Protocol parameter in the Software menu in your router s configuration All of the above listed statistics are available in all Hewlett Packard routers that have the corresponding routing services To verify the routing services available in your router refer to the release notes you received with the router or the most recent software update ST SONSNEIS SU823 19S 15 3 15 4 Using the Statistic Screens AppleTalk Router Statistics Screen AppleTalk Router Statistics Screen The AppleTalk Router Statistics screen is available if the AppleTalk routing service is enabled in your configuration This screen summarizes AppleTalk traffic volume for each circuit group To see more detailed AppleTalk statistics maintained by the router you can use the NCL Get command SAMPLE_CONFIG 6 Jan 1991 21 31 46 Appletalk Router Statistics NAME FRAMES Receive Forward Drop gt 1 etherilg B B B Z tokenig 2 2 2 3 wanig B 2 2 4 wanzg 2 B B TOTAL B B B PRESS r for reset Down Up lt to exit Figure 15 1 AppleTalk Router Statistics Screen Using the Statistic Screens AppleTalk Router Statistics Screen Categ
131. router and I O devices such as a console modem and Telnet Page Session Parameters 14 Baud Rate 1 5 Bit Char 1 5 Connection inactivity time min 1 6 Event Filter Level 1 7 Flow Control 1 7 Modem connection time sec 1 7 Modem disconnection time sec 1 8 Modem lost receive ready time msec 1 8 Parity 1 8 Session Mode 1 8 Screen Refresh Rate 1 8 Stop Bits 1 9 Terminal 1 9 Timezone 1 3 T sSJIpPUL LLd uoIss S pue jeqoj5 Auto Enable No Yes Automatic Reboot No Yes Baud Rate Speed Sense Other Options Beginning day 1 4 Global and Session Parameters Parameters and Options Parameters and Options Determines whether various system services and application modules initialize automatically when the router boots Default yes Disables all protocol specific Auto Enable parameters for all software modules and system services You will need to enable each service or software module with the NCL Network Control Language Interpreter Enable command after the router boots Conditionally enables all protocol specific Auto Enable parameters for all software modules and system services Enables or disables automatic router booting after a software crash Default No Disables automatic rebooting the router must be rebooted manually Enables automatic rebooting the router starts operation with its bridging and routing applications enabled if booting is successful
132. s rtr my rtrid Meaning The OSPF entity has detected another OSPF router with the same router identification in a database description packet DD Nbr state low Meaning OSPF has received a database description packet from a neighbor whose state is too low to honor That is the router will drop the Ls Req and Ls Update packets from the neighbor whose state is below Exchange in the following list Full Loading Exchange Exch Start 2 Way Init Attempt Down DD Unknown nbr Meaning A database description packet has been received from an unknown neighbor Hello Extern option mismatch Meaning The Hello external stub option specified does not match the configured option 17 105 Event Log Messages ospf OSPF Event Messages Hello IF dead timer mismatch Meaning The dead timer value specified in an incoming Hello packet does not match the configured value Hello IF hello timer mismatch Meaning The hello timer value specified in an incoming Hello packet does not match the configured value Hello IF mask mismatch Meaning The mask value specified in an incoming Hello packet does not match the configured value Hello Unknown Virt nbr Meaning An unknown virtual link neighbor has tried to establish an adjacency with the resident OSPF entity IP Bad IP Dest Meaning The OSPF entity received an IP packet that was not destined for it IP Bad IP proto id Meaning The protocol ID
133. second frames _tx_ok contains the number of packets transmitted without error by circuit cet This value equals the sum of highpri_tx norm pri_tx and lowpri_tx seg UONBUWUOjU quowbHeuep frames _tx_per_sec contains the number of frames that this circuit has transmitted in the last second frams_incomp_rx contains the number of incomplete frames received by circuit cet An incomplete frame is identified by failure to set the end of long frame bit in the receive message descriptor frmr_frames_rx contains the count of unnumbered FRMR Frame Reject frames received by circuit cct A FRMR frame reports an error condition The remote end of the point to point circuit transmits a FRMR frame in response to a previous command requesting an unavailable action or service Because the service or command is unavailable a FRMR frame does not request retransmission of the erroneous frame highpri_congestion contains the number of high priority packets dropped due to congestion highpri_tx contains the number of high priority packets transmitted without error 18 15 18 16 M anagement Information Base Variables cct Circuits Information Base lack_resc_error_rx contains the number of instances that circuit cct lost a frame because it could not obtain a receive buffer latency_tx contains the number of packets of all priorities dropped due to exceeding the maximum link latency configured by the user Link_SetUps contains the num
134. seconds Options 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 300 or 360 seconds 7 9 L sPULHLd dl 020 01d PUHI Default Route Listen Default Route Supply Dest IP Address DLCI Drop If Next Hop is Down Effect 7 10 No Yes No Yes No Yes Internet Protocol IP Parameters Parameters and Options Note All routers on the OSPF backbone must be configured with the same values for Hello Interval and Dead Interval Determines whether the IP router adds network and subnet default route information received in RIP updates from neighboring routers to its internal routing table Default No Prevents the router from adding received default route information to its internal routing table Allows the router to add received default route information to its internal routing table Note For Default Route Listen to be enabled RIP Listen must be set to Yes Determines whether the IP router advertises default routes in RIP updates sent to neighboring routers Default No Prevents the router from advertising network or subnet default routes Allows the router to advertise default routes Note For Default Route Supply to be enabled RIP Supply must be set to Yes Accepts the IP destination address used by the relay agent written in dotted decimal notation Specifies the Frame Relay Data Link Connection Identifier to the target host Determines the disposition of a filtered datag
135. seg UONBUWUOjU quowumbeuep 18 106 M anagement Information Base Variables x25 X 25 Information Base Circuit Frame Level bad_len_rx contains the number of supervisory FRMR Frame Reject frames received by X 25 circuit cct that contained W and X bits set to 1 This bit pattern indicates that the remote end has rejected a supervisory or unnumbered frame issued by X 25 circuit cct because the frame length was faulty bad_len_tx contains the number of supervisory FRMR Frame Reject frames transmitted by X 25 circuit cct that contained W and X bits set to 1 This bit pattern indicates that X 25 circuit cct has rejected a previously received supervisory or unnumbered frame because the frame length was faulty bad_nr_rx contains the number of supervisory FRMR Frame Reject frames received by X 25 circuit cct that contained a Z bit equal to 1 This bit pattern indicates that the remote end has rejected a frame issued by X 25 circuit cct because it contained a faulty receive sequence number bad_nr_tx contains the number of supervisory FRMR Frame Reject frames transmitted by X 25 circuit cct that contained a Z bit value equal to 1 This bit pattern indicates that X 25 circuit cct has rejected a previously received frame because the frame contained a faulty receive sequence number disc_rx contains the count of unnumbered DISC Disconnect frames received by X 25 circuit cct DISC frames terminate the DCE DTE link disc_tx contains
136. select from multiple routes to a single destination Default 16 Range 1 to 18 The TCP IP router maintains a routing pool containing information supplied by up to three routing protocols RIP EGP OSPF in addition to manually configured static routes Consequently the routing pool can contain multiple routes to the same destination By default the TCP IP router uses manually configured static and or default routes in preference to routes gathered by protocol exchanges Preference contains a numeric value within the range from 0 to 16 the higher the value the greater the preference of the route That is routes with higher values are selected used for routing by the TCP IP router in preference to routes with lower values Priority Propagate to EGP Propagate to RIP Propagate to OSPF Protocol No Yes No Yes No Yes Internet Protocol IP Parameters Parameters and Options Specifies a weighted value used in the designated router and backup designated router selection algorithm When two routers attached to the backbone both attempt to become the designated router the one with the highest Priority value takes precedence In the case of equal Priority values the router with the highest Router ID takes precedence Default 0 seconds Range 0 to 15 seconds Determines whether the static route is advertised by the EGP protocol Default Yes Prevents the EGP from advertising static routes Allows
137. slot is being self tested Selftest passed on slot slot Meaning The port module in the specified slot has completed selftest successfully slot slot HW ID and line configuration mismatch Meaning The port module inserted in the specified slot does not match the expected value and will not be initialized Action Change the configuration for the slot and reboot Uploading crash record from slot slot Meaning After detecting a critical failure on the port module the router software will upload a crash record and make an entry in the crash log You can view the crash record using the NCL Crash command 17 116 Event Log M essages ppp Point to Point Protocol ppp Point to Point Protocol 4T These event messages are generated by the PPP managed object bad configuration file soBessop 6o7 WweAW Meaning PPP detected an inconsistency in the configuration Action Modify the configuration XXX is up Meaning The PPP protocol XXX has been successfully negotiated with the peer PPP XXX is down Meaning The PPP protocol XXX has stopped communicating with the peer PPP LQM negotiaion rejected by remote station Meaning The peer PPP has rejected the LQM option Action Configure the local PPP for no LQM LQM time of zero Max Pkt Size adjusted down to XX Meaning The negotiated PPP maximum receive size MRU is larger than the router can manage Action Reconfigure peer PPP for as
138. source node field Options Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter AppleTalk source nodes a Enter the AppleTalk node identifier in this field and leave the Source Node high field blank if you are filtering a single AppleTalk source node Enter the lowest AppleTalk node identifier in this field and enter the highest node identifier in the Source Node high field if you are filtering a range of AppleTalk source nodes 12 16 Source Route Token Ring N to Ye wn Source Sock high Options Source Sock low Options AppleTalk Parameters Parameters and Options Enter the Node list name in this field and leave the Source Node high field blank if you want to use a Node list to establish the upper and lower range of source node identifiers For additional information refer to Source Node high earlier in this chapter F or more information about Node lists refer to Node high and Node low earlier in this chapter Enables or disables source routing over token ring media for the interface being defined Source route functionality allows the AppleTalk router to transmit and receive frames over a token ring network extended with source routing bridges If the router you are configuring does not have a token ring port you should always set this option to No Default No Disables source routing over token ring media Enable source routing over token ring media Sets the
139. the connection If this happens frequently check the terminal adapter s configuration DCE set DSR while waiting for CTS Meaning 17 26 While the router was waiting for the clear to send CTS line to come up the terminal adapter unexpectedly pulled up DSR This indicates that the router and terminal adapter are out of synchronization during a V 25 bis exchange The router will drop DTR and re attempt the connection if the retry count permits Event Log M essages cct Circuit Event Messages Action No user action required The router will try to re syncronize the connection If this happens frequently check the terminal adapter s configuration 4T DCE set DSR while waiting for IND Meaning While the router was waiting for an indication from the terminal adapter the adapter unexpectedly pulled up DSR This indicates that the router and adapter are out of synchronization during a V 25 bis exchange The router will drop DTR and re attempt the connection if the retry count permits soBessop 601 WweAR Action No user action required The router will try to re syncronize the connection If this happens frequently check the terminal adapter s configuration DEV CCT cct Ethernet circuit record missing Meaning Circuit is undefined Action Modify the configuration to include a circuit record for cct DEV CCT cct Ethernet line record missing Meaning The driver cannot associate circuit cct with an ex
140. the Dest Node low field if you are filtering a single DE Cnet destination node 8 a Enter the DE Cnet ID of the highest destination node in the range if you are filtering a range of DE Cnet destination nodes a Leave this field blank and enter the name of the Node list in the Dest Node low field if you want to use a Node list to establish the upper and lower range of DECnet destination nodes SJ PULLed 2 2uUd340 8 7 Dest Node low Effect 8 8 Options Don t Match Ignore DECnet Parameters Parameters and Options For additional information refer to Dest Node low later in this chapter For more information about Node lists refer to Node high and Node low later in this chapter Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering a DE Cnet packet based on the contents of its destination node field Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter DE Cnet destination nodes Enter the DECnet ID of the destination node in this field and leave the Dest Node high field blank if you are filtering a single DE Cnet destination node Enter the DECnet ID of the lowest destination node in this field and enter the DECnet ID of the highest destination node in the Dest Node high field if you are filtering a range of DECnet destination nodes Enter the Node list name in this field and leave the Dest Node high field blank if you want to use a Node list to establish the upper and lower range o
141. the Network Control Language Managing the Open Shortest Path First Protocol a State is the functional level of the interface between adjacent neighbors as follows Down Loopback Waiting Point to Point DR DR Other Backup Inoperable interface Self referential interface not attached to a network An initial packet has been sent and the interface is waiting to hear from other routers before selecting the designated router A point to point interface does not select a designated router The designated router on this interface Neither the designated nor backup designated router on this interface The backup designated router on this interface Cost lists the cost of sending a packet on the interface expressed with the link state metric DR lists the designated router selected for the attached network BDR lists the backup designated router selected for the attached network Using the Network Control Language Managing the Open Shortest Path First Protocol Ospf Lsdb Displaying the OSPF Link State Database Use NCL s Ospf Lsdb command to format and display the database OSPF of link state advertisements Syntax ospf lsdb Example LS Database Area 0 0 0 0 Type LS_ STUB 10 0 0 0 Link ID Adv Rtr 10 0 0 0 Age Len Seq Metric 236 24 0 0 The fields in the table are as follows Area lists the area ID of the link state database m Type is the type of entry in this da
142. the Routing Information Protocol RIP to exchange route information maintain routing tables and determine a path by using a distance vector algorithm Setting Global Broadcast to No effectively disables RIP which uses the global broadcast message to propagate periodic routing updates Lets the router accept the global broadcast message Determines whether the IP header or the upper level protocol header is selected when creating a user defined IP filter Default Network Selects the upper level protocol header Selects the IP header Specifies the number of seconds between the TCP IP router s transmission of OSPF Hello packets Hello packets are transmitted across each OSPF interface On broadcast interfaces they are used to elect the designated and backup designated router and to discover and maintain neighbor relationships Default 5 seconds 10 15 20 30 or 60 seconds Note All routers connected to the OSPF backbone must be configured with the same values for Hello Interval and Dead Interval Specifies the time interval in seconds between EGP Hello commands Default 60 seconds 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 and 120 seconds Sets the upper boundary range of the hexadecimal bit pattern when creating a user defined filter 7 13 L sPUeLLd dl 020 01d PUHI Internet Protocol IP Parameters Parameters and Options Options Leave this field blank and enter the bit pattern in the Low Value h
143. the Source Socket low field if you want to use a Socket list to establish the upper and lower range of IPX source socket numbers For additional information refer to Source Socket low later in this chapter F or more information about Socket lists refer to Socket high and Socket low earlier in this chapter Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering an IPX packet based on the contents of its source socket field Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter IPX source sockets Enter the IPX socket number in this field and leave the Source Socket high field blank if you are filtering a single IPX source socket a Enter the lowest IPX socket number in this field and enter the highest socket number in the Source Socket high field if you are filtering a range of IPX source sockets Enter the Socket list name in this field and leave the Source Socket high field blank if you want to use a Socket list to establish the upper and lower range of source socket numbers For additional information refer to Source Socket high earlier in this chapter For more information about Socket lists refer to Socket high and Socket low earlier in this chapter Target Net WAN SAP Period IPX Protocol Parameters Parameters and Options Identifies a specific network in an internet Sets the time interval elapsing when the IPX router transmits GSRs across any WAN link Defau
144. the transmit queue of each individual X 25 virtual circuit If the value specified by Max Queue Size is exceeded the router drops the oldest packet s in the transmit queue Default 10 Range 1 to 999 sSJIPUL LLd N S SZ X Sets the minimum number of flag sequences prefixed to an X 25 packet As is the HDLC packet an X 25 frame is prefixed by a variable number of 8 bit flag sequences and is terminated by a single instance of the same flag Therefore the number of flags transmitted between sequential frames is equal to the constant 1 the trailing flag plus the variable number of leading flags After determining the minimum number of flags to prefix to each frame reduce this number by 1 to account for the terminating flag Default 2 Range 2 to 62 even values only Sets the minimum period of circuit inactivity no IP datagrams sent to or received from IP Address before a circuit can be cleared and reused for a call to another destination A value of 0 implying an infinite idle time prevents a connection to IP Address from ever being cleared once such a connection is established Default 10 seconds Range 0 to 9999 Sets the maximum number of bytes in a packet delivered to the X 25 PDN service from an upper level redirecting protocol It facilitates X 25 PDN service if the remote end of the virtual circuit requires a specific data packet length Allowable values are in the range up to 1600 bytes the largest pack
145. this case the router must relearn them You may want to increase the F orwarding Table Size parameter in the bridge configuration SR max RDs exceeded in explorer frame Meaning The router has received a source route explorer frame STE ARE or SRF that is addressed to the router and there are more than eight routing descriptors in the packet The node that generated the packet is in violation of the source routing protocol SR Rif_table out of space Meaning Action The table that stores RIFs for hop count reduction and translational bridging is full The router uses a Least Recently U sed policy to replace entries in this table so no connectivity is lost The replacement of entries may only affect the forwarding performance to those nodes who have been replaced In this case the router must relearn them You may want to increase the F orwarding Table Size parameter in the bridge configuration 17 73 Event Log Messages drs DECnet Event Messages drs DE Cnet Event Messages These event messages are generated by the system variable drs the DECnet routing service Adj Down CG ccg Bad Pkt Adj aa nnnn Meaning An adjacent node accessible through circuit group ccg whose area and node address is aa nnnn is declared down because the node transmitted an erroneous packet Adj Down CG ccg Chksum error Adj aa nnnn Meaning An adjacent node accessible through circuit group ccg whose area an
146. to the frame Default 31 Range 1 to 31 s79 SwWIe1ed 2 2uUd340 8 11 Remote Area Remote Node Remote WAN Address Router Priority Source Area high Options Source Area low Options 8 12 DECnet Parameters Parameters and Options Note In the event of two filters with equal precedence the first configured filter takes precedence over the second filter Identifies the area address of the remote target Default 63 Range 1 to 63 Identifies the node address of the remote target Default 1023 Range 1 to 1023 Identifies the protocol address of the remote target Enter the remote target s X 25 frame relay or SMDS address Determines the designated router on a LAN segment The router with the highest priority becomes the designated router If more than one router shares the same priority the router with the highest node number becomes the designated router Default 64 Range 1 to 127 Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering a DE Cnet packet based on the contents of its source area field Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter DE Cnet packets based on the source area field Leave this field blank and enter the DE Cnet ID of the source area in the Source Area low field if you are filtering a single DE Cnet source area Enter the DECnet ID of the highest source area in the range if you are filtering a range of DECnet source areas Leave this field blank an
147. until the next time the bridge task runs SR TF forward_ring full Meaning The forward_ring data structure used to contain outgoing source routed packets that have been filtered through traffic filters is full No other source routed packets that need to be filtered will be sent out until the next time the bridge task runs Status msg polling recovery Meaning The network is now responding to the status enquiry messages within the given timeout period After three consecutive status enquiry status message exchanges this message is displayed to indicate that the system is in sync Token cable connection fault Meaning 17 52 The token ring interface has detected a faulty cable connection Event Log M essages cct Circuit Event Messages Action Check for a loose or disconnected cable and verify other hardware 4T Token SRA Programming Failure Meaning The token ring device failed SRA programming indicating a possible hardware failure Source route bridging will not function properly Action Contact your Hewlett Packard support provider soBessop 6o7 WweAW too many bytes lost link unreliable Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit the number of bytes lost either by the system or by the remote station exceeded the allowed number of lost bytes as determined using the Desired Link Quality parameter All Network Control Protocols will be brought down by the system The system will continue t
148. upper boundary of the range for filtering a datagram based on the contents of its source socket field Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter AppleTalk source sockets Leave this field blank and enter the AppleTalk socket number in the Source Sock low field if you are filtering a single AppleTalk source socket Enter the highest AppleTalk socket number in the range if you are filtering a range of AppleTalk source sockets Leave this field blank and enter the name of the Socket list in the Source Sock low field if you want to use a Socket list to establish the upper and lower range of AppleTalk source socket numbers For additional information refer to Source Sock low later in this chapter For more information about Socket lists refer to Socket high and Socket low earlier in this chapter cL Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering a datagram based on the contents of its source socket field Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter AppleTalk source sockets meLeiddy s73 SuIeled Enter the AppleTalk socket number in this field and leave the Source Sock high field blank if you are filtering a single AppleTalk source socket 12 17 Zone Filter Zone Name Zone Table Size 12 18 Yes No AppleTalk Parameters Parameters and Options Enter the lowest AppleTalk socket number in this field and enter the highest socket number in the Source Sock hi
149. value other than 0 0 0 0 the Stub Area parameter is displayed Determines the initial state of the IP router This P specific Auto Enable parameter works in conjunction with the global Auto Enable parameter found on the Global Parameters screen in the System configuration menu to enable or disable the IP routing protocol when the router boots When the global Auto Enable parameter is set to No the IP router like all other applications is unconditionally disabled When the global Auto Enable parameter is set to Yes the setting of the IP specific Auto Enable parameter determines whether the IP router is automatically enabled Default Yes No IP routing is disabled Then to enable it after the router boots use the NCL Interpreter s Enable command Yes IP routing is automatically enabled if the global Auto Enable parameter is also enabled Identifies the circuit group associated with the network interface Sets the number of seconds TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol waits before relinquishing resources after it successfully completes a file transfer Default 25 Name of the circuit group whose status enabled or disabled determines when to implement or drop the conditional static route Number of router hops that a datagram traverses before the destination is reached not counting this router Range 1 to 99 hops Specifics the number of seconds before a silent router is declared down Default 20
150. virtual circuits Established calls are indicated by event log entries that take the following form call cct_name ip_addr where cct_name is the name of the X 25 DDN or PDN circuit ip_addr is the dotted decimal IP address of the remote device is the logical connection number 18 113 18 114 M anagement Information Base Variables x25 X 25 Information Base After verifying that a call has been established scan the log to ensure that the call and switched virtual circuit is still active has not been cleared Cleared calls are indicated by an event log entry that takes the following format clr cct_name ip_addr 4C nn D nn where cct_name is the name of the X 25 DDN or PDN circuit ip_addr is the dotted decimal IP address of the remote device is the logical connection number C nn is the encoded clearing cause D nn is encoded diagnostic information To display all virtual circuit variables for an established DDN or PDN virtual circuit enter the following at the NCL prompt x25 cct_name ipaddr where x25 is the X 25 managed object cct_name ip_addr is taken from the event log is the wildcard character To display a single virtual circuit variable for an established DDN or PDN virtual circuit enter the following at the NCL prompt x25 cctip_addr code where x25 is the X 25 managed object cct_name ip_addr is taken from the event log code is the pathname code for the variable See the
151. while waiting for a directory memory access bus operation to complete adpt_dma_wr_abort contains the number of times the token ring adapter aborted a direct memory access write operation This could be caused by excessive parity errors excessive bus errors or the expira tion of a 10 second timer while waiting for a directory memory access bus operation to complete adpt_parity_err contains the number of times the token ring adapter detected a bus parity error on the adapter s internal bus adpt_ring_underrun contains the number of times the token ring adapter detected an internal direct memory access underrun when receiving from the ring frames _rx_per_sec contains the number of frames that this circuit has received in the last second frames _tx_per_sec contains the number of frames that this circuit has received and transmitted in the last second log_ari_fci_err contains the number of times the token ring adapter detected that is upstream neighbor was unable to set the address recog nized indicator or frame copied indicator bit of received frames log burst_err contains the number of times the token ring adapter detected the absence of signal transitions for five half bit times between the starting and ending delimiters or between the ending and starting delimiters ables Base ST seg UOnBUWOjU quowumbeuep 18 37 18 38 M anagement Information Base Variables cct Circuits Information Base log dma_bus err
152. 0 4 300 0 3 500 0 2 999 0 1 0 0 DLCI Encoding Length Sets the length of the Frame Relay address field Default Two Bytes Four Bytes Sets the DCLI encoding length for four byte extended address fields Use this value only if your Frame Relay service supports extended four byte address fields Three Bytes Sets three byte extended address fields Use this value only if your Frame Relay services supports extended three byte address fields Three Control Sets Q922 encoding not yet completely standardized While this value can be selected with the Q922 encoding type the control field is undefined Two Bytes Sets the length of the address field to two bytes Two Control Sets Two Control Q922 encoding not yet completely standardized While this value can be selected with the Q922 encoding type the control field is undefined DLCI Encoding Type Selects the DLCI encoding format Default Q 922 Q921 Q 921 is a virtually obsolete method of setting a 13 bit DLCI within a two byte address field It drops the FECN BECN and DE bits from the second byte of the address field Select DLCI encoding on the basis of the encoding format used by the attached Frame Relay DCE device V Q922 Selects DLCI encoding as described in CCITT draft standard Q 922 This standard specifies a 10 bit DLCI While the DLCI is most often contained within a two byte address field the Q 922 standard allows for three byte and four byte address fields Rega
153. 1 WweAW Event Log Messages at AppleTalk Event Messages Invalid AARP event X AARP state Y for cg ccg Meaning The circuit group specified by ccgwas in AARP state Y and thus unable to process AARP event X Possible values for X and Y ee Event Code 0 xmit AARP PROBE 1 xmit AARP REQUEST 2 rcv AARP PROBE 3 rcv AARP REQUEST 4 rcv AARP RESPONSE 5 timer expired cancelled Ea AARP State Code 0 circuit group disabled 1 circuit group xmit AARP PROBE 2 circuit group xmit AARP REQUEST 3 circuit group enabled Action None No AppleTalk circuit group configured Meaning You have not configured an AppleTalk circuit group Action Configure an AppleTalk circuit group No AppleTalk Record configured Meaning The configuration does not include an AppleTalk record Action Configure the AppleTalk router 17 12 Event Log M essages at AppleTalk Event Messages No AppleTalk softw are configured 4T Meaning The portion of the configuration file that contains AppleTalk configuration data is faulty One or more of the following required records may be missing AppleTalk record configuration summary record entity records or boot load record soBessop 6o7 WweAR Action Verify and reconfigure the AppleTalk router No circuit group recorded for cg number X Meaning The configuration does not contain a valid circuit group record for the circuit group identified by X where X is the sy
154. 16 24 Using the Network Control Language Managing Router Operations and Resources Stats Invoking the Statistics Screens Use NCL s Stats command to switch to the Statistics Screen menu as if you had chosen Statistics Screen Menu from the Main menu as described in chapter 1 The function of Stats is to allow you to view the statistics screens without leaving NCL Refer to chapter 15 for information on how to interpret the contents of statistics menus For information on how to operate the statistics screens refer to the User s Guide When you choose the Statistics Screens menu item Return to Previous Menu you will return to the NCL prompt rather than to the Main menu Syntax stats Using the Network Control Language Managing Router Operations and Resources Summary Displaying the Quick Configuration Summary Use NCL s Summary command to display the summary table that Quick Configuration presents at the top of the screen You remain in NCL you do not actually go into Quick Configuration as selected from the Main menu To output the display to a printer or file instead of your console screen see the Print command on page 16 19 Syntax summary For control of the Summary screen e Use the e E 4 and 7 to move in the Summary screen e Use the Space bar or to sequence through the screen and return to the NCL prompt e Use the key combination to exit from any part of the Summary screen and return to
155. 16 51 Accessing Bridging and Routing Tables 16 54 Managing the Open Shortest Path First Protocol 16 72 Blocking and Unblocking Spanning Tree Explorer Frames 16 84 Controlling IP Mapped Circuits for V 25 biS 16 87 Using TFTP To Transfer Operating Code Configuration and NCL Display 4402s meaa e a a a 16 93 Using ZModem to Transfer Configuration and NCL Display 16 98 E vent Log Messages How To Use This Chapter aaan aaa a 17 2 at AppleTalk Event Messages ooa a 17 4 boot Boot Event Messages 0000s 17 15 bootp Network Boot Protocol Event Messages 17 16 cct Circuit Event Messages aoaaa aaa 17 18 10 18 dev Device Event Messages 0 0000 eee ee 17 60 dis Data Link Services Event Messages 04 17 69 drs DE Cnet Event Messages 0 00000 17 74 egp Exterior Gateway Protocol EventMessages 17 79 ip IP Event Messages nuaa ee 17 86 ipx IPX Router Event Messages 0 00000 17 92 Ib Bridge Event Messages 2 0 00 eee eee 17 96 line Lines Event Messages 2 2 0 0000 pee eee 17 101 mgr Manager Event Messages 0 00 a 17 103 ospf OSPF Event Messages 0 0000 17 105 pm Port Module Manager Event Messages 17 112 ppp Point to Point Protocol 0 0 00004 17 117 rok Router Operating Kernel Event Messages 17 120 SMDS Event Messages
156. 16 94 Using the Network Control Language Using TFTP To Transfer Operating Code Configuration and NCL Display Before operating code is downloaded you will be asked to enter the current manager password if one exists and to verify that you want the operating system changed see page 16 15 If download ing operating code fails the router will be operating but most of the protocols and circuits will be disabled only the circuit used for TFTP will remain enabled After the operating code is success fully downloaded the router burns the new code into ROM which may take five minutes and then automatically reboots After downloading a new configuration is completed you may modify it You must reboot the router for the new configuration to take effect F put Storing the Configuration Operating Code or Display Command Output Use NCL s Fput command to copy router operating code the router s configuration or the output of an NCL display command Help Time and Date with no arguments Summary Browse Config Crash Stamp Log List Get or a command beginning with Rget to a file on a remote host or HP Router CR on an attached network using TFTP You cannot use Fput to put the operating code or configuration on another router F get must be used from the other router The local router must have IP routing and TFTP configured See the TFTP security notes on page 16 94 Syntax fput X X X X os filename transfer router opera
157. 200 and 400 routers the default circuit name includes the circuit type and related port number 1 4 For example ETHER1 The first 802 3 E thernet port configured WAN2 The second WAN port configured In HP Series 600 routers the default circuit name also includes the number of the slot in which the associated port is installed For example ETHER21 The first 802 3 Ethernet port in the second slot WAN 32 The second WAN port in the third slot Note You can change a circuit name to nearly any character sequence you want but it is recommended that you use names that identify the associated slot if any and port numbers for each circuit Bridge Parameters Bridge Parameters Overview Overview DEFAULT_CONFIG Configuration Editor System 1 Software 1 Lines 4 Circuits 4 Circuit Groups 4 5 Bridge a Access to Bridge Parameters DoD Internet Router B DECNET IV Routing Service B SNMP Sessions 18 Xerox Routing Service B 11 IPX Routing Service 1Z AppleTalk Router B 13 X 25 Network Service B 14 U 25 bis Network Mapping 9 OOS OO Bw Enter Selection B for Previous Menu Figure 6 1 Access to Bridge Parameters Bridge Parameters Describe the means for filtering and relaying frames at the data link layer between network and or point to point con nections using station MAC or Media Access Control addressing Page Bridge Parameters 6 5 Action 6 5 Aging
158. 25 will not accept a CALL ACCEPT packet containing a User Data field unless Fast Select was specified in the call request X 25 waits for an SABM from the remote end to initiate establishment of Frame Level If X 25 is waiting for a UA and receives either a T1 timeout or a DM it retries the SABM up to N2 times If after N2 retries it has still not received a UA it goes to disconnect mode and continues sending SABMs at intervals of T3 20 seconds If the X 25 1 enters the T1 timeout state 2 sends an RR 3 obtains an RR response and 4 retransmits the unacknowledged INFO frame the retry counter clears immediately per the CCCIT definition This procedure leaves open the possibility of an endless loop if the DCE were processing RR frames but not INFO frames If X 25 sends an SABM or is waiting for one and receives a DISC it dis connects the link after responding to the previous flag 13 14 X 25 Service Parameters Parameters and Options Table 13 1 X 25 PDN Parameter Bitmap Argument Values Continued BitNumber Function ON logical 1 OFF logical 0 3 DISC ANSWER If X 25 sends an SABM or is If X 25 sends an SABM or is waiting waiting for one and receives a for one and receives a DISC it DISC it responds with a UA responds with a DM 2 CLEAR P F Receiving an unknown frame Receiving an unknown frame causes causes an FRMR frame to besent an FRMR frame to be sent with its with its
159. 5 Network Service B 14 V 25 bis Network Mapping B woONOMAUNE Enter Selection B for Previous Menu Figure 4 1 Access to Circuit Parameters Circuit Parameters Describe the data link layer level 2 transmis sion channels between the router and the extended network Circuits condition the bandwidth provided by lines to provide a reliable transmis sion medium Circuit Parameters Overview Page Circuits Parameters 4 5 AppleTalk multicast DLC 4 5 ARP multicast DLCI 4 5 Auto Enable 4 6 Bridge Flood multicast DLC 4 7 Circuit Name 4 7 Circuit Type 4 10 Connect Retry 4 11 Data Link Layer protocol 4 11 DECNet multicast DLC 4 12 Desired Link Quality 4 14 Echo Request Time secs 4 14 Extended 32 bit CRC 4 15 General multicast DLCI 4 15 IP Address 4 15 LAN Address 4 17 LCP Active Open 4 17 LCP Auto Restart 4 17 Link Idle Timer T3 4 17 Local Address 4 17 Local LAN Address 4 17 LQM Time secs 4 20 Max Pkt Size 4 20 Min Frame Spacing Pt to Pt Protocol PPP 4 21 Minimum connect duration sec 4 21 Minimum Frame Spacing HP Point To Point 4 21 Modulus 4 23 OSI multicast DLC 4 23 Quality of Service 4 23 Point To Point Address 4 27 Remote Address 4 25 Remote LAN Address 4 25 Remote signal and sense 4 26 Retry Counter N2 Continued Next Page 4 3 LA SJIPUL Led N41 Circuit Parameters Overview Page Circuits Parameters Continued From Previous P
160. 5 circuits configured for slot Meaning The configuration contains an excessive number of V 35 line records Action Modify the Lines configuration V35 circuit record missing Meaning The circuit has not been configured Action Modify the configuration to ensure that it includes circuit records for the circuit V35 line record missing Meaning A line record has not been associated with the circuit cct Action Modify the configuration to ensure that it includes properly associated line and circuit records 17 102 Event Log M essages mgr Manager Event Messages mgr Manager Event Messages These event messages are generated by the system variable mgr auto enabling entity Meaning The manager is auto enabling the specified device or service entity can be any of the following a circuit of any type the IP router the bridge the IPX router EGP SNMP TCP and Telnet Config file converted due to OS upgrade Meaning When a new operating system OS is downloaded to a router the configuration file is converted to become consistent with the new OS Config file updated from netw ork download Meaning The configuration file has been updated through the network witha copy of another router s configuration Config file updated to default configuration Meaning The configuration file has been updated to a default configuration Config file updated via configuration editor Meaning A change
161. 8 05 94 10 52 13 cct wanl WAN1 carrier lost The event log messages listed in this chapter are organized alphabetically within subsections corresponding to the objects from which the messages are generated The object name for each message appears immediately after the time stamp included in the message For example the object generating the above message is cct The wanl is further information describing in this case the specific circuit being reported in this message severity is one of the following codes D debug indicates installation and diagnostic information information indicates routine events W warning indicates that a service has behaved unexpectedly P performance indicates that a current service has degraded or upgraded M major indicates a service appearance disappearance For information on how to operate the event log refer to Log Viewing the Entire Event Log or Selected Message Categories on page 16 16 and to chapter 5 How To Use the Event Log To Analyze Router Operation in the User s Guide Event Log M essages How To Use This Chapter To Locate Event Messages by Managed Object Name Subsection at AppleTalk Event Messages boot Boot Event M essages bootp Network Boot Protocol Event M essages cct Circuit Event M essages dev Device Event Messages dis Data Link Services Event Messages drs DECnet Event M essages egp Exterior Gateway Protocol Event
162. Accessing Bridging and Routing Tables Rgetxr Displaying the XNS Routing Table Use NCL s Rgetxr command to format and display the Xerox XNS routing table for a local or remote HP router Syntax rgetxr X X X X community X X X X optional is the IP address of the local or remote router in dotted decimal notation If you omit this field an address on the local router will be used community optional is the name of the SNMP community that grants access to that node If you omit the name public is used If you include a name the IP address must also be included Example rgetxr 15 2 1 94 Displays the XNS routing table for the node whose address is 15 2 1 94 Dst Next Hop Hop T P Age IF 000b1021 080009000411 0 D L 101 2 000b1022 0800090333ab 0 D L 9 3 00062022 080009000882 1 R R 4 1 9T spuewuop TON 16 69 16 70 Using the Network Control Language Accessing Bridging and Routing Tables The fields in the table are as follows Dst lists the XNS network number at the destination in 8 digit hexadecimal format Next Hop lists the station address of the next hop router Hop lists the hop count to Dst T lists the route type as follows D direct local route an invalid route R aremote route P lists how the route type was learned as follows L astatic route R Routing Information Protocol Age lists the number of seconds since the route was learned IF lists the number the router assigned to the n
163. Adj aa nnnn Meaning The circuit group manager has declared circuit group ccg which accesses node aa nnnn up Circuit Group misconfigured Meaning The configuration file contains an improperly configured circuit group Action Check circuit and circuit group records in the configuration Circuit misconfigured Meaning The configuration contains an improperly configured circuit Action Check circuit records in the configuration DECnet Circuit Group misconfigured Meaning The DECnet record in the configuration contains an improperly configured circuit group Action Check DECnet circuit group parameters entity disabled Meaning DECnet has been disabled in response to NCL s Disable command 17 76 entity enabled Meaning Init Fail CG ccg Block size small Ver nn nn nn Meaning Event Log M essages drs DECnet Event Messages 4T DECnet successfully initialized or has been enabled with the NCL s Enable command soBessop 6o7 WweAW An adjacent host accessible over circuit group ccg failed to complete initialization because of an insufficient configured block size No DECnet Record configured Meaning Action The configuration does not contain a DECnet record Modify the configuration to include a DECnet configuration record Node Reach Chg Node aa nnnn Reachable Meaning The previously unreachable node whose area and node address are aa nnnn has become re
164. Base Rgetw Displaying the Value of a Remote Variable Use NCL s Rgetw command to display the value of an individual variable from the enterprise specific section of the MIB of aremote HP or Wellfleet router Syntax rgetw identifier X X X X community identifier isthe object identification path identifying a specific MIB variable Do not include the path for the private enterprise 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 1 1 since it is assumed X X X X optional is the IP address of the remote router in dotted decimal notation If you omit this field an IP address on the local router would be used community optional is the name of the SNMP community that grants access to that node If you omit the name public is used If you include a name the IP address must also be included Examples rgetw 11 2 1 1 15 8 3 94 Displays the value of the enterprise specific MIB variable 11 2 1 1 the number of packet buffers allocated at router initialization from the HP or Wellfleet router whose IP address is 15 8 3 94 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 1 1 11 2 1 1 number of allocated packet buffers rgetw 2 1 1 15 8 2 194 Displays the value of the enterprise specific MIB variable 2 1 1 octets received without error on circuit 1 from the HP or Wellfleet router whose IP address is 15 8 2 194 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 1 1 2 1 1 octets received without error 16 50 Command Rget Rgetm Using the Network Control Language Accessing a Foreign Management Inf
165. Canada and the continental U S A Applies the daylight savings rule observed in middle Europe and Portugal Applies the daylight savings time rule observed in the southern hemisphere Displays a screen with four parameters for defining a custom daylight savings time rule Use this option to define a daylight savings time rule if one of the other parameter options does no meet your requirements For additional information refer to Beginning Month Beginning Day Ending Month and Ending Day Applies the daylight savings rule observed in western Europe Assigns the month in which to return to standard local time when defining a custom daylight savings time rule Default October January February March April May J une J uly August September October November December Assigns the day on which to return to standard local time when defining a custom daylight savings time rule Default Sunday Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Note If Ending day is set to Sunday the router makes the correction at 2 a m on that day If Ending day is not set to Sunday the router makes the correction at 2 a m on the first Sunday after the specified day Determines which event messages are automatically displayed on the console Major A service has appeared or disappeared Performance A service has upgraded or degraded Warning A service has behaved unexpectedly Information General
166. Continued Bit Number 10 4 Function COLLISION REJECT D BIT CONFIRMATION CALL DATA ACTIVE CONNECTION N2 ACTION INFO COUNT DISC ACTION ON logical 1 If a Clear Collision occurs and the received CLEAR packet has a bad length anew CLEAR packet is sent with a diagnostic code Disables the D bit in CALL CONFIRM packets X 25 will accept a CALL ACCEPT packet containing a User Data field even if Fast Select was not specified in the call request X 25 begins sending SABMs as soon as the physical connection is established If X 25 is waiting for a UA and receives either a T1 timeout or a DM it retries the SABM up to N2 times If after N2 retries it has still not received a UA it goes to disconnect mode and ceases to transmit SABMs If the X 25 1 enters the T1 time out state 2 sends an RR 3 obtains an RR response and 4 then retransmits the unacknowledged INFO frame the retry counter is not cleared until the retransmitted INFO frame is acknowledged This procedure avoids an endless loop that would occur if the DCE were processing RR frames but not INFO frames If X 25 sends an SABM or is waiting for one and receives a DISC it sends an SABM immediately after responding to the previous flag OFF logical 0 If a Clear Collision occurs and the received CLEAR packet has a bad length anew CLEAR packet is dropped Enables the D bit in CALL CONFIRM packets X
167. D of the highest node in the range if you are filtering a range of DECnet destination or source nodes For more information refer to Node low later in this chapter To learn how to assign an Node list to a filter refer to Dest Node low and Source Node low Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering DE Cnet source and destination nodes when creating an Node list a Enter the DECnet ID of the node in this field and leave the Node high field blank if you are filtering a single DE Cnet destination or source node Enter the DECnet ID of the lowest node in this field and enter the DECnet ID of highest destination or source node network in the Node high field if you are filtering a range of DE Cnet destination or source nodes Number of Routers Packet Type high Options Packet Type low Precedence Options DECnet Parameters Parameters and Options For more information refer to Node high earlier in this chapter To learn how to assign an Node list to a filter refer to Dest Node low and Source Node low Identifies the number of adjacent DE Cnet routers associated with this circuit group Refer to your network map to determine this number Default 6 Range 1 to 33 Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering DE Cnet Packet Types when creating a Packet Type filter or Packet Type list Leave this field blank and enter the packet type number in the Packet T
168. Default 1 Range 1 to 63 Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering DE Cnet source and destination areas networks when creating an Area list Leave this field blank and enter the DE Cnet ID of the network in the Area low field if you are filtering a single DE Cnet destination or source area Enter the DECnet ID of the highest network in the range if you are filtering a range of DE Cnet destination or source areas For more information refer to Area low later in this chapter To learn how to assign an Area list to a filter refer to Dest Network low and Source Area low later in this chapter Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering DE Cnet source and destination areas networks when creating an Area list Enter the DECnet ID of the network in this field and leave the Area high field blank if you are filtering a single DE Cnet destination or source area a Enter the DECnet ID this field and enter the highest DE Cnet ID in the Area high field if you are filtering a range of DECnet destination or source areas For more information refer to Area high earlier in this chapter To learn how to assign an Area list to a filter refer to Dest Network low and Source Area low later in this chapter Area Max Cost Area Max Hops Auto Enable Yes No DECnet Parameters Parameters and Options Sets the maximum cost of a path to any area in the network DE C
169. Enter the XNS host number in this field and leave the Host high field blank if you are filtering a single XNS source or destination host Enter the lowest XNS host number in this field and enter the highest host number in the Host high field if you are filtering a range of XNS source or destination hosts For additional information refer to Host high earlier in this chapter To learn how to assign a Host list to a filter refer to Dest Host low and Source Host low later in this chapter Assigns a unique XNS physical host address to the router Your HP router was shipped with a unique universally administered 48 bit station address for each port stored in read only memory ROM Default Blank assigns the factory default station address Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering XNS source or destination networks when creating a Network list Options Netw ork Number low Options Network lists Netw ork Number Next Hop Host Next Hop Net Packet Type high Options Xerox Network Systems XNS Router Parameters Parameters and Options Leave this field blank and enter the XNS network number in the Network Number low field if you are filtering a single XNS source or destination network Enter the XNS highest network number in the range if you are filtering a range of XNS source or destination networks For additional information refer to Network Number low later
170. HP Series 200 or 400 router 1 to 5 on an HP Router 650 vari ables listed below The pathname is constructed as follows timer slot 4 vari able The variables are listed alphabetically cancel_cnt contains the number of timers cancelled by the router prior to the expiration of the timer expire_cnt contains the number of timers that have expired race_cnt contains the number of simultaneous occurrences of the expiration of the timer and the cancellation of the timer set_cnt contains the number of timers scheduled by the router Management Information Base Variables xrx Xerox XNS Information Base xrx Xerox XNS Information Base The xns information base is a composed of 1 a set of variables that describe transmission and reception of packets across each XNS interface 2 a set of variables that describe aggregate Internet Datagram Protocol IDP Error Protocol activity 3 an XNS addressing table and 4 an XNS routing table You can also use NCL s Rgetxr command to access the tables The structure is the following xns if the interface specific XNS address hexadecimal see subheading variables the interface specific variables listed below mib along with idp the DP error protocol branch idp along with mib the IDP Error Protocol branch see subheading variables theIDP Error Protocol variables listed below The pathnames are constructed as follows xns if vari able xns mib idp variable
171. IP address on the local router would be used community optional is the name of the SNMP community that grants access to that node If you omit the name public is used If you include a name the IP address must also be included Example rget 1 3 6 1 4 1 N n n n 15 8 2 2 Displays the value of the enterprise specific MIB variable from the foreign node 15 8 2 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 is the path to the private enterprise MIB branch N is the corporate identifier provided by the Internet Assigned Number authority n n n is the object identification path assigned by the equipment manufacturer Using the Network Control Language Accessing a Foreign Management Information Base Rgetm Displaying the Values of a Foreign Variable Class Use NCL s Rgetm command to display the values of the variables in a branch of a foreign enterprise specific section of the MIB of a remote node Syntax rgetm identifier X X X X community identifier is the complete object identification path identifying a branch of foreign MIB variables X X X X optional is the IP address of the remote foreign node in dotted decimal notation If you omit this field an IP address on the local router would be used community optional is the name of the SNMP community that grants access to that node If you omit the name public is used If you include a name the IP address must also be included Example rgetm 1 3 6 1 4 1 N n n n 15 8 2 2
172. Internet Router 9 DECNET IV Routing Service B SNMP Sessions B 19 Xerox Routing Service B 11 IPX Routing Service B 12 AppleTalk Router B 8 COO OS OU IN 14 U 25 bis Network Mapping B Enter Selection B for Previous Menu Figure 13 1 Access to X 25 Parameters X 25 Parameters UseLAPB circuits to operate X 25 DDN X 25 PDN and X 25 Point to Point services 13 X 25 Network Service B _ Access to X 25 parameters X 25 Service Parameters Overview Page X 25 Parameters 13 4 Auto Enable 13 4 Broadcast 13 4 Call Retry Timer secs 13 5 Circuit Name 13 5 Circuit Type 13 5 Closed User Group 13 5 Connection ID 13 6 Flow Control 13 6 Group Number 13 6 High PVC LCN 13 6 High SVC LCN 13 7 Internet Address 13 7 IP Address 13 8 Local DTE Address 13 8 Lower Circuit Name 13 8 Low PVC LCN 13 8 Low SVC LCN 13 8 Max Conns 13 8 Max Idle Time secs 13 9 Max Link Latency ms 13 9 Max Queue Size 13 9 Min Frame Spacing 13 9 Min Idle Time secs 13 9 MTU Size 13 10 Outgoing Access 13 10 PDN 13 11 Pkt Size 13 11 Pkt Window 13 11 Precedence 13 11 PVC 13 11 Quality of Service 13 11 Remote DTE Address 13 12 SVC 13 12 T1 13 12 Upper Circuit Name 13 12 X 121 Address 13 3 T sSIPUL LLd N S SZ X Auto Enable Yes No Broadcast Yes No Call Retry Timer secs 13 4 X 25 Service Parameters Parameters and Options Parameters
173. List Name 6 13 Loop Detection Time hex 6 13 MAC Address high 6 14 MAC Address low 6 14 MAC dest high 6 15 Max Hops 6 16 Protocol ID Org Code high 6 17 Protocol ID Org Code low 6 17 SAP high 6 18 Spanning Tree Enable 6 19 SSAP high 6 20 SSAP low 6 20 STP Priority 6 21 Type high 6 22 Bridge Type 3 3 bridge type FDDI 3 3 Broadcast 13 4 Browse 16 6 Buf 16 31 16 32 buf object 16 30 buffers 15 8 C cable F 1047 80002 16 100 cache table ARP 16 41 Call restrictions 4 6 Call Retry Timer secs 13 4 13 5 cct 16 32 Channel Management 4 6 Chassis 16 32 Index 3 xepul 4 Index Checksum 12 6 checksum faulty 15 15 Checksums On 10 4 Circuit Group 7 9 10 4 11 6 12 6 Circuit Group Name 6 7 8 6 12 14 Circuits 5 3 Circuit Group Speed 5 3 Circuit Name 6 7 13 5 Circuits 3 3 4 7 5 3 Circuit Type 4 7 13 5 Circuits ARP Group Address 4 5 Auto Enable 4 5 Call restrictions 4 6 Channel Management 4 6 Circuit Group Name 5 3 Circuit Group Speed 5 3 Circuit is enabled 4 11 Circuit Type 4 7 Compression 4 9 Connect inactivity time sec 4 10 Connect Retries 4 10 Connect retry count 4 10 Connect wait time sec 4 10 Connect when 4 11 Data is available or on incoming calls 4 11 Data Link Layer Protocol 4 11 Desired Link Quality 4 12 DLCI Encoding Length 4 13 Echo Request Times
174. Makes router answer time requests made by clients using its address It provides the time kept on this router set by the NCL Interpreter s Time command which is converted by the client to its local time Server and Client Allows the router to send and receive time server updates MTU Discovery Enables or disables the Probe MTU and Reply MTU options IP options number 11 Option and 12 specified in RFC 1063 These features enable the router to learn the minimum Maximum Transmission Unit MTU of all networks traversed by an IP datagram from source to destination They can significantly decrease network load by eliminating the need for transmit fragmentation and destination reassembly Default No No Disables MTU discovery 7 19 L sPUeLLd dl 020 01d PUHI Yes Neighbor ID Netw ork Address Network Mask Next Hop Examples Next Hop Address Non Local ARP Source 7 20 Accept Drop Drop and Log Internet Protocol IP Parameters Parameters and Options Enables MTU discovery Identifies the remote end of the virtual link Enter the router ID of the remote end in dotted decimal notation Accepts the filtered IP network address in dotted decimal notation when creating an import or export route filter If you want to filter all destination networks leave this field blank If you want to filter a specific IP network enter that network address Determines the range of addresses to filter whe
175. Meaning A disparity exists between the ends of a point to point circuit The circuit s remote signal and sense testing require that both ends of the circuit be designated as active This message is generated by the active side of a mismatched pair Action Modify the configuration to ensure that the Remote signal amp sense parameter is set to Active on both of the routers Local reset of remote succeeded Meaning The router has received a reset indication in response to an outstanding reset request 17 35 Event Log Messages cct Circuit Event Messages LQM negotiation rejected by remote station Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit the remote station refuses to accept negotiation of the Link Quality Monitor LQM parameter The system cannot bring up the Link Control Protocol LCP until the remote station is willing to accept negotiation of the LQM parameter Action If it is not considered necessary to receive Link Quality Report LQR packets in order to monitor link quality then modify the configuration so that the LQM Time parameter is set to 0 If the LQM Time parameter is set to 0 then the system will not require the peer remote station to send LQR packets Management Interface connection established Meaning The network and the DTE hav eestablished the connection necessary for periodic polling and status message exchange on the identified circuit mapped inact used since req q ed cct YYY
176. Meaning This indicates that an IP mapped circuit has timed out due to inactivity on circuit YYY The inactivity time set in the map record was used since other requests were queued waiting a free circuit Max Pkt Size adjusted down to 1500 Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit the Max Pkt Size parameter exceeded the maximum value allowed of 1500 bytes The Max Pkt Size parameter has been automatically adjusted down to 1500 bytes Action Modify the configuration so that the Max Pkt Size parameter is within the legal range Memory error MERR detected Meaning The LAN controller or link level controller cannot access the router memory The circuit is effectively disabled Action Verify hardware integrity 17 36 Event Log M essages cct Circuit Event Messages min channel number gt max min set to X 4T Meaning The router configuration has the minimum channel number greater than the maximum channel number The router will correct this Action Correct the router configuration s pess Ww 601 344 Minimum Latency cap being used Meaning A minimum latency cap of 3100 bytes is being used because the latency cap time is too small for the current link speed missed receiving XX LQRs link is down Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit XX Link Quality Monitor LQM time periods elapsed without a Link Quality Report LQR packet being received from the peer remote station The link is declared down
177. Messages ip IP Event M essages ipx IPX Router Event M essages 1b Bridge Event Messages line Lines Event Messages mgr Manager Event M essages ospf OSPF Event Messages pm Port Module M anager Event M essages ppp Point to Point Protocol rok Router Operating Kernel Event Messages SMDS Event Messages tcp Transmission Control Protocol Event Messages telnet Telnet Event Messages tftp TFTP and Fget Event Messages timep Time Protocol Event Messages X 25 Event M essages xrx XNS Router Event Messages zmodem Zmodem Event M essages Page 17 4 17 15 17 16 17 18 17 60 17 69 17 74 17 79 17 86 17 92 17 96 17 101 17 103 17 105 17 112 17 117 17 120 17 122 17 124 17 125 17 126 17 133 17 135 17 147 17 149 17 3 4T s pess Ww 601 344 Event Log Messages at AppleTalk Event Messages at AppleTalk Event Messages These event messages are generated by the system variable at the AppleTalk router AARP mapping table is full Meaning The AppleTalk router cannot add an address resolution pair AppleTalk node address and an associated station address to its address mapping table the table contains its maximum number of entries Action Increase the value of the AARP mapping table parameter to expand the size of the table AARP PROBE RSP node address X Y Meaning The AppleTalk router after having issued a Probe packet to test the uniqueness of the network number and node id
178. Multicast DLCI 4 15 Get 16 34 global auto enable 1 4 Global Broadcast 7 13 GMT 1 9 Grenwich Mean Time 1 9 Group Address 4 15 Group LAN ID 6 11 Group Number 13 6 H HDLC 4 8 4 20 4 21 Header 6 11 7 13 Heartbeat Down Count 4 15 heartbeat polling 4 27 Heartbeat Polling Interval 4 15 heartbeat polling messages 4 15 Hello Interval 7 13 Hello Time 6 12 6 21 Hello Timer 7 13 8 9 Help 16 10 High LCN 13 7 High PVC LCN 13 6 High SVC LCN 13 6 High Value hex 6 12 Hold down time 14 3 Hop Count Reduction 6 12 Host high 10 8 Host high 10 8 Host low 10 8 Host Cache 7 14 Host lists 10 8 11 10 Host Number 10 8 Host Number high 11 10 Host Number low 11 10 hotswap 16 25 16 26 HP 700 series terminal 16 19 HP Remote Bridge 4 25 16 28 hpnm 16 32 hw 16 32 l ICMP address mask reply message 7 6 ICMP datagram 15 15 IEEE 802 2 test packet 16 28 IHU response 7 21 Import Action 7 14 Individual Address 4 15 Information event log 1 6 interface module 4 27 Interface Type OSPF 7 14 internal clock source 3 3 Internal LAN ID Hex 6 12 Internal Network Number 11 11 Internal Router Name 11 11 Internet Address 7 15 13 7 Intervals Between Polls 4 15 ip 16 32 IP Address 4 15 7 15 13 7 IP Address high 7 15 IP Address low 7 15 IP datagram disposition 7 6 IP datagrams 15 15 IP
179. Number 10 9 Next Hop Host 10 9 Next Hop Net 10 9 Packet Type high 10 10 Packet Type low 10 10 Precedence 10 10 RIP Interface Cost 10 10 RIP Listen 10 11 RIP Supply 10 11 Socket high 10 11 Socket low 10 11 Source Route Token Ring 10 12 Source Host high 10 12 Source Host low 10 12 Source Network high 10 12 Source Network low 10 13 Source Socket high 10 14 Source Socket low 10 14 Target Net 10 14 XNS Filter rule B 10 3 OT SJIPULLd Ooy SNX Action Accept Accept and Log Drop Drop and Log Drop Auto Enable Circuit Group Checksums On 10 4 No Yes Xerox Network Systems XNS Router Parameters Parameters and Options Parameters and Options Determines the disposition of packets meeting the filter rule Default Drop Relays a packet meeting the filter rule Relays a packet meeting the filter rule and records an event message in the event log Discard a packet meeting the filter rule Discards a packet meeting the filter rule and records an events message in the event log Determines the initial state of the XNS router The XNS specific Auto Enable parameter works in conjunction with the global Auto Enable parameter found on the Global Parameters screen in the System configuration menu to enable or disable XNS routing when the router boots When the global Auto Enable parameter is set to No the XNS router like all other protocols is unconditionally di
180. P entity has received NCL s Enable command entity disabled Meaning The TFTP entity was disabled in response to NCL s Disable command entity enabled Meaning The TFTP entity was enabled in response to NCL s Enable command entity not enabled request denied Meaning The F get or F put request requires that TFTP be configured and enabled Action Check that TFTP is configured and enabled ERR error pdu string Meaning This is the message string referred to by the event message RCVD ERR from ip address error msg follows or the event message SENT ERR to ip address error msg follows FGET OS aborted Meaning The Fget request has been aborted for the reason indicated by the message listed immediately prior to this message in the event log FGET OS aborted destination address unknown Meaning The specified destination IP address cannot be reached Action Ensure that the referenced system is available 17 128 Event Log M essages tftp TFTP and Fget Event Messages FGET Waiting for route to destination IP_ address x Meaning The destination IP address was unavailable The system is retrying the request GET remote filename from ip address file local filename GET CONFIG from ip address file CONFIG s pess Ww 601 u44 Meaning Echoes the F get command request Insufficient resources for Enable Meaning Couldn t allocate a message buffer to register TFTP s port wit
181. P supply function determining whether the XNS router transmits periodic RIP updates to neighboring routers across the Circuit Group Default Yes No Prevents the router from transmitting updates Use this setting to inactivate RIP for circuit groups configured with static routes Yes Allows the router to transmit RIP updates Socket high Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering XNS source or destination sockets when creating a Socket list Options Leave this field blank and enter the XNS socket number in the Socket low field if you are filtering a single XNS source or destination socket Enter the highest XNS socket number in the range if you are filtering a range of XNS source or destination sockets SJIPULLed oy SNX For additional information refer to Socket low later in this chapter To learn how to assign a Socket list to a filter refer to Dest Socket low and Source Socket low Socket low Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering XNS source or destination sockets when creating a Socket list Options Enter the XNS socket number in this field and leave the Socket high field blank if you are filtering a single XNS source or destination socket Enter the lowest XNS socket number in this field and enter the highest socket number in the Socket high field if you are filtering a range of XNS source or destination sockets For additional information refer to Socke
182. P was unable to function because of insufficient memory resources nop contains the number of instances that EGP received an otherwise valid EGP message inappropriate or inapplicable to its current state pkts_rcv contains the total number of received EGP messages pkts_snt contains the total number of transmitted EGP messages sess cur contains the current number of EGP peers An EGP peer is a remote routing device with which the router exchanges routing information sess tot contains the aggregate number of EGP peers This counter is incremented when the router moves from the EGP Idle state to either the Acquisition state or Down state tmrrej contains the number of T3 abort timer timeouts Management Information Base Variables hw Hardware Information Base hw Hardware Information Base The structure of the hardware hw information base is the following hw slot always 1 for HP Series 200 and 400 routers 1 through 5 for the HP Router 650 variables listed below The pathname is constructed as follows hw slot 4 variable The variables are listed alphabetically dram_size contains the number of bytes of DRAM dynamic RAM on this router flash_size contains the number of bytes of flash EPROM electrically programmable ROM on this router id contains the hardware model identification number prod_nm contains the HP product number for this router rom_ver contains the version number of the
183. PP over V 25 bis Note To operate properly compression must be configured on both the source and destination routers for the interconnecting circuit Limitations On any HP series 200 or 400 router there should be no more than than two WAN links running with Compression enabled Default HP Point to Point Auto Ptto Pt Protocol PPP No Compression PPP over V 25 bis No Compression LA Auto Lets the router automatically sense the compression setting used by the remote device and resets local compression accordingly HP PPC Packet by Enables packet compression Packet SJ PUL Led N2119 No Compression Disables packet compression 4 9 Connectinactivity time sec Circuit Parameters Parameters and Options Sets a time interval in seconds for determining how long to incrementally maintain a connection after no activity is detected in either direction This parameter is typically set to the incremental charge rate of the local phone system The parameter does not become active until the Minimum connect duration sec parameter elapses Thus if you want the inactivity time to be the sole reason for disconnecting set the a wait time period here and leave the Minimum connect duration sec parameter set to zero Default 60 Disable 0 Range 10 to 64800 seconds or Infinity Infinity Connection inactivity does not cause the router to terminate the call Other choices 0 zero disables the timer Connect Retrie
184. RIP Listen to Yes then set RIP Supply For additional information refer to RIP Supply Default Route Supply Default Route Listen Poisoned Reverse and RIP Interface Cost Determines whether the IP router transmits periodic RIP updates to neighboring routers within the network RIP Supply along with RIP Listen Default Route Supply Default Route Listen Poisoned Reverse and RIP Interface Cost implement certain features of the RIP protocol RIP enables the exchange of routing information between routers in the same autonomous system Default Yes Prevents the router from transmitting updates Allows the router to transmit RIP updates Note To enable Default Route Supply RIP Supply must be set to Yes Uniquely identifies the TCP IP router within the OPSF domain Accepts the router ID in dotted decimal notation Enables or disables source routing over token ring media for the interface being defined If your router does not have a token ring port always set this option to No Default No Specifies the area type Subnet Mask Suppress Authentication Traps No Yes Tag Options To Interface Options To Protocol Internet Protocol IP Parameters Parameters and Options Note When configuring a stub area all routers within the stub area should configure the area as a stub The router connecting to the backbone typically defines the default route onto the backbone Sets the bit mask for dete
185. ROM used on this router sram_size contains the number of bytes of SRAM static RAM on this router ST seg UOnBUWOjU quowbHeuep 18 63 18 64 M anagement Information Base Variables ip IP Information Base ip IP Information Base The IP router ip information base contains variables that describe transmission and reception activities across each IP interface it also contains variables describing the IP routing table The structure is the following Ip ip_interface the interface specific branch see subheading ip address the IP address in dotted decimal notation variables the interface specific variables ip_route_table the routing table branch see subheading net_tree variables the routing table variables The pathnames are constructed as follows ip ip_interface ip address variable ip ip_route_table net_tree variable The variables are listed alphabetically under the two branches Interface Specific address contains the 32 bit IP address of interface ip address expressed as a decimal integer drop dest_unknown contains the number of IP datagrams dropped by interface ip address because the IP header contained an unknown or corrupt IP destination address drop filtered contains the number of IP datagrams dropped by interface ip interface in response to source address or destination address filters established at router configuration Management Information Base Variables ip IP Information B
186. Refresh Rate parameter in the Configuration Editor the default is three seconds Syntax repeat Example get cct etherl octets_tx_ok repeat Continually repeats the Get command for an updated octet count SPACE Stops repeating Using the Network Control Language Managing Router Operations and Resources Stamp Displaying the Operating Code Version Use NCL s Stamp command to display the router s operating code version and date To output the display to a printer or file instead of your console screen see the Print command on page 16 19 F or example A 08 01 is a full version number which has three fields The character in the first field A identifies the function set included in your router B Basic functionality IP and IPX routing services A Advanced functionality Basic functionality plus AppleTalk XNS DECnet and other features For amore comprehensive listing of features available in your router refer to the release notes you received with the router or with your most recent software upgrade The number in the second field 08 in this case identifies the release number common to all HP routers The number in the third field 01 in this case identifies the level of update to the release indicated in the second field On an HP Series 650 router Stamp also produces a version and date for each installed interface module Syntax stamp 9T spuewuop TON 16 23
187. Restart Link Idle Timer T3 Local Address Local LAN Address LQM Time secs Yes No Yes No Circuit Parameters Parameters and Options Determines whether Point to Point establishes the LCP connection Note At least one of the Point to Point peers must be configured to actively open the LCP connection Default Yes The Point to Point circuit attempts to establish the LCP connection as soon as the physical link is ready The Point to Point circuit waits for the remote peer to establish the LCP connection Determines whether the Point to Point protocol attempts to re establish an LCP connection after the link is declared down The Point to Point circuit attempts to re establish an LCP connection The Point to Point circuit does not attempt to re establish an LCP connection Sets the idle time in seconds to wait before disconnecting the Point to Point circuit Default 3 seconds Range Accepts a unique decimal value from 00 through 99 when entering an explicit Point to Point non x 25 address For more information refer to Point to Point Address and specifically the Explicit option Default 07 Range 00 to 99 Note Avoid the conventional address values of 01 or 03 Accepts the MAC address of the source pass thru circuit This parameter appears when the Data Link Layer protocol parameter is set to Pass Thru LA Sets the link quality monitoring report period in seconds Defaul
188. ST SU82 19S SONSNEIS Using the Statistic Screens IPX Router Statistics Screen IPX Router Statistics Screen The IPX Router Statistics screen is available if IPX routing is enabled in your configuration This screen summarizes traffic volume for each IPX network interface SAMPLE_CONFIG 6 Jan 1991 21 26 07 IPX Router Statistics NAME PACKETS Receive Transmit Deliver Dropped gt 1 89000823 a 7 a l Z g0008085 a 7 B B 3 30000007 a 7 7 B 4 o30008009 a B B i TOTAL a B B B PRESS r for reset Down Up lt to exit Figure 15 7 IPX Router Statistics Screen 15 16 Using the Statistic Screens IPX Router Statistics Screen Categories on the IPX Router Statistics screen are the following NAME Receive Transmit Deliver Dropped TOTAL Lists the network interface address in 8 digit hexadecimal format Lists the number of IPX datagrams received by the network interface Lists the number of IPX datagrams transmitted by the network interface Lists the number of IPX datagrams delivered by the router to an upper layer protocol for processing Lists the number of IPX datagrams dropped by the network interface Dropped datagrams include but are not limited to datagrams with faulty checksums and datagrams with faulty header information Lists the total for each of the above counts for all IPX network interfaces ST SONSNEIS SU823 19S 15 17 Using the Stati
189. Selection B for Previous Menu Figure 5 1 Access to Circuit Parameters Circuit Group Parameters Complete the communication channels between multiprotocol routers and network devices by forming collec tions of circuits used by the application modules to bridge and route packets A circuit group comprises circuits of the same type such as LAN WAN and Frame Relay that originate at a common point and terminate at another common point Each individual circuit must be assigned to a circuit group even if the group consists of only one circuit Page Circuits Parameters 5 3 5 3 5 3 Circuit Group Name Circuit Group Speed Circuit Name Circuit Group Name ETHER1G WANIG Circuit Group Speed Circuit Name Circuit Group Parameters Parameters and Options S Parameters and Options Accepts a maximum of 12 alphanumeric characters to identify the circuit group The default when configuring an Ethernet LAN port s1 ULLed dno19 iNd119 The default when configuring a WAN port Used for WAN ports to enable the setting of the MIB interface if Speed entry in the if table by providing this value in response to SNMP gets requesting the if speed setting Default 56000 Identifies the circuit for the associated connector The default startup and default Quick Configuration set this parameter to the name of the Connector This name should also appear on your network map In HP Series
190. Series 600 routers the default circuit name also includes the number of the slot in which the associated port is installed For example ETHER21 The first 802 3 Ethernet port in the second slot WAN32 The second WAN port in the third slot Note You can change a circuit name to nearly any character sequence you want but it is recommended that you use names that identify the associated slot if any and port numbers for each circuit Circuit Type Specifies the circuit type Ether 802 3 Provides a transmission channel over CSMA CD or IEEE 802 3 Ethernet network media 802 5 Provides a transmission channel over IEEE 802 5 Token Ring network media Results in these additioinal parameters LAN Address Xcvr Signal Polling FDDI Provides a transmission channel over FDDI Fiber Optic Data Distribution Interface network media LA Frame Relay Provides a transmission channel over a Frame Relay network Results in these additional parameters DLCI Encoding Length DLCI Encoding Type Management Type Maximum Packet Size Max Link Latency Provide InARP SJIPULLed N2119 4 7 Circuit Parameters Parameters and Options HP Point to Point Provides a transmission channel over a single long haul medium terminated by a router peer at a remote site Uses HDLC High level Data Link Control protocol to exchange data and control packets Displays a screen with parameters for configuring an HP Point to Point Protocol circuit Results in these additio
191. Sets the interval in seconds between Hello messages transmitted across the circuit group Default 15 15 30 45 60 600 1800 2400 3600 Accepts the list name of an Area list Node list or Packet Type list Determines the number of areas in the extended network Max Area identifies the highest area ID number in the extended network Default 63 highly recommended Range 1 to 63 Determines the maximum number of end nodes adjacent to that is on the same LAN as a DECnet router on a LAN The higher the number of adjacent nodes the greater the impact on network performance and memory utilization Refer to your network map and find the largest number of adjacent nodes Default 95 Range 1 to 1023 Note The higher the number of adjacent nodes the greater the impact on network performance and memory utilization Specifies the maximum cost of a path to any node in the network This setting must be equal to or greater than Area Max Cost Default 1008 Range 1 to 1008 Specifies the maximum number of hops from source to destination This setting must be equal to or greater than Area Max Hops 8 Default 30 Range 1 to 30 Identifies the highest node number residing in the DE Cnet area This setting should be the same for each DECnet router within the network SJIPUL Led 2 2uUd340 Default 1023 highly recommended Range 1 to 1023 8 9 Max Visits Node Node high Node low 8 10 Options Op
192. Table Size 1 Lists 1 Network Lists List Name 1 List Members Network low Network high 2 Node Lists List Name 1 List Members Node low Node high 3 Socket Lists List Name 1 List Members Socket low Socket high 4 DDP Type Lists List Name 1 List Members Network low Network high J pu 4 JTO pureed A Parameter Finder 12 AppleTalk Router Continued A 32 2 Circuit Groups Circuit Group Name Probe Checksum Node ID Source Route Token Ring Seed Router Seed Router Yes Network Min Network Max Network Default Zone Name Zone Filter Cost Seed Router Yes 1 Zone Name List Zone Name 2 Traffic Filters Same as 1 Traffic Filters below 1 Traffic Filters Numbered 2 if Seed Router Yes Precedence Dest Net low high Effect Dest Node low high Effect Dest Sock low high Effect Source Net low high Effect Source Node low high Effect Source Sock low high Effect DDP Type low high Effect Action A Parameter Finder 13 X 25 Network Service 13 X 25 Netw ork Service Auto Enable 1 PDN Service Lower Circuit Name M ax Queue Size MTU Size Upper Circuit Name Local DTE Address Closed User Group Closed User Group Yes Outgoing Access Group Number 1 X 25 Address M ap IP Address X 121 Address Broadcast M ax Conns Min Idle Time secs M ax Idle Time secs Call Retry Time secs Flow Ctrl Flow Ctrl Negot Negotiated Pkt
193. Target Net Identifies the network address of the next router in the hop sequence Displays a screen with parameters for creating Packet Type lists For information about creating a Packet Type list and associating the list with a Packet Type filter refer to Packet Type low and Packet Type high later in this chapter Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering IPX packet type numbers when creating a Packet Type filter or Packet Type list Options Packet Type low Precedence Random load balancing Options No IPX Protocol Parameters Parameters and Options Leave this field blank and enter the IPX packet type number in the Packet Type low field if you are filtering a single IPX packet type number a Enter the highest IPX packet type number in the range if you are filtering a range of IPX packet type numbers Enter the list name in the Packet Type low field and leave this field blank if you are creating an IPX Packet Type filter and want to create a range of packet type numbers with a filter list For additional information refer to Packet Type low later in this chapter Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering IPX packet type numbers when creating a Packet Type filter or Packet Type list Enter the IPX packet type number in this field and leave the Packet Type high field blank if you are filtering a single IPX packet type number Enter the lowest IPX packet type n
194. Telnet is disconnected you will see your own system name on the display 9T spuewuop TON 16 27 16 28 Using the Network Control Language Managing Router Operations and Resources Test Sending an IEEE 802 2 Test Packet Use NCL s Test command to perform a link layer test of a directly connected network or a bridged link Test sends an IEEE 802 2 test packet to a specified target node on a network directly attached to a port on this router or on a network bridged from a WAN port on this router for example using an HP Remote Bridge The target node must be able to respond to the test packet for the test to work IEEE 802 3 devices but not Ethernet devices can respond to the test packet After transmitting the test packet to the node the router waits for a response If a response is received within the specified or default interval the console displays a message indicating success or response received If a response is not received within the specified or default interval the console displays a message indicating that the test timed out Syntax test mac_addr count delay mac_addr is the station address of the target node in 12 character hexadecimal format count optional is the number of test packets to send The number that succeeded will be indicated on the console display If an integer is not included the packet is sent once delay optional is how many seconds to wait for a response to each packet If a s
195. X X assoc w YYY Meaning This indicates that a virtual IP circuit IP mapped circuit has been associated with an actual circuit IPXCP is down Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit IPX Control Protocol IPXCP has gone down IPXCP is up Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit IPX Control Protocol IPXCP is up Keep alive recovery from net Meaning The router is now properly receiving the network keep alive sequence number for the identified circuit name LCP is being restarted Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit Link Control Protocol LCP went down and the system is restarting LCP because the LCP Auto Restart option was set to Yes 17 34 Event Log M essages cct Circuit Event Messages LCP is down x Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit Link Control Protocol LCP has gone down If the LCP Auto Restart option was configured as Yes then the 2m system attempts to restart LCP 5 LCP is up 8 Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit Link Control Protocol LCP is up The system now attempts to bring up the appropriate network layer control protocols Local disconnected remote Meaning The router has disconnected the point to point link after first sending a disconnect request to the remote end and receiving an unnumbered acknowledgment Local LLC reset remote Meaning The router has sent a reset request to the remote end of the point to point link Local not hearing from remote
196. Your console screen stops at the copyright screen displays crash information about the cause of the crash and waits for you to type the customary password or any key before you can use the console Sets the data transmission speed baud rate for router connect sessions initiated through the Console port Default Speed Sense Automatically detects the baud rate of the remote terminal device and sets the router to the same baud rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 Note If the router is set to a fixed baud rate the terminal device connected to the router must be set to the same baud rate Assigns a day of the week to apply the time adjustment when preparing a user defined daylight savings time rule Default Sunday Options Beginning month Options Bit Char 8 7 Connection Inactivity Time Options Daylight Time Rule Alaska None Global and Session Parameters Parameters and Options Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Note If Beginning Day is set to Sunday the router compensates for daylight savings time at 2 a m on that Sunday If Beginning day is not set to Sunday the router makes the time correction at 2 a m on the first Sunday following the specified day Assigns the month of the year to correct for daylight savings time when preparing a user defined daylight savings time rule Default April January February March April May J une J uly Au
197. a A value of 1 means the service can be configured a A value of 0 means the service is not available key vari ables listed below The pathname is constructed as follows key variable The variables are listed alphabetically at AppleTalk routing service drs DECnet routing service fr Frame Relay circuit services ip IP routing service the TCP IP protocol suite ipx IPX routing service Ib Bridge service osi OSI routing smds SMDS services x25 X 25 circuit services xns XNS routing service 18 74 Management Information Base Variables lb Bridge Information Base lb Bridge Information Base The bridge Ib information base contains variables that describe the reception and transmission of packets across each bridging circuit group The structure is the following Ib ccg bridge circuit group name vari ables listed below ST The pathname is constructed as follows lb ccg variable The variables are listed alphabetically block_ste indicates the disposition of STE frames received by the circuit group A value of 1 indicates that received STE frames are blocked dropped a value of 0 indicates that received STE frames are forwarded If either NCL s Blockste or Unblockste command has been executed after the most recent reboot of the router this variable indicates which is currently in effect Conversely if neither Blockste nor Unblockste have been used since the last reboot then this variable indicates the s
198. a Host list to establish the upper and lower range of XNS source host numbers For additional information refer to Source Host low later in this chapter F or more information about Host lists refer to Host high and Host low later in this chapter Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering an XNS packet based on the contents of its source host field Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter XNS source hosts Enter the XNS host number in this field and leave the Dest Host high field blank if you are filtering a single XNS source host Enter the lowest XNS host number in this field and enter the highest host number in the Source Host high field if you are filtering a range of XNS destination hosts a Enter the Host list name in this field and leave the Source Host high field blank if you want to use a Host list to establish the upper and lower range of source host numbers For additional information refer to Source Host high earlier in this chapter F or more information about Host lists refer to Host high and Host low later in this chapter Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering an XNS packet based on the contents of its source network field Options Source Network low Options Source Socket high Options Xerox Network Systems XNS Router Parameters Parameters and Options Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter
199. a Protocol UDP datagrams originated by the SNMP management agent snmpprocerrs contains the number of syntactically correct SNMP messages that could not be processed such messages might request an unknown variable contain an invalid instance identification or contain a violation of access control restrictions snmptotalrequested contains the total number of individual variables whose values have been requested in incoming SNMP PDUs An approximation of the number of variables requested in each SNMP PDU can be computed by dividing snmptotalrequested by snmpinpkts Management Information Base Variables svc System Services Information Base svc System Services Information Base The system services svc information base contains variables that describe the private memory management function of system management This function maintains dynamic information on the memory space available to active tasks The next level identifies the memory management instance sme The next level identifies one of four specific memory management tables The lowest level contains the actual svc memory management variables The router maintains identical variable sets for all tables The structure is the following ST SVC 3 z slot always Ci for an HP Series 200 or 400 A router 1 to 5 on an HP Router 650 sme memory management f type table type either i ref reference table act action table symsymbol table txt text str
200. a local or remote network node Syntax Example rgetr X X X X community X X X X optional is the IP address of the local or remote node in dotted decimal notation If you omit this field an IP address on the local router will be used community optional is the name of the SNMP community that grants access to that node If you omit the name public is Using the Network Control Language Accessing the Internet Management Information Base used If you include a name the IP address must also be included rgetr 192 32 1 94 Displays the MIB IP routing table for the node whose IP address iS 192 32 1 94 with subnet mask 255 255 255 224 Destination 192 192 192 192 192 32 32 32 32 32 1 32 1 64 1 160 10 0 1 0 Mtr N N PP PB 192 192 192 192 192 32 32 32 32 32 Next Hop L 193 94 193 193 193 T P R R D L R L R R R R Age 23 12846 12850 25 26 N N N FP N 9T spuewuop TON 16 45 16 46 Using the Network Control Language Accessing the Internet Management Information Base The fields in the table are as follows Destination lists the destination subnetwork address in dotted decimal notation Mtr lists the hop count plus cost to Destination Next Hop lists the address in dotted decimal notation of the next hop T lists the route type as follows D a local route to a directly connected subnetwork I an invalid rout
201. achable Node Reach Chg Node aa nnnn Unreachable Meaning The previously reachable node whose area and node address are aa nnnn has become unreachable Pkt Fmt Err CG ccg ffffffffffff node aa nnnn Meaning The DECnet router received a partially correct packet from node aa nnnn over circuit group ccg ffffffffffff is the hexadecimal representation of the first six bytes of the packet remote SMDS address invalid for DRS Area XX Node YY Meaning Action The SMDS address in the entry in the DE Cnet Routing Service DRS Remote Address Map for DECnet Area XX system YY is invalid An SMDS address is 10 digits in length and each digit must be in the range 0 to 9 Modify the configuration to correct the SMDS address in the appropriate DECnet Address Map entry 17 77 Event Log Messages drs DECnet Event Messages Routing Pkt CG ccg Highest aa nnnn Adj aa nnnn Meaning An adjacent router is configured with an area and or node number greater than the values for which the router is configured Adj contains the source address of the packet Highest contains the faulty address data contained in the packet 17 78 Event Log M essages egp Exterior Gatew ay Protocol Event Messages egp Exterior Gateway Protocol Event Messages 4T These event messages are generated by the system variable egp the Exterior Gateway Protocol s pess Ww 601 u44 Already enabled Meaning An already
202. acket within 20 seconds and ipxwan then timed out 17 93 4T 601 343 s pess Ww Event Log Messages ipx IPX Router Event Messages ipx ipxwan Internal Netw ork Number not unique Meaning 1PXWAN detected the same Internal Network Number configured on both sides of the link Action Modify the configuration Change the IPX Internal Network Number to be unique ipx ccg ipxwanis up Meaning IPXWAN exchange was successful and IPXWAN is up on this interface ipx ipxwan out of pkt buffers Meaning Out of packet buffers ipx ipxwan Routing Type Not Accepted Meaning Routing protocol RIP NLSP not accepted by the router ipx ccg ipxwan slave timed out Meaning IPXWAN exchange did not conclude in 60 seconds and ipx then timed out ipx ipxwan Timer Response received by slave Meaning Router has been selected to be a slave and received an incorrect timer response packet ipx ccg ipxwan trying to connect not configured Meaning Remote router requesting IPXWAN connection IPXWAN not configured on the router Action Configure IPXWAN on the router 17 94 Event Log M essages ipx IPX Router Event Messages ipx ccg New Rt to ipxnetvia ipx address 4T Meaning The IPX routing module generates a new event message whenever it learns a new route or updates an existing route The new route is specified by i pxnet which is the destination network to w
203. action is necessary cct identifies the SMDS circuit invalid SMDS ARP group address for cct Meaning The SMDS Address Resolution Protocol ARP group address in the SMDS circuit record for cct is invalid An SMDS address is ten digits in length and each digit must be in the range of 0 to 9 Action Modify the configuration invalid SMDS group address for cct Meaning A group address in the SMDS circuit record for cct is invalid An SMDS address is ten digits in length and each digit must be in the range of 0 to 9 Action Modify the configuration 17 122 Event Log M essages SMDS Event Messages invalid SMDS individual address for cct x Meaning The individual address in the SMDS circuit record for cct is invalid An SMDS address is ten digits in length and each digit must be in the range 2m of Oto 9 5 Action Modify the configuration 8 Madr_table is full Meaning The station Address Table Madr_table is out of space The station address table is a hash table that contains station addresses used by the router no SMDS Address for DRS area XX node YY Meaning An attempt was made to transmit a DE Cnet Routing Service DRS packet to DE Cnet area XX system YY but no DE Cnet Address Map record exists that specifies which remote SMDS address should be used for the packet Action Modify the configuration to add the appropriate DE Cnet Address Map entry Smds_bridge_table is full Meaning
204. address Lists the number of received frames that were flooded by the bridge Flooding indicates 1 that the bridge had not learned the destination address at the time of packet reception or 2 the packet contained a multicast address Lists the number of received frames that were dropped by the bridge Reasons for dropping packets include but are not limited to 1 the packet is local to the circuit 2 the packet was directed to a blocked port and 3 protocol source address filtering Lists the total for each of the above counts for all circuit groups ST SONSNEIS SU82319S 15 8 Using the Statistic Screens Buffers Usage Statistics Screen Buffers Usage Statistics Screen The Buffers Usage Statistics screen always available summarizes the allocation usage and availability of global memory buffers within the router Global memory contains two types of buffers message and packet Message buffers are used for inter process communications internal to the router Packet buffers are used for external network communications by temporarily storing incoming or outgoing data packets SAMPLE_CONFIG 6 Jan 1991 23 10 17 SESSION 1 MGR MODE Buffers Usage Statistics NAME MSG miss init free min PKT miss init free min TOTAL 198 184 161 376 277 178 PRESS r for reset Down Up lt to exit Figure 15 3 Buffers Usage Statistics Scre
205. age 4 26 Retry Timer T1 4 28 Use UPAP 4 28 Window Size 4 29 XCVR signal polling Adapter Record Alarm Timer AppleTalk multicast DLCI ARP Group Address ARP multicast DLCI Auto Enable Circuit Parameters Parameters and Options Parameters and Options Displays a screen with parameters for configuring a V 25bis circuit For additional information refer to Connect When Sets the time interval between issuing a Status Enquiry or Full Status Enquiry message and the receipt of a Link Verification or Full Status Report from a Frame Relay DCE The timer value must be less than or equal to the value selected for Poll Interval Default 10 Range 5 to 30 Refer to Multicast Support on page 4 22 Accepts an IP address resolution multicast address Enter a 10 digit decimal address to be used for IP address resolution broadcasts or leave blank if the SMDS circuit does not carry IP traffic Refer to Multicast Support on page 4 22 Enables or disables the initial state of the LAN circuit This circuit specific Auto Enable parameter works in conjunction with the global Auto Enable parameter found on the Global Parameters screen in the System configuration menu to enable or disable the LAN circuit when the router boots When the global Auto Enable parameter is set to No the setting of the circuit specific Auto Enable parameter is unconditionally disabled When the global Auto Enable parameter is s
206. agement Information Base Variables config Configuration Information Base Pathnames for the List and Get commands are constructed as shown in the following examples get config version 0 list config key list config cct_table get config ip_table ip iftbl_entry get 35 14 1 3 cct Version version 0 contains the operating code version number also known as software or firmware For example a software version such as A 08 01 is described as follows A the function set available in your router 08 the common release number 01 updates to the current common release Key The Key variables inform you of whether a particular variable can be configured on the router For each of the variables a A value of 1 means the service can be configured A value of 0 means the service is not available for configuration on this model router at AppleTalk routing service drs DECnet routing service fr Frame Relay circuit services ip IP routing service the TCP IP protocol suite ipx IPX routing service Management Information Base Variables config Configuration Information Base Ib Bridge service osi OSI routing smds SMDS services x25 X 25 circuit services xns XNS routing service Circuit Table ST cct_indx cct circuit number cct_type cct circuit type cct_name cct circuit name such as Ether 1 seg UOnBUWOjU quowbHeuep cct_slot cct slot number cct_pam cct physical access method cc
207. ains the number of specifically routed frames dropped on circuit group ccg because the bridge was not contained in the routing path srf_fwd contains the number of specifically routed frames forwarded on circuit group ccg srf_rx contains the number of specifically routed frames received on circuit group ccg 18 77 18 78 M anagement Information Base Variables lb Bridge Information Base xmit contains the number of packets transmitted by circuit group ccg xmit_cfg contains the number of configuration BPDUs sent by circuit group ccg xmit_tcn contains the number of topology change notification BPDUs sent by circuit group ceg Management Information Base Variables Ibmib Bridge Address Table Information Base lomib Bridge Address Table Information Base The bridge address table Ibmib information base contains data on the forwarding and filtering of bridge frames Use NCL s Rgetb command to access the Ibmib address table The structure is the following Ibmib fwdtable 5 entry 3 variables listed below F count co O riftable f rifentry R variables listed below The variables are listed alphabetically address contains a station MAC level or physical address of a connected LAN device expressed as a 12 digit hexadecimal number cg contains the name of the circuit group that provides a connection to address dst contains the disposition of frames containing address in the destination a
208. al message to all of the attached routers Select this option if the current interface connects to an OSPF broadcast type media Point to Point Connects a pair of OSPF routers that is it connects the router to a remote peer or to a packet switched network such as Telenet or the DDN Select this option if the current interface connects to a remote peer 7 14 Non Broadcast M ulti Access Internet Address IP Address IP Address high Options IP Address low Options IP Dest high Options Internet Protocol IP Parameters Parameters and Options Supports multiple more than two routers but does not provide the ability to address a single physical message to all routers An example is a public switched packet network Accepts the IP Internet Protocol address of the remote router port for the destination network Enter the address in dotted decimal notation Identifies the Internet Protocol address for an interface in dotted decimal notation Sets the upper boundary of the IP address range when creating an IP address list Leave this field blank and enter the IP address in the IP Address low field if you are filtering a single IP address Enter the highest IP address in the range if you are filtering a range of IP addresses For more information refer to IP Address low To learn how to apply a IP Address list to a filter refer to IP Dest low and IP Source low Sets the lower bo
209. al clock must be the same for ports WAN3 amp WAN4 Meaning On an HP Router 650 synchronous lines using connectors WAN1 and WAN2 share the same clock signal generator Thus when using internal clocking on WAN1 and WAN2 the Clock Speed parameter in the lines configuration must have the same value for both connectors The Clock Speed parameter is meaningless when Clock Source for the line is set to External 17 63 Action Event Log Messages dev Device Event Messages Reconfigure both lines to have the same clock speed Internal clock must be the same on all ports Meaning Action On all HP series 200 and 400 routers all synchronous lines share the same clock signal generator Thus when using internal clocking on more than one line the Clock Speed parameter in the lines configuration must have the same value for those lines The Clock Speed parameter is not used when the clock source for the line is set to External Reconfigure both lines to have the same clock speed Internal clock set to speed Meaning Action Invalid MFS dflt 2 Meaning Action Invalid N2 dflt 16 Meaning Action 17 64 This is a progress message indicating what clock speed was chosen for the indicated line The chosen speed is not what was configured because the line shares a clock signal generator with another line For an HP Router 650 lines using connectors WAN1 and WAN2 share a clock signal generator and li
210. al of the lost signal before transmitting more data In this case data transmission resumes when the remote end of the connection receives the next XON signal Sets the number of seconds to wait for data mode and clear to send and receiver ready signals after asserting request to send and terminal ready signals Default 60 0 1 5 10 15 20 25 30 60 120 255 Note The router waits forever for the modem to connect when the parameter setting is 0 zero Sets the wait period in seconds for the Console port after the modem disconnects and before the modem reconnects 1 7 Options Modem Lost Receive Ready Time Parity Options Options Screen Refresh Rate Session Mode Stop Bits 1 8 Options Telnet User Global and Session Parameters Parameters and Options Default 0 5 0 5 1 5 10 15 20 30 60 Sets the number of milliseconds the receiver ready signal drops before the router disconnects the modem attached to the Console port This is a form of debouncing the receiver ready signal Default 400 0 25 50 100 200 400 800 1600 2550 Note The modem waits forever when the time period is set to 0 zero Assigns a value to the eighth bit of each ASCII character transmitted by the router Match your console s requirements Default None no parity None Even Odd Note Most terminals do not operate with an odd or even parity if Bit Char is set to 8 Matches the vertical frequ
211. ameters Parameters and Options Leave this field blank and enter the XNS network number in the Dest Network low field if you are filtering a single XNS destination network numbers Enter the highest XNS network number in the range if you are filtering a range of XNS destination network number Leave this field blank and enter the name of the Network list in the Dest Network low field if you want to use a Network list to establish the upper and lower range of XNS destination network numbers For additional information refer to Dest Network low later in this chapter For more information about Network lists refer to Network Number high and Network Number low later in this chapter Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering an XNS packet based on the contents of its destination network field Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter XNS destination networks a Enter the XNS network number in this field and leave the Dest Network high field blank if you are filtering a single XNS destination network number a Enter the lowest XNS network number in this field and enter the highest network number in the Dest Network high field if you are filtering a range of XNS destination network numbers a Enter the Host list name in this field and leave the Dest Host high field blank if you want to use a Host list to establish the upper and lower range of destination host numbers For additi
212. an use the NCL List command to diaplay all or a part of the event log information base and the NCL Get command to obtain the value of any variable within the information base The MIB number for log is 57 The structure is log variable listed below ST table entry text listed below Examples of the pathname are as follows list log list 57 list log bootpoint seg UOnBUWOjU quowumbeuep get log get log bootpoint get 57 2 bootpoint 0 contains the event number of the first event that occured on this router when it was booted events 0 contains the number of events that have occured on this router lastevent 0 contains the last event message to occur on this router maxtablesize 0 contains the maximuim number of events the log can hold table entry text event is only available through SNMP It contains the event message for event number event get log table entry text get 57 4 1 1 18 81 18 82 M anagement Information Base Variables mem Memory Information Base mem Memory Information Base The memory mem information base contains variables that describe system memory management The structure is the following mem slot always 1 for an HP Series 200 or 400 router 1 to 5 on an HP Router 650 type either local or global both with the same variables vari ables listed below The pathname is constructed as follows mem slot typevari able The variables a
213. and Options Determines the initial state of the LAPB circuit The LAPB specific Auto Enable parameter works in conjunction with the global Auto Enable parameter based on the following criteria When global Auto Enable is No the LAPB circuit identified by Circuit Name is unconditionally disabled the LAPB specific Auto Enable parameter is disabled when the global Auto Enable parameter is disabled When global Auto Enable is Yes the LAPB circuit is conditionally enabled the LAPB specific Auto Enable parameter can be enabled or disabled when global Auto Enable is enabled Default Yes Automatically enables the LAPB circuit when the global Auto Enable parameter is enabled Automatically disables the LAPB circuit when the global Auto Enable parameter is enabled Then to enable the circuit after the router boots use the NCL Interpreter s Enable command Note The LAPB specific Auto Enable parameter should be set to an applicable setting regardless if the global Auto Enable parameter is enabled If the global Auto Enable parameter is later enabled the current setting for the LAPB specific Auto Enable parameter takes effect Identifies IP Address as a possible recipient of broadcast messages X 25 forwards broadcast messages to IP Address X 25 does not forward broadcast messages Sets the interval between call request packets to a specific destination In the event of an unsuccessful call attempt for example the call
214. anization Codes leave this field blank f you are filtering a single Protocol D Organization Code enter the Protocol D Organization Code in this field and leave the Protocol ID Org Code high field blank 6 17 Protocol Type SAP high SAP low 6 18 Bridge Parameters Parameters and Options Options Options f you are filtering a range of Protocol ID Organization Codes enter the lowest Protocol ID Organization Code in this field and enter the highest Protocol D Organization Code in the Protocol ID Org Code high field a f you are establishing the range of Protocol ID Organization Codes with a filter list enter the name of a Protocol D Organization Code list in this field and leave the Protocol ID Org Code high field blank For more information refer to Protocol D Org Code high Note The Protocol ID Org Code low parameter is also displayed when creating a Protocol D Organization Code list Determines the protocol to filter Enter the 12 digit hexadecimal protocol type value identifying the protocol to relay to a specific circuit Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering a frame based on the contents of its source service access points SSAP or destination service access points DSAP The SAP low and SAP high parameters are displayed when creating a SAP filter list Leave this field blank and enter the source or destination service access point in the SAP
215. ank if you are filtering a single XNS destination socket Enter the lowest XNS socket number in this field and enter the highest socket 9 Ss number in the Socket Host high field if you are filtering a range of XNS gu destination sockets i ag Enter the Socket list name in this field and leave the Dest Socket high field blank if you want to use a Socket list to establish the upper and lower range of destination socket numbers For additional information refer to Socket Host high earlier in this chapter F or more information about Host lists refer to Socket high and Socket low later in this chapter Determines whether a packet is dropped or relayed filtered based on the contents of a packet field and a range established by a matching set of low and high parameters The packet field and corresponding low and high parameters are listed in the following table Packet Field XNS Parameter Destination Host Dest Host low and Dest Host high Destination Network Dest Network low and Dest Network high Destination Socket Dest Socket low and Dest Socket high Packet Type Packet Type low and Packet Type high Source Host Source Host low and Source Host high Source Network Source Network low and Source Network high Source Socket Source Socket low and Source Socket high Default Ignore Don tMatch Applies the filtering action drop accept log if the contents of the packet field do n
216. as specified in RFC 1293 Default No Disables InARP Enables InARP Specifies the link level control It always must remain set to LLC1 the default for 802 3 802 5 and Point to Point circuits Default LLC1 Allows the router to automatically detect the link level control and to set the link level control accordingly Remote Address LLC1 LLC2 X 25 Remote LAN Address Remote Signal and Sense Inactive Active Circuit Parameters Parameters and Options Datagram service best effort delivery Reliable service provides link level control that includes error detection and error recovery by retransmission For more information refer to these parameters Retry Counter Retry Timer Connect Retries Link Idle Timer Modulus Directs the router to use the link level control associated with X 25 This should be set in conjunction with a circuit type of LAPB X 25 Accepts a unique decimal value from 00 to 99 Be sure to reverse local and remote address values when you configure the device at the other end of the Point to Point circuit Default 07 Range 00 to 99 Accepts the MAC address of the destination pass thru circuit This parameter appears when the Data Link Layer protocol parameter is set to Pass Thru Enables transmission of periodic messages by the router software to the remote router The messages are sent at 10 second intervals to verify end to end connectivity on the circuit This is a prop
217. ase drop frag_error contains the number of IP datagrams dropped by interface ip interface because of its inability to fragment a datagram ip interface forwards datagrams up to 1500 bytes in length longer datagrams must be fragmented Should the datagram originator forbid fragmenting by setting the DF bit Do Not Fragment in the IP header interface ip address drops the datagram incre ments this counter and issues an Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP destination unreachable message drop header format contains the number of IP datagrams dropped by interface ip address because of an unparsable or corrupt IP header ST drop reassembly_ busy contains the number of IP datagrams dropped by interface ip interface because of the lack of resources at the message destination drop ttl_ exceeded contains the number of IP datagrams dropped by interface ip interface because the IP header Time field had reached 0 seg UOnBUWUOjU quowumbeuep drop xsumerror contains the number of IP datagrams dropped by interface ip interface because of a faulty IP header checksum icmp_rx dest_unreachable contains the number of ICMP destination unreachable messages received by interface ip address Such messages indicate that the originating node cannot route or deliver datagrams icmp_rx echo request contains the number of ICMP echo request messages received by interface ip address Such messages test whether a destination node is reachable
218. at Ethernet Type low high Effect Action 1 User Defined Fields Header Offset Length Effect 1 Values Low Value hex High Value hex 2 Outgoing Circuit Group Assignment Circuit Group Name 3 Circuit Group Load Balancing Circuit Group Name 1 Load Balancing Definitions 1 Load Balancing Selections Protocol Type Circuit Name 4 Source Route Bridge IDs Bridge ID hex 5 Translational Bridge Aging Timer min Default Conversion Type 1 Alternate Conversion List MAC Address A Parameter Finder A 15 J pu 4 JTO pureed A Parameter Finder 7 DoD Internet Router 7 DoD Internet Router Auto Enable RIP Network Diameter Management Priority Global Broadcast Mode Drop Non Local Arp Suppress Authentication Traps 1 Lists 1 IP Address Lists List Name 1 List Members IP Address low IP Address high 2 IP Port Lists List Name IP Port low IP Port high 2 Network Interface Definition Internet Address Subnet Mask Circuit Group Receive Broadcast Transmit Broadcast Address Resolution Normal ARP Proxy ARP Host Cache UDP Checksum RIP Supply RIP Listen A 16 7 DoD Internet Router Continued 2 Network Interface Definition Continued Default Route Supply Default Route Listen Poisoned Reverse RIP Interface Cost Address Mask Reply MTU Discovery Option Load Balancing ASB Flood Source Route Token Ring 1 Traffic Filters Precedence IP Dest low IP Dest high Effect IP Source low IP S
219. at node If you omit the name public is used If you include a name the IP address must also be included Example rgetb 15 2 1 94 Displays the bridge forwarding filtering table for the node whose IP address is 15 2 1 94 Physical Addr srce Dst CctGrp IF 080009000411 F F Ether1G 1 0800098333ab F F WAN1G 1 The fields in the table are as follows Physical Addr lists the station also called physical or MAC addresses learned by the bridge Src lists the disposition of frames containing Physical Addr in the source address field of the Ethernet frame as follows F forwarded D dropped 9T Dst lists the disposition of frames whose destination is Physical Addr F forwarded D dropped spuewuop TON CctGrp lists the circuit group connected to Physical Addr e IF lists the sequential number the router assigned to the network interface that corresponds to CctGrp 16 59 16 60 Using the Network Control Language Accessing Bridging and Routing Tables Rgetd Displaying the DE Cnet Router Configuration Table Use NCL s Rgetd command to format and display the DECnet router configuration table for a local or remote HP router Syntax rgetd X X X X community X X X X optional is the IP address of the local or remote router in dotted decimal notation If you omit this field an IP address on the local router will be used community optional is the name of the SNMP community that grants access t
220. ayers 18 FRAME LEVEL An RR with Poll Bit set is The link is not polled when it has KEEP_ALIVE generated when the link has been been idle idle for 2 seconds In the absence of DCE response normal retry and link recovery procedures will be initiated 17 X 25 The 1984 version of X 25 is The 1980 version of X 25 is supported supported 16 ADDRESS The local X 121 address is not The local X 121 address is included SUPPRESSION included in any call packet sent in all locally originated call packets from the device 15 LINE RESTART A RESTART packet is transmitted Frame Level establishment does not whenever Frame Level is generate a RESTART packet established 14 DATAPAC Enables special DATAPAC Disables special DATAPAC facilities FACILITIES facilities checking checking 13 UNASSIGNED X 25 clears calls received on an X 25 ignores calls received on an LCN invalid LCN invalid LCN 12 CLEAR LENGTH X 25 rejects CLEAR INDICATION X 25 accepts CLEAR INDICATION and CLEAR CONFIRMATION and CLEAR CONFIRMATION packets if they contain facilitiesor packets even if they contain user data facilities or user data 11 TIMER DIAG If a T20 3 minutes timeout If a T20 timeout occurs a RESTART occurs a RESTART packet is retransmitted with the original diagnostic code packet is retransmitted with a T20 Expired diagnostic code 13 13 X 25 Service Parameters Parameters and Options Table 13 1 X 25 PDN Parameter Bitmap Argument Values
221. ber of packets in the circuit s DLS receive ring This statistic exists only on the routing engine for HP series 600 routers There is a DLS receive ring per circuit The circuit s DLS RX ring is filled by the routing engine as it pulls global packet buffer pointers from the interface module that owns the circuit seg UOnBWOjU quowbHeuep rx_dma_drops These are the number of received packets dropped by an interface module due to global packet memory congestion that is lack of global packet buffers This situation occurs when the routing engine cannot keep up with the aggregate packet input rate The inter face module sees that the RE is out of global buffers so it drops the incoming packets test_cmd_rx contains the number of 802 2 Logical Link Control LLC Test commands received by circuit cct Test commands seek to provide a basic verification of the LLC to LLC transmission path The value contained in this variable should equal the value contained in test_rsp_tx test_cmd_tx contains the number of 802 2 Logical Link Control LLC Test commands issued on circuit cct The value contained in this vari able should be 0 as should the value of test_rsp_rx 18 55 18 56 M anagement Information Base Variables dis Data Link Services Information Base test_rsp_rx contains the number of 802 2 Logical Link Control LLC Test responses received by circuit cct Receipt of a Test response requires the previous transmission of a Test c
222. ber of times the link has been set up Link_UpTime contains how long the link has been up since the router has been booted lowpri_congestion contains the number of low priority packets dropped due to congestion lowpri_tx contains the number of low priority packets transmitted without error mac_addr contains the 12 digit hexadecimal representation of the 48 bit station address used by circuit cct merr contains the number of memory errors A memory error indicates that the link level controller after becoming bus master failed to receive a ready signal within 256 increments of the system clock after asserting a memory address on the data address bus A memory error disables the link level controller normpri_congestion contains the number of normal priority packets dropped due to congestion normpri_tx contains the number of normal priority packets transmitted without error octets rx_ok contains the number of octets bytes received without error by circuit cct octets _rx_per_sec contains the number of octets that this circuit has received in the last second octets tx_ok contains the number of octets bytes transmitted without error by circuit cet Management Information Base Variables cct Circuits Information Base octets _tx_per_sec contains the number of octets that this circuit has transmitted in the last second oflo rx contains the total number of overflows on circuit cet An overflow occurs when the receive
223. ber of times the token ring adapter transmitted or received beacon frames to or from the ring The beacon processor is used to recover the ring after a ringstation has sensed a hard error which renders the ring inoperable Hard errors are caused by 1 wire faults 2 frequency errors or 3 incoming signal loss The station that detects such a hard error transmits or beacons informa tion that isolates the failure location ring lobe wire contains the number of times the token ring adapter detected a short or open circuit between the adapter and the wire concentrator ring_one_station contains the number of times the token ring adapter sensed that it was the only station on the ring ring_recover contains the number of times the token ring adapter observed claim token frames on the ring A ring station transmits a 18 39 18 40 M anagement Information Base Variables cct Circuits Information Base claim token frame when it detects that the ring does not contain an active monitor or that the active monitor is not functioning properly ring_rem_station contains the number of times the token ring adapter removed itself from the ring after receiving a remove ring station frame A remove ring station frame is issued from the network manager and forces an adapter to remove itself from the ring ring sig loss contains the number of times the token ring adapter detected a loss of signal on the ring ring soft_err contains the nu
224. ble ST node_out_of_range contains the number of packets dropped by the DECnet router because the destination node resided in an area having a number greater than that designated by the Max Area parameter or because the destination node number exceeded that designated by the Max Nodes parameter seg UOnBUWUOjU quowmbHeuep oversized_pkt_loss contains the number of packets dropped by the DECnet router because the packet size exceeded the capacity of the transmission media pkt_format_error contains the number of packets dropped by the DECnet router because some portion of the packet header could not be parsed route_update_loss contains the number of topology packets dropped by the DECnet router because the packet contained information beyond the router s capacity 18 59 18 60 M anagement Information Base Variables echo Echo Service Information Base echo Echo Service Information Base The TCP echo information base contains variables that describe the Transmission Control Protocol echo service The structure is the following echo vari ables listed below The pathname is constructed as follows echo variable The variables are listed alphabetically mem_err contains the number of memory errors mem_use contains the total number of bytes used by the echo service no mem contains the number of times echo was unable to function because of lack of memory resources rx_bytes contains the total number
225. ble six octets of destination address information six octets of source address information and two octets of packet length information to the unchecksummed IPX packet It appends a four octet frame check sequence to the packet Displays a screen with parameters for creating a Host list For information about creating a Host list refer to Host Number low and Host Number high later in this chapter For information about assigning the Host list to a filter refer to Dest Host low and Source Host low Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering IPX source or destination hosts when creating a Host list Leave this field blank and enter the IPX host number in the Host Number low field if you are filtering a single IPX source or destination host a Enter the highest IPX host number in the range if you are filtering a range of IPX source or destination hosts For additional information refer to Host Number low later in this chapter To learn how to assign a Host list to a filter refer to Dest Host low and Source Host low Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering IPX source or destination hosts when creating a Host list Enter the IPX host number in this field and leave the Host Number high field blank if you are filtering a single IPX source or destination host Enter the lowest IPX host number in this field and enter the highest host number in the Host Numb
226. bled in your configuration This screen summarizes DE Cnet traffic volume for each circuit group To see more detailed DE Cnet statistics maintained by the router you can use the NCL Get command SAMPLE_CONFIG 6 Jan 1991 28 53 80 DECnet Router Statistics NAME FRAMES Receive Forward Drop gt 1 etherig B B B Z tokenig 2 2 2 3 wanig B 2 2 4 wanzg B B B TOTAL B B B PRESS r for reset Down Up lt to exit Figure 15 5 DECnet Router Statistics Screen Using the Statistic Screens DECnet Router Statistics Screen Categories on the DECnet Router Statistics screen are the following NAME Receive Forward Drop TOTAL Lists each DECnet circuit group by name Lists the number of data frames received on the circuit group Lists the number of data frames transmitted on the circuit group Lists the number of data frames dropped by the router Lists the total for each of the above counts for all DE Cnet circuit groups ST SONSNEIS SU823 19S 15 13 Using the Statistic Screens DoD IP Router Statistics Screen DoD IP Router Statistics Screen The DoD IP Router Statistics screen is available if DoD Internet IP routing is enabled in your configuration This screen summarizes traffic volume for each IP network interface SAMPLE_CONFIG 6 Jan 1991 21 81 52 DoD IP Router Statistics NAME PACKETS Receive Transmit Deliver Dropped gt 1 15 8 129 97 489 107 316
227. c more evenly between segments The delay time is X minutes Meaning X minutes is the delay time request by the terminal adapter on the DLC indication Disabled LLC2 retries exhausted Meaning Action The circuit indicated in the object field of the event message has been disabled because the router was unable to obtain positive acknowledgment of an outstanding frame after a sequence of retransmission attempts The number of such attempts is governed by the Retry Counter N2 Retry Timer T1 and Connect Retries LLC2 parameters Verify point to point connectivity DLCI too large for interface XXX Meaning 17 28 DLCI values exceeding that which could be fit into the length specified during config uration Primarily this will happen if there is no management interface selected and PVCs are hand configured with large DLCls XXX identifies the DLC which is too large DLCI XXX not within range not added Meaning DRSCP is down Meaning DRSCP is up Meaning Event Log M essages cct Circuit Event Messages 4T For the indicated frame relay circuit a DLCI value was added that was not within the range of valid values for the specified type and length XXX identifies the DLCI in error soBessop 6o7 WweAR For the indicated PPP circuit DE Cnet Routing Service Control Protocol DRSCP is down For the indicated PPP circuit DE Cnet Routing Service Control Protocol DRSCP is up
228. cal or remote router in dotted decimal notation If you omit this field an IP address on the local router will be used community optional is the name of the SNMP community that grants access to that node If you omit the name public is used If you include a name the IP address must also be included Example rgetatr 15 2 1 94 Displays the AppleTalk router configuration table for the node with IP address 15 2 1 94 Destination Next Hop Hop IF 100 109 100 38 0 3 120 129 129 47 2 2 160 160 160 37 0 2 180 180 180 232 2 2 200 200 200 147 2 2 600 600 600 83 1 2 The fields in the table are as follows Destination lists the destination network range Next Hop lists the AppleTalk node address the network number and node identifier pair of the next hop router Hop lists the hop count to Destination IF lists the number the router assigned to the network interface for Next Hop Using the Network Control Language Accessing Bridging and Routing Tables Rgetb Displaying the Bridge Forwarding F iltering Table Use NCL s Rgetb command to format and display the bridge forwarding filtering table for a local or remote HP or Wellfleet router Syntax rgetb X X X X community X X X X optional is the IP address of the local or remote router in dotted decimal notation If you omit this field an IP address on the local router will be used community optional is the name of the SNMP community that grants access to th
229. call fails or it rejects the router command Refer to the terminal adapter manual for the meaning of the XX error code issued adapter not responding with CTS line Meaning Action The router has timed out while waiting for the adapter to set Clear To Send When the router first enables the line it will wait for either the connection time or 255 seconds if the Connection Time is set to 0 for the adapter to bring up Clear To Send Check the connection between the adapter and the router Also check the adapter documentation to be sure it is configured properly Increase the Connection Time parameter as necessary 17 19 Event Log Messages cct Circuit Event Messages Attempt to init FR on inactive cct Meaning The indicated frame relay circuit is not active yet there was an attempt to initialize the circuit This is an internal problem and cannot be corrected by the user Bad Address option combination Meaning In the indicated frame relay circuit the selected combination of addressing encoding and address length is not compatible Allowable combinations are Q921 TWO BYTE only Q922 March 90 TWO BYTE only Q922 November 90 TWO BYTE THREE BYTE FOUR BYTE Q922 TWO BYTE TWO CONTROL THREE BYTE THREE CONTROL FOUR BYTE Action Modify the configuration so that the address encoding and address length are compatible bad configuration file Meaning The configuration has an inconsistency or error Action C
230. ccessing Bridging and Routing Tables Rgetata Displaying the AARP Table Use NCL s Rgetata command to format and display the AppleTalk Address Resolution Protocol AARP table for alocal or remote HP router Syntax rgetata X X X X community X X X X optional is the IP address of the local or remote router in dotted decimal notation If you omit this field an IP address on the local router will be used community optional is the name of the SNMP community that grants access to that node If you omit the name public is used If you include a name the IP address must also be included Example rgetata 15 2 1 94 Displays the AARP table for the node whose IP address is 15 2 1 94 NetNode Phys Address IF 102 3 080009000411 3 160 147 0800098333ab 12 The fields in the table are as follows a Net Node lists the AppleTalk node address network number and node identifier Phys Address lists the station or physical or MAC address of Net Node a IF lists the sequential number the router assigned to the network interface for Net Node 9T spuewruop TON 16 57 16 58 Using the Network Control Language Accessing Bridging and Routing Tables Rgetatr Displaying the AppleTalk Routing Table Use NCL s Rgetatr command to format and display the AppleTalk routing table for a local or remote HP or Wellfleet router Syntax rgetatr X X X X community X X X X optional is the IP address of the lo
231. ccttbl entry o_sent cct ddd 36 26 2 1 7cct ddd where cct indicates the circuit and ddd indicates the dlci state Indicates whether the particular circuit is operational These entries are created by the Data Link Connection Management exchange There are three possible values for this entry Invalid 1 is used to delete an entry manually ST Active 2 is an indication that the circuit is up and ready for use Inactive 3 is used to show that the circuit is present but not ready for use exmib fr ccttbl entry state cct ddd 36 26 2 1 3 cct ddd where cct indicates the circuit and ddd indicates the dlci seg UONBWOjU quowbHeuep Frame Relay Error Table Variables This table describes errors encountered on the Frame Relay interface It is indexed by circuit number The error table variables in alphabetical order are as follows data Isan octet string containing as much of the error packet as possible As a minimum it must contain the two octets of the DLCI exmib fr errtbl entry data cct 36 26 3 1 3 cct where cct indicates the circuit index Isthe index into the error table that corresponds to the circuit number exmib fr errtbl entry index cct 36 26 3 1 1 cct where cct indicates the circuit 18 29 18 30 M anagement Information Base Variables cct Circuits Information Base time Is the value of sysUpTime at which the error was detected exmib fr errtbl entry time cct 36 26 3 1 4 cct
232. cedure call_cfm_tx contains the number of CALL ACCEPTED packets transmitted by X 25 circuit cct A CALL ACCEPTED packet indicates readiness to accept an incoming call and generates a CALL CONNECTED packet at the remote end of the circuit call_rx contains the number of INCOMING CALL packets received by X 25 circuit cct An INCOMING CALL packet indicates that a remote node is attempting to establish a connection ST call_tx contains the number of CALL REQUEST packets transmitted by X 25 circuit cct A CALL REQUEST packet initiates the call setup procedure and generates an INCOMING CALL packet at the remote end of the circuit seg UONBUWOjU quowumbeuep clear_cfm_rx contains the number of CLEAR CONFIRMATION packets received by X 25 circuit cct ACLEAR CONFIRMATION packet acknowledges that the previously requested clear action has been implemented clear_cfm_tx contains the number of CLEAR CONFIRMATION packets transmitted by X 25 circuit cct ACLEAR CONFIRMATION packet acknowledges that the previously requested clear action has been implemented clear_rx contains the number of CLEAR INDICATION packets received by X 25 circuit cct A CLEAR INDICATION packet acknow ledges the receipt of aCLEAR REQUEST packet clear_tx contains the number of CLEAR REQUEST packets transmitted by X 25 circuit cct A CLEAR REQUEST packet disconnects the virtual circuit diagnostic_rx contains the number of DIAGNOSTIC packets received by X 25 cir
233. ces dls DECnet router drs DECnet routing table decnet Device drivers uses slot driver Event log information base log Experimental M IB for future use exmib Exterior Gatew ay Protocol egp Hardware uses slot hw HP network management hpnm IP router ip IP Internet standard M IB mib IPX router ipx Key key M emory uses slot mem Name server uses slot name OSPF ospf Port module manager pm Router operating kernel rok Simple Network M anagement Protocol snmp System M anager mgr System services SVC uses slot SVC Telnet telnet Time Protocol timep Timers use slot timer Transmission Control Protocol tcp Continued on Next Page Command Get identifier List identifier Reset identifier Using the Network Control Language Accessing the Management Information Base Managed Objects Table continued Name TCP echo service Trivial File Transfer Protocol V 25 bis XNS router X 25 echo tftp isdn XIX x25 The MIB commands are Function Display on the console the value of a MIB variable page 16 34 Display on the console a variable or part of the M IB structure page 16 35 Reset the value of a MIB variable to 0 page 16 39 16 33 9T spuewuop TON Using the Network Control Language Accessing the Management Information Base Get Displaying the Value of a MIB Variable Use NCL s Get command to display the value of a MIB variable on the router You need to specify th
234. cg No action is required The AppleTalk router ignores any zone names beyond the maximum value of ten Cfg Zone name greater than 32 chars Meaning Action AppleTalk zone names must be lt 32 characters in length An illegal default zone event or an illegal zone name event will follow to show the invalid zone name Use Quick Configuration or the Configuration Editor to correct the zone name 17 9 Event Log Messages at AppleTalk Event Messages ccg enabled with netw ork range X Y Meaning The circuit group specified by ccg is enabled and connected to the attached medium whose range of network numbers is X to Y ccg enabled with node address X Y Meaning The circuit group specified by ccgis enabled with the node address X Y where X is the network number and Y is the node identifier Circuit Group record not configured for cg X Meaning The configuration does not contain a circuit group record for the circuit group identified by X where X is the system assigned interface number that identifies the circuit group Action First use NCL s Get command in the form get cct X to obtain the circuit group name with associated statistics Then verify and or reconfigure the circuit group Forcing AARP probing for cg ccg Meaning The circuit group specified by ccgwas configured with AARP Probe disabled In completing the configuration of this circuit group however you did not specify a no
235. cghas been configured as a seed port No response was entered however to the Default Zone Name parameter Action Configure the Default Zone Name parameter for the circuit group Cfg Illegal construction in Zone name Meaning The zone name has a bad xx hex construction An illegal default zone event or an illegal zone name event will follow in the Event Log to show the invalid zone name Action Use Quick Configuration or the Configuration Editor to correct the zone name Cfg illegal zone name zone name Meaning The zone name that you entered uses an incorrect format of the escaped character syntax A non hexadecimal non backslash character was entered as one of the two characters immediately following a backslash character Action Configure a valid zone name to replace zone name Cfg invid dflt zone name for ccg Meaning The circuit group specified by ccghas been configured as a seed port The directly connected network is serviced also by another seed router 17 6 Action Event Log M essages at AppleTalk Event Messages already in service The default zone names conveyed by these seed routers are inconsistent 4T One of the seed routers must be reconfigured to ensure the consistency of the default zone names If you reconfigure the AppleTalk router to match the default zone name of the in service router no further changes are necessary If you reconfigure the in service r
236. ch is the destination network to which the new or updated route refers and by i px address which is the full IPX address of the next hop router The i px address is shown in hexademimal notation the first eight digits are the network address and the last twelve digits are the host address If the value of xrxnetis zero and the second part of i px address is the station address of the router then the first part of ipx address is a directly connected network If xrxnetis zero and the second part of the i px address is the station ad dress of the box then the first part of the i px address is also a directly connected network 17 147 Event Log Messages xrx XNS Router Event Messages xrx ccg Revd Err Pkt err Param errparam Meaning WNrFr 512 513 514 515 516 An error packet has been received by the XNS router ccgis the circuit group on which the error packet was received er is the error number in decimal of the error packet errparam is the error parameter in decimal of the error packet Valid error numbers are Unspecified error at destination Bad checksum or other packet inconsistency at destination Unknown socket at destination Destination resource limitations Unspecified error before reaching destination Bad checksum or inconsistency before reaching destination Destination host cannot be reached Packet exceeded hop count of 15 Packet too large to forward the erparam is the maximum
237. change Protocol IPX in support of a wide variety of LAN topologies and media Page IPX Parameters 11 5 Accept NETBIOS Bcasts from net 11 5 Action 11 5 Auto Enable 11 6 Circuit Group 11 6 Deliver NETBIOS Bcasts to net 11 6 Dest Host high 11 6 Dest Host low 11 7 Dest Network Hex 11 7 Dest Network high 11 7 Dest Network low Continued Next Page IPX Protocol Parameters Overview Page IPX Parameters Continued from previous page 11 8 11 8 11 9 11 9 11 10 11 10 11 10 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 13 11 13 11 13 11 14 11 14 11 14 11 14 11 14 11 15 11 15 11 15 11 15 11 16 Dest Socket high Dest Socket low Effect Encapsulation Type Host lists Host Number high Host Number low Internal Network Number Internal Router Name IPX WAN List Name Network lists Network Number Network Number high Network Number Hex Network Number low NETBIOS Resource Name Next Hop Host Next Hop Net Packet type lists specify Packet Type high Packet Type low Precedence Random load balancing RIP Interface Cost RIP Listen RIP Supply RIP Table Cost RIP and SAP split horizon SAP driven RIP supply Server Name Server Type Hex Socket high Socket low Continued Next Page 11 3 TT sSJ PULLed 030 01d Xdi 11 4 IPX Protocol Parameters Overview Page
238. cimal format Next Hop lists the station address of the next hop router Mtr Metric lists the hop count to Dst 9T T lists the route type as follows D adirect local route I an invalid route R a remote route spuewuop TON P lists how the route type was learned as follows L astatic route R Routing Information Protocol 16 63 Using the Network Control Language Accessing Bridging and Routing Tables Age lists the number of seconds since the route was learned IF lists the number the router assigned to the network interface for Next Hop 16 64 Using the Network Control Language Accessing Bridging and Routing Tables Rgetis Displaying the IPX Servers SAP Table Use NCL s Rgetis command to format and display the IPX Service Advertising Protocol SAP table for either this router or aremote HP or Wellfleet router that is running IPX Syntax rgetis X X X X community X X X X optional is the IP address of the local or remote router in dotted decimal notation If you omit this field an IP address on the local router will be used community optional is the name of the SNMP community that grants access to that node If you omit the name public is used If you include a name the IP address must also be included Example rgetis 15 2 1 94 Displays the IPX servers that the router whose IP address is 15 2 1 94 discovered by listening to the SAP protocol Net Address Sock
239. circuit Bridge Network Control Protocol BNCP has gone down For the indicated PPP circuit Bridge Network Control Protocol BNCP is up Bridge packets may now be sent and received on the link Bridge mapping table is full Meaning For the indicated frame relay circuit the bridge table mapping destination station addresses to frame relay DLCIs is full and can not accommodate a new entry This table is related to the internal bridging tables and therefore may be indicative of a bridging problem 17 21 Event Log Messages cct Circuit Event Messages BUD Failed SIFSTS XXXX Meaning The token ring device Bring Up Diagnostic BUD failed indicating a possible hardware failure Action Note the code number in the event message and contact your Hewlett Packard representative Call collision will rcv inbound call Meaning The router received an incoming call after sending a connect request CRN command The connect request will be stopped and the incoming call accepted if it doesn t fail any user specified call restrictions placed on inbound calls Call coll to IP next hop X X X X Meaning We were attempting to establish an outbound call to next hop X X X X when we received an inbound call from that location The outbound call will be closed and the inbound call will be used Can t configure 4 M bps token interface Meaning You have configured 4 Mbit s service on a 16 Mbit s medium Action Reconfigure
240. cket based on the contents of its destination socket field Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter IPX destination sockets a Leave this field blank and enter the IPX socket number in the Dest Socket low field if you are filtering a single IPX destination socket Enter the highest IPX socket number in the range if you are filtering a range of IPX destination sockets a Leave this field blank and enter the name of the Socket list in the Dest Socket low field if you want to use a Socket list to establish the upper and lower range of IPX destination socket numbers For additional information refer to Dest Socket low later in this chapter For more information about Socket lists refer to Socket high and Socket low later in this chapter Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering an IPX packet based on the contents of its destination socket field Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter IPX destination sockets Enter the IPX socket number in this field and leave the Dest Socket high field blank if you are filtering a single IPX destination socket Enter the lowest IPX socket number in this field and enter the highest socket number in the Dest Socket high field if you are filtering a range of IPX destination sockets Enter the Socket list name in this field and leave the Dest Socket high field blank if you want to use a Socket list to establish the upper and lo
241. col AEP request message to a specific AppleTalk node address as a network layer test of the reachability of the node Syntax atping X X wait X X is the AppleTalk address network number and node identi fier of the target wait optional is how many seconds to wait for a response If an integer is not included the response must be received in five seconds to be successful Examples atping 178 46 5 Sends AEP request and waits 5 seconds for reply atping 178 46 1 Sends AEP request and waits 1 second for reply Note Using the Network Control Language Managing Router Operations and Resources Boot Rebooting the Router Use NCL s Boot command to reboot the router Any changes in configuration or password will take effect and the console session is restarted If you see NCL ERR invalid command ignored in response to the Boot command it is possible you did not use the manager pass word when starting this console session or did not enter the manager password when prompted in this command Syntax boot The console displays Enter current manager password if a manager password exists mgr mgr is the current manager password required if assigned The console displays Do you want to reboot the system y n y Answer yes to go ahead and boot 9T spuewruop TON 16 6 Using the Network Control Language Managing Router Operations and Resources Browse Displaying the Formatted Configuratio
242. configured Meaning The configuration contains an excessive number of V 35 line records for this slot Action Modify the configuration Transceiver signal loss Meaning The LAN controller cannot communicate with the E thernet 802 3 transceiver Action Verify the integrity of the transceiver transmit congestion on cctX Meaning Indicates that the flow of data to be transmitted to the given V 25 bis circuit cct has exceeded the circuit s capacity and packets have been dropped Action Slow down the information rate or increase the available line bandwidth Transmit underflow detected Meaning The link level controller has truncated packet transmission because of an interruption in the flow of data from memory 17 54 Event Log M essages cct Circuit Event Messages TR Open Failed x Meaning The token ring device failed in its attempt to insert into the ring This usually results from trying to insert to a ring at the wrong speed 4 or 16 za Mbits 5 Action Verify and select the proper ring interface speed for this line 8 Unable to perform update for dici Meaning For the indicated frame relay circuit an operator tried to modify a DLCI but the system was unable to perform the requested modification Possible problems are adding a DLC that has already been added or deleting a DLC that isn t present unable to read configuration summary Meaning Unable to read the V 25 bis map configuration
243. connecting means the map is in the process of making a V 25 bis connection connected means the map is connected and the circuit is in use queue wait means the map has data to send but no pool circuits are currently available When a circuit becomes available the map will go into the connecting state Refer to the VC inactivity time parameter in chapter 14 ST hold down means the map has failed to connect It cannot be used until the Hold down time expires The IP address will again be accessable and the map will go into the disconnected state Refer to the Hold down time and VC inactivity time parameters in chapter 14 seg UONBUWOjU quowumbeuep ipmapx mitpkt map contains the number of packets successfully transmitted for this map nexthop map contains the address of the network that has a static route through the next hop address There is a separate entry for each network reachable using the static route That is there can be several entries per next hop For this reason there is a separate instance for each address The format of the message associates the next hop with the given address For example ip_networks_1 indicates that this IP address is associated with nexthop 1 18 73 M anagement Information Base Variables key Key Information Base key Key Information Base The key information base indicates whether specific HP router services are available to be configured on this model router
244. ction drop accept log if the contents of the applicable 2 y packet field fall within the range established by the matching low and high filter A Q parameters 0 Q d O Encapsulation Type Selects from three available encapsulation methods that can be used on the IEEE 802 3 cable type media this parameter has no effect on other media types token ring WAN etc Default Novell Note E ncapsulation Type is also referred to as F rame Type 11 9 802 2 Ethernet Novell Hostlists Host Number high Options Host Number low Options IPX Protocol Parameters Parameters and Options Enables IEEE 802 2 logical link control encapsulation The 802 2 encapsulation method prefixes one octet of destination service access point identification one octet of source service access point identification and one octet of control information to the IPX packet The 802 2 packet in turn will be encapsulated within a packet specific to the cable type For media other than 802 3 ThinLAN ThickLAN and EtherTwist an encapsulation method is implicitly chosen Enables Ethernet 2 0 encapsulation Ethernet encapsulation prefixes an eight octet preamble six octets of destination address information and two octets of protocol type information hexadecimal 8137 to the IPX packet It appends a four octet frame check sequence to the packet Enables Novell proprietary encapsulation Novell encapsulation prefixes and eight octet pream
245. cuit cct The DCE generates DIAGNOSTIC packets for fault isolation purposes 18 109 18 110 M anagement Information Base Variables x25 X 25 Information Base data_rx contains the number of DATA packets received by X 25 circuit cct DATA packets contain user data data_tx contains the number of DATA packets transmitted by X 25 circuit cct DATA packets contain user data dropped_tx contains the count of IP datagrams dropped by the circuit because of X 25 failures or queue clipping error_rx contains the number of erroneous packets for example packets with a bad length REGISTRATION packets if registration is not enabled and RESTART packets not directed to LCNOQ received by X 25 circuit cct reset_cfm_rx contains the number of RESET CONFIRMATION packets received by X 25 circuit cct ARESET CONFIRMATION packet acknowledges that the previously requested reset action has been implemented reset_cfm_tx contains the number of RESET CONFIRMATION packets transmitted by X 25 circuit cct A RESET CONFIRMATION packet acknowledges that the previously requested reset action has been implemented reset_rx contains the number of RESET INDICATION packets received by X 25 circuit cct A RESET INDICATION packet informs the recipient that the remote node has reset the send and receive packet sequences to 0 reset_tx contains the number of RESET REQUEST packets trans mitted by X 25 circuit cct A RESET REQUEST packet sets the send and receiv
246. d Note Setting Management Priority to High can noticeably impact the routing of non management traffic Gives priority to the normal routing of incoming non management traffic Internet Protocol IP Parameters Parameters and Options Max Relay Hops Determines the maximum number of router hops allowed to reach a destination Default 4 Range 1 to 16 hops Max Retransmissions Determines the number of times TFTP retransmits an unacknowledged data Metric Mode message before abandoning the transfer attempt Default 5 Assigns a cost to the propagated route Used in the initial IP display to specify whether the IP router will route or bridge IP normal orend node datagrams it receives on any circuit group Default Router Host Host only Makes the router run in IP end node mode as if it is a virtual host on one of the bridged interfaces If you are bridging IP traffic select this mode No IP routing is done in this mode Router Host Routes IP traffic normally The router can also be addressed as a host or node If Mode you are not bridging IP traffic select this mode Used in time protocol configuration to access from 8 Time Protocol Configuration Time Protocol IP menu item Determines whether the router supplies or receives the time service or does both Default Server only Client only Makes the router poll a designated server for the time when the router is initialized Server only
247. d frame bit equal to 0 indicating more to follow tx_threshold contains the number of times the token ring adapter recorded a transmit threshold error A transmit threshold error occurs when the frame size count bytes 7 and 8 of the transmit parameter list exceeds the buffer capacity allocated at system initialization Management Information Base Variables chassis Chassis Information Base chassis Chassis Information Base The chassis information base contains variables that describe various chassis elements in the HP Router 650 The structure is the following chassis id 0 slots 0 slot_table entry ST vari ables instance entity_table entry vari ables instance seg UOnBUWOjU quowumbeuep slotmap_table entry vari ables instance sensor_table entry vari ables instance Examples of pathname constructions are chassis id 0 chassis slot_table entry variablelinstance or 58 3 1 vari able i nstance The variables are listed alphabetically under each table type 18 43 18 44 M anagement Information Base Variables chassis Chassis Information Base ID O contains a unique identifier for this chassis slots 0 contains the number of slots in this chassis Slot_Table Example get chassis slot_table entry objectid slot descr slot contains a texual description of the card plugged into slot index slot contains the index number for slot lastchange slot contains a time stamp showing the
248. d node address is aa nnnn is declared down because the node transmitted a routing topology packet which contained an invalid checksum Adj Down CG ccg Dropped Adj aa nnnn Meaning In adjacent node accessible through circuit group ccg whose area and node address is aa nnnn is declared down because the node transmitted a faulty misaddressed hello packet Adj Down CG ccg Out of range Adj aa nnnn Meaning An adjacent node accessible through circuit group ccg whose area and node address is aa nnnn is declared down because the node s area and or node address exceeds the values set by the Max Area and or Max Nodes parameters Action Modify the configuration to increase the values of Max Area and or Max Nodes Adj Down CG ccg Router Table Full Adj aa nnnn Meaning An adjacent node accessible through circuit group ccg whose area and node address is aa nnnn is declared down The node information has been deleted from the current adjacent router table 17 74 Event Log M essages drs DECnet Event Messages Adj Down CG ccg Sync lost Adj aa nnnn 4T Meaning The circuit group manager has declared circuit group ccg which accesses node aa nnnn to be disabled Consequently the DE Cnet router declares aa nnnn down soBessop 6o7 WweAW Adj Down CG ccg Timeout Adj aa nnnn Meaning An adjacent node accessible through circuit group ccg whose area and node address is aa nnnn is declared down
249. d enter the name of the Area list in the Source Area low field if you want to use an Area list to establish the upper and lower range of DE Cnet source areas For additional information refer to Source Area low later in this chapter For more information about Area lists refer to Area high and Area low earlier in this chapter Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering a DE Cnet packet based on the contents of its source area field Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter DE Cnet source areas Source Node high Options Source Node low Options DECnet Parameters Parameters and Options Enter the DECnet ID of the source area in this field and leave the Source Area high field blank if you are filtering a single DE Cnet source area a Enter the DECnet ID of the lowest source area in this field and enter the DE Cnet ID of the highest source area in the Source Area high field if you are filtering a range of DECnet source areas Enter the Area list name in this field and leave the Source Area high field blank if you want to use an Area list to establish the upper and lower range of DECnet source areas For more information refer to Source Area high earlier in this chapter For more information about Area lists refer to Area high and Area low earlier in this chapter Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering a DE Cnet packet based on th
250. d leave the DDP Type high field blank if you are creating a DDP Type filter and want to establish the range of DDP Types with a DDP Type list For additional information refer to DDP Type high earlier in this chapter Default Zone Name Functional when Seed Router set to Yes Determines the default zone used by inquiring nodes A zone is a logical grouping of networks Such a logical grouping can be confined to a single network or span multiple networks within the AppleTalk internet Each zone is identified by a zone name a string of up to 32 printable characters including the SPACE character Note A 32 character limit is applied when entering a zone name For specific information refer to your router configuration guide Dest Net high Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering a datagram based on the contents of its destination network field CL Options Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter AppleTalk destination networks Leave this field blank and enter the AppleTalk network number in the Dest Net low field if you are filtering a single AppleTalk destination network meLeiddy SJIPUL Ld Enter the highest AppleTalk network number in the range if you are filtering a range of AppleTalk destination networks Dest Net low Dest Node high 12 8 Options Options AppleTalk Parameters Parameters and Options Leave this field blank and enter the name of the Network lis
251. d not disable entities for OS GET Meaning In order to receive the operating system image we disable all the entities other than IP and the circuit over which the file will be transferred This frees up enough memory to store the image in memory before burning into non volatile memory In this case some of the configured entities could not be disabled could not find an IP_NW config record for FGET OS request Meaning Could not find any IP network interface definition in the configuration Action Check that IP is configured correctly could not find cct group config for FGET OS request Meaning Could not find the circuit group configuration record for the circuit group specified in the IP network interface definition Action Check that IP is configured correctly could not find IP configuration for FGET OS request Meaning Could not find a configuration record for IP Action Check that IP is configured correctly don t know how to reach dest for FGET OS request Meaning The IP address specified in the F get command is not reachable Action Check that the IP routing protocol is operating correctly and that you used the correct IP address of the TFTP server in the Fget command 17 127 Event Log Messages tftp TFTP and Fget Event Messages entity already disabled Meaning An already disabled TFTP entity has received NCL s Disable command entity already enabled Meaning An already enabled TFT
252. ddress Mask Reply No 7 6 Internet Protocol IP Parameters Parameters and Options Parameters and Options Determines the disposition of IP datagrams UDP datagrams or TCP segments meeting the filter rule Default Drop Relays a packet meeting the filter rule Discards a packet meeting the filter rule Determines the action taken with the Conditional Circuit Group Default disable enable Enables the conditional static routing when the conditional circuit group is disabled When the conditional circuit group is restored the conditional route is disabled Enables the conditional static routing when the conditional circuit group is enabled When the conditional circuit group goes down the conditional route is disabled Specifies which of two neighbors initiates EGP connections EGP connections are initiated when one neighbor issues an acquisition request message and finalized when the recipient of the acquisition request message issues an acquisition confirmation response A neighbor who issues acquisition request messages is said to be active a neighbor responding to such messages is said to be passive Although the EGP protocol allows both neighbors to be active protocol efficiency is enhanced when one neighbor is active and the other is passive Default Active Assigns the router as an Active neighbor Assigns the router as an Passive neighbor Enables or disables the generation of ICMP address mask reply messages w
253. ddress field of the Ethernet header F indicates they are forwarded D indicates they are dropped dstaddr_ contains the station MAC level or physical address of the destination node if contains the interface number the router assigned to cg 18 79 18 80 M anagement Information Base Variables Ibmib Bridge Address Table Information Base rif describes the path used to source route packets between the source route and the destination The first two bytes contain the routing control RC field that describes the routing type field length direction bit and largest frame size as follows bits 1 2 RIF type 00 Specifically Routed Frame SRF 11 Spanning Tree Explorer STE 10 All Routes Explorer ARE bit 3 Reserved bits 4 8 Length of RIF maximum 18 bytes bit 9 Direction that frames traverse LAN 0 Forward 1 Reverse bits 13 16 Reserved src contains the disposition of frames containing address in the source address field of the Ethernet header F indicates they are forwarded D indicates they are dropped src_addr contains the station MAC level or physical address of the source interface xs_ flood denotes whether frames destined for address are 1 for warded 2 flooded or 3 dropped Management Information Base Variables log Event Log Information Base log Event Log Information Base The event log information base contains data on the event log and enables access to certain events You c
254. de identifier and or you did not select a network number for seed routers only Consequently the AppleTalk router has generated a quasi random node identifier and or network number and is using the Probe facility to ensure the uniqueness of the network number and node identifier pair Illegal construction in Zone name Meaning The zone name has a bad xx hex construct An illegal default zone event or an illegal zone name event will follow showing the invalid zone name Action Use Quick Configuration or the Configuration Editor to correct the zone name 17 10 Event Log M essages at AppleTalk Event Messages Illegal netw ork number for ccg Meaning The network number configured for ccgis outside of the range specified by the Network Min and Network Max parameters Action Reconfigure the network number to within the range Illegal network range for ccg Meaning Either the Network Min or Network Max parameter for ccgis outside the range of legal AppleTalk network numbers 1 through 65279 Action Reconfigure the AppleTalk network range parameters Incoming invalid zone len length zone aa bb cc dd Meaning The HP system has detected an incorrectly formatted zone information packet The zone length length and the first four characters of the zone name in ASCII hexadecimal format are aa bb cc dd Action None The HP router will repeat its request for zone names 17 11 LT soBessop 60
255. der bad_sum contains the total number of received EGP messages that contained a faulty checksum in the EGP header bad_type contains the total number of received EGP messages that contained an unrecognized value in the Type field of the EGP header bad_ver contains the total number of received EGP messages that contained an invalid EGP version number in the EGP header The router s EGP implementation supports EGP version 2 18 61 18 62 M anagement Information Base Variables egp EGP Information Base cmdoos contains the number of times EGP received an out of se quence command message An out of sequence message indicates that a prior message issued by an EGP peer has been missed cmdrej contains the number of times EGP refused to respond to a received command Such refusal could be generated by receipt of a neighbor acquisition message from an unknown autonomous system or by receipt of a faulty EGP message for example one with a bad checksum from a known neighbor err contains the number of times EGP received a message that while appropriate for the router s current state was otherwise erroneous mem_use_ contains the number of memory bytes used by the EGP protocol Memory requirements include protocol overhead the state machine model and timers mem_wait contains the number of instances in which EGP delayed operations because of unavailable memory resources nho_mem contains the number of instances in which EG
256. destination host discarded an IDP packet because of lack of processing resources errsdestproto contains the number of packets rejected by a destination host because the protocol type field contained an invalid or unknown value errsdestunspec contains the number of destination host generated Error Protocol packets with an Error Number of 0 that were relayed by the router This error number indicates that the destination host rejected an IDP packet for unspecified reasons errssuppressed contains the number of packets dropped because of length below minimum errsxitchksum contains the number of router generated Error Protocol packets with an Error Number of 1001 This error number indicates that the router received an IDP packet that contained a faulty or corrupted checksum Management Information Base Variables xrx Xerox XNS Information Base errsxithopcnt contains the number of router generated Error Protocol packets with an Error Number of 1003 This error number indicates that the packet had passed through more than the maximum number of routers before arriving at its destination errsxittoobig contains the number of router generated Error Protocol packets with an error number of 1004 This Error Number indicates that the packet is too long for the router to relay errsxitunreach contains the number of router generated Error Protocol packets with an Error Number of 1002 This error number indicates that the router cannot reach t
257. destination address Enter the destination address in this field and leave the MAC dest high field blank if you are filtering a single MAC destination address Enter the lowest MAC destination address in this field and enter the highest MAC destination address in the MAC dest high field if you are filtering a range of MAC destination addresses 9 Enter the name of a MAC Address list in this field if you are establishing the range of MAC destination addresses with a filter list For more information refer to MAC dest high To learn how to create a MAC Address list refer to MAC Address low and MAC Address high Su3 SUNeIe gd e6piig Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering a frame based on the contents of its MAC level source address field Options Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter a frame based on its MAC source address Leave this field blank and enter the source address in the MAC source low field if you are filtering a single MAC source address Enter the highest MAC source address in the range if you are filtering a range of MAC source addresses Leave this field blank and enter the name of the MAC Address list in the MAC source low field if you are establishing a range of MAC source addresses with a MAC Address list For more information refer to MAC source low To learn how to create a MAC Address list refer to MAC Address low and MAC Addre
258. do not want to filter AppleTalk destination nodes a Leave this field blank and enter the AppleTalk node identifier in the Dest Node low field if you are filtering a single AppleTalk destination node a Enter the highest AppleTalk node identifier in the range if you are filtering a range of AppleTalk destination nodes Leave this field blank and enter the name of the Node list in the Dest Node low field if you want to use a Node list to establish the upper and lower range of AppleTalk destination node identifiers For additional information refer to Dest Node low later in this chapter For more information about Node lists refer to Node high and Node low later in this chapter Dest Node low Dest Sock high Dest Sock low AppleTalk Parameters Parameters and Options Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering a datagram based on the contents of its destination node field Options Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter AppleTalk destination nodes Enter the AppleTalk node identifier in this field and leave the Dest Node high field blank if you are filtering a single AppleTalk destination node Enter the lowest AppleTalk node identifier in this field and enter the highest node identifier in the Dest Node high field if you are filtering a range of AppleTalk destination nodes Enter the Node list name in this field and leave the Dest Node high field blank if you want t
259. dress is 15 2 1 94 MAC Src Addr MAC Dst Addr Cct Grp RIF 10005a9631e7 10005a95fbla G_T31 0820001120011001 10005a95fbla 10005a9631e7 WAN1G 0820001170010021 The fields in the table are as follows MAC Src Addr lists the station address of the source interface MAC Dst Addr lists the station address of the destination interface Cct Grp lists the circuit group that connects the source interface to the token ring RIF describes the path used to source route packets between the source and destination nodes in hexadecimal format The first two bytes are the routing control RC field These 16 bits such as 0000 1000 0010 0000 for the first example of 0820h above from most to least significant have the following functions 2 bits for RIF type 00 Specifically Routed Frame 16 67 9T spuewuop TON Using the Network Control Language Accessing Bridging and Routing Tables 10 Spanning Tree Explorer 11 All Routes E xplorer 1 bit reserved 5 bits for the length in bytes up to 18 of the RIF field 1 direction bit o frame moves forward 1 frame moves in reverse 4 bits for largest frame size in bytes handled up to 4472 3 bits reserved Each subsequent series of two bytes such as 0011h and 7001h in the example above describe the LAN ID in the 12 most significant bits and the bridge ID number in the 4 least significant bits of the next hop to the destination 16 68 Using the Network Control Language
260. due to a busy signal then the next available outbound phone number if configured is used immediately However none of the phone numbers are repeated before the connect wait time expires Connect when Circuit is enabled Data is available or on incoming calls Data Link Layer Protocol Standard Pass Thru DECnet multicast DLCI Circuit Parameters Parameters and Options Determines when to attempt a connection with the remote router via V 25 bis Default Data is available or on incoming calls Initiates a call attempt when the circuit is enabled that is either when the subject circuit is configured and the router reboots or when the subject circuit is a backup circuit that will be called when all primary circuits are down Results in these additional parameters Allowed Inbound Call Numbers Call Restrictions Connect Retry Count Connect Wait Time sec Delay after Connect Failure min Local Number Max Channels to Aggregate Min Channels to Aggregate Outbound Call Number Per Channel Bandwidth Send CIC on all allowed INC s Initiates call attempts whenever there is data to transmit of there is an incoming call from another router via V 25 bis Results in these additional parameters Allowed Inbound Call Numbers Call Restrictions Channel Management Connect Inactivity Time Connect Retry Count Connect Wait Time sec Delay after Connect Failure Local Number Max Channels to Aggregate Min Channels to Aggregate
261. e upstream_mac_ Contains the 48 bit address of the FDDI upstream neighbor Frame Relay Management Information Base The Frame Relay MIB tables are organized under the experimental MIB exmib number 26 in a six level tree instead of under the cct MIB exmib Information base identifier fr Frame Relay managed object table vari able dictble or errtbl listed below entry Fixed entry data vari able cct table vari able entry data vari able cct ddd Data type Circuit number ccttbl listed below Fixed entry Data type Circuit number dici The table variables are a Data Link Connection Management Interface Table dictble a Error Table errtbl a Circuit Table ccttbl Each circuit number cct corresponds to the number assigned to that circuit in the Circuit Name listing in the first level of the Circuits menu in the main screen of the Configuration E ditor Figure 18 shows this organization The Management Information Base for Frame Relay contains the values for these tables which are described in the following sections Management Information Base Variables cct Circuits Information Base exmib 36 4 fr 26 dictble _ ecttbl errtbl Dicmi table circuit table error table entry entry entry variable variable variable variable variable variable a en es eee eee cct cct cct cct cct cct cct cct cct cct cct cct dlci dilci dici dilci dici dlci dici dlci Figure 18 1 Fram
262. e R a remote route to a subnetwork not directly connected P lists how the route type was learned as follows E Exterior Gateway Protocol L astatically configured route R Routing Information Protocol Age lists the number of seconds since the route was learned IF lists the sequential number the router assigned to the network interface over which Next Hop is reached Using the Network Control Language Accessing the Internet Management Information Base Rgets Displaying the Value of an Internet MIB Variable Use NCL s Rgets command to display the value of an individual Internet MIB variable for a remote network node not this router You can also use Rgets to display the value of an individual Internet standard MIB variable on this local router Rgets defaults the standard Internet MIB portion of the complete pathname iso org dod internet mgmt mib or 1 3 6 1 2 1 Syntax rgets identifier X X X X community identifier is the object identification path identifying a specific Internet MIB variable as defined in RFC 1156 Do not include the path to the Internet MIB 1 3 6 1 2 1 since itis assumed X X X X optional is the IP address of the remote target node in dotted decimal notation If you omit this field an IP address on the local router would be used community optional is the name of the SNMP community that grants access to that node If you omit the name public is used If you include a name t
263. e Using ZModem to Transfer Configuration and NCL Display Zget Loading the Configuration to a Router Use NCL s Zget command to upload the router configuration previously stored as a file on the PC connected to the router as a console Zget overwrites the router s current configuration with the uploaded configuration Preparation You must have previously used Zput to download the configuration to the PC host see page 16 100 above Run the PROCOMM PLUS terminal emulation program Start a router console session with the manager password Procedure to upload the configuration to the router 1 Enter the Zget command zget 2 Press the key to display the Upload Protocols window 3 Type z to select the ZMODEM option and to display the Send ZMODEM window 4 Enter the name of the file containing the configuration you want to upload End with to begin uploading If the PC host does not respond within approximately 70 seconds after you execute step 4 the command times out and control returns to the NCL prompt If Zget is in use and the PC host is left in terminal emulation mode you may see Zmodem protocol packets displayed as a series of character strings before the command times out You can use other host versons of Zmodem However the exact procedure for invoking them depends on how each is implemented Using the Network Control Language Using ZM odem to Transfer Configuration and NCL Display Zput
264. e contents of its source node field Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter DE Cnet source nodes a Leave this field blank and enter the node number of the source area in the Source Node low field if you are filtering a single DE Cnet source node Enter the node number of the highest source node in the range if you are filtering a range of DECnet source areas Leave this field blank and enter the name of the Area list in the Source Node low field if you want to use an Area list to establish the upper and lower range of DECnet source nodes For additional information refer to Source Node low later in this chapter For more information about Area lists refer to Area high and Area low earlier in this chapter Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering a DE Cnet packet based on the contents of its source node field Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter DE Cnet source nodes 8 a Enter the node number of the source node in this field and leave the Source Node high field blank if you are filtering a single DE Cnet source node Enter the node number of the lowest source node in this field and enter the node number of the highest source node in the Source Node high field if you are filtering a range of DE Cnet source nodes SJIPUL Led 2 2uUd340 8 13 DECnet Parameters Parameters and Options Enter the Area list name in this field and leave the Sourc
265. e enables the router to assume responsibility for IP packets destined for that host Before proxy ARP can be enabled Address Resolution must also be set to ARP or to ARP amp HP Probe Default Yes Enables Proxy ARP Disables Proxy ARP Determines the types of broadcast messages received by the IP router Default Network and Subnet Network Only Sets the router to accept only the network broadcasts Choose this option only when the network does not have subnets Network and Subnet Sets the router to accept both network and subnet broadcast messages This is Relay Auto Enable 7 24 No Yes appropriate in most applications Note A network broadcast message consists of the network field the NIC assigned 8 bit 16 bit or 24 bit network address followed by a string of 8 16 or 24 logical ones or zeroes Note A subnet broadcast message consists of the network field the NIC assigned 8 bit 16 bit or 24 bit network address followed by the locally assigned subnet field followed by a string of 8 16 or 24 logical ones or zeroes Determines whether the BOOTP relay agent is automatically enabled by the IP protocol Default No Disables the BOOTP Relay agent Enables the BOOTP Relay agent Remote Address Remote ASN Retransmission Time Out Retransmit Interval Options RIP Interface Cost RIP Network Diameter Internet Protocol IP Parameters Parameters and Options Note The BOOTP relay a
266. e secs Extended 32 bit CRC LCP Active Open LCP Auto Restart LQM Time secs Max Link Latency Max Pkt Size Min Frame Spacing IP Address Use UPAP Circuit Parameters Parameters and Options SMDS Provides a transmission channel over V 35 synchronous media between the router and an SMDS Switched Multi megabit Data Service data service unit DSU or switch Displays a screen with parameters for configuring an SMDS Switched Multi megabit Data Service circuit Results in these additional parameters ARP Group Address Extended 32 bit CRC Group Address Heartbeat Down Count Heartbeat Polling Interval Individual Address Max Link Latency Max Pkt Size Min Frame Spacing Use DXI v3 2 Use Heartbeat Poll Use SNAP V 25 bis Adapter Provides a transmission channel for automatic dialup over a V 25 bis circuit Results in these additional parameters Adapter Record Bandwidth Reservation Max Link Latency IMin Frame Spacing Compression Enables or disables packet compression to enable increased throughput over HP Point to Point WAN links connecting two Hewlett Packard routers Compression reduces or eliminates the need to move to higher speed and more expensive synchronous lines In operation individual packets are compressed in the source router transmitted to the destination router over the Point to Point circuit and decompressed Compression operates with the following three circuit types HP Point to Point Pt to Pt Protocol PPP P
267. e DECnet Auto Enable parameter is already disabled When the global Auto Enable parameter is set to Yes the setting for the DECnet Auto Enable parameter determines whether the DE Cnet router is automatically enabled or disabled when the router boots Default Yes 8 Automatically enables DE Cnet routing if the global Auto Enable parameter is enabled Automatically disables DE Cnet routing if the global Auto Enable parameter is also enabled To enable DE Cnet routing after the router boots use the NCL Interpreter s Enable command SJIPULLed 2 2uUd340 8 5 Bcast Routing Timer Options Circuit Group Name Cost Dest Area high Options DECnet Parameters Parameters and Options Sets the maximum number of seconds between routing topology messages issued by the router Default 180 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180 Identifies the name of a circuit group for DECnet routing This is one of the circuit groups configured for the Circuit Group menu For more information about setting circuit group parameters refer to Chapter 2 Line Circuit and Circuit Group Parameters Sets the relative cost of the circuit group DECnet determines path costs by summing the individual sequential circuit costs The cost you assign typically should reflect the relative speed of the transmission medium low costs for high speed media and high costs for slower media The DECnet router always selects the c
268. e Node high field blank if you want to use an Area list to establish the upper and lower range of DECnet source nodes For more information refer to Source Node high earlier in this chapter For more information about Area lists refer to Area high and Area low earlier in this chapter WAN Protocol Identifies the WAN protocol for the circuit providing service to the remote target Default Frame Relay Frame Relay circuits provide a transmission channel between the router and a frame relay network The transmission channel supports multiple protocols SMDS Switched Multi megabit Data Service SMDS circuits provide a transmission channel over V 35 synchronous media between the router and an SMDS data service unit DSU or switch X 25 X 25 packet switched circuits three levels of X 25 service X 25 DDN X 25 PDN and X 25 PPP Point to Point Protocol For additional information about the services supported by X 25 packet switched circuits refer to Chapter 13 X 25 Parameters 8 14 SNMP Agent Parameters SNMP Agent Parameters Overview Overview DEFAULT_CONFIG Configuration Editor System 1 Software 1 Lines 4 Circuits 4 Circuit Groups 4 Bridge 1 DoD Internet Router 9 DECNET IV Routing Service B SNMP Sessions 2 Access to SNMP parameters 19 Xerox Routing Service B 11 IPX Routing Service B 12 AppleTalk Router B 13 X 25 Net
269. e Relay Exmib 18 23 ST seg UOnBUWuOjU Juawpeuenw 18 24 M anagement Information Base Variables cct Circuits Information Base Each frame relay MIB item can be accessed through the Network Command Language NCL from the console screen Use the NCL list command to display all or a portion of the frame relay information base Use the NCL get command to obtain the value of any variable within the information base There are two methods of access one using the names of the branches and the other using the numbers exmib fr table nametable entry where table name is the name of the fr table and table entry is the actual value of the table entry Or using the second method of access 36 26 1 1 5 8 where 8 is the frame relay circuit number which is system assigned and 5 is the MIB variable Data Link Connection Management Interface Table dlctble The frame relay MIB variables in alphabetical order for the Data Link Connection Management Interface Table are as follows active States which data link connection management scheme is active and by implication which DLCI it uses on the frame relay interface There are four possible values Disabled 1 indicates that there is no interface management running on this interface LmiRev1 2 is the original Local Management Interface LMI ansiT 1 617 D 3 indicates the use of ANSI Annex D of ANSI T 1 617 ansiT 1 617 B 4 indicates the use of ANSI Annex D
270. e bit bit 2 of TRANSMIT_CSTAT Either the bit is equal to 1 on a list that is not the anticipated start of a frame or the bit is equal to 0 on an anticipated start of a frame tx_frm_size_err contains the number of times the token ring adapter recorded a transmit frame size error A transmit frame size ST seg UOnBUWuOjU quowumbeuep error occurs when 1 the frame size count bytes 7 and 8 of the transmit parameter list is not equal to the sum of the data count fields contained in the parameter list 2 when the frame size count is less than the required header plus one byte of the Information field date or 3 when the frame size count is equal to 0 except in lists that define frames 18 41 18 42 M anagement Information Base Variables cct Circuits Information Base tx_ill_frm_fmt contains the number of times the token ring adapter recorded an illegal frame format error An illegal frame format error occurs when bit 0 of the frame control FC field is equal to 1 tx_list_err contains the number of times the token ring adapter recorded an error in one of the lists that compose the frame The token ring adapter terminates the Transmit command the attached system must issue another Transmit command to continue tx_odd_adr contains the number of times the token ring adapter processed a transmit parameter list containing both an odd address in the forward pointer field indicating the end of the list and an en
271. e configured ring ID matches the actual ring ID drop_listen contains the number of packets dropped by circuit group ceg while it was in the spanning tree learning state While in the learning state ceg receives both network generated bridge protocol data units BPDUs and end node generated traffic This traffic is sub jected to the learning process but not relayed Time spent in the learning state is governed by the Forward Delay parameter Upon expiration of the forward delay timer circuit group ccg enters the forwarding state drop_loadbal_noprotcf contains the number of packets dropped by circuit group ceg because the protocol contained in the Type field did not match the expected protocol value drop_no_cg from_cgm contains the number of packets dropped by circuit group ceg because of a change in state of the circuit group during processing time This usually indicates that a circuit group has gone down been disabled during packet processing drop_protocol contains the number of packets dropped by circuit group cegin accordance with global or local protocol filters specified by the configuration drop_src_addr contains the number of packets dropped by circuit group ceg in accordance with local source address filters specified by the configuration flood contains the number of packets flooded by circuit group ceg ccg floods packets if it has not yet learned the location of the packet s destination address fwd_dst_addr contain
272. e entry is not accessed for twice this interval the entry is removed from the table A value of zero disables the timer and aging is no longer performed Note If the network contains a high number of end stations a shorter duration can prevent the forwarding table from being filled Traffic Priority Transitional Bridge Type high 6 22 Bridge Parameters Parameters and Options High Normal Low Yes No Options The aging algorithm consumes CPU bandwidth that could otherwise be used to forward packets Therefore excessive aging of the table can cause occasional dropping of frames The default should provide the most appropriate time interval for aging in most installations Prioritizes packets received for bridging to other routers via WAN links and assures that packets packets that are sensitive to long response times such as SNA packets are not delayed or dropped because of delays caused by traffic congestion Prioritizing is done on a circuit basis on inbound packets that are bridged You can configure to prioritize all bridged packets or use filtering to prioritize packets based on their encapsulation type Default Normal Incoming packet configured for High priority have first priority for outgoing bridged transmission Incoming packets configured for Normal priority have second priority for outgoing bridged transmission and are subject to the same first in first out rule governing outgoing transmission
273. e he a ee Awe ena we og eee RS 10 2 Parameters and Options 00 00 10 4 IPX Protocol Parameters OVERVIEW iost Leta an Meee Pad eee iene ER EA 11 2 Parameters and Options 20 00 eee 11 5 AppleTalk Parameters OVERVIEW coi ha ae ee ee oe 2 See geen eel gS ee eRe 12 2 Parameters and Options 0 00ers 12 5 X 25 Service Parameters OVENVIEW pis Gas Ree ee eg be Sad Bee heed be eR 13 2 Parameters and Options 00 000 13 4 V 25 bis Network Mapping OVERVIEW 2 Stok Acie eee ad Se eee Bae ee ee Ee Ske 14 2 Parameters and Options 00 00 14 3 Partili General Operating Reference 15 16 17 Using the Statistic Screens AppleTalk Router Statistics Screen 2 ee ee 15 4 Bridge Statistics Screen 2 2 ee 15 6 Buffers Usage Statistics Screen 2 ee ee 15 8 Circuit Statistics Screen 2 2 ee 15 10 DECnet Router Statistics Screen 2 0 ce eee 15 12 DoD IP Router Statistics Screen 2 ee ee 15 14 IPX Router Statistics Screen 2 ee 15 16 Per Second Statistics Screen 2 ee 15 18 XNS Router Statistics Screen 2 ee 15 20 Using the Network Control Language Managing Router Operations and Resources 16 2 Accessing the Management Information Base 16 30 Accessing the Internet Management Information Base 16 40 Accessing a Remote Management Information Base 16 48 Accessing a Foreign Management Information Base
274. e host was running another protocol Action Check the serial line for a poor connection or source of noise Also verify that the host is running Zmodem 17 150 Event Log M essages zmodem Zmodem Event Messages CONFIG transfer aborted no ID string found 4T Meaning The router rejected the reception of a new configuration file because it lacked the proper configuration ID at the beginning of the file This error only can occur with the Zget command Action Try again with the proper configuration file soBessop 601 WweAW Data subpacket too long from remote Meaning Indicates that the packet received by the router was longer than expected Either the packet was corrupted during transmission or the host was running another protocol Action Check the serial line for a poor connection or source of noise Also verify that the host is running Zmodem Received a bad 16 bit CRC on a data packet Received a bad 32 bit CRC on a data packet Meaning Indicate that a data packet received by the router had a bad CRC That is the packet was damaged in transit Action Check the serial line for a poor connection or source of noise Received a bad 16 bit CRC on binary header Received a bad 32 bit CRC on binary header Meaning Indicate that a binary header received by the router had a bad CRC That is the packet was damaged in transit Action Check the serial line for a poor connection or source of noise
275. e hosts Leave this field blank and enter the IPX host number in the Source Host low field if you are filtering a single IPX source host Enter the highest IPX host number in the range if you are filtering a range of IPX source hosts Leave this field blank and enter the name of the Host list in the Source Host low field if you want to use a Host list to establish the upper and lower range of IPX source host numbers For additional information refer to Source Host low later in this chapter For more information about Host lists refer to Host Number high and Host Number low earlier in this chapter Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering an IPX packet based on the contents of its source host field a Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter IPX source hosts a Enter the IPX host number in this field and leave the Source Host high field blank if you are filtering a single IPX source host Enter the lowest IPX host number in this field and enter the highest host number in the Source Host high field if you are filtering a range of IPX source hosts Enter the Host list name in this field and leave the Source Host high field blank if you want to use a Host list to establish the upper and lower range of source host numbers 11 16 IPX Protocol Parameters Parameters and Options For additional information refer to Source Host high earlier in this chapter F or m
276. e packet sequences to 0 and generates a RESET INDICATION packet at the remote end of the circuit restart_cfm_rx contains the number of RESTART CONFIRMATION packets received by X 25 circuit cct A RESTART CONFIRMATION packet acknowledges that the previously requested restart action has been implemented restart_cfm_tx contains the number of RESTART CONFIRMATION packets transmitted by X 25 circuit cct A RESTART CONFIRMATION Management Information Base Variables x25 X 25 Information Base packet acknowledges that the previously requested restart action has been implemented restart_rx contains the number of RESTART INDICATION packets received by X 25 circuit cct A RESTART INDICATION packet informs the recipient that the remote node has cleared all switched virtual circuits restart_tx contains the number of RESTART REQUEST packets transmitted by X 25 circuit cct ARESTART REQUEST packet clears all switched virtual circuits and generates a RESTART INDICATION packet at the remote end of the circuit ST rnr_rx contains the number of RNR Receiver Not Ready packets received by X 25 circuit cct An RNR packet denotes a busy condition indicating a temporary inability to accept DATA packets from the remote end of the circuit rnr_tx contains the number of RNR Receiver Not Ready packets transmitted by X 25 circuit cct An RNR packet denotes a busy condition indicating a temporary inability to accept DATA packets from the remote end
277. e packet to reduce the hop count Default 1000 ms Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering a frame based on a user defined bit pattern hexadecimal value within the MAC or data link header 6 13 9 Su3 SUIeIe gd 26piig Bridge Parameters Parameters and Options Options MAC Address high Options MAC Address low Options MAC dest high Options 6 14 f you are filtering a single MAC or data link header enter the MAC or data link header in this field and leave the High Value hex field blank f you are filtering a range of MAC or data link headers enter the lowest MAC or data link header in this field and enter highest MAC or data link header in the High Value hex field For additional information refer to High Value hex Sets the upper boundary of the MAC address range when creating a MAC Address list f you are filtering a single MAC address leave this field blank and enter the address in the MAC Address low field If you are filtering a range of MAC addresses enter the highest MAC address in the range For more information refer to MAC Address low To learn how to apply a MAC Address list to a filter refer to MAC dest low and MAC source low Sets the lower boundary of the MAC address range when creating a MAC Address list f you are filtering a single MAC address enter the MAC address in this field and leave the MAC Address
278. e path to the variable You can obtain the pathname using the List command see page 16 35 To output the display to a printer or file instead of the screen place the get command within the Print command described on page 16 19 Syntax get identifier identifier is the pathname identifying a specific variable You must provide the pathname from the router s highest level objects using object identification codes and or object names You can use the asterisk as a wild card at the end of your identifier It specifies all variables in the branch descending from the object specified in front of it Examples get telnet tx_bytes Displays the value of the Telnet variable tx_bytes get svc Displays values of all system service variables get svc 3 Displays values of all system service variables for slot 3 in the router 650 get config version 0 Displays version number of the operating code 16 34 Using the Network Control Language Accessing the Management Information Base List Displaying the MIB Use NCL s List command to display all or any part of the structure of the router s management information base List tells you what specific variables that part of the MIB contains showing their pathnames To output the display to a printer or file instead of the screen place the List command within the Print command described on page 16 19 After obtaining the pathname using List you can use the Get command to
279. e per port Too many Token Ring circuits configured for slot Meaning There can be no more than four token ring circuits configured for an HP Router 650 four port token ring interface module More than four circuits have been configured Action Reconfigure the token ring circuits to no more than one per port 17 67 Event Log Messages dev Device Event Messages Too many V 35 circuits configured Meaning The configuration contains an excessive number of V 35 line records Action Modify the line configuration Total bandwidth reserved not 100 XXX cfg ed Meaning The bandwidth reserved for each of the priorities for the WAN circuit does not add up to 100 Action Make sure the three percentages configured in the Bandwidth Reservation record for the given WAN circuit add up to 100 IV 35 circuit record missing Meaning A circuit cct has not been configured Action Modify the configuration to ensure that it includes circuit records for cct WAN Port failed self test Meaning Hardware error Action HP series 200 or 400 router Replace the router HP router 650 Replace the interface card XCVR n out of range in line record Meaning The configuration contains an invalid transceiver number Action Modify the lines configuration 17 68 Event Log M essages dis Data Link Services Event Messages dis Data Link Services Event q Messages ji Bad action i j Meaning Internal DLS
280. e remote station may successfully login to the system 17 47 Event Log Messages cct Circuit Event Messages remote station s LQM time gt configuration time Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit the Link Quality Monitor LQM time that the remote station is willing to negotiate for is greater than the LQM time configured for the PPP circuit The higher LQM time is accepted but it means that the remote station will be sending Link Quality Report packets less often than the system originally requested Responded to reset service continued Meaning The router has received and processed a reset request from the remote end Refer also to Unexpected remote reset to local on page 17 55 in this section Retrying LLC2 connection Meaning The circuit identified in the object field of the event message has been unable to obtain positive acknowledgment of an outstanding frame It will continue to retry the connection as specified by the Retry Counter N2 Retry Timer T1 and Connect Retries LLC2 parameters Sent CIC cmd to connect call Meaning The router has sent a CIC command in response to an incoming call to establish a connection Sent CRN cmd to XXX Meaning The router has sent a CRN command with the listed number XXX Sent DIC cmd to disconnect call Meaning The router has sent a DIC command in response to an incoming call to prevent establishing a connection Server has logged in to re
281. e slot You need to identify the object by its management information base variable name or object identification code See the Managed Objects Table on page 16 32 and the List command on page 16 35 for object names codes and pathnames Syntax enable identifier identifier is the pathname identifying the software object You can use object identification codes and or object names Examples enable ip Both enable the IP router enable 5 5 is the equivalent object identification code for ip enable cct etherl cct wani Enables the circuits named Etherl and WANT enable echo Enables TCP echo service enable pm 2 Enables the interface module in slot 2 HP Router 650 only 9T spuewuop TON 16 9 Using the Network Control Language Managing Router Operations and Resources Exit Leaving NCL Back to the Main Menu Use NCL s Exit command to exit NCL and return to the Main menu see figure 1 2 in chapter 1 Syntax exit Help Listing the NCL Commands Use NCL s Help command to display a summary of syntax and functions of NCL commands To output the display to a printer or file instead see the Print command on page 16 19 Syntax help type type optional specifies a portion as shown below of all the NCL commands to list If you do not specify the portion the most commonly used commands are listed rget For the commands beginning with rget See pages 16 40 through 16 69
282. econd integer is not included the response must arrive in two seconds to be successful Examples test 080009123456 Sends it once and waits 2 seconds test 080009123456 5 Sends it 5 times and waits 2 seconds test 080009123456 1 30 Sends it once and waits 30 seconds Using the Network Control Language Managing Router Operations and Resources Time Setting or Displaying the Date and Time Use NCL s Time command to set the router s clock and or calendar Using the Time command without any arguments simply displays the current date and time To output the date and time display to a printer or file instead see the Print command on page 16 19 The current date and time also are continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the console display The date and time are always reset when the router s power is switched on An alternative to setting the date and time every time power is switched on is to configure the IP Internet s Time protocol and set this router to be a client of a time server elsewhere on the network However if this router is configured to be a time server then you must set its date and time with this command Syntax time mm dd yy hh mm ss mm dd yy optional is the date in month day year format Youcanomit yy to specify the year that is currently set If you omit the date entirely it is not changed hh mm ss optional is the time specified as hours minutes seconds in 24 hour format You can omit
283. ecurity with passwords select Logout in the Main menu when leaving a console unattended and or use the Configuration Editor to set the Connection Inactivity Time parameter to automatically log out the console session when there s no console activity for the time you configure After logging out of the session a password must be given to use the console again If a modem is used Logout also gives you the option of disconnecting your modem line If you see NCL ERR invalid command ignored in response to the Password command it is possible you did not use the manager password when starting this console session or did not enter the manager password when prompted in this command Pressing the Clear button on the router removes both passwords so that a console session could be started and all commands used without giving a password Use Clear if you forget a password then set the passwords again with this Password command 9T spuewuop TON 16 15 16 16 Using the Network Control Language Managing Router Operations and Resources Syntax To assign an initial password password type mgr new new The console displays Which password is changing type is either m for manager or u for user password The console displays Enter current manager password if a manager password already exists mgr is the current manager password required if existing to assign the user password The console
284. ed in the calculation X Low priority transmit congestion Meaning This message is reported when the data packets that were prioritized as low can t be sent over the WAN link due to congestion This message is reported on the first instance of dropping a packet due to congestion and the first time a packet is dropped after the tx_congestion or total_tx_error statistic is reset X Maximum link latency reached Meaning This message is reported when packets can t be sent over the WAN link because the maximum link latency configured by the user would be exceeded This message is reported on the first instance of dropping a packet due to exceeding the latency cap and the first time a packet is dropped after the latency_tx or total_tx_error statistic is reset X Normal priority transmit congestion 17 58 Meaning This message is reported when the data packets that were not prioritized can t be sent over the WAN link due to congestion This message is reported on the first instance of dropping a packet due to congestion and the first time a packet is dropped after the tx_congestion or total_tx_error statistic is reset Event Log M essages cct Circuit Event Messages XNSCP is down 4T Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit XNS Control Protocol XNSCP has gone down z i XNSCP is up i Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit XNS Control Protocol XNSCP is up XNS packets may now be sent and recei
285. ed map 0004code 6 E is 16 37 16 38 Using the Network Control Language Accessing the Management Information Base As shown in figure 16 2 those six items are the lowest level variables in the buffers MIB If you attempted to use List to display more variables for example by entering the following list 11 1 1 1 In response the console would display no data and simply return you to the NCL prompt To see the contents of variable 11 1 1 1 init specify itin the Get command described on page 16 34 As defined above for identifier you can use the asterisk asa wild card to display the entire buffers information base Thus as a short cut for the above procedure you would enter list buf or list 11 In response the console displays the same formatted data seen in the last step of the above procedure init map 0002code 1 free map 0002code 2 min map 0002code 3 miss map 0002code 4 size map 0002code 5 corrupted map 0002code 6 Using the Network Control Language Accessing the Management Information Base Reset Setting the Value of a MIB Variable to Zero Use NCL s Reset command to set the value of one or more MIB variables to zero You can obtain the pathname using the List command see page 16 35 Syntax reset identifier identifier is the pathname identifying a specific variable You must provide the pathname from the router s highest level objects using object identification codes and or ob
286. ed to the frame Default 31 Range 1 to 31 In the event of identical cost circuit groups the spanning tree algorithm select the circuit group with the better lower priority value Priority is only meaningful if the spanning tree algorithm is enabled Default 128 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 16 32 64 127 128 129 255 Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering a frame based on the contents its Protocol ID Organization Code field Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter a frame based on its Protocol D Organization Codes Ssu3 SUIeIe gd e6piig If you are filtering a single Protocol ID Organization Code leave this field blank and enter the Protocol ID Organization Code in the Protocol ID Org Code low field If you are filtering a range of Protocol ID Organization Codes enter the highest Protocol D Organization Code in the range If you want to establish a range of Protocol D Organization Codes with a filter list leave this field blank and enter the name of a Protocol ID Organization Code list in the Protocol ID Org Code low field For more information refer to Protocol ID Org Code low Note The Protocol D Org Code high parameter is also displayed when creating a Protocol ID Organization Code list Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering a frame based on the contents of its Protocol D Organization Codes a f you do not want to filter Protocol D Org
287. edged packets Note The default of 8 is the required setting for connecting an HP Remote Bridge LA 128 Selects a 16 bit control field providing seven bits for sequencing and allowing a maximum of 127 unacknowledged packets SJIPUL Ld IND1D 4 21 Monitored Events Multicast Support 4 22 Circuit Parameters Parameters and Options Flag i Flag Address Control FCS Flag Key Flag 8 bit sequence 01111110 Address 8 16 bits in length Control 16 bits if Modulus is 123 8 bits if Modulus is 8 Information Contains n bytes of data FPS 16 bit or 32 bit frame check sequence Figure 4 2 HDLC Frame Format Works in conjunction with the Events for Error parameter to define the quality of service metric for the F rame Relay DCE DTE connection Default 4 Range 1 to 10 The two parameters specify a j out of krelationship used to measure circuit reliability as follows If the number of faulty status exchanges Status Inquiry Link Integrity Verification Full Status Inquiry and or Full Status Report messages in a continuous sequence of k Monitored Events such as events equals or exceeds j Events for Error the interface is declared down While the connection is down status exchanges continue Oncej consecutive status exchanges are transferred without error the connection is restored to the active state Frame Relay multicast support lets the multiprotocol router take advantage o
288. een cleared cct identifies the X 25 DDN or PDN circuit and identifies the logical connection number C nn contains the decimal contents of the Cause field octet 4 of the supervisory header of the packet that CLEARed the call D nn contains the decimal contents of the Diagnostic Code field octet 5 of the same packet The tables at the end of this chapter provide a summary listing of these decimal values disable ignored for virtual cct still processing a previous request Meaning NCL s Disable command was issued for the busy virtual circuit vi rtual cct disable in progress for virtual cct Meaning Virtual circuit virtual cct is being disabled enable ignored for virtual cct still processing a previous request Meaning NCL s Enable command was issued for an already enabled and busy virtual circuit vi rtual cct enable in progress for virtual cct Meaning Virtual circuit virtual cctis being enabled fail cct ip address C mm D nn Meaning A call to the destination with IP address i p address on the circuit cct has failed C mm contains the decimal contents of the Cause field octet 4 of the supervisory header of the packet that failed D nn contains the decimal contents of the Diagnostic Code field octet 5 of the same 17 138 Event Log M essages X 25 Event Messages packet The values are listed in tables 17 2 and table 17 3 at the end of this X 25 section 4T high Icn xx
289. efore it was changed by a request from the Timep server and to what the time was changed See the description of the message entry at the beginning of this chapter entity already disabled Meaning An already disabled Time Protocol has received NCL s Disable command entity already enabled Meaning An already enabled Time Protocol has received NCL s Enable command entity disabled Meaning Time Protocol has been disabled in response to NCL s Disable command 17 133 entity enabled Meaning new time set Meaning Event Log Messages timep Time Protocol Event Messages Time Protocol has been enabled in response to NCL s Enable command The time fields in front of this event message indicate what the time was before it was changed by a request from the Timep server and to what the time was changed See the description of the message entry at the beginning of this chapter request from ip address Meaning 17 134 The server received a request for the current time from client i p address and will respond unless it can t reach the node Event Log Messages X 25 Event Messages X 25 Event Messages a N These event messages are generated by the system variable x25 that SiM is X 25 i 5 bad configuration 8 Meaning X 25 had detected an inconsistency in the configuration Action Examine and modify the X 25 configuration bad LAPB packet window value Meaning
290. ement was Len lists the length in bytes of this link state advertisement Seq is a sequential number identifying each successive instance of a link state advertisement indicating old and duplicate entries Metric is the cost of this route Using the Network Control Language Managing the Open Shortest Path First Protocol Ospf Nbrs Displaying the Status of the OSPF Neighbors Use NCL s Ospf Nbrs command to format and display the status of the OSPF neighbors Syntax ospf nbrs Example Area 0 0 0 0 Interface Router ID 190 190 190 10 13 13 13 13 190 190 190 10 12 12 12 12 The fields in the table are as follows Nbr IP Addr State Mode Priority 190 190 190 13 Full Slave 5 190 190 190 12 Full Slave 5 a Area lists the area ID for the neighbor Area ID 0 is reserved for the backbone m Interface lists the interface number of the network to which the neighbor is attached Router ID lists the 32 bit router ID number of the router in the autonomous system Nbr IP Addr lists the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal notation 9T spuewuop TON 16 77 Using the Network Control Language Managing the Open Shortest Path First Protocol a State is the functional level of the interface with the neighbor as fol lows Down No recent information received from the neighbor or the initial state of a neighbor conversation Attempt No recent information received from the neighbor but
291. en Using the Statistic Screens Buffers Usage Statistics Screen Categories on the Buffers Usage Statistics screen are the following MSG miss MSG init MSG free MSG min PKT miss PKT init PKT free PKT min Lists the number of times the router was unable to obtain a message buffer that is all buffers were in use Lists the number of message buffers allocated when the router booted Lists the number of message buffers available for use Due to overhead the number of buffers available is somewhat less than the number allocated Lists the lowest number of message buffers that were available since the router booted This count corresponds to the MSG miss count if message buffers were always available MSG min gt 0 then MSG miss 0 Lists the number of times the router was unable to obtain a packet buffer that is all buffers were in use Lists the number of packet buffers allocated when the router booted Lists the number of packet buffers available for use Due to overhead the number of buffers available is somewhat less than the number allocated Lists the lowest number of packet buffers that were available since the router booted This count corresponds to the PKT miss count if packet buffers were always available PKT min gt 0 then PKT miss 0 15 9 ST su DS SONSNEIS Using the Statistic Screens Circuit Statistics Screen Circuit Statistics Screen The Circu
292. enabled soBessop 6o7 WweAR Meaning The bridge successfully initialized or has been enabled with NCL s Enable command fwd dlay should be gt XXX Meaning The F orward Delay configuration parameter was misconfigured Action For the Forward Delay parameter configure the value XXX or greater correctly corresponding to the value configured for Max Age max age should be gt XXX Meaning The Max Age configuration parameter was misconfigured Action For the Max Age parameter configure the value XXX or greater correctly corresponding to the value configured for Hello Time No Bridge Circuit Group configured Meaning The bridge record in the configuration contains an improperly configured circuit group Action Check bridge circuit groups No Bridge Record configured Meaning The bridge protocol has not been configured Action Configure the bridge 17 97 Event Log Messages lb Bridge Event Messages No Bridge Softw are configured Meaning The bridge protocol has not been loaded Action Modify the configuration to include a bridge record SR internal LAN ID notin RIF route Meaning A specifically routed frame SRF was received that did not include the Internal LAN ID of the bridge The frame cannot be forwarded and must be dropped SR is_srf_rif_insert no rif entry Meaning A specifically routed frame SRF was received however the appropriate entry in the source routing inte
293. enabled EGP has received NCL s Enable command Already disabled Meaning An already disabled EGP has received NCL s Disable command Bad AS local ip address remote ip address Meaning EGP has detected a faulty autonomous system address within the configuration Action Verify the integrity of Local ASN and Remote ASN entries in the configuration A valid entry pair consists of two unique nonzero addresses Bad IP address ip address Meaning EGP has detected a faulty IP address within the configuration Action Verify the integrity of the Local Address and Remote Address configuration parameters Ensure that these parameters do not include broadcast addresses A valid entry pair consists of two unique nonzero addresses Configuration complete Meaning EGP has successfully initialized Configuration failed Meaning EGP could not initialize because of errors in the configuration 17 79 Event Log Messages egp Exterior Gatew ay Protocol Event Messages Action Modify the configuration Configuration inconsistency repaired Meaning EGP has noted a minor discrepancy in the configuration It has initialized using default values Configuration record not found Meaning The configuration does not include an EGP record Action Modify the configuration Enable failed Meaning EGP failed to enable in response to NCL s Enable command Entity disabled Meaning EGP has been disabled in r
294. ency rate Hz of the router end of the connection to the vertical frequency rate of the terminal device connected to Console port or remote modem Default 3 Hz 1 3 5 10 20 30 45 60 Toggles the Console port connection between standard User mode and Telnet mode Default User Places the Console port connection in Telnet mode Places the Console port in standard User mode Specifies the number of bits following each ASCII character received or transmitted by the router Match your console requirements Default 2 Options System Contact System Location System Name System Session Terminal Timezone ANSI VT100 Global and Session Parameters Parameters and Options 1 15 2 T Accepts an ASCII character string identifying the person responsible for the router For example J ohn Smith Building 6 Accepts an ASCII character string identifying the physical location of the router For example Technology Center Engineering Lab Accepts a 15 character string with no spaces naming the router as a node in the network sso Ieg UOISSES pue jeqojD Default DEFAULT_CONFIG Optional selection for displaying additional parameters for configuring the Console port connection Remote users can enable this option to display the session parameters when they want to optimize the connection with the router For example the user might want to change the baud rate of the Console port Default 0 Display
295. ensor contains the authoritative identification of the indicated sensor status sensor contains the status of the sensor Status categories are 18 45 18 46 M anagement Information Base Variables chassis Chassis Information Base e 1 UNKNOWN Status of the object monitored by the sensor is unknown e 2 BAD The object monitored by the sensor may be inoperable or operating outside of the proper range e 3 WARNING The object monitored by the sensor is operating close to the limit of the proper range e 4 GOOD The object monitored by the sensor is within the proper operating range warnings sensor contains the number of times the sensor s status has changed to WARNING Management Information Base Variables config Configuration Information Base config Configuration Information Base The config information base contains variables identifying router hardware and software The major structure for config excluding variables is version 0 the version variable listed first below key Key to available services cct_table Circuit branch cct_tbl_entry cgr_table Circuit Group branch cgr_tbl_entry Ib table Bridge branch Ib_cgtbl_entry at_table AppleTalk branch at_cgtbl_entry drs table DECnet branch drs_cgtbl_entry ip_table IP branch ip_iftbl_ entry xrx_table XNS branch xrx_iftbl_ entry ipx_table IPX branch ipx_iftbl_entry num_egp 0 18 47 ST seg UOnBUWOjU quowumbeuep 18 48 M an
296. ent Information Base in chapter 7 of the User s Guide The router s managed objects define the major MIB categories and are the software resources that enable network services Which managed objects are currently resident within the router depends on which protocols and services are enabled For example if X 25 service is not configured the X 25 object is not resident in the router The table on page 16 32 lists the managed objects These managed objects are the heads of objects leading in some number of levels or intermediate objects to single MIB variables The names of the objects at each level make up pathnames for the variables Chapter 18 Management Information Base Variables lists and defines the MIB variables that are accessed through the managed objects 9T Certain managed objects include a slot number in their pathnames On the HP Router 650 the slot number corresponds to the slot containing the desired MIB activity slots 2 through 5 On HP series 200 and 400 routers the slot number is always 1 spuewuop TON 16 31 16 32 Using the Network Control Language Accessing the Management Information Base Managed Objects Table Managed Objects Table continued Name Alarms uses slot alarm AppleTalk router at AppleTalk router M IB atmib Bridge lb Bridge address table Ibmib Buffers uses slot buf Chassis information base chassis Circuits cct Configuration config Data link servi
297. entifier pair specified by X Y has received a Response packet indicating that the network number and node identifier pair is in use by another network node Consequently the AppleTalk router will generate a new address pair and issue another Probe AARP probing terminated for ccg Meaning The AppleTalk router cannot obtain a unique network number and node identifier pair for the circuit group specified by ccg The directly connected medium is supporting the maximum number of nodes Action Reconfigure the AppleTalk network with a larger network range using the Network Min and Network Max parameters AARP REQ RSP node address X Y Meaning The AppleTalk router resolved the station address for the AppleTalk node address X Y where X is the network number and Y is the node identifier 17 4 Event Log M essages at AppleTalk Event Messages at_amt_alloc out of memory 4T Meaning The AppleTalk router cannot obtain sufficient memory to allocate the AARP address mapping table Action Reduce the AARP Mapping Table parameter to place a lesser demand on memory s pess Ww 601 344 at_cg_cb_alloc out of memory Meaning The AppleTalk router cannot obtain sufficient memory to allocate a circuit group control block Action Reduce the Routing Table Size and or AARP Mapping Table parameters to place a lesser demand on memory at_routing_tbl_alloc out of memory Meaning The AppleTalk router cannot obtain s
298. ep alive sequence numbers that are not as expected That is this sequence number is not the last sequence number we sent This indicates that the other side is not receiving our status message response s pess Ww 601 344 out of memory for IP to V 25 bis mapping Meaning Either too many IP mapping records have been configured or too many other configuration parameters have been set Action Check your configuration and reduce the number of configured items out of memory for IP to V 25 bis mapping phone Meaning Either too map records have been configured or too many other configuration parameters have been set Action Check your configuration file and reduce the number of configured items out of message buffers pkts dropped Meaning There are no message buffers available for V 25 bis These messages are used for internal V 25 bis communication When this occurs data packets may be lost or a V 25 bis connection may not be established Action Reduce the overall system resource use For example reduce traffic to the router Out of sequence keep alive net Meaning The router is not properly receiving the network keep alive sequence number for the identified circuit name Usually this means the switch has reset its sequence counter indicating that it is experiencing difficulties 17 39 Event Log Messages cct Circuit Event Messages Providing quality of service to remote Meaning Follows
299. er high field if you are filtering a range of IPX source or destination hosts 11 10 IPX Protocol Parameters Parameters and Options For additional information refer to Host Number high earlier in this chapter To learn how to assign a Host list to a filter refer to Dest Host low and Source Host low Internal Netw ork Required if IPXWAN is set to Yes Must be unique within the relevant routing Number area and is distinct from the network numbers of the physical network segments in a routing area The internal network number is an 8 digit hexadecimal value padded with zeroes if necessary Internal Router Name Required if IPXWAN is set to Yes Provides an easily identifiable name especially for network management purposes to identify systems by user defined mnemonic names Can be from 1 to 47 uppercase English characters plus the underscore _ hyphen and sign Blank spaces are not allowed Note Blank spaces are not supported IPXWAN Enables or disables IPX operation over a WAN link If enabled requi res values for the Internal Network Number and the Internal Router Name parameters accessed through the 4 Internal Network Number and Router Name IPX menu item Currently supported over the following WAN protocols PPP Frame Relay X 25 Point to Point and HP Point to Point Default No No Disables IPX operation over a WAN link TT Yes Enables IPX operation over a WAN link List Na
300. er from trying to open an outbound connection if the initial attempt failed In this case if you want the router to try again you must use the Network Command Language NCL disable and denable commands to disable then re enable the circuit Even if the router will no longer try to open an outbound connection it will still accept inbound calls Disabl es the circuit when a connect failure occurs In this case if your want the router to try again you must use the Network Command Langure NCL enable command to re enable the circuit Provides a metric for measuring circuit reliability The link quality report packets exchanged by Point to Point peers contain counts of received and transmitted octets and packets thus allowing both Point to Point implementations to monitor data loss across the link Desired Link Quality specifies an acceptable percentage of data loss The percentage is determined by dividing the constant 1 by the value for Desired Link Quality For example the default value 99 specifies an acceptable loss of approximately 1 1 99 0101 Default 99 Options The range of Desired Link Quality parameter values along with the resulting data 4 12 loss percentages are as follows Desired Link Acceptable Quality Value Loss Percentage 1 100 2 50 4 25 5 20 10 10 20 5 50 2 100 1 200 0 5 Circuit Parameters Parameters and Options Desired Link Acceptable Quality Value Loss Percentage 250
301. er was aborted transfer of file filename aborted after retransmissions Meaning The receiver of the file stopped sending acknowledgements before the transfer was complete The connection was timed out Action Check that the remote system is still up transfer of file filename aborted for inactivity Meaning The sender of the file stopped sending data before the transfer was complete The connection was timed out Action Check that the remote system is still up transfer of file filename complete transfer of file CONFIG complete Meaning The file filaevamespecified in the F put command has been successfully transferred 17 132 Event Log M essages timep Time Protocol Event Messages timep Time Protocol Event Messages 4T These messages are generated by the system variable timep s pess Ww 601 344 can t reach time server ip address Meaning The client cannot reach the server with the ip address The normal cause is that the subnet of the server is not yet known by IP However if the condition persists for several minutes it indicates that some part of the path is down or that the configured address is incorrect Action Check that the correct address for the Timep server is configured Check that the server s subnet is entered in the IP routing table by using NCL s Rgetr command changing time Meaning The time fields in front of this event message indicate what the time was b
302. eration of HP Probe and ARP With both address resolution protocols enabled the router uses the first in resolved media address until the address is modified by subsequent updates Nodes are contacted with both Ethernet and IEEE 802 3 encapsulation if a node responds to both then the encapsulation used for the node is the one with the shortest data link layer header Enables the DDN address resolution algorithm a requirement if the network interface provides X 25 DDN service Disables address mapping With mapping disabled all station address IP address relationships must be configured as static routes Enables a table based RF C 877 compliant address resolution mechanism a requirement if the network interface provides X 25 PDN service 7 7 Allow Router to Accept Files Area ID AS Boundary ASB Flood Authentication Type Yes No No Yes No Yes Internet Protocol IP Parameters Parameters and Options Enables inbound TFTP by allowing router to accept files via TFTP from other sources Default No Enables router to accept files via TFTP from other sources Disables acceptance of files via TFTP from other sources Identifies an OSPF area in dotted decimal notation Note The area ID value of 0 0 0 0 is reserved for the backbone Area ID only and should not be used to configure other OSPF areas Opens the OSPF routing pool to routing information obtained from sources external to OPSF Prevents the
303. errun variables Management Information Base Variables cct Circuits Information Base total_log error contains the aggregate count of token ring adapter log errors the sum of the counts of log_ari_fci_err log_burst_err log_dma_bus err log dma_par_err log frm_cpy_err log_line err log_lost_frm log_rx_congest and log_token_err variables total_ring_error contains the aggregate count of ring errors the sum of the counts of ring_auto_rem ring_cnt_overflow ring_hard_err ring_lobe_wire ring_one_station ring_recover ring_rem_station ring_sig_loss ring_soft_err and ring_tx_beacon variables total_rx_error contains the sum of the counts of log_rx_congest and rx_suspended variables total_tx_error contains the sum of the counts of tx_frm_cmpi tx_frm_err tx_frm_size_err tx_ill_frm_fmt tx_list_err tx_odd_adr and tx_threshold variables tx_frm_cmpl tint contains the number of times the token ring adapter transmitted a frame and then generated an adapter to attached system interrupt Such an interrupt is enabled or disabled by the frame interrupt bit bit 4 of TRANSMIT_CSTAT Because frames can be trans mitted faster than the adapter can cause the interrupts each increment of this counter can report the transmission of one or multiple frames tx_frm_err contains the number of times the token ring adapter recorded a transmit frame error A transmit frame error occurs when the token ring adapter finds an erroneous start fram
304. es in conjunction with MAC level source and destination addresses Novell Prepares Novell filters Novell filters drop or forward Novell frames As an option you can construct filters to examine Novell encapsulated frames in conjunction with MAC level source and destination addresses DSAP high Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering 802 2 LLC packets based on the contents of its destination service access point DSAP field Options Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter destination service access points Leave this field blank and enter a DSAP in the DSAP low field if you are filtering a single destination service access point Enter the highest DSAP in the range if you are filtering a range of destination service access points a Leave this field blank and enter the name of the SAP list in the DSAP low field if you are establishing a range of destination service access points with a filter list For more information refer to DSAP low To learn how to create a SAP list refer to SAP low and SAP high DSAP low Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering 802 2 LLC packets based on the contents of its destination service access point DSAP field Options Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter destination service access points a Enter a DSAP in this field if you are filtering a single destination access point 6 8 Effect Don t Match Ignore
305. es or disables remote access to local servers Default Yes Disables broadcasting and effectively isolates local NETBIOS servers from remote clients Enables the delivery of received NETBIOS broadcasts across the local interface thus making local NETBIOS servers available to remote users Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering an IPX packet based on the contents of its destination host field a Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter IPX destination hosts a Leave this field blank and enter the IPX host number in the Dest Host low field if you are filtering a single IPX destination host Enter the highest IPX host number in the range if you are filtering a range of IPX destination hosts a Leave this field blank and enter the name of the Host list in the Dest Host low field if you want to use a Host list to establish the upper and lower range of IPX destination host numbers For additional information refer to Dest Host low later in this chapter For more information about Host lists refer to Host Number high and Host Number low later in this chapter Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering an IPX packet based on the contents of its destination host field 11 6 Options Dest Netw ork Hex Dest Netw ork high Options Dest Network low Options IPX Protocol Parameters Parameters and Options Leave this field blank if you do not want to
306. esponse to NCL s Disable command Entity disabled shutdown failed Meaning EGP has been disabled in response to NCL s Disable command Currently existing neighbor connections were terminated abruptly and not in accordance with EGP protocol Entity enabled Meaning EGP has been enabled in response to NCL s Enable command Entity enabled startup failed Meaning EGP has been enabled in response to NCL s Enable command EGP however has failed to establish connections with neighboring routers Entity is still closing connections Meaning A busy EGP has received NCL s Disable command Action Wait then re issue the command 17 80 Event Log M essages egp Exterior Gateway Protocol Event Messages Entity not initialized 4T Meaning EGP has received an NCL command before it has completed initialization Error nnnn attaching to ip address Meaning EGP has encountered an error attempting to attach the neighbor designated by i p address nnnn designates the error listed in table 17 1 on page 17 83 soBessop 6o7 WweAW Error nnnn detaching from ip address Meaning EGP has encountered an error attempting to detach from the neighbor designated by ip address nnnn designates the error listed in table 17 1 on page 17 83 Insufficient buffers for operation Meaning The router cannot provide sufficient buffers for EGP operations Action Consider reducing the number of neighbors t
307. est lists the IP network number of the destination D Mask lists the IP network mask of the destination Area lists the ID of the area whose link state information has led to the routing table entry s collection of paths Cost lists for type 2 external paths the link state cost of the portion of the path internal to the autonomous system or the link state cost of the entire path for other types E lists for type 2 external paths the cost of the path s external portion 9T spuewuop TON 16 79 Using the Network Control Language Managing the Open Shortest Path First Protocol a Path is the type of path as follows EXT1 Autonomous system AS external path of type 1 EXT2 Autonomous system AS external path of type 2 INTER Inter area path to destinations in other areas INTRA Intra area path to destinations on one of the router s attached areas Next hop lists the next hop to the destination a Advrtr lists for inter area and autonomous system external paths the router ID of the router advertising the summary link or AS external link leading to this path 16 80 Using the Network Control Language Managing the Open Shortest Path First Protocol Ospf Tq Displaying the OSPF Timer Use NCL s Ospf Tq command to format and display the top ten times on OSPF s timer queue Syntax ospf tq Example Type Minutes Seconds USeconds TQLsaLock 0 5 0 TQAck 0 5 0 TQHelloTimer 0 10 0 TQRetrans 0 10 0 TQSumLsdbA
308. et sent by an upper level redirecting protocol to X 25 PDN Should you enter a value greater the 1600 X 25 enforces the upper boundary limit Default 590 Range 0 to 1600 Note Ensure that the value you enter at MTU Size is equal to or greater than the value specified at Pkt Size 13 9 N2 Negotiated Pkt Size Negotiated Pkt Window Outgoing Access PDN 13 10 No Yes DDN TELENET UK PSS NET2 Other X 25 Service Parameters Parameters and Options Determines the number of times a frame is retransmitted before the circuit is reset If a frame remains unacknowledged at the expiration of the T1 timer X 25 retransmits the outstanding frame up to N2 times with each retransmittal requesting an immediate acknowledgment If the frame remains unacknowledged after N2 retries the router resets the LAPB circuit Default 20 Range 1 to 255 Appears when Flow Control is set to Negot Specifies the packet size that appears in the facilities field of Call Request packets originated on Circuit Name Default 128 Range 128 through 2048 Appears when Flow Control is set to Negot Specifies the packet size that appears in the facilities field of Call Request packets originated on Circuit Name Default 2 Range 1 through 7 Determines whether the router can initiate calls to other routers or data terminal devices that are not in CUG Appears and operates only when the Closed User Group parameter is set to Yes
309. et to Yes the setting of the circuit specific Auto Enable parameter determines whether the circuit is automatically enabled Default Yes No Disables the circuit To enable the circuit after the router boots you must use the NCL Interpreter s Enable command Yes Automatically enables the circuit if the global Auto Enable parameter is enabled 4 5 LA sSJIPUL Led N11 Circuit Parameters Parameters and Options Bandwidth Reservation Reserves percentages of the total available bandwidth on a WAN circuit for the transmission of high normal and low priority packets Use this feature to prevent any one priority from taking over the entire bandwidth of a circuit Default High Priority 34 High Priority Reserves 34 of the total available bandwidth Normal Priority Reserves 33 of the total available bandwidth Low Reserves 33 of the available total bandwidth Bridge Flood Refer to Multicast Support on page 4 22 multicast DLCI Call restrictions Specifies which inbound phone numbers will be accepted via V 25 bis media from other routers Default Allows all incoming calls Allow all Accepts all incoming calls incoming calls Allow defined inbound Accepts inbound calls only from the telephone numbers listed with the Allowed call inbound call numbers option If you don t want to allow any inbound calls use this number option and leave the Allowed inbound call numbers empty Channel Management Selects the
310. et_cnt contains the number of alarms scheduled by the router 18 3 18 4 M anagement Information Base Variables at AppleTalk Information Base at AppleTalk Information Base The at information base contains variables that describe transmission and reception activities across each AppleTalk circuit group and rejection of certain packets by the AppleTalk router The structure is the following at ccg AppleTalk circuit group name protocol specific AppleTalk protocol see subheadings variables listed below The pathname is constructed as follows at ccg protocol vari able The variables are listed alphabetically under each protocol AppleTalk Address Resolution Protocol AARP amt_overflow contains the number of times the circuit group tried unsuccessfully to store a node address and its corresponding station address in the AARP mapping table probe_rx contains the number of AARP PROBE packets received by circuit group ccg probe tx contains the number of AARP PROBE packets transmitted by circuit group cog req_rx contains the number of AARP REQUEST packets received by circuit group ccg req tx contains the number of AARP REQUEST packets transmitted by circuit group cog Management Information Base Variables at AppleTalk Information Base rsp_rx contains the number of AARP RESPONSE packets received by circuit group ccg rsp_tx contains the number of AARP RESPONSE packets transmitted by circuit group cc
311. etting of the Block STE configuration parameter in the Bridge Circuit Group Parameters Screen at the last reboot seg UOnBUWOjU quowbHeuep drop_dst_addr contains the number of packets dropped by circuit group cegin accordance with global destination address filters specified within the configuration drop _dst_local contains the number of packets dropped by circuit group ccg because the source and destination address were on the same local network drop_interval contains the number of packets dropped by circuit group ccg because more than one packet was flooded to a particular unlearned address during a Flood Interval time period A packet is flooded to all networks if the destination of the packet is unknown to the router The flood can be controlled by the Flood Interval parameter in the Bridge menu of the Configuration Editor If packets are received with the same destination as the first packet and within the Flood 18 75 18 76 M anagement Information Base Variables lb Bridge Information Base Interval time those packets are dropped if the destination of the first packet has not yet replied The router will not flood packets more than once wihin the Flood Interval time if the Flood interval time is set to a value other than zero drop_invalid_ringid increments when an explorer frame is received and the last ring ID in the RIF does not match the configured ring ID on which it was received If this occurs verify that th
312. etwork interface for Next Hop Using the Network Control Language Managing the Open Shortest Path First Protocol Managing the Open Shortest Path First Protocol OSPF an IP internal gateway routing protocol has an openly available protocol specification that is not proprietary to any single vendor You can display the status of various OSPF elements on this router using the NCL commands listed below You must use a complete MIB pathname with each of these commands The commands available in this category are the following Command Function OspfErrs Display OSPF error counts page 16 73 Ospf Intf Display the status of the OSPF interfaces page 16 74 Ospflsdb Display the OSPF link state database page 16 76 OspfNbrs Display the status of the OSPF neighbors page 16 78 OspfRtab Display IP s OSPF routing table page 16 80 Ospf Tq Display the OSPF timer queue page 16 82 These commands display their output on the console screen To output the display to a printer or file instead of the console screen place the command syntax as shown below for each command within the Print command described in an earlier section of this chapter 9T spuewuop TON 16 71 16 72 Using the Network Control Language Managing the Open Shortest Path First Protocol Ospf Errs Displaying OSPF Error Counts Use NCL s Ospf Errs command to format and display the number of errors accrued by OSPF Syntax ospf errs Example
313. etwork to which the new or updated route refers and by i px address which is the full 1PX address of the next hop router The i px address is shown in hexademimal notation the first eight digits are the network address and the last twelve digits are the host address CG ccg New Srv server at ipx address Meaning The Service Advertising Protocol learned a new node sever which is a character string that is truncated after eleven digits and by the full the destination network to which the new or updated route refers and by i px address which is the full IPX address ipx address which is shown in hexademimal notation the first eight digits are the network address and the last twelve digits are the host address CG ccg SAP Net Fitr ee ignored bad net num Meaning A SAP network level filter configured on the IPX interface has a Network Number of 00000000 The filter is being ignored The circuit group associated with this network interface is ccg and ee is the number of the invalid SAP network level filter configured CG ccg SAP Srv Fitr ee ignored bad srv type Meaning A SAP server level filter configured on the IPX interface has a Server Type of FFFF The filter is being ignored The circuit group associated with this network interface is ccg and is the number of the invalid SAP server level filter configured ipx ccg ipxwan info response timed out Meaning IPXWAN did not receive an information response p
314. ex field if you are filtering a single bit pattern a Enter the highest bit pattern in the range if you are filtering a range of bit patterns For more information refer to Low Value hex later in this chapter Host Cache Enables or disables the aging of physical level addresses learned by any of the address resolution protocols With the address resolution cache disabled Host Cache is set to No entries in the address resolution cache are not aged out With the address resolution cache enabled Host Cache equal to Yes cache entries that have not been accessed within two minutes are aged out removed from the cache Once an entry has been aged the TCP IP router must again acquire the physical level address via an address resolution protocol should it be needed in the future Default No No Disables aging feature Yes Enables again feature Import Action Used in import route filters to determine whether the route is transferred to the routing pool Default ACCEPT ACCEPT Sends information to the routing pool IGNORE Drops the routing information Note The Preference parameter is displayed when Import Action is set to ACCEPT For additional information refer to Preference on page 7 22 Interface Type Sets the OSPF Interface type Default Broadcast Broadcast Connects the router to an Ethernet or IEEE 802 x medium and supports multiple more than two routers plus providing the ability to address a single physic
315. f DECnet destination nodes For more information refer to Dest Node high earlier in this chapter For more information about Node lists refer to Node high and Node low later in this chapter Determines whether a packet is dropped or relayed filtered based on the contents of a packet field and a range established by a matching set of low and high parameters The packet field and corresponding low and high parameters are listed in the following table Packet Field DECnet Parameter Destination area Dest Area low and Dest Area high Destination node Dest Node low and Dest Node high Packet Type Packet Type low and Packet Type high Source area Source Network low and high Source node Source Node low and Source Node high Default Ignore Applies the filtering action drop accept if the contents of the packet field do not fall within the range established by the matching set of low and high filter parameters Applies no filtering action if the contents of the packet field falls within the range established by the matching set of low and high parameters Match Hello Timer Options List Name Max Area Max BcastEnd nodes Max Cost Max Hops Max Nodes DECnet Parameters Parameters and Options Applies the filtering action drop accept if the contents of the packet field falls within the range established by the matching set of low and high filter parameters
316. f end nodes on the attached local network Then select the next highest number from one of the following toggle options Default 887 53 211 523 887 1327 3327 9551 Enables or disables the calculation of the DDP checksum for datagrams constructed and transmitted by the AppleTalk router AppleTalk provides the option of including a 16 bit checksum in the header of DDP datagrams Checksum has no effect upon incoming datagrams If the AppleTalk router receives a datagram containing a checksum it verifies the checksum value Default No Disables DDP check summing the AppleTalk router does not calculate a checksum and writes a value of 0 to the DDP datagram header Enables DDP check summing the AppleTalk router calculates and writes a checksum to the header of any DDP datagram originating from the AppleTalk router Assigns a cost value to the AppleTalk interface Default 0 Range 0 to 9 where 0 designates the highest speed most preferred path and 9 designates the least preferred path The name of a circuit group connecting to a neighboring EtherTalk network router or backbone network This is one of the circuit groups configured for the Circuit Group menu Displays a screen with parameters for creating a DDP Data Delivery Protocol Type filter list For information about creating a DDP Type filter and assigning the list to a filter refer to DDP Type low and DDP Type high later in this chapter Sets the
317. f the multicast functionality offered or expected to be offered by some Frame Relay service providers Frame Relay multicasting reserves certain network assigned DLCIs as multicast addresses The Frame Relay network maps multiple recipients an address group to this single DLCI and delivers copies of a single Frame Relay packet to each member of the address group As the packet passes through the Frame Relay network the DLCI is manipulated so that the packet recipient receives a DLCI indicating the actual packet source not the multicast DLCI Multicasting is generally used in certain address resolution techniques and for applications requiring delivery of identical information to multiple recipients You can configure the following for multicast support ARP multicast DLCI AppleTalk multicast DLCI Bridge Flood multicast DLC DECnet multicast DLCI OSI multicast DLCI General multicast DLCI OSI multicast DLCI Password of Remote Station Percent of queue reserved for high priority packets Percent of queue reserved for low priority packets Percent of queue reserved for normal priority packets Per channel bandwidth Not Used Other Options Permanent Virtual Circuits Point to Point Address Auto Circuit Parameters Parameters and Options Refer to Multicast Support above Accepts the password used by the remote Point to Point peer when logging into the local router Enter the password as an ASCII string of les
318. face Metric To Protocol OSPF Type Tag A Parameter Finder A 21 J pu 4 JTO pureed A Parameter Finder 7 DoD Internet Router Continued 11 Export Route Filters Continued To Protocol EGP To Peer To Autonomous System Metric A 22 A Parameter Finder 8 DECNET IV Routing Service 8 DECNET IV Routing Service Auto Enable M ax Nodes Max Area Node Area M ax Hops Area Max Hops M ax Cost Area Max Cost M ax Bcast Endnodes M ax Visits Bcast Routing Timer 1 Lists 1 Area Lists List Name 1 List Members Area low Area high 2 Node Lists List Name 1 List Members Node low Node high 3 Packet Type Lists List Name 1 List Members Packet Type low Packet Type high A 23 J pu 4 JTO pureed A Parameter Finder 8 DECNET IV Routing Service Continued A 24 2 Circuit Groups Circuit Group Name Cost Hello Timer Router Priority Number of Routers 1 Traffic Filters Precedence Dest Area low high Effect Dest Node low high Effect Source Area low high Effect Source Node low high Effect Packet Type low high Effect Action 3 Remote Address Map Remote Area Remote Node Remote WAN Address WAN Protocol Circuit Name A Parameter Finder 9 SNMP Sessions 9 SNMP Sessions Community Name Session mode Session type Session type Trap Send Event Messages As Traps Event Filter Level 1 Node Addresses Node Add
319. figured too low to detect an ARE loop if the network is reconfiguring due to a link failure or if the router is rebooted Action Increase the Loop Detection Time parameter 17 50 SR Rif_table out of space Meaning Event Log M essages cct Circuit Event Messages 4T The routing information field RIF table which contains the RIF s used to route source routed packets between the router and the remote token ring nodes is out of space It contains RIFs used for both end station source routing for IP as well as intermediate station source routing for bridging soBessop 6o7 WweAR SR sr_es_find Madr_table out of space Meaning Action The madr_table the station address table also called the MAC address table is out of space It contains the station addresses of nodes that communicate through token ring interfaces on this router These addresses are used for both end station source routing for IP as well as intermediate station source routing for bridging For an HP series 200 or 400 routers Increase available memory space by deleting any unneeded portions of the configuration such as configurations for unused ports or protocols For an HP router 650 Increase memory on the routing engine from 8 to 16 Mbytes using the HP J 2443A memory upgrade If this message occurs after a memory upgrade increase available memory space by deleting any unneeded portions of the configuration such as configurations f
320. filter IPX destination hosts Enter the IPX host number in this field and leave the Dest Host high field blank if you are filtering a single IPX destination host Enter the lowest IPX host number in this field and enter the highest host number in the Dest Host high field if you are filtering a range of IPX destination hosts a Enter the Host list name in this field and leave the Dest Host high field blank if you want to use a Host list to establish the upper and lower range of destination host numbers For additional information refer to Dest Host high earlier in this chapter For more information about Host lists refer to Host Number high and Host Number low later in this chapter Identifies the network where the NETBIOS target resides Enter the network number in 8 digit hexadecimal format use leading 0 s if necessary Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering an IPX packet based on the contents of its destination network field Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter IPX destination networks Leave this field blank and enter the IPX network number in the Dest Network low field if you are filtering a single IPX destination network TT Enter the highest IPX network number in the range if you are filtering a range of IPX destination networks Leave this field blank and enter the name of the Network list in the Dest Network low field if you want to use a Network
321. formation Base 2 2 0 02 00 eee 18 75 Ibmib Bridge Address Table Information Base 18 79 log Event Log Information Base 0 05 18 81 mem Memory Information Base 0 4 18 82 mgr Manager Information Base 0 05 18 83 mib Internet MIB 2 ee 18 84 name Name Information Base 0 004 18 85 pm Port Module Manager Information Base 18 86 proprietary Proprietary InformationBase 18 88 rok Router Operating Kernel InformationBase 18 89 snmp SNMP InformationBase 005 18 90 svc System Services Information Base 005 18 91 tcp TCP Information Base 20 0002 18 92 telnet TelnetInformationBase 0004 18 95 tftp TFTP Information Base 2 00004 18 97 timep Time Protocol Information Base 18 99 timer Timer Information Base aaa aaa a 18 100 xrx Xerox XNS Information Base aaau aaa 18 101 x25 X 25 Information Base sanaaa aaa 18 105 11 12 Parameter Finder How To Use the Parameter Finder 0 04 4 A 2 T SyStEM 6 208 d a n eat BA aie A Mae a a D ae A 4 2 Software amp 3 LINeS ouaaa a A 5 A CIRCUITS oi 2 e aa ee eee ee eek A 6 Se Circ it Groups ais 23 Sie yet tee baba a BM ial tee bg A 12 OsBMOGe excep Sk eR Bee eee git Roe E Mage A 13 7 DoD Internet ROUTE oo aa ea eae e ea ee A 16 8 DECNET IV Routing Service
322. frames initiate the establishment of the DCE DTE link sabm_tx contains the number of SABM Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode frames transmitted by X 25 circuit cct SABM frames initiate the establishment of the DCE DTE link ua_rx contains the number of UA Unnumbered Acknowledgment frames received by X 25 circuit cct UA frames acknowledge receipt of SABM or DISC frames and complete the establishment or termination of the DCE DTE link ua_tx contains the number of UA Unnumbered Acknowledgment frames transmitted by X 25 circuit cct UA frames acknowledge receipt of SABM or DISC frames and complete the establishment or termination of the DCE DTE link unknown_rx contains the number of FRMR Frame Reject frames received by X 25 circuit cct that contained a W bit set to 1 This bit setting indicates that the remote end has rejected a frame issued by cct because the frame contained an invalid or unimplemented command or response unknown_tx contains the number of FRMR Frame Reject frames transmitted by X 25 circuit cct that contained a W bit set to 1 This bit setting indicates that cct has rejected a previously received frame because the frame contained an invalid or unimplemented command or response Management Information Base Variables x25 X 25 Information Base Circuit Packet Level call_cfm_rx contains the number of CALL CONNECTED packets received by X 25 circuit cct A CALL CONNECTED packet completes the call setup pro
323. g AppleTalk Echo Protocol AEP reply_tx contains the number of AEP REPLY packets transmitted by circuit group ccg ST req_rx contains the number of AEP REQUEST packets received by circuit group ccg Datagram Delivery Protocol DDP seg UOnBUWOjU quowbHeuep ddp_bad_cksum contains the number of AppleTalk packets dropped by circuit group ccg because the packet contained an incorrect DDP checksum value ddp fwd contains the number of AppleTalk packets forwarded by circuit group ccg ddp_hop ct_exceed contains the number of AppleTalk packets dropped by circuit group ccg because the packet s hop count was too large ddp_noir_addr contains the number of AppleTalk packets dropped by circuit group ccg because the next router s station address could not be resolved ddp_pkts dropped_no_aarp_rsp contains the number of Apple Talk packets dropped by circuit group ccg because the packet s destina tion node did not respond to AARP REQUEST packets issued by the router ddp_pkts_sent_by_aarp contains the number of AppleTalk packets forwarded after the destination address was resolved by AARP 18 6 M anagement Information Base Variables at AppleTalk Information Base ddp_rx contains the number of valid AppleTalk packets received by circuit group ccg ddp_total_ drop contains the total number of AppleTalk packets dropped by circuit group ccg ddp_unknown_netwk contains the number of AppleTalk packets dropped by circ
324. g Access 13 10 P Packet Type high 8 11 10 9 11 12 Packet Type low 8 11 10 10 11 13 Packet type lists specify 11 12 Page 16 14 parameter finder A 2 Parameter finder how to use A 2 Parity 1 8 pass thru 4 11 Password 7 21 16 15 incorrect 16 21 manager 16 96 of Remote Station 4 23 PC host file 16 98 PC upload 16 99 PC terminal 16 19 PDN 13 10 Percent of queue reserved 4 23 Perchannel Bandwidth 4 23 Performance event log 1 6 Permanent Virtual Circuit 4 23 Physical Access Method 3 4 physical address See station address Ping 16 18 Pkt Size 13 11 Pkt Window 13 11 pm 16 32 Point to Point Address 4 23 Point to Point WAN links 4 9 Poisoned Reverse Split Horizon 7 21 Poll Interval 4 5 7 22 Poll Interval seconds 4 24 Polling Mode 7 21 Polling Timer 7 22 PPP address 4 23 Precedence 6 17 7 22 8 11 10 10 11 13 12 13 Precedence X 25 13 11 Preference 7 22 Print 16 19 Index 17 xepul 18 Index print to file 16 19 priorities for different packet types 6 22 Priority 6 17 7 23 Probe 12 14 Procomm Plus 16 98 16 100 Propagate to OSPF 7 23 Propagate to RIP 7 23 propagated route 7 12 Protocol 2 3 7 23 Protocol ID Org Code high 6 17 Protocol D Org Code low 6 17 Protocol Type 6 18 Provide InARP 4 24 Proxy ARP 7 24 PVC 13 11 Q R Quality of Service 13 11 circuits 1 5 4 24 Quick 16
325. g call from DTE address x121 address has been cleared because the remote DTE address was not found in the X 25 address map Action Modify the configuration by adding an entry for the remote node in the X 25 PDN Address Map for the appropriate X 25 circuit clr call from DTE x121 address max calls active Meaning The incoming call from DTE address x121 address has been cleared because the maximum number of calls is already active between the X 25 circuit and the remote node Action Modify the configuration by increasing the Max Conns Dest parameter in the X 25 PDN Address Map for the appropriate X 25 circuit clr call from DTE x121 address no host found Meaning The incoming call from DTE address x121 address has been cleared because no host circuit was found for the call For example if the call was received on a line connected to a DDN network and the line has not been configured for a DDN network then the call cannot be accepted Action Modify the configuration by configuring the appropriate Quality of Service and PDN types for your network 17 137 Event Log Messages X 25 Event Messages clr call from DTE x121 address no idle circuits Meaning The incoming call from DTE address x121 address has been cleared because an idle circuit is not available to receive the incoming call clr cctip_addr C nn D nn Meaning An established DDN or PDN call to the remote host or gateway identified by ip_addr has b
326. g to an HP Remote Bridge To use this option configure the remote device with the address DTE To use this option configure the remote device with the address DCE Explicit Used when multiple communication channels are enabled by a common Poll Interval seconds Provide InARP Quality of Service 4 24 No Yes Auto satellite link Displays a screen with two additional parameters For more information refer to Local Address and Remote Address Sets the time interval between Status Inquiry messages transmitted by the router to the Frame Relay network Default 10 seconds Range The Status Inquiry message requests the Frame Relay network to respond with a Link Integrity Verification to verify the status of the DCE DTE link Enables or disables the Inverse Address Resolution Protocol InARP InARP an extension to the Address Resolution Protocol enables the router to resolve a given DLCI to a specific protocol address Within the Frame Relay environment new PVCs are announced through the exchange of signaling messages between the Frame Relay DCE and the multiprotocol router These signaling exchanges provide an indication of the DLC assigned to the PVC but provide no information regarding protocol addressing thus severely limiting the immediate utility of the PVC InARP enables the multiprotocol router to discover the protocol address of the remote station associated with the newly announced DLCI
327. gent does not need to be turned on in all routers between the client and server The router adjacent to the client must be a relay agent If the router adjacent to the client has a configured set of BOOTREQUEST destinations that are specific server addresses or subnet addresses then the adjacent router is the only router requiring relay agent functionality If the adjacent relay agent does not have either server or subnet addresses configured then the BOOTREQUEST is sent out through all of the adjacent router interfaces and is addressed to the ALL HOSTS broadcast for each interface To allow these BOOTREQUESTS to be forwarded to the server each router in the path between the client and the server must be a BOOTP relay agent The IP address of the remote interface that establishes the connection to the remote autonomous system Enter the address in dotted decimal notation The NIC assigned decimal number identifying the remote autonomous system Enter the remote autonomous system number Sets the number of seconds TFTP waits for an acknowledgment before retransmitting a data message Default 5 seconds Specifies the number of seconds between the TCP IP router s retransmission of OSPF link state advertisements L Default 5 seconds 5 10 15 20 or 30 seconds Note Retransmit Interval should be set to a value greater than the expected round trip delay between any two routers on the backbone Sets the cost for each router ho
328. gh field if you are filtering a range of AppleTalk source sockets Enter the Socket list name in this field and leave the Source Sock high field blank if you want to use a Socket list to establish the upper and lower range of source socket numbers For additional information refer to Source Sock high earlier in this chapter F or more information about Socket lists refer to Socket high and Socket low earlier in this chapter Enables control of the AppleTalk zone names that a router advertises onto a local network Zone filters help to reduce the number of zones that appear on a user s Chooser menu by filtering out all but those zone names that match the local list They also act as a security measure by restricting the AppleTalk zones to which users have access Default No Enables Zone Filter operation Disables Zone Filter operation Identifies a zone that nodes on this port may choose for this circuit group Note that zones are logical groupings and that a zone can encompass more than one network Zone name is optional You can configure up to 36 zone names in addition to the mandatory default zone refer to Default Zone Name on page 12 7 Default 512 13 X 25 Service Parameters 13 2 X 25 Service Parameters Overview Overview DEFAULT_CONFIG Configuration Editor System 1 Software 1 Lines 4 Circuits 4 Circuit Groups 4 Bridge 1 DoD
329. gle control object whose sole function is to generate system management messages The single level structure is the following dev Management Information Base Variables decnet DECnet Configuration Information Base decnet DE Cnet Configuration Information Base The DECnet configuration decnet information base contains variables that describe DE Cnet global and interface specific configuration parameters The structure is the following decnet vari ables the global variables listed below see Global subheading 5 iftab if the interface specific branch see Interface Specific subheading variables the interface specific variables listed below n the interface number assigned by the router The pathnames are constructed as follows seg UOnBUWOjU Juawpeuenw decnet vari able decnet iftab if vari abl n The variables are listed alphabetically under the two branches Global amaxcst contains the maximum inter area transit cost amaxhop contains the maximum number of areas that a packet can traverse from source to destination area contains the number of the local DECnet area bcrtimer contains the time interval between topology packets enadj contains the maximum number of adjacent nodes maxarea contains the number of areas in the network 18 53 18 54 M anagement Information Base Variables decnet DECnet Configuration Information Base maxnode contains the maximum number of nodes per ne
330. gust September October November December Sets the number of data bits in each ASCII character received or transmitted over the Console port by the router The terminal device or remote modem connected to the Console port must be set to a matching number of data bits Default 8 8 data bits 7 data bits Sets the number of minutes of no activity detected on the Console port before the router terminates a communication session When the time period elapses the router logs off the user if a terminal device is connected to the port or sends a hang up string if a modem is connected to the port Default 0 The router ignores inactivity on the Console port 0 1 5 10 15 20 20 30 60 120 1080 Applies the daylight savings time rule used by the Internet RFC 868 Time protocol If the Time protocol is enabled with IP routing and a timeserver is available the day light savings time correction is applied after the router is powered on or booted Default None Applies the daylight savings time rule observed in Alaska local time Disables corrections for daylight savings time 15 T sSIJULILed UOISSES pue jeqojD Canada and Continental US M iddle Europe and Portugal Southern Hemisphere User defined Western Europe Ending month Options Ending day Options Event Filter Level 1 6 Debug Events Global and Session Parameters Parameters and Options Applies the daylight savings time rule observed in
331. h 10 13 11 18 Source Socket low 10 14 source socket field 12 10 source route bridging 16 84 16 86 source route packets 18 80 spanning tree 16 84 16 85 spanning tree algorithm 6 7 6 21 Spanning Tree Enable 6 19 spanning tree parameter values 6 19 speed sense 1 4 Split horizon 7 21 Src Rte 6 20 SRF 18 80 SRF specially routed froma 6 11 SSAP high 6 20 SSAP low 6 20 Stamp 16 23 static route 7 11 station address 4 15 4 16 4 25 7 7 7 17 Stats 16 24 status inquiry messages 4 24 STE 16 84 18 80 Stop Bits 1 8 STP Priority 6 21 stub area 7 9 7 26 Subaddress 4 27 14 4 Subnet Mask 7 27 Summary 16 25 Suppress Authentication Traps 7 27 SVC 13 12 16 32 synchronous line 3 4 synchronous timing signals origin 3 3 System Contact 1 9 System Location 1 9 System Name 1 9 System Session 1 9 T T1 4 26 13 12 Table Age Interval 6 21 Tag 7 27 Target Net 10 14 11 19 TCP 15 15 16 32 TCP connections 16 27 TCP segments disposition 7 6 Index 21 xepul 22 Index TELENET 13 10 Telnet 16 27 16 32 Telnet Mode 1 8 Terminal 1 9 terminal emulation 1 9 terminal ANSI 16 98 terminal VT 100 16 98 Test 16 28 TFTP 7 9 16 33 16 93 16 95 16 96 Time 16 29 time rule 1 4 1 6 Timeout 16 21 timep 16 32 timer 16 32 timer OSPF 16 82 Timezone 1 9 TIP Table Cost 11 14 To Interface
332. h Reservation Percent of queue reserved for high priority pkts Percent of queue reserved for normal priority pkts Percent of queue reserved for low priority pkts Circuit Type Manual Adapter M in Frame Spacing M ax Link Latency ms Connect when Minimum connect duration sec Connect retry count Connect wait time sec Connection inactivity time sec Delay after connect failure min 1 Bandwidth Reservation Percent of queue reserved for high priority pkts Percent of queue reserved for normal priority pkts Percent of queue reserved for low priority pkts Circuit Type V 25 bis adapter M in Frame Spacing M ax Link Latency ms A Parameter Finder A 7 J pu 4 JTO pureed A Parameter Finder 4 Circuits Continued A 8 Circuit Type V 25 bis adapter Continued 1 Adapter record Connect when Minimum connect duration sec Connect retry count Connect wait time sec Connect inactivity time sec Send CIC on all allowed INC s Delay after connect failure min Per channel Bandwidth Min channels to aggregate Max channels to aggregate Channel Management 1 Outbound call number Remote station Number Subaddress 2 Allowed inbound call numbers Allowed Number Subaddress 3 Local number Used for collision avoidance Remote Station Number Subaddress 2 Bandwidth Reservation Percent of queue reserved for high priority pkts Percent of queue reserved for normal priority pkts Percent of queue reserved for low priority pkts
333. h UDP ip_ctrl_id not valid for FGET OS request Meaning The IP entity is not in a state to accept requests from upper layers so the Fget command could not be executed Action Check that IP is configured correctly and is enabled IP not in valid state to accept FGET OS request Meaning The IP entity may not be enabled We cannot invoke TFTP without IP being in the running state Action Ensure that IP is enabled Not enough free memory for OS after reclamation Meaning The operating system image is too large for the current configuration Action Reconfigure the entire router for IP only and reconfigure only the TFTP port Not enough memory for OS will retry Meaning The operating system image is too large for the current configuration TFTP is rebooting to reclaim memory and try again 17 129 Event Log Messages tftp TFTP and Fget Event Messages No pkt buffers for TFTP data send transfer aborted Meaning Ran out of packet buffers during TFTP transfer No such action Meaning Internal entity action error Action Call your local product support provider OS file checksum failed GET failed Meaning The operating system image has a CRC in it that is checked after the F get transfer has completed The calculated CRC did not match that transferred with the file One of the TFTP packets may have been corrupted during the transfer Action Retry the F get os command OS tra
334. he Block STE configuration parameter Syntax blockste all blockste circuit group circuit group is the name of a source routing bridging circuit group Examples blockste WAN1G Blocks forwarding of STE frames on circuit group WANIG blockste all Blocks forwarding of STE frames on all circuits on this router Using the Network Control Language Blocking and Unblocking Spanning Tree Explorer Frames Unblockste Unblock Spanning Tree Explorer Frames Use NCL s Unblockste command to restore forwarding of spanning tree explorer frames on source routing bridging circuit groups overriding the current setting of the Block STE configuration parameter Syntax unblockste all unblockste circuit group circuit group is the name of a source routing bridging circuit group Examples unblockste WAN1G Unblocks forwarding of STE frames on circuit group WAN1G unblockste all Unblocks forwarding of STE frames on all circuits on this router 9T spuewruop TON 16 85 Command Disipmap Enipmap Ipmap 16 86 Using the Network Control Language Controlling IP M apped Circuits for V 25 bis Controlling IP Mapped Circuits for V 25 bis Mapped data is IP data from an IP switched virtual circuit which is configured by defining an IP static route and a phone number to IP to V 25 bis map entry Individual map entries can be disabled while leaving others enabled Three NCL commands are provided for disabling enabling and checking t
335. he IP address must also be included Examples rgets 6 4 0 192 32 1 94 Displays the value of the Internet MIB variable 1 3 6 1 2 1 6 4 0 maximum number of TCP connections from the node whose IP address is 192 32 1 94 1 3 6 1 2 1 6 4 0 the maximum number of TCP connections 9T rgets 7 1 0 192 32 2 194 Displays the value of the Internet MIB variable 1 3 6 1 2 1 7 1 0 number of UDP datagrams delivered to UDP users from the node whose IP address is 192 32 2 194 1 3 6 1 2 1 7 1 0 the number of UDP datagrams spuewuop TON 16 47 Command Rgetmw Rgetw 16 48 Using the Network Control Language Accessing a Remote Management Information Base Accessing a Remote Management Information Base Two NCL commands work with the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP agent and the IP routing application to provide access to the Wellfleet enterprise specific section of the MIB of aremote HP or Wellfleet router Hewlett Packard Company and Wellfleet Communications Inc share this definition for their routers The structure and the variables in this MIB are described in chapter 18 NCL s highest level branches listed in the Managed Objects Table on page 16 32 are branches in this section of the MIB These commands default a portion of the complete pathname iso org dod internet private enterprises wellfleet commServer wfmib or 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 1 1 The commands available in this category are the
336. he MAC or data link header a f you are filtering a single MAC or data link header leave this field blank and enter the MAC or data link header in the Low Value hex field f you are filtering a range of MAC or data link headers enter the highest MAC or data link header in the range For more information refer to Low Value hex Determines whether to limit the bridge hop count to seven hops or to provide infinite hop capability Default No Enables infinite hop capability between the source routing source and destination Allows a maximum of seven hops between the source routing source and destination Assigns a numeric identifier to the bridge The bridge uses the identifier when constructing routing designators Default 1 Disable Leave blank Range 0 to FFF hexadecimal Enter avalue from 0 to FFF hexadecimal to enable global source routing Leave this field blank to disable source routing Note The internal LAN ID must always be network unique LAN ID Hex Learning Bridge Length List Name Loop Detection Time Hex Low Value hex Options Yes No Bridge Parameters Parameters and Options Sets the LAN ID of a particular interface You must assign a unique LAN ID to each bridge interface that uses source routing including non token ring interfaces Default 1 Disable Leave blank Range 0 to fff hexadecimal Leave this field blank if you don t want to enable so
337. he call to be accepted it must be added to the list of allowed numbers in the configuration file or the configuration must be changed to allow all incoming calls 17 43 Event Log Messages cct Circuit Event Messages received indication too short len X Meaning The terminal adapter indication is too short The router will ignore it Action Check the terminal adapter configuration Received packets while in the down state Meaning The router has received packets from the terminal adapter while the conection is down These packets will be dropped Action Check the terminal adapter configuration Received packets while waiting for CTS Meaning The router has received packets from the terminal adapter while waiting for CTS These packets will be dropped Action Check the terminal adapter configuration Received phone number length gt XX Meaning The received phone number was too long The router will truncate it to the allowed length Action Check the terminal adapter configuration Received sub address length gt XX Meaning The received subaddress is too long The router will truncate it to the allowed length Action Check the terminal adapter configuration received unknown indication gt XXX Meaning The terminal adapter indication is unknown The router will ignore it Action Check the terminal adapter configuration 17 44 Event Log M essages cct Circuit Event Messages
338. he configuration so that Source Route is No for a non token ring line netw ork enabled on ip address Meaning IP has initialized the network interface i p address 17 89 Event Log Messages ip IP Event Messages no netw ork interfaces configured Meaning The configuration contains no network interface records Action Modify the configuration to include network definitions for all network interfaces resolved ip address1 ip address2 Meaning IP has added a new entry learned through the Address Resolution Protocol ARP to its address translation table i p address1 is the host address ip address2 is the network interface address SR max RDs exceeded in explorer packet Meaning The maximum number of Route Descriptors RDs was exceeded in an All Routes Explorer ARE packet or a Spanning Tree Explorer STE packet The maximum number of Route Descriptors for a source routed packet is eight The packet cannot be accepted and is dropped SR max RDs exceeded in SRF packet Meaning The maximum number of Route Descriptors RDs was exceeded in a specifically routed frame SRF The maximum number of Route Descriptors for a source routed packet is eight The packet cannot be accepted or dropped SR Rif_table out of space Meaning The routing information field RIF table is out of space The Rif_table contains routing information fields that are used to route source routed packets between the HP bridge ro
339. he link level controller Management Information Base Variables cct Circuits Information Base FDDI Circuit canonical_addr Contains the address of this station in canonical form cfm_state Contains the state of the configuration management state machine downstream_mac_ Contains the 48 bit address of the F DDI downstream neighbor ST elm_a_pcm Contains the state of ELM A s physical connection machine PCM elm_b_pcm_ Contains the state of ELM B s physical connection machine PCM err_gsr_host Contains the number of parity errors detected duringa write access to FDDI System Interface FSI seg UOnBUWOjU quowbHeuep err_gsr_internal_op Contains a count of FSI internal operation errors err_gsr_llc_rx_rer Contains the number of ring errors that occurred for the ring that controls receive LLC frames err_gsr_llc_tx_rer Contains the number of ring errors that occurred for the ring controlling transmit LLC frames err_gsr_Ilc_rx_rov Contains the number of ring overruns on the receive LLC err_gsr_port_op Contains the number of FSI port operation errors err_gsr_smt_rx_rer Contains the number of ring errors that occurred for the ring that controls receive SMT frames err_gsr_smt_rx_rov_ Contains the number of ring overruns on the receive SMT frame 18 19 18 20 M anagement Information Base Variables cct Circuits Information Base err_rx_crc Contains the number of received frames with a faulty FCS
340. he network is reconfiguring due to a link failure or if the router is rebooted Action Check the Loop Detection Time parameter in the configuration The Loop Detection Time may be set too low to detect an ARE loop and may need to be increased SR Rif_table out of space Meaning The routing information field RIF table Rif_table is out of space The RIF table contains RIFs that are used to route source routed packets between routers and remote hosts over token ring networks The RIF table contains RIF s used for both end station ES source routing over IP and intermediate station 1S source routing over the bridge SR sr_is_find Madr_table out of space Meaning The station address table Madr_table is out of space The Madr_table is a table that contains station addresses that are used for both end station ES source routing for IP as well as intermediate station IS source routing for the bridge 17 99 Event Log Messages lb Bridge Event Messages SR sr_is_table outcct s cg is 0 sending ARE Meaning The specifically routed frame SRE was received and the appropriate entry in the source route intermediate station table Sr_is table for the source destination pair does not yet include the route to the destination station The bridge will now send an All Routes Explorer ARE packet in order to discover the route to the destination station The route to the destination station is discovered when a resp
341. he packet destination ST errsxitunspec contains the number of router generated Error Protocol packets with an Error Number of 1000 This error number indicates that the router rejected an IDP packet for unspecified reasons forwarding contains an integer switch indicating the node s function within the extended XNS network A value of 1 indicates that the node is acting as a gateway routes and forwards datagrams a value of 2 indicates that the node is acting as a host does not route and forward datagrams seg UOnBUWOjU quowbHeuep forwdatagrams contains the number of received IDP datagrams not addressed to the XNS router The router attempts to forward these datagrams to their ultimate destination inadderrors contains the number of IDP datagrams discarded because of invalid destination address fields indelivers contains the number of IDP datagrams delivered to IDP user protocols including Error Protocol indiscards contains the number of valid input IDP datagrams discarded because of insufficient router resources lack of buffer space inhderrors contains the number of IDP datagrams discarded because of errors in their IDP headers Such errors include faulty checksums format errors and transport control hop count errors inreceives contains the total number of all IDP datagrams including those received in error received from all interfaces 18 103 18 104 M anagement Information Base Variables xrx Xer
342. he router software was unable to allocate a message needed to initiate the reboot process of a port module The port module will not be restarted automatically Action Restart the port module by enabling it from the NCL prompt Card in slot slot removed Meaning The router software has detected the removal of a port module in the specified slot Disabling Port Module Meaning The NCL Disable command was successful and the process of disabling the port module has begun Disabling Port Module slot slot Meaning The port module in the specified slot is being disabled Download failure on slot slot Meaning The port module in the specific slot was not able to be downloaded because of alack of memory or aCRC error in the download file in Flash memory Action Manually restart the port module by enabling it from NCL For example if a download failure is indicated for slot 4 you can attempt to manually enable it by executing this NCL command enable dev 4 17 112 Event Log M essages pm Port Module Manager Event M essages If the condition persists contact you HP support provider 4T Downloading Port M odule type type in slot slot Meaning The software for the port module in slot is being downloaded The port module type is a numeric identifier 1 2 etc soBessop 6o7 WweAW Enabling Port Module Meaning The NCL Enable command was successful and the process of enabling the port
343. he status of virtual IP maps The commands available in this category are the following Function Disable an IP map page 16 88 Enable an IP map that was disabled earlier by Disipmap page 16 89 Show the current state of an IP map page 16 90 These commands are described below Using the Network Control Language Controlling IP Mapped Circuits for V 25 bis Disipmap Disabling an IP Map for V 25 bis Switched Virtual Circuits Use NCL s Disipmap command to disable an IP map entry a specific location while leaving the other mappings enabled Then the IP next hop address configured with this map will remain unreachable as will all of the static routes with which it is associated Syntax disipmap X X X X X X X X isthe next hop IP address in dotted decimal notation of the map to disable 9T spuewuop TON 16 87 16 88 Using the Network Control Language Controlling IP M apped Circuits for V 25 bis Enipmap Re enabling an IP Map for V 25 bis Switched Virtual Circuits Use NCL s Enipmap command to enable an IP map that was disabled earlier by using Disipmap Syntax enipmap X X X X X X X X is the next hop IP address in dotted decimal notation of the map to enable Using the Network Control Language Controlling IP Mapped Circuits for V 25 bis lpmap Displaying an IP Map for V 25 bis Switched Virtual Circuits Use NCL s lpmap command to display the status of an IP map Syntax ipmap X X X X
344. heck the portion of the configuration for the type of circuit named after cct in the object name preceding this message Correct the configuration and reboot the router Bad full polling reset to 6 Meaning In the indicated frame relay circuit the chosen interval between full polling parameter is not within the proper range The proper range is between 1 and 255 polls The default value is to send a full status enquiry every six polling cycles 17 20 Action Bad interface discriminator found lt xxx gt Meaning Event Log M essages cct Circuit Event Messages Modify the configuration so that the polling interval is within the proper range 4T For the indicated frame relay circuit a packet was received on the management interface Data Link Connection Identifier DLCI but the protocol discriminator field did not contain the proper value for the selected management interface method Proper values are 9 for LMI and 8 for ANSI Annex D lt xxx gt identifies the protocol discriminator that was found soBessop 6o7 WweAR Bad poll interval reset to 10 Meaning Action BNCP is down Meaning BNCP is up Meaning For the indicated frame relay circuit indicates that the polling interval chosen during configuration is not within the valid range of 5 to 30 seconds Modify the frame relay configuration so that the polling interval is within the proper range For the indicated PPP
345. hen the router boots and in response to valid address mask request messages Default No Disables address mask reply messages Yes Address Resolution ARP HP Probe ARP amp HP Probe DDN None PDN Internet Protocol IP Parameters Parameters and Options Enables address mask reply messages to be generated in compliance with the relevant sections of RFCs 950 and 1009 Enables or disables address resolution the mapping of 32 bit IP addresses to 48 bit station addresses This parameter setting also influences the data link encapsulation method used at address resolution time Default ARP amp HP Probe Allows the router to conditionally enable IP E thernet address mapping using the Address Resolution Protocol ARP as described in RFC 826 and the Proxy ARP Protocol Enables the proprietary Hewlett Packard Probe Protocol an address resolution functioning much like ARP Both Ethernet and IEEE 802 3 encapsulation are used The following Probe messages are routed Unsolicited Reply outgoing transmitted on all IP network IFs when router is booted Virtual Address Request incoming except on the same circuit and outgoing Virtual Address Reply incoming and outgoing L The following HP Probe messages are bridged if bridging is enabled Name Request incoming Name Reply outgoing Proxy Name Request incoming Proxy Name Reply outgoing sI3UL Led di 090 01d 3U Enables concurrent op
346. hich the new or updated route refers and by i px address which is the full IPX address of the next hop router The i px address is shown in hexademimal notation the first eight digits are the network address and the last twelve digits are the host address soBessop 6o7 WweAW Note HP Router 650 Only If the value of ipxnetis zero and the second part of i px address is the station address of the router then the first part of i px address is a directly connected network on the router ipx ccg New Srv server at ipx address Meaning The Service Advertising Protocol learned a new node sever which is a character string that is truncated after eleven digits and by the full the destination network to which the new or updated route refers and by ipx address which is the full IPX address i px address which is shown in hexademimal notation the first eight digits are the network address and the last twelve digits are the host address ipx ccg request timed out Meaning IPXWAN request sent out but no response received on that interface within the timeout interval Action Check if IPXWAN has been configured on the remote link ipxwan Internal Network Number record not configured Meaning IPXWAN detected an unconfigured record in the IPX configuration Action Configure an internal network number and router name in the IPX configuration 17 95 Event Log Messages lb Bridge Event Messages lb Bridge Event
347. high field blank If you are filtering a range of MAC addresses enter the lowest MAC address in this field and enter the highest MAC address in the MAC Address high field For more information refer to MAC Address low To learn how to apply a MAC Address list to a filter refer to MAC dest low and MAC source low Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering a frame based on the contents of its MAC level destination address field Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter MAC destination addresses Leave this field blank and enter the destination address in the MAC dest low field if you are filtering a single MAC destination address Enter the highest MAC destination address in the range if you are filtering a range of MAC destination addresses Leave this field blank and enter the name of the MAC Address list in the MAC dest low field if you are establishing a range of MAC destination addresses with aMAC Address list MAC dest low MAC source high MAC source low Bridge Parameters Parameters and Options For more information refer to MAC dest low To learn how to create a MAC Address list refer to MAC Address low and MAC Address high Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering a frame based on the contents of its MAC level destination address field Options Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter a frame based on its MAC
348. hronous WAN Port Module 3 Token Ring Port Module 4 FDDI Port Module msg tx the number of messages transmitted from the routing engine to the port module msg_rx the number of messages received by the routing engine from the port module msg fail the number of message transmissions and receptions which have failed trans depth the maximum depth of the transactional message log 18 87 18 88 M anagement Information Base Variables proprietary Proprietary Information Base proprietary Proprietary Information Base This is a proprietary Information Base used by HP network management applications If further information is desired please contact your HP representitive Management Information Base Variables rok Router Operating Kernel Information Base rok Router Operating Kernel Information Base The structure of the router operating system rok information base is the following rok slot always 1 for an HP Series 200 or 400 router 1 to 5 on an HP Router 650 vari ables listed below ST The pathname is constructed as follows rok slot vari able The variables are listed alphabetically boot_count contains the number of times the router has been booted It is never reset as long as battery backed RAM is intact seg UOnBUWOjU quowumbeuep console connects contains the number of times the console has made a modem connection cpu contains the CPU utilization averaged ove
349. hrough the transmit timing TT output line The upper range for external clocking is 2 megabits per second and the aggregate throughput is 4 megabits per second Select this option if the router has to supply the timing signals Some test environments do require an external clock The internal clock signal drives the transmit timing TT output line If you set Clock Source to Internal also set the Clock Speed parameter 3 3 Clock Speed Connector Options Physical Access Method 3 4 CSMA CD Token Ring Lines Parameters Parameters and Options Sets the speed on the internal clock if the Clock Source parameter is set to Internal Choose one of the following options Default 56 K bits per second 1 2 K 2 4K 4 8K 7 2 K 9 6 K 19 2 K 32 K 38 4 K 56 K 64K 125 K 230 4 K 420 K 625 K 833 K 1 25 M Note The Clock Speed limit for RS 232 cables connected to the router s WAN ports is 230 4Kbps Identifies the physical port interfaced to a synchronous line Examples of defaults Line Type Series 200 400 Series 600 First Port of Type First Port of Type Ethernet 802 3 ETHER1 ETHER21 slot 2 port 1 Synchronous WAN1 WAN31 slot 3 port 1 Token Ring TOKEN1 TOKEN 41 slot 4 port 1 FDDI FDDI1 Note The options displayed for Connector vary depending on the type of line you are configuring Specifies the type of physical line connected to the indicated port and on HP Series 600 routers the Slo
350. ic name f you do not have SNMP network management stations on your extended network HP recommends that you enter a community name even if no other nodes will use it This allows you to use the Rget commands from the Network Control Language NCL Interpreter on this router s console to check its forwarding and routing tables and other MIB variables If you enter Public the Rget commands will default the community name parameter so that you need not type it for every command Or you can assign some other name which must be typed for every Rget command to provide some security against other remote access to the agent Note If you leave the Community Name field blank as it is by default there will be no access for queries by either this console or any remote network managers even if you complete the remainder of this screen so that the agent is enabled You must enter a name to have access Determines which event messages are transmitted as traps to SNMP application entities The Event Filter Level parameter is displayed when the Trap option is selected for the Session Type parameter Skip this field if enterprise specific trapping is disabled Select the appropriate filter level if you have enabled enterprise specific trapping For information about selecting a filter level refer to Filter Level later in this chapter Grants SNMP agent access to the member of Community Name whose IP address you specify 9 3
351. ield blank if you are filtering a single AppleTalk destination socket 12 9 CL Jle1 ddy SJIPUL Ld Effect Don t Match List M embers 12 10 Ignore Match AppleTalk Parameters Parameters and Options Enter the lowest AppleTalk socket number in this field and enter the highest socket number in the Dest Sock high field if you are filtering a range of AppleTalk destination sockets Enter the Socket list name in this field and leave the Dest Sock high field blank if you want to use a Socket list to establish the upper and lower range of destination socket numbers For additional information refer to Dest Sock high earlier in this chapter F or more information about Socket lists refer to Socket high and Socket low later in this chapter Determines whether datagrams are dropped or relayed filtered based on the contents of a datagram field and a range established by a matching set of low and high filter parameters The datagram field and corresponding of low and high filter parameters are listed in the following table Datagram Field AppleTalk Router Parameter DDP type DDP Type low and DDP Type high destination node Dest Node low and Dest Node high destination socket Dest Sock low and Dest Sock high destination network Dest Net low and Dest Net high source network Source Net low and Source Net high source node Source Node low and Source Node high so
352. ime secs Echo Request Time secs Desired Link Quality M in Frame Spacing Extended 32 bit CRC M ax Pkt Size IP Address LCP Active Open LCP Auto Restart M ax Link Latency ms Use UPAP Compression 1 Bandwidth Reservation Percent of queue reserved for high priority pkts Percent of queue reserved for normal priority pkts Percent of queue reserved for low priority pkts Circuit Type LAPB X 25 PDN T1 0 1 secs N2 M in Frame Spacing Flow Ctrl Pkt Window Pkt Size A 10 A Parameter Finder 4 Circuits Continued Circuit Type LAPB X 25 Continued SVC Low SVC LCN High SVC LCN PVC Low PVC LCN High PVC LCN M ax Link Latency ms O none 1 Bandwidth Reservation Percent of queue reserved for high priority pkts Percent of queue reserved for normal priority pkts Percent of queue reserved for low priority pkts Circuit Type HP Point to Point Point to Point Address Minimum Frame Spacing M ax Link Latency ms Compression Remote signal amp sense Data Link Layer Protocol 1 Bandwidth Reservation Percent of queue reserved for high priority pkts Percent of queue reserved for normal priority pkts Percent of queue reserved for low priority pkts Circuit Type FDDI LAN Address XCVR signal polling Circuit Type 802 5 LAN Address XCVR signal polling J pu 4 JTO pureed A Parameter Finder 5 Circuit Groups 5 Circuit Groups Circuit Group Name Circuit Group Speed 1 Circuit Group M embers Circuit Name
353. imes that X 25 circuit cct came up in accordance with X 25 frame level protocol rej rx contains the number of REJ Reject frames received by X 25 circuit cct A REJ frame is a negative acknowledgment calling for the retransmission of specified frames rej_tx contains the number of REJ Reject frames transmitted by X 25 circuit cct A REJ frame is a negative acknowledgment calling for the retransmission of specified frames rnr_rx contains the number of RNR Receiver Not Ready frames received by X 25 circuit cct An RNR frame denotes a busy condition indicating a temporary inability to accept frames from the remote end of the circuit rnr_tx contains the number of RNR Receiver Not Ready frames transmitted by X 25 circuit cct An RNR frame denotes a busy condition indicating a temporary inability to accept frames from the remote end of the circuit 18 107 18 108 M anagement Information Base Variables x25 X 25 Information Base rr_rx contains the number of RR Receiver Ready frames received by X 25 circuit cct An RR frame either indicates the readiness to receive frames or acknowledges the receipt of frames rr_tx contains the number of RR Receiver Ready frames transmit ted by X 25 circuit cct An RR frame either indicates the readiness to receive frames or acknowledges the receipt of frames sabm_rx contains the number of SABM Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode frames received by X 25 circuit cct SABM
354. in table 18 1 in the hw Hardware Information Base section in chapter 18 Verify the adapter card hardware The router has detected that the connector number specified for this token ring port does not physically exist on the hardware Either the current version of the operating system does not support the hardware type or the line record for this token ring circuit cct has an invalid connector number configured Check the connector assignment for this token ring line cct in the configuration file CCT cct Group Address Programming Failure Meaning Action 17 60 A failure was detected when programming the proprietary token ring group address for the hop count reduction No source routing hop count reduction will take place There may be too many protocols configured on this token ring circuit that use functional addresses Contact your HP support provider Event Log M essages dev Device Event Messages CCT cct Token cable connection fault 4T Meaning The router detected a cable fault on this token ring circuit The circuit is no longer in operation Action Check that the cable is still attached to the router and also to the token ring hub If the connections are proper then the cable itself may be bad soBessop 607 WweAR CCT cct Token Ring circuit record missing Meaning This token ring circuit is not completely configured There may be some corruption of the configuration file Action Rec
355. in this chapter To learn how to assign a Network list to a source or destination network filter refer to Dest Network low and Source Network low later in this chapter Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering XNS source or destination networks when creating a Network list a Enter the XNS network number in this field and leave the Network Number high field blank if you are filtering a single XNS source or destination network Enter the lowest XNS network number in this field and enter the highest network number in the Network Number high field if you are filtering a range of XNS source or destination networks For additional information refer to Network Number high earlier in this chapter To learn how to assign a Network list to a source of destination network filter refer to Dest Network high and Dest Network low later in this chapter Displays additional parameters for creating a Network list For additional information about creating a Network list refer to Network Number low and Network Number high earlier in this chapter For information about creating a filter with a Network list refer to Dest Network low and Dest Network high earlier in this chapter n Identifies the XNS network for interfacing connections All XNS networks are identified by a 32 bit network number assigned by the local network administrator Identifies the next hop router b
356. in this chapter To learn how to assign a Node list to a filter refer to Dest Node low and Source Node low Assigns a priority value to a filter the higher the precedence the greater the priority You can construct up to 31 filters per AppleTalk interface The Precedence value is used when an in coming packet meets several filter rules In such an instance the filter rule with the highest priority precedence is applied to filter the packet CL Default 31 Range 1 to 31 Note When two filters have equal precedence the first filter configured takes precedence the second filter meLeiddy SJIPUL Ld 12 13 Probe Routing Table Size Seed Router Socket Lists 12 14 Options No Yes AppleTalk Parameters Parameters and Options Works in conjunction with the Node ID parameter and in the case of seed routers the Network parameter to enable or disable the generation of AARP Probe datagrams and their subsequent transmission across Circuit Group Name Note It is recommended that you enable Probe even if you plan to assign an explicit node identifier Enabling Probe guards against duplicate AppleTalk addresses within an internet Determines the number of entries in the AppleTalk router s routing table Default 887 53 211 523 887 1327 3327 9551 Determines whether the AppleTalk router is a seed or nonseed router for the network attached by the circuit group A seed router is a route
357. ination host numbers 5 For additional information refer to Dest Host low later in this chapter For more 8 3 information about Host lists refer to Host high and Host low later in this g chapter Dest Host low Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering an XNS packet based on the contents of its destination host field Options Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter XNS destination hosts Enter the XNS host number in this field and leave the Dest Host high field blank if you are filtering a single XNS destination host Enter the lowest XNS host number in this field and enter the highest host number in the Dest Host high field if you are filtering a range of XNS destination hosts Enter the Host list name in this field and leave the Dest Host high field blank if you want to use a Host list to establish the upper and lower range of destination host numbers For additional information refer to Dest Host high earlier in this chapter F or more information about Host lists refer to Host high and Host low later in this chapter Dest Netw ork high Sets the high boundary of the range for filtering an XNS packet based on the contents of its destination network field Options Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter XNS destination networks Dest Network low Options Dest Socket high 10 6 Options Xerox Network Systems XNS Router Par
358. incremented and on the first drop of a packet an event is logged Determines the largest packet size handled by the Frame Relay network or the maximum size of an SMDS packet transmitted by the router or the largest packet size accepted by Point to Point from the peer router SMDS Default 1547 Point to Point Default 1578 Frame Relay Default 1600 Sets the lower limit for the number of channels your terminal adapter uses to make a connection For further information refer to the instruction manual for your terminal adapter Used with Pt to Pt Protocol PPP to determine the minimum number of eight bit flag sequences prefixed to an HDLC packet transmitted by the router The packet ends with a single instance of the same flag The total number of of flags transmitted between sequential packets includes the trailing flag and the variable number of leading flags After determining the minimum number of leading flags not including the trailing flag needed select the closest available value Default 2 Range 2 to 62 in increments of 2 Minimum connect duration sec Minimum Frame Spacing Modulus Circuit Parameters Parameters and Options Sets the total time to keep the connection open even if no further data is expected This parameter is also disabled when you set the Connect when parameter to Circuit is enabled Default 180 Disable 0 Range 0 to 64800 seconds This parameter lets you keep a line open for the mi
359. ing table variables listed below The pathname is constructed as follows svc slot sme type vari able The variables are listed alphabetically alloc contains the number of objects allocated and in use in space install contains the current number of objects contained in space space contains the size of the memory area in bytes 18 91 18 92 M anagement Information Base Variables tcp TCP Information Base tcp TCP Information Base The Transmission Control Protocol tcp information base contains variables that describe the exchange of TCP segments between communicating TCP peer entities The structure is the following tcp vari ables listed below The pathname is constructed as follows tcp variable The variables are listed alphabetically acks_snt contains the number of positive acknowledgments transmitted by the router during TCP sessions app_dropped contains the number of TCP segments dropped because of invalid segment port and or protocol information app_notcb contains the number of instances the TCP port was not found in the hash table Consequently TCP drops the segment badack contains the number of received faulty acknowledgment segments badflg contains the number of received TCP segments that contained unknown or faulty flags badopt contains the number of received TCP segments that requested unknown unsupported TCP options badrst contains the number of received faulty TCP reset segments
360. ion ports enter the name of the IP port list in this field and leave the UDP TCP Dest Port high field blank 7 29 L sPULHLd dl 020 01d PUHI UDP TCP Source Port high Options UDP TCP Source Port low 7 30 Options Internet Protocol IP Parameters Parameters and Options For more information refer to UDP TCP Dest Port high earlier in this chapter To learn how to create a Port list refer to Port low and Port high earlier in this chapter Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering a UDP or TCP source port Set the Protocol parameter to Ignore to disable the filtering of UDP and TCP source ports Leave this field blank and enter the source port number in the UDP TCP Source Port low field if you are filtering a single UDP or TCP source port Enter the highest port number if you are filtering a range of UDP or TCP source ports Leave this field blank and enter the name of an IP port list in the UDP TCP Source Port low field if you want to use an IP port list to establish the lower and upper range of UDP or TCP source ports For more information refer to UDP TCP Source Port low later in this chapter To learn how to create a Port list refer to Port low and Port high earlier in this chapter Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering a UDP or TCP source port Set the Protocol parameter to Ignore to disable the filtering of UDP and TCP
361. ion unreachable messages with a Code field of 4 indicating that a datagram could not be fragmented transmitted by interface ip address Such messages indicate that ip address cannot fragment an IP datagram longer than 1500 bytes or that the DF bit Do Not Fragment of the IP datagram was set icmp_tx param_problem contains the number of ICMP parameter problem messages transmitted by interface ip address Such messages report faulty IP headers icmp_tx redirect contains the number of ICMP redirect messages transmitted by interface ip address Such messages inform the recipient of a more optimum IP route icmp_tx ttl contains the number of ICMP time exceeded messages transmitted by interface ip address Such messages are generated when a datagram s hop count reaches zero mask contains the 32 bit subnet mask of interface ip address expressed as an unformatted decimal integer Management Information Base Variables ip IP Information Base rx contains the total number of IP datagrams received by interface ip address tx contains the total number of IP datagrams transmitted by interface ip address ulp contains the total number of IP datagrams delivered by the router to one of three upper level protocols Internet Control Message Protocol Transmission Control Protocol or User Datagram Protocol for processing Routing Table cache_hits contains the number of times the IP address was not found in the forwarding table and was fou
362. ircuit s with the lowest cost when defining a path so assigning each circuit a cost is in effect a way of assigning it a priority Assign a higher cost to a circuit not to be used on a regular basis Your circuit costs should be in line with the settings of the Area Max Cost and Max Cost basic parameters Refer to Table 8 1 at the end of this chapter for suggested circuit costs when transmitting media of various clock speeds Default 10 Range 1 to 25 Table 8 1 Suggested DECnet Circuit Costs Transmission Suggested Transmission Suggested Circuit Speed Circuit Cost Speed Cost 10 M bit s 3 56 Kbit s 15 1 54 M bit s 7 38 4 Kbit s 16 1 25 M bit s 8 32 Kbit s 17 833 Kbit s 9 19 2 Kbit s 18 Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering a DE Cnet packet based on the contents of its destination area field Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter DE Cnet destination areas Leave this field blank and enter the DE Cnet ID of the destination area in the Dest Area low field if you are filtering a single DE Cnet destination area Dest Area low Dest Node high Options Options DECnet Parameters Parameters and Options a Enter the DECnet ID of the highest destination area in the range if you are filtering a range of DECnet destination areas Leave this field blank and enter the name of the Area list in the Dest Area low field if you want to use an Area list to establish the upper and lowe
363. iry every 60 seconds LA Specifies the 32 bit Internet address of the Point to Point circuit Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation Changes the station address also called the physical or Ethernet or MAC address for the port assigned to the circuit sSJIPUL Ld N2119 4 15 4 16 Circuit Parameters Parameters and Options Every HP router is shipped with a unique universally administered 48 bit station address for each port written in read only memory ROM The first 24 bits are always 080009 hexadecimal from Hewlett Packard and the second 24 bits are unique to each port on each unit manufactured by Hewlett Packard Because each LAN device within your network requires a unique station address it is imperative that no other device use the same address the address assigned in the factory guards against duplicate addresses The station address of each port is used by the protocol application for routing Some of the protocols when enabled override the currently configured station address for some or all of the ports DE Cnet sets its own single station address identically on all ports IPX and IP host only routing and spanning tree bridging use the currently configured station address of the WAN1 Port for all ports in the router IP routing uses the currently configured station address of the WAN1 port By default the LAN Address field on the Circuit Parameters screen is blank which leaves the factory default uncha
364. isting line record Action Modify the configuration to include proper line and circuit records DEV CCT cct Invalid QOS for PPP QOS LLC1 Meaning The Quality of Service parameter for circuit cct was not configured as LLC1 unreliable datagram Since LLC1 is the only appropriate Quality of Service for the driver to use for Point to Point protocol the Quality of Service parameter has been automatically modified to be LLC1 Note that the PPP subsystem not the driver provides additional services beyond LLC1 Action Modify the configuration so that the Quality of Service parameter is LLC1 17 27 Event Log Messages cct Circuit Event Messages DEV CCT cct Not enough memory for compression Meaning Action Compression is configured on the circuit but there is not enough free memory to allocate the compression table Either remove configured functionality that is unnecessary or replace the router with another one having more memory DEV CCT cct transmit congestion Meaning Action The router has dropped packets that were to be transmitted on this circuit The bit rate of traffic destined for this port is larger than the media can handle This could be due to either many circuits feeding this one circuit too much data or the ring is too busy with other traffic to allow all of the traffic the router would like to place on the ring Investigate resegmenting your network to balance the flow of traffi
365. it Statistics screen summarizes traffic volume for each circuit on the router For more detailed circuit statistics maintained by the router use the NCL Get command SAMPLE_CONFIG 6 Jan 1991 28 40 16 NAME RX Bytes Frames Err TX Bytes Frames Err gt 1 ether1 225358 2586 861 4718 75 B Z tokeni a l a 7 a B 3 want 7 a 7 a 7 B 4 wanz B B B B B 7 TOTAL 225358 2586 861 4718 75 B PRESS r for reset Down Up lt to exit Figure 15 4 Circuit Statistics Screens 15 10 Using the Statistic Screens Circuit Statistics Screen Categories on the Circuit Statistics screen are the following NAME Rx Bytes Rx Frames Rx Err Tx Bytes Tx Frames Tx Err TOTAL Lists each individual configured circuit by name Lists the number of bytes of data received by the circuit Lists the number of frames received by the circuit Lists the number of faulty frames frames that contained an error received by the circuit Lists the number of bytes of data transmitted by the circuit Lists the number of frames transmitted by the circuit Lists the number of frames that were not transmitted because of errors Lists the total for each of the above counts for all circuits ST SONSNEIS SU823 19S 15 11 15 12 Using the Statistic Screens DECnet Router Statistics Screen DE Cnet Router Statistics Screen The DECnet Router Statistics screen is available if the DE Cnet routing service is ena
366. ject names You can use the asterisk as a wild card at the end of your identifier It specifies all variables in the branch descending from the object specified in front of it Examples reset telnet tx_bytes Resets the value of the Telnet variable tx_bytes reset lb lab_net xmit Resets the value of the variable containing the number of bridge frames transmitted across circuit group lab_net reset cct jrb Resets all variables associated with the circuit jrb 16 39 9T spuewuop TON Command Rgeta Rgeti Rgetms Rgetr Rgets 16 40 Using the Network Control Language Accessing the Internet Management Information Base Accessing the Internet Management Information Base Internet Request for Comments 1156 defines the variable set required for monitoring and controlling various components of the IP Internet The router s MIB implementation is fully compliant with all requirements of RFC 1156 Some of the NCL commands work in conjunction with the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP agent and the IP routing application to provide access to the Internet standard MIB Use these commands to examine the MIB of any local or remote network node that provides a standard SNMP MIB implementation The commands available in this category are the following Function Display the MIB IP address translation table page 16 41 Display the MIB IP address table page 16 42 Display the value of a branch
367. keep trying For neighbors attached to nonbroadcast networks Init A Hello packet recently seen from the neighbor but bidirectional communication not yet established 2 way Bidirectional communication with the neighbor ExStart First step in creating an adjacency with the neighbor to decide which is the master router Exchange Neighbors starting database synchronization Loading Link state request packets being sent to the neighbor Full Adjacent neighbors established and databases synchronized Mode lists the mode of the neighbor as follows Master Sends the first database description packet and allowed to retransmit Slave Responds to the master s database description packet Priority lists the router priority of the neighbor used when selecting the designated router for the attached network 16 78 Using the Network Control Language Managing the Open Shortest Path First Protocol Ospf Rtab Displaying the OSPF Routing Table Use NCL s Ospf Rtab command to format and display the OSPF routing table Syntax ospf rtab Example Dest DMask Area Cost E Path Nexthop Advrtr AS Border Routes 14 14 14 14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 EXT 190 190 190 13 14 14 14 14 13 13 13 13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 EXT 190 190 190 13 14 14 14 14 Area Border Routes 14 14 14 14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 SUM 190 190 190 13 14 14 14 14 Nets 10 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 INTER 10 0 0 1 10 0 0 1 The fields in the table are as follows D
368. l be aged recalculating the database checksum and checking the age of the entries Minutes Seconds m Seconds specify when the timer was issued 16 82 Command Blockste Unblockste Using the Network Control Language Blocking and Unblocking Spanning Tree Explorer Frames Blocking and Unblocking Spanning Tree Explorer Frames Because the spanning tree does not operate automatically on source routing bridging circuits it is necessary to manually build the spanning tree in these circuits Two NCL commands allow you to block and unblock forwarding of spanning tree explorer frames on source routing bridging circuit groups This is an alternative to changing the Block STE configuration parameter in the Configuration Editor and booting the router to put the change into effect These commands override the current setting of the Block STE parameter The commands available in this category are the following Function Block spanning tree explorer frames on a circuit group page 16 85 Unblock spanning tree explorer frames on a circuit group page 16 86 These commands are described below 9T spuewuop TON 16 83 16 84 Using the Network Control Language Blocking and Unblocking Spanning Tree Explorer Frames Blockste Block Spanning Tree Explorer Frames Use NCL s Blockste command to block forwarding of spanning tree explorer frames on source routing bridging circuit groups overriding the current setting of t
369. lating Translating Circuit Name Clock Source External Internal Lines Parameters Parameters and Options Parameters and Options Specifies the FDDI bridge type when FDDI is selected as the Physical Access Method Default Encapsulating Identifies the circuit for the associated connector The default startup and default Quick Configuration set this parameter to the name of the connector This name should also appear on your network map In HP Series 200 and 400 routers the default circuit name includes the circuit type and related port number 1 4 For example ETHER1 The first 802 3 Ethernet port configured WAN2 The second WAN port configured In HP Series 600 routers the default circuit name also includes the number of the slot in which the associated port is installed For example ETHER21 The first 802 3 Ethernet port in the second slot WAN 32 The second WAN port in the third slot Note You can change a circuit name to nearly any character sequence you want but it is recommended that you use names that identify the associated slot if any and port numbers for each circuit S19 3UWIe1ed soul Identifies the origin of synchronous timing signals Default External Select this option if an external network device supplies the timing signals over synchronous lines In virtually all field applications another network device supplies the timing signals The send timing ST signal is looped back t
370. le parameter regardless of the global Auto Enable parameter setting If the global Auto Enable parameter is later enabled the option selected for the bridge specific Auto Enable parameter takes effect Determines whether the bridge should drop single route explorer frames received on the circuit group Note that this option does not stop single route explorer frames from being transmitted on the circuit group Default No Disables Block STE Enables Block STE Enables source routing In the initial Bridge screen identifies a specific source route bridge If your network does not include parallel source routing bridges this is the only instance you should enter But if your network includes parallel source routing bridges then you will need to configure a second Bridge ID Hex entry under the Source Route Bridge IDs menu item The second entry specifies a second HP bridge configured in parallel with the bridge you are currently configuring as a source routing bridge Both instances of this parameter use a value between 1 and F hexadecimal Leave this field blank if you do not want to enable source routing Default 1 Disable Leave Blank Range 1 to F hexadecimal Circuit Group Name Circuit Name Cost Default Conversion Type DL Format Options 802 3 Ethernet V2 MAC only Bridge Parameters Parameters and Options Note Parallel source routing bridges require unique Bridge ID hex values Non parallel
371. led then for a given source IP and destination IP address the same circuit is used for all packets Enables load balancing When enabled a circuit is randomly selected from the circuit group for each packet The NIC assigned decimal number that identifies the local autonomous system Enter the local autonomous system number The IP address in dotted decimal notation of the local EGP interface that establishes the connection to the remote autonomous system Sets the lower boundary range of the bit pattern when creating a user defined filter Enter the bit pattern hexadecimal in this field and leave the High Value hex field blank if you are filtering a single bit pattern Enter the lowest bit pattern in this field and enter the highest bit pattern in the High Value hex field If you are filtering a range of bit patterns For more information refer to High Value hex earlier in this chapter Determines whether to use conditional static routing Default No Disables conditional static routing Enables conditional static routing Note When conditional static routing is enabled the Conditional Circuit Group and Action on circuit group enable disable parameters are displayed For more information refer to Conditional Circuit Group and Action on circuit group enable disable Enables immediate procession of SNMP traffic Default Low Causes the router to process all management traffic as it is receive
372. liability of its software on equipment that is not fur nished by Hewlett Packard Hewlett Packard 8000 F oothills Boulevard Roseville California 95747 6588 916 786 8000 Operator s Reference Preface Preface When To Use This Guide Part of this guide provides an alphabetical listing of Configuration Editor parameters and their descriptions grouped according to their corresponding entries in the Configuration Menu of the Configuration Editor DEFAULT_CONFIG Configuration Editor System 1 Software 1 Lines 4 Circuits 4 Circuit Groups 4 Bridge 1 DoD Internet Router B DECNET IV Routing Service SNMP Sessions Xerox Routing Service B IPX Routing Service B AppleTalk Router 9 X Z5 Network Service B U Z5 bis Network Mapping B 1 Z 3 4 5 b 7 B 3 Enter Selection for Previous Menu The Configuration M enu of the Configuration Guide Refer to Part when you need information on a parameter in order to better understand how to use it in your router s configuration Part II of this guide provides detailed descriptions of the following The router statistics screens The Network Command Language Interpreter NCL commands The Event Log messages The Management Information Base MIB variables Coverage Note Operator s Reference Preface Refer to Part II when you need to learn the meanings of features in these areas To learn how to usestati
373. ll cases the map will show the following data Next hop address of the map Map state lists one of the following disconnected The map is disconnected the circuit is available disabled The circuit has been disabled by the Disipmap command connecting The map isin the process of making a V 25 bis connection connected The map is connected and the circuit is in use queue wait The map has data to send but no pool circuits are currently available When a circuit becomes avail able the map will go into the connecting state Refer to the VC inactivity time parameter in chapter 14 of this manual hold down A map goes into this state if it fails to connect It cannot be used until the Hold down time expires The IP address will again be accessable and the map will go into the disconnected state Refer to the Hold down time and VC inactivity time para meters in chapter 14 of this manual Total connect time for this map a x shows the number of separate times this map has succeeded in making a connection a Packet totals shows the total number of packets successfully transmitted and received and the number of outbound packets dropped P networks accessible shows all statically configured networks reachable by the given next hop In some map states the following additional information is displayed Queued packets shows the number of packets queued to be sent a Circuit shows the name of the circuit allocated t
374. ll cleared because circuit was disabled or because of failure in X 25 protocol levels 1 2 or 3 242 Call cleared because SVC was disabled Code DDN Service 84 Invalid EE error code received 85 Invalid out of range PSN number 86 Software error 128 DCE dropped the ready line Network forwarding mechanisms are not available 129 Link level sent BREAK 130 Link came up 131 Link went down 132 Remote DTE restarted 133 Local resources not available for call establishment 134 Remote resources not available for call establishment 135 Remote call collision 136 Remote host dead 137 Remote DCE dead 138 Logical subnet access barred The remote DTE cannot be reached because of a communities of interest 139 prohibition 140 Connection lost 141 Response lost 142 Calling logical name not authorized or enabled 143 Calling logical name incorrect for this DTE 144 Called logical name not authorized Called logical name not enabled Event Log M essages X 25 Event Messages Table 17 3 Diagnostic Field Codes Continued Code DDN Service Continued 145 Called logical name has no effective translations 146 Invalid address logical addressing not used in this netw ork 147 Declared logical name is now enabled 148 Declared logical name was already enabled 149 Declared logical name is not disabled 150 Declared logical name was already disabled 151 Incoming calls are barred 152 Outgoing calls are barred 153 Cause field is n
375. lly Routed Frames between HP bridges Together with the other routing designators Group LAN ID helps intermediate bridges identify the destination end station The group ID must match the Group LAN ID assigned to all HP bridges running software release 5 74 and differ from all Internal LAN ID Hex values and external LAN ID values assigned to any bridges on the network Default 1 Range 1 to fff Used to position the filtered bit pattern within the incoming frame when creating a user defined filter Default MAC Find and position the filtered bit patterns within the MAC level header of the incoming frame Data Link Find the pattern within the data link header of the incoming frame 6 11 Hello Time High Value hex Hop Count Reduction Bridge Parameters Parameters and Options Options Options Yes No Internal LAN ID Hex 6 12 Options Sets the time interval in seconds between BPDUs transmitted by the bridge Default 2 seconds Range 1 to 10 Skip this field if the spanning tree algorithm is not enabled Enter the Hello Time in seconds If the spanning tree algorithm is enabled Hello Time sets the time interval between BPDUs BPDUs are periodic formatted transmissions exchanged between bridges in the extended network They convey configuration and topology change data Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering a frame based on a user defined bit pattern hexadecimal value within t
376. local router will be used community optional is the name of the SNMPcommunity that grants access to that node If you omit the name public is used If you include a name the IP address must also be included Example rgetat 15 2 1 94 Displays the AppleTalk router configuration table for the node with IP address 15 2 1 94 Net Default IF Net Node Range Seed Zone 1 133 45 130 135 N Printer zone 2 160 37 160 160 N Sales Dept 3 100 38 100 109 S Bldg 12 9T spuewuop TON 16 55 16 56 Using the Network Control Language Accessing Bridging and Routing Tables Local Zone Table IF Zone Name 3 Bldg 12 3 Administration 3 Corporate 2 Sales Dept 1 Printer zone 1 Laser World The fields in the table are as follows IF lists the number the router assigned to the network interface for Net Node Net Node lists the AppleTalk node address the network number and node identifier pair of each AppleTalk router port Net Range lists the range of network numbers available to nodes on the directly connected medium Seed lists the configuration source seed or nonseed A seed port is configured with the network identifying information but a non seed port obtains it from the network Default Zone lists the default zone name for Net Range Local Zone Table lists a list of zone names serviced by each of the AppleTalk router ports This list includes the port s default zone name Using the Network Control Language A
377. low field if you are filtering a single service access point Enter the highest service access point in the range if you are filtering a range of source or destination service access points For more information refer to SAP low To learn how to apply a SAP list to a filter refer to SSAP low and DSAP low Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering a frame based on the contents of its source service access points SSAP or destination service access points DSAP The SAP low and SAP high parameters are displayed when creating a SAP filter list f you are filtering a single source or destination service access point enter the service access point in this field and leave the SAP high field blank Enter the lowest source or destination service access point in this field and enter the highest service access points in the SAP high field if you are filtering a range of service access points For more information refer to SAP high To learn how to apply a SAP list toa filter refer to SSAP low and DSAP low Bridge Parameters Parameters and Options Spanning Enables or disables the spanning tree algorithm Tree Enable Default No Yes Enables the spanning tree algorithm if your network topology contains redundant bridge LAN connections No Disables the spanning tree algorithm if your network topology contains a single bridge or multiple non redundant bridges
378. lt 1 minute Range 0 to 99 minutes 11 19 TT sJ pUL LLed 030 01d Xdi 12 AppleTalk Parameters Note 12 2 AppleTalk Parameters Overview Overview DEFAULT_CONFIG Configuration Editor System 1 Software 1 Lines 4 Circuits 4 Circuit Groups 4 Bridge 1 DoD Internet Router 9 DECNET IV Routing Service B SNMP Sessions B 10 Xerox Routing Service B 11 IPX Routing Service B 12 AppleTalk Router 2 _ Access to AppleTalk parameters 13 X 25 Network Service B 14 V 25 bis Network Mapping 8 8 COO OS OU IN Enter Selection B for Previous Menu Figure 12 1 Access to AppleTalk Parameters AppleTalk Parameters Implement the AppleTalk Phase 2 protocol to operate with Ethernet and Token Ring networks The AppleTalk router does not support AppleTalk Phase 1 Phase 1 traffic cannot be routed through the AppleTalk router However such traffic can be relayed through a bridge AppleTalk Parameters Overview Page AppleTalk Parameters 12 6 12 6 12 6 12 6 12 6 12 6 12 7 12 7 12 7 12 7 12 7 12 8 12 8 12 9 12 9 12 9 12 10 12 10 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 13 12 13 12 13 12 13 12 14 12 14 12 14 12 14 12 15 AARP Mapping Table Size Checksum Circuit Group Name Cost DDP Type Lists DDP Type high DDP Type low Default Zone Name DDP Type low Default Zone Name Dest Net
379. lter the same range of source or destination points on the AppleTalk network using different filter rules Accepts a list name when creating a DDP Type list Network list Node list or Socket list Displays a screen with parameters for creating a Network list For information about creating a Network list refer to Network Number low and Network Number high later in this chapter For information about assigning the Network list to a filter refer to Dest Net low and Source Net low Functional when Seed Router set to yes Specifies the circuit group specific network number The network number for each AppleTalk network must be unique You can explicitly assign the network number or you can allow the AppleTalk seed router to assign a random value in the range specified by Network Min and Network Max Default 0 Range 1 to 65279 decimal Note To explicitly assign the network number enter a decimal number equal to or greater than Network Min and equal to or less than Network Max Functional when Seed Router set to Yes Operates in conjunction with Network Min to specify the range of network numbers available to nodes on the directly connected AppleTalk network This Network Max parameter specifies the highest network number for the range Default 0 port is treated as a nonseed router Disable 0 Range 1 to 65279 decimal Note When enabling this feature you must enter a decimal number g
380. ly 11 15 Screen Refresh Rate 1 8 security console 16 15 Seed Router 12 14 Send CIC on all allowed INC s 4 26 Index 19 xepul 20 Index Send Event Messages As Traps 9 4 Server Name 11 15 Server Password 4 27 Server Type Server Type Hex 11 15 Server User ID 4 27 services routing 1 4 Session mode 1 8 9 4 A 4 Session type 9 4 severity event log 16 11 severity event log message 17 2 single route explorer frames 6 6 Slot Number 4 27 slot number HP router 650 16 31 slot number series 200 400 16 31 SNA packets 6 22 SNAP 7 11 SNMP 16 32 Community Name 9 3 Send Event Messages As Traps 9 4 Session Mode 9 4 SNMP agent 16 54 Socket high 10 11 11 15 12 15 Socket low 10 11 11 16 12 15 Socket Lists 12 10 12 14 Software 2 3 Source Area high 8 12 Source Area low 8 12 Source Host high 10 12 11 16 Source Host low 10 12 11 16 Source Net high 12 15 Source Net low 12 15 Source Network high 10 12 11 17 Source Network low 10 13 11 17 source network field 12 10 Source Node high 8 13 12 16 Source Node low 8 13 12 16 source node field 12 10 Source Route Token Ring 6 20 7 26 10 11 11 18 12 17 source route entries aging 6 5 Source Route Translation Bridging See TRNSB source routing 6 6 6 19 source routing parallel bridges 6 7 Source Sock high 12 17 Source Sock low 12 17 Source Socket hig
381. ly no matching request Meaning The Bootp reply received had no initial request relayed The Bootp server could have incorrectly addressed the reply or could have retransmitted the reply 17 16 Event Log M essages bootp Netw ork Boot Protocol Event Messages p illegal action for boop_act N Meaning Internal messaging error am Action Call your local product support provider received BOOTP reply from server Meaning Reply received from Bootp server received BOOTP request from client Meaning Request received from Bootp client received unknow n BOOTP pkt type Meaning Some node is generating bad packets 17 17 Event Log Messages cct Circuit Event Messages cct Circuit Event Messages These event message are generated by the system variable cct for circuits ATCP is down Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit Appletalk Control Protocol ATCP has gone down ATCP is up Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit Appletalk Control Protocol ATCP is up Adapter accepted CIC command Meaning The adapter accepted the router CIC command Adapter accepted CRN command Meaning The terminal adapter accepted the router CRN command Adapter accepted DIC command Meaning The adapter accepted the router DIC command Adapter did not accept CIC command Meaning The terminal adapter has rejected the router CIC command The router will bring down the circuit and
382. m XNS Parameters a Chapter 11 IPX Protocol Parameters a Chapter 12 AppleTalk Parameters a Chapter 13 X 25 Service Parameters a Chapter 14 V 25 bis Network Mapping Parameters Part Il General Operating Reference provides detailed reference information on the router s statistics output NCL command usage event messages and MIB variables The individual chapters are Chapter 15 Statistics a Chapter 16 Network Command Languague NCL Commands Chapter 17 Event Log Messages a Chapter 18 Management Information Base MIB Variables Appendix A Public Ethernet Type Field Values lists Ethernet packet types found in the 13th and 14th octets of an Ethernet packet Appendix B TCP and UDP Well Known Port Numbers lists well known port numbers used by TCP and UDP Appendix C Parameter Locator is an aid to locating individual parameters in the Configuration Editor Structure The Index includes references to terms and parameters described in this manual Other HP Router Manuals For acurrent listing of manuals designed for use with your Hewlett Packard router refer to the Hewlett Packard Router Products Release Notes shipped with your router or most recent software update Operator s Reference Preface Contents Operator s Reference PrEfAGE Gta tied sm he ee ae ee eae ek ws Eee Bes 3 When To Use This Guide 0 00000 eee 3 AUGIENCE 2 2
383. m of the display area Your choices are Press a key such as SPACE for an additional screen of data Press Return for one more line of data Type a number from 1 through 9 to display that number of additional lines Press e key left cursor or Ctri C or QJ to stop the display and return to NCL s prompt Notes Using the Network Control Language Managing Router Operations and Resources Password Implementing Password Protection Use NCL s Password command to assign change or remove the passwords protecting console access to the router Such access may be local through a modem or through Telnet The router is shipped from the factory with no passwords set and thus no password protection Two types of password can be Set a user password and or a manager password To set both passwords use this command twice Starting the console session with the manager password if one is set is required to change either password change the date or time boot the router with the Boot command modify configuration reset statistics or MIB variables enable or disable services download use the Fget or Fput command or use the Ping or Test command In addition the manager password is again required when using the Boot or Password or Fget OS command Starting the console session with the user password allows monitoring of the router only viewing statistics event log MIB variables and configuration values For added console s
384. maller PPP MRU 17 117 Event Log Messages ppp Point to Point Protocol missed NN Echo Replies link is down Meaning The local PPP has not received a response for NN echo replies The link is going down PPP will automatically retry opening the PPP link nissed NN LQRs link is down Meaning The link quality of the WAN is not conducive to data transfers possible loop back has been detected Meaning It is possible that the router has a loop back cable attached or the telephone company has an error that causes a loop back condition to exist Action Remove the loop back condition protocol NNN not supported Meaning The local PPP received a packet with an unknown protocol The protocol NNN will be displayed in hex remote station has logged in to Server Meaning The peer PPP Password Authentication Protocol PAP has successfully logged into the local PPP PAP remote station s login attempt failed Meaning The peer PPP Password Authentication Protocol PAP was unsuccessful in logging into the local PPP PAP Action Check the PPP PAP password configurations 17 118 Event Log M essages ppp Point to Point Protocol remote station rejected XXX x Meaning The peer PPP reject PPP protocol XXX Action There is a configuration mismatch between the local router s PPP and the peer PPP For example the local router may be configured for Appletalk on the PPP link while the peer PPP is not config
385. mation Base The telnet information base contains variables that describe virtual terminal connections between the router and a remote device The structure is the following telnet vari ables listed below The pathname is constructed as follows telnet vari able ST The variables are listed alphabetically inp bad_opt contains the number of incoming TCP segments that requested unknown or unsupported Telnet options inp dropped contains the number of incoming TCP segments that were dropped because of lack of processing resources seg UONBUWOjU quowumbeuep inp no_if contains the number of incoming TCP segments that were dropped for lack of an interface inp too_ big contains the number of incoming TCP segments that were dropped because they exceeded the mtu mem_err contains the number of memory errors mem_use contains the number of bytes of memory used by Telnet no mem contains the number of instances Telnet was unable to function because of the lack of memory resources out dropped contains the number of outgoing TCP segments that were not sent because of lack of processing resources out iac_fnd contains the number of outgoing Telnet escape sequences that were not transmitted 18 95 18 96 M anagement Information Base Variables telnet Telnet Information Base out no if contains the number of outgoing TCP segments that were dropped for lack of an interface out too_ big contains the number of ou
386. mber of report error frames transmit ted by the token ring adapter A report error frame is transmitted in response to a soft error A soft error is one that temporarily degrades system performance but may be recovered using standard adapter protocols ring tx_beacon contains the number of times the token ring adapter transmitted beacon frames to the ring A beacon frame indicates a hard error This count specifies the number of hard errors detected by the adapter the difference between this count and ring_hard_err specifies the number of hard errors detected by other ring stations rx_frm_cmpi rint contains the number of times the token ring adapter received a frame and then generated an adapter to attached system interrupt Such an interrupt is enabled or disabled by the frame interrupt bit bit 4 of RECEIVE_CSTAT Because frames can be received faster than the adapter can cause the interrupts each increment of this counter can report the reception of one or multiple frames rx_suspended contains the number of times the token ring adapter processed a receive parameter list containing both an odd address in the forward pointer field indicating the end of the list and an end frame bit equal to 0 indicating more to follow total_adapt_error contains the aggregate count of token ring adapter hardware or software errors the sum of the counts of adpt_bad_dio_ par adpt_dma_rd_abort adpt_dma_wr_abort adpt_ parity_err and adpt_ring_und
387. me Accepts the name of a Host list Network list Packet Type list or Socket list Netw ork lists Displays a screen with parameters for defining a Network list For information about creating a Network list refer to Network Number low and Network Number high later in this chapter For information about assigning the Network list to a filter refer to Dest Network low and Source Network low S19 3UWIe1ed 030 01d Xdi Network Number Accepts the IPX network number for the IPX network connected to the router interface All IPX networks are identified by a locally assigned network number IPX network numbers consist of an 8 digit hexadecimal value pad with leading zeros if necessary Note HP routers support one IPX network number per interface Netw ork Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering IPX source or destination Number high networks when creating a Network list 11 11 Options Netw ork Number Hex Netw ork Number low Options NETBIOS Resource Name Next Hop Host Next Hop Net Packet type lists specify Packet Type high 11 12 IPX Protocol Parameters Parameters and Options Leave this field blank and enter the IPX network number in the Network Number low field if you are filtering a single IPX source or destination network Enter the highest IPX network number in the range if you are filtering a range of IPX source or destination networks For additi
388. mes Syntax disable identifier identifier is the pathname identifying the software object You can use object identification codes and or object names Examples disable ip Disables the IP router disable 5 5 is the equivalent object identification code for ip disable cct etherl cct wani Disables the circuits named Etherl and WANT disable echo Disables TCP echo service disable pm 2 Disables the interface module in slot 2 HP Router 650 only E dit Invoking the Configuration Editor Use NCL s Edit command to switch to the Configuration Editor menu as if you had chosen Configuration Editor from the Main menu but without leaving NCL Refer to the User s Gui defor information on how to use the Configuration Editor When you choose Exit without Saving or Save and Exit you will return to the NCL prompt rather than to the Main menu Syntax edit Using the Network Control Language Managing Router Operations and Resources Enable Enabling Configured Entities Use NCL s Enable command to place a configured protocol application circuit an X 25 point to point virtual circuit or other configured software object into service You would do this for a Entities previously disabled using the Disable command a Entities configured not to be auto enabled when the router boots a Configuration conflicts and errors On the HP Router 650 you can also enable a previously disabled interface modul
389. module has begun Enabling Port Module slot slot Meaning The port module in the specified slot is being enabled Failure to disable slot slot Meaning Software was unable to disable the port module in the specified slot The port module may already be disabled Action If the hot swap LED is illuminated extract the port module Port Module hot swap in slot s ot initiated Meaning An operator has pressed the hot swap button on the specified port module and started the hot swap process The port module will shut down all functions and illuminate the hot swap LED when it is safe to extract the port module Port Module slot slot Initialized Meaning The software download and initialization of the port module in the specified slot is successful and complete Port Module slot slot boot fail Meaning The port module in the specified slot did not boot after being successfully downloaded If the router has Auto Enable set the port module will automatically be restarted 17 113 Event Log Messages pm Port Module M anager Event M essages Port M odule inserted in slot slot Meaning The router software has detected the insertion of a port module in the specified slot Port Module in slot s ot ready for hot swap Meaning Action The port module in the specified slot has been successfully shut down and is ready to be removed To restart a module in slot extract the shut down port
390. mote station Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit the system successfully logged in to the remote station 17 48 Event Log M essages cct Circuit Event Messages Server s login attempt failed 4T Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit the system failed in its attempt to login to the remote station The system User ID or the System Password or both were incorrect Action Modify system User ID and or System Password in the configuration soBessop 601 WweAR SQE absent non 802 3 XCVR Meaning The circuit named in the object field of the event message has detected a loss of the Signal Quality Error SQE signal Action Check transceiver hardware SQE is not supported by Ethernet version 1 0 transceivers SR internal LAN ID notin RIF route Meaning A specifically routed frame that did not include the internal LAN ID configured for bridging was received The packet is dropped Action For information on the Internal LAN ID parameter refer to chapter 6 in this manual SR is_srf_rif_insert no rif entry Meaning A specifically routed frame was received but the appropriate entry in the source routing intermediate station table sr_is_ table does not contain a routing information field for the destination station The packet is dropped SR max hops exceeded in explorer frame Meaning The maximum number of hops for a source routed packet seven was exceeded in an all routes explorer ARE frame
391. municate via TRNSB In most cases the default 5 minutes is sufficient A shorter duration can cause non functional stations to be removed more quickly but impacts performance Auto Enable Determines the initial state of the bridge The bridge specific Auto Enable parameter works in conjunction with the global Auto Enable parameter to enable or disable the bridge application software when the node boots based on the following criteria 6 5 9 Suo SUIeIed e6piig Block STE Bridge ID Hex 6 6 Bridge Parameters Parameters and Options No Yes No Yes When the global Auto Enable parameter is set to No the bridge as are all other application software modules is unconditionally disabled The bridge specific Auto Enable parameter is disabled when the global Auto Enable parameter is disabled When the global Auto Enable parameter is set to Yes the bridge as are all other application software modules is conditionally enabled The bridge specific Auto Enable parameter can be set to enable or disable the bridge Default Yes Disables the bridge specific Auto Enable parameter if the global Auto Enable parameter is enabled If you choose No you will subsequently need to enable the bridge manually with the NCL Interpreter after the node boots Enables the bridge specific Auto Enable parameter if the global Auto Enable parameter is also enabled Note Select an applicable value for the bridge specific Auto Enab
392. n Use NCL s Browse command to display all of the configuration screens that the Configuration Editor presents as if you had chosen the Browse action for each screen The configuration is displayed in its entirety on the console screen not divided into the same interactive screens as the Configuration Editor You remain in NCL you do not actually go into the Configuration Editor as selected from the Main menu The output is divided into screens to fit the console screen with a prompt for MORE at the end of each screen as long as page mode is enabled as it is by default Page mode and how to get more screens are described on page 16 14 To output the configuration display to a printer or file instead of your console screen see the Print command on page 16 19 Syntax browse Config Displaying the Unformatted Configuration Use NCL s Config command to display the configuration as stored in nonvolatile memory and read by the router whenever it is booted This configuration is an ASCII text file and contains all configuration parameter settings It is not formatted into menus and tables and labeled with field names as presented by the Configuration Editor or by Quick Configuration or by the Browse command Its lines are arranged for display on the screen Before using Config make sure that page mode is enabled as it is by default so that the configuration is displayed one screen at a time with a prompt for
393. n an internet 17 14 Event Log M essages boot Boot Event Messages boot Boot Event Messages This event message is generated by the system variable boot System w ent down day month hh mm ss year Meaning Identifies the last time the system went down 17 15 4T s pess Ww 607 343 Event Log Messages bootp Netw ork Boot Protocol Event Messages bootp Network Boot Protocol Event Messages These event messages are generated by the system variable bootp the network boot protocol buffer for timer msg can t be allocated Meaning Buffer memory ran out so the Bootp request or reply could not be serviced can t allocate any msg buffers Meaning Buffer memory ran out so the Bootp request or reply could not be serviced dropped BOOTP pkt bad hdwe addr type Meaning A Bootp request with a station address length not equal to 48 bits was received Station addresses that are not 48 bits long are not supported dropped BOOTP pkt bad max relay hop count Meaning A Bootp request packet was discarded because its hop count was decremented to zero The hop count is not the same as IP s Time To Live field The Bootp request may have been relayed by other relay agents such that the packet is being looped Action Increase the hop count the maximum relay hops parameter in IP s Bootp configuration or determine why a loop exists for Bootp requests being relayed dropped BOOTP rep
394. n creating a EGP RIP or OSPF export route filter or the IP address of the OSPF backbone network The address mask directs the filtering process to a specific portion of the IP address f Network Mask is set to 255 255 255 0 only the Net_ID portion of the IP address is filtered f Network Mask is set to 255 255 255 224 the Net_ID and Subnet_ID portions of the IP address are filtered f Network Mask is set to 255 255 255 255 the entire IP address is filtered Used with IP static routes to specify the IP address of the router port connected to the next router in the hop sequence IP addresses are entered in dotted decimal notation Used with IP traffic filters to set the IP address of the next router in the hop sequence IP addresses are entered in dotted decimal notation Determines how the IP router to responds when receiving ARP requests originating from a non local network a network that is not connected directly to the router Default Drop and Log Adds non local ARP entries to the local ARP table Simply drops non local ARPs This option has the least impact on router behavior Drops non local ARPs and logs them Note Because Accept adds nonlocal ARP entries to the local ARP table it may cause unpredictable results Normal ARP Offset Password No Yes Poisoned Reverse Split Horizon Polling Mode None Poison Split Active Both Internet Protocol IP Parameters Parameters and Optio
395. n is accomplished with a satellite link Under these conditions T1 must have a value greater than the round trip frame transmission time plus the time required to process the frame at the receiving end Note If the T1 value is too small throughput is reduced because of needless retransmittal of frames If T1 is too large X 25 takes an excessive length of time to detect lost frames Enter the T1 timer value taking note that the timer is expressed in tenths of seconds for example a value of 30 sets the timer to 3 seconds The value of T1 must be the same for both ends of the link Identifies a software circuit or pipe providing the interface between a protocol suite for PDN this is TCP IP and X 25 packet level services The upper circuit provides an interface between the upper layer protocol and X 25 network services The lower LAPB circuit in contrast provides an interface via a device driver between X 25 network services and the X 25 service provider Accepts the X 121 address corresponding to IP Address X 25 Service Parameters Parameters and Options Table 13 1 X 25 PDN Parameter Bitmap Argument Values T sSJIpPUL LLd N S SZ X BitNumber Function ON logical 1 OFF logical 0 20to31 Reserved for n a n a future use 19 LINE_MODE X 25 line behaves as a DCE at X 25 line behaves as a DTE at network and data link layers but network data link and physical remains DTE at physical layer l
396. n is selected for the Session Type parameter With enterprise specific trapping enabled some or all of the event messages generated by the node are encapsulated within an SNMP protocol data unit and sent as traps to SNMP application entities Default No Enables enterprise specific trapping Disable enterprise specific trapping Determines the SNMP management node s access privileges to the router s MIB Default Read Reads MIB data only Reads and writes MIB data Identifies the types of data exchange management queries or event reporting between the SNMP agent and the SNMP management nodes Some network manager applications provide their users both types of data in this case you will want to set one of the session types for this access record and then configure another access record with the other type The event reporting types of exchanges are not queries by the managing node so it doesn t matter what community name is set for the record using this session type called Trap Default Regular SNMP Agent Parameters Parameters and Options Regular Allows the router s agent to respond to queries Trap Allows the router s agent to generate unsolicited asynchronous notifications of significant events such as booting and enabling or disabling interfaces Note Additional fields are displayed when you select the Session Type For more information about the additional fields refer to Send Event Messages As Trap
397. n service Enables CUG security CUG provides various classes of security depending on the particular X 25 features purchased from the PDN subscription service When Closed User Group is set to Yes the Outgoing Access and Group Number parameters appear on the configuration screen Enables the establishment of multiple parallel dedicated virtual circuits between two routers Such parallel circuits may result in higher throughput because of the increased window size afforded by multiple virtual circuits Default None Range 1 to 99 f you are establishing only one dedicated virtual circuit between the local router and the remote peer designated by Remote DTE Address enter 1 When configuring the remote peer you must ensure that you also assign aConnection ID of 1 f you are establishing multiple dedicated virtual circuits between the local and remote peers you must assign a unique Connection ID to each virtual circuit When configuring the remote peer you must ensure that you assign identical Connection ID values 13 5 Flow Ctrl Group Number High PVC LCN High SVC LCN 13 6 Defit Negot Options X 25 Service Parameters Parameters and Options Enables or disables Flow Control Parameter Negotiation Flow Control Parameter Negotiation is available as a subscription option from most service providers Default Negot Disables flow control negotiation With negotiation disabled the configured values for Pk
398. n this field and leave the Ethernet Type high field blank if you are filtering a single Ethernet Type a Enter the lowest Ethernet Type in this field and enter the highest Ethernet Type in the Ethernet Type high field if you are filtering a range of Ethernet Types Enter the name of an Ethernet Type list in this field blank and end leave the Ethernet Type high field blank if you want to establish the range of Ethernet Types using a filter list For more information refer to Ethernet Type high earlier in this chapter To learn how to create a Ethernet Type filter list refer to Type low and Type high later in this chapter Sets the time interval in seconds during which at most a single frame will be flooded to an unlearned address Default 0 disables flood limiting Sets the time interval spent by a circuit group when in the Listening and Learning states Setting Forward Delay to the minimum value causes the spanning tree to converge at its fastest rate Default 15 Range 4 to 30 Skip this field if the spanning tree algorithm is disabled a Use the Forward Delay parameter to set a timer value for timing a circuit group as it moves from state to state if the spanning tree algorithm is enabled Forwarding Table Size Group LAN ID Header Options MAC Bridge Parameters Parameters and Options As the algorithm operates it eventually places all circuit groups in either a forwardi
399. n this field and leave the Packet Type high field blank if you are filtering a single XNS packet type number Enter the lowest XNS packet type number in this field and enter the highest packet type number in the Packet Type high field if you are filtering a range of XNS packet type numbers Enter the list name in this field and leave the Packet Type high field blank if you are creating an XNS Packet Type filter and want to establish the range of packet type numbers with a filter list For additional information refer to Packet Type high earlier in this chapter Assigns a priority value to the filter the higher the precedence the greater the priority You can construct up to 31 filters per XNS circuit group The Precedence value is used when an incoming packet meets multiple filter rules In such an instance the filter with the highest priority is applied to the frame Default 31 Range 1 to 31 Note When two filters have equal precedence the first configured filter takes precedence over the second filter Sets the cost for each router hop Default 1 Enables or disables the RIP listen function Default Sets the router to ignore RIP updates received from neighboring routers Xerox Network Systems XNS Router Parameters Parameters and Options Yes Sets the router to add routes received in RIP updates from neighboring routers to its own internal routing table RIP Supply Enables or disables the RI
400. nal parameters Bandwidth Reservation Compression Data Link Layer Protocol Max Link Latency Minimum Frame Spacing Point to Point Address Remote Signal and Sense LAPB X 25 Provides a transmission channel over a public or private packet switched X 25 network Results in these additional parameters Bandwidth Reservation Max Link Latency For additional information about other LAPB parameters refer to Chapter 10 X 25 Service Parameters Point to Point Protocol Provides a transmission channel over synchronous WAN media between the router 4 8 PPP and aremote Point to Point peer device The transmission channel supports the Point to Point Protocol service as defined in Internet Request for Comments RFC 1171 1172 and 1220 Displays a screen with parameters for configuring a Point to Point circuit Results in these additional parameters Bandwidth Reservation Compression Desired Link Quality Echo Request Time sec Extended 32 bit CRC IP Address LCP Active Open LCP Auto Restart LQM Time sec Max Link Latency Max Packet Size Min Frame Spacing Use UPAP PPP over V 25 bis Provides a transmission channel using automatic dialup and Point to Point over a v 25 bis circuit to a remote Point to Point peer device Displays a screen with parameters for configuring a Point to Point over V 25 bis circuit Results in these additional parameters Bandwidth Reservation Compression Desired Link Quality Echo Request Tim
401. nal Polling 4 29 XNS Action 10 4 Checksums On 10 4 Circuit Group 10 4 Dest Host high 10 5 Dest Host low 10 5 Dest Network high 10 5 Index 23 xepul 24 Index Dest Network low 10 6 Dest Socket high 10 6 Dest Socket low 10 7 E ffect 10 7 Host low 10 8 Network Number 10 9 Network Number high 10 8 Next Hop Host 10 9 Next Hop Net 10 9 Packet Type high 10 9 RIP Interface Cost 10 10 RIP Listen 10 10 RIP Supply 10 11 Socket high 10 11 Source Network low 10 13 Source Route Token Ring 10 11 Source Socket high 10 13 Source Socket low 10 14 XON XOFF 1 7 xrx 16 33 zmodem 16 98 16 100 16 102 16 103 Zone Filter 12 18 Zone Name 12 18 Zone Table Size 12 18 CA eackann Copyright 1994 Hewlett Packard Company Printed in Singapore 7 94 Manual Part Number 5962 8305
402. names are constructed as follows px if variable ipx mib idp variable The variables are listed alphabetically under two branches Interface Specific drop contains the total number of IDP datagrams dropped for whatever reason by interface if rx contains the total number of IDP datagrams received by interface if tx contains the total number of IDP datagrams transmitted by interface if ulp contains the total number of IDP datagrams delivered to be processed by an upper level protocol for example RIP Echo Error Management Information Base Variables ipx IPX Information Base Internet Datagram Protocol IDP forwarding contains an integer switch indicating the node s function within the extended IPX network A value of 1 indicates that the node is acting as a gateway routes and forwards datagrams a value of 2 indicates that the node is acting as a host does not route and forward datagrams forwdatagrams contains the number of received IDP datagrams not addressed to the IPX router The router attempts to forward these datagrams to their ultimate destination ST inadderrors contains the number of IDP datagrams discarded because of invalid destination address fields indelivers contains the number of IDP datagrams delivered to IDP user protocols including Error Protocol indiscards contains the number of valid input IDP datagrams discarded because of insufficient router resources lack of buffer space
403. nd Source Sock low Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering a datagram based on the contents of its source network field Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter AppleTalk source networks Leave this field blank and enter the AppleTalk network number in the Source Net low field if you are filtering a single AppleTalk source network Enter the highest AppleTalk network number in the range if you are filtering a range of AppleTalk source networks Leave this field blank and enter the name of the Network list in the Source Net low field if you want to use a Network list to establish the upper and lower range of AppleTalk destination network numbers CL For additional information refer to Source Net low later in this chapter F or more information about Network lists refer to Network Number high and Network Number low later in this chapter meLeiddy SJIPUL Ld Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering a datagram based on the contents of its source network field 12 15 AppleTalk Parameters Parameters and Options Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter AppleTalk source networks Options Enter the AppleTalk network number in this field and leave the Source Net high field blank if you are filtering a single AppleTalk source network Enter the lowest AppleTalk network number in this field and enter the highest network number in the Source Ne
404. nd in the IP address cache which contains the previous IP address found mem_used contains the number of bytes of memory used by the IP routing table node_count contains the current number of networks contained in the IP routing table node depth contains the number of levels in the IP routing table search_count contains the number of searches through the IP routing table Upon receiving a packet for forwarding the router first checks its cache to determine the next hop to the destination address If not found there the router then accesses the IP routing table search_depth contains the total depth of searches through the routing tree ST seg UONBUWOjU quowumbeuep 18 67 18 68 M anagement Information Base Variables ipx IPX Information Base ipx IPX Information Base The ipx information base is a composed of 1 a set of variables that describe transmission and reception of packets across each IPX interface 2 a set of variables that describe aggregate Internet Datagram Protocol IDP activity 3 an IPX addressing table 4 a SAP table and 5 an IPX routing table You can also use NCL s Rgetir and Rgetis commands to access the tables The structure is the following ipx if the interface specific IPX address hexadecimal branch see subheading vari ables the interface specific variables mib the IDP protocol branch see subheading idp vari ables the IDP protocol variables The path
405. nd verifying that the DSU responds with an acknowledgment Heartbeat polling does not check the status of the trunk line connected to the DSU If DXI version 2 1 is selected Use DXI v3 2 set to No this parameter is ignored Default No 4 27 LA SJIPUL Led N41 Use SNAP Use UPAP User ID of Remote Station Window Size 4 28 No Yes Yes No No Yes Circuit Parameters Parameters and Options Disables heartbeat polling Enables heartbeat polling Identifies the version of IEEE 802 6 to be used Default Yes Enables the approved version of IEEE 802 6 D15 With 802 6 D15 encapsulation as specified by Internet RFC 1209 IP Over SMDS Enables IEEE version s D9 and D11 With IEE 802 6 D9 D11 an At amp T proprietary encapsulation is used Enables the User Password Authentication protocol UPAP Point to Point implementations can require a remote peer to authenticate itself before engaging in NCP negotiation For more information refer to the RFC 1172 specification Default No Disables U PAP Enables UPAP Accepts the name user ID used by the remote Point to Point peer when logging into the local router Enter the name as an ASCII string of less than 16 characters Used with HP Point To Point circuits to specify an exact number of packets that may be unacknowledged at any one time Modulus specifies a maximum number of unacknowledged packets This toggle option offers different choice
406. ndicates the circuit errthr Is the number of errors within a given monitored number of events necessary to cause the interface to be shut down The default is three errors Base 18 25 ST seg UOnBUWOjU quowumbeuep 18 26 Management Information Base Variables cct Circuits Information Base exmib fr dictble entry errthr cct 36 26 1 1 7 cct where cct indicates the circuit index Is the index into the Dicmi table It corresponds to the frame relay circuit for which table information is requested exmib fr dictble entry index cct 36 26 1 1 1 cct where cct indicates the circuit enqint Is the number of status enquiry intervals that pass before issuance of a full status enquiry message The default is six intervals exmib fr dictble entry enqlnt cct 36 26 1 1 6 cct where cct indicates the circuit maxpvc Indicates the maximum number of permanent virtual circuits PVCs allowed for this interface This is usually dictated by the frame relay network exmib fr dictble entry maxpvc cct 36 26 1 1 9 cct where cct indicates the circuit monevnt Is the number of events for which errors are collected in order to monitor for an interface shutdown due to excissive error The default is four events exmib fr dictble entry monevnt cct 36 26 1 1 8 cct where cct indicates the circuit multcast Indicates whether the frame relay provider offers a multicast service There are two possible values f
407. ned to Low SVC LCN and High SVC LCN must be identical on both sides of the X 25 physical link Note PVC LCN ranges and SVC LCN ranges must not overlap Specifies the 32 bit IP address of Upper Circuit Name Enter this address in dotted decimal notation The DDN algorithm maps the IP address to an X 121 address For more information about entering addresses in dotted decimal notation refer to Appendix D Network Addresses Accepts the IP address of a recipient of IP datagrams transmitted by an X 25 PDN service Enter the 32 bit IP address in dotted decimal notation For more information about entering addresses in dotted decimal notation refer to Appendix D Network Addresses Local DTE Address Low exxr Circuit Name Low PVC LCN Low SVC LCN Max Conns Options Max Idle Time secs 13 8 X 25 Service Parameters Parameters and Options Sets the network supplied decimal number X 121 Address identifying the interface between the router and the X 25 network After assigning the local DTE address the screen prompts for X 25 address map data Assigns the circuit providing the LAPB service Enter the name of the previously configured LAPB circuit Sets the minimum LCN for a permanent virtual circuit PVC The LCN is a decimal number that identifies the PVC Default 33 Range 0 to 4095 Note PVC LCN ranges and SVC LCN ranges must not overlap Sets the minimum LCN for a switched virtual circuit SVC The
408. nes using connectors WAN3 and WAN4 share a clock signal generator For all other products all synchronous lines share a clock signal generator Reconfigure both lines to have the same clock speed The configuration record for the circuit contains a faulty value in the Minimum Frame Spacing field The router has defaulted to a value of 2 Modify Minimum Frame Spacing in the configuration The configuration record for the circuit contains a faulty value in the Retry Counter N2 field The router has defaulted to a value of 16 Modify Retry Counter N2 in the configuration Event Log M essages dev Device Event Messages No buffers available for deadlock processing 4T Meaning Indicates a degenerative line condition resulting in the lack of receive buffers at both the line source and termination No circuits configured s pess Ww 601 343 Meaning No circuits are configured Action Modify the configuration to include required circuit records No configuration summary record Meaning A circuit record is missing from the configuration Action Modify the configuration to ensure that all lines and circuits are defined No Ethernet circuits configured Meaning HP series 200 and 400 Routers No Ethernet circuits are config ured in the router HP J 2435A Four Port Ethernet Interface Module No Ethernet circuits are configured in the module Action Modify the line and circuit configuration to include re
409. net determines path costs by summing the individual sequential circuit costs Circuit costs are decimal values reflecting the relative speed of the transmission media the faster the media the lower the cost Refer to Table 8 1 at the end of this chapter for suggested circuit costs when transmitting media of various clock speeds Default 1008 Range 1 to 1008 Determines the maximum number of DE Cnet areas hops that a packet can pass through before it reaches the area containing its destination end node In a large network there are frequently multiple paths to a destination area The number of routers a packet has to pass through to reach this destination may vary depending on the path the packet follows Longer paths mean more routers for the packet to traverse potentially increasing the packet s travel time Refer to your network map to determine the longest acceptable path for a packet and count the number of DE Cnet routers in this path Default 30 Range 1 to 30 Determines how the DECnet router initializes when the router boots The DECnet specific Auto Enable parameter is protocol specific and works in conjunction with the global Auto Enable parameter found on the Global Parameters screen The global Auto Enable parameter influences the DE Cnet specific Auto Enable parameter in two ways When the global Auto Enable parameter is set to No the DECnet router like all other protocols is unconditionally disabled therefore th
410. nfigure on either the local or the remote device Invalid Configuration Use No Compression Meaning Auto configuring has detected a remote bridge and the router s compression configuration option is not set to No Compression or auto configure Action Use No Compression or auto configure as the compression method for the Point to Point WAN circuit Invalid Configuration Pt to Pt addresses are equal Meaning The Pt to Pt address configuration option for the Point to Point WAN circuit is the same on the local and remote device Action Change to Pt to Pt address configuration option to be the different or to use auto configure on either the local or the remote device Invalid Configuration Mismatching Compression Meaning The compression configuration option for the Point to Point WAN circuit is not the same on the local and remote device Action Change the compression configuration option to be the same or to use auto configure on either the local or the remote device 17 71 4T soBessop 6o7 WweAW Event Log Messages dis Data Link Services Event Messages Invalid Configuration detected by remote side Meaning A Point to Point configuration option that was not using auto configure is incompatible with the remote device Action Use the auto configure option to configure the Point to Point WAN circuit on either the local or the remote device Lost carrier disabling cct Meaning The rou
411. ng enabled or blocking disabled state Later in response to network topology changes the algorithm can change the state of specific circuit groups In order to prevent network looping caused by sudden state changes the algorithm does not transition circuit groups directly from Blocking to Forwarding Rather it places them in two intermediate states the Listening and Learning state While in the Listening stand by state the circuit group receives network generated BPDUs but does not receive end station generated message traffic When the Forward Delay timer expires the circuit group is placed in the Learning state While in Learning state the circuit group receives network generated BPDUs and also receives end station generated traffic which is subjected to the learning process but not relayed When the Forward Delay timer expires the circuit group is placed in the Forwarding state 9 Specifies the maximum size of the forwarding table The forwarding table contains the list of end station addresses learned by the bridge plus all source address filters and destination address filters The value that you enter at Forwarding Table Size sets the maximum size of this table Sue SUIeIe gd e6piig Default 1024 0 64 512 1024 2048 4096 and 8192 For more discussion on Forwarding Table Size refer to Spanning Tree Enable on page 6 19 Accepts the group LAN ID used by the bridge when transmitting SRF s Specifica
412. nged This setting is recommended To assign a different station address enter it in 12 character hexadecimal format The user configured address is also be ignored by some protocols as described earlier The nodes ignores the value of the LAN Address on circuits supporting the Bridge with the spanning tree algorithm enabled In such instances the bridging routing software asserts an internally generated LAN address If the node uses only the IP Router of if it uses the IP Router in conjunction with the Bridge with the spanning tree algorithm disabled you can assigned an Ethernet address of your choosing Because each LAN device within you network requests a unique 48 bit address it is imperative that you guard against duplicated addresses Note When assigning a user supplied LAN address ensure that the least significant bit of the most significant byte is clear equal to zero When the LAN address is transmitted their bit order is reversed Consequently the least significant bit of the most significant byte is transmitted first A local one in the first bit position of a destination address designated a broadcast or multicast address During router operation you can see what station address is actually being used on a circuit by entering the following NCL command get cct circuit name mac_addr circuit nameis the name of the circuit The character between mac and addr is an underline character LCP Active Open LCP Auto
413. nimum period that you are charged for a call This reduces overall line charges by keeping a line open for subsequent transmissions at a lower line rate than if an initial call is terminated then followed by another call If a data flow interrupts a period of inactivity within the Minimum connect duration time then the connection remains open for at least one Connect inactivity time period after the Minimum connect duration elapses that is after the Minimum connect duration time expires Used with the HP Point To Point circuit type to specify the minimum number of 8 bit flag sequences prefixed to an HDLC packet transmitted by the router You can choose any even numbered value from 2 to 62 The packet ends with a single instance of the same flag The total number of flags transmitted between sequential packets includes the trailing flag and the variable number of leading flags Default 2 Range Even numbers from 2 to 62 Note The default setting 2 is the required setting for a circuit connecting to an HP remote bridge Specifies the length in bits of the HDLC packet control field The size of the control field determines the maximumnumber of unacknowledged packets that may be pending at any one time The format of the entire HDLC frame including the control field is illustrated in figure 4 2 below Default 8 8 Selects an 8 bit control field providing three bits for message sequencing and allowing for a maximum of seven unacknowl
414. not allow any more connections on this circuit Action This error indicates either a configuration error on the router or on the terminal adapter or an incompatablity between them You must change the configuration If an adapter error is sent the router will log it Check for this error if available 17 18 Adapter did not accept CRN command Meaning Action Event Log M essages cct Circuit Event Messages 4T The terminal adapter rejected the router CRN command The router will bring down the circuit and not allow and more connections on this circuit This error indicates either a configuration error on the router or on the terminal adapter or an incompatablity between them You must change the configuration This can happen if the V 25 bis extensions are used and not accepted If an adapter error is sent the router will log it s pess Ww 601 344 Adapter did not accept DIC command Meaning Action Adapter error XX Meaning Action The terminal adapter rejected the router DIC command The router will bring down the circuit and not allow and more connections on this circuit This error indicates either a configuration error on the router or on the terminal adapter or an incompatablity between them The user must change the configuration If an adapter error is sent the router will log it This indicates the two character error code XX issued by the terminal adapter when either a
415. ns Enables or disables the Address Resolution Protocol ARP ARP maps 32 bit IP addresses to 48 bit station addresses For enabling to take effect Address Resolution must also be set to ARP or to ARP amp HP Probe Default yes Disables ARP Enables ARP Use to position the filtered bit pattern within the selected header when creating a user defined filter Specifies the authentication key used across an interface Determines how IP advertises routes learned from a neighboring router in periodic updates subsequently sent to the router Default Poison Allows the router to advertise all routes learned from a neighbor in subsequent RIP updates using the actual hop count assigned to the routes Enables Poisoned Reverse the router advertises routes learned from a neighbor in subsequent RIP updates The router assigns a hop count of 16 to these routes thus declaring the destinations unreachable Enables Split Horizon the router omits routes learned from a neighbor when sending subsequent RIP updates to the neighbor Specifies one of two neighbor reachability algorithms In the active mode the router issues periodic Hello and Poll commands Neighbor reachability is verified by receipt of corresponding I hear you I H U and Update responses In the passive mode the router does not issue Hello commands nor does it expect I H U responses Neighbor reachability is verified by examining the Status field of the received Hello
416. nsfer aborted no memory to hold file Meaning There is not enough global memory available to hold the operating system Out of resources for UDP port registration Meaning Couldn t allocate a message buffer to register TFTP s port with UDP PUT local filename to ip address file remote filename Meaning Echoes the Fput command request RCVD ERR from ip address error msg follows Meaning We received a TFTP error PDU during the file transfer with the system whose IP address is i p address The error number is TF TP specific and its meaning can be found in RFC 783 The message string that was sent back in the error PDU follows this message in the event log 17 130 Event Log M essages tftp TFTP and Fget Event Messages REBOOTING THE SYSTEM FOR FGET OS MEMORY 4T Meaning The operating system needs more memory than the current configuration can supply TFTP is rebooting to reclaim memory and try again soBessop 6o7 WweAR receipt of filename file complete Meaning The file filenamespecified in the F get command has been successfully received received pkt on deleted connection Meaning A stray duplicate or retransmitted packet has been received after the full transmission related to that packet has been received and TFTP completed This may be a retransmitted packet that got delayed in the network Indicates the possibility of network congestion RRQ from ip address for file filename
417. nt bit equal to one indicating a circulat ing frame No token or frame is received within a 10 millisecond window a The starting delimiter token sequence has a code violation in an area where code violations must not occur octets_rx_per_sec contains the number of octets that this circuit has received in the last second Management Information Base Variables cct Circuits Information Base octets_tx_per_sec contains the number of octets that this circuit has transmitted in the last second peak_frames_rx contains the peak number of frames that this circuit has received in any given second since reboot peak_frames tx contains the peak number of frames that this circuit has transmitted in any given second since reboot peak_octets_rx contains the peak number of octets that this circuit has received in any given second since reboot ST peak_octets tx contains the peak number of octets that this circuit has transmitted in any given second since reboot ring_auto_rem contains the number of times the token ring adapter detected an internal hardware error either within the chip set itself or within the physical star wiring lobe between the adapter and the wire concentrator The token ring adapter is removed from the ring after detecting the error seg UONBUWOjU quowumbeuep ring_cnt_overflow contains the number of times the token ring adapter error counter incremented from 254 to 255 ring_hard_err contains the num
418. nt messages are generated by the system variable tftp the Trivial File Transfer Protocol An FGET is already in progress request denied Meaning Only one Fget command can be satisfied at a time Action Try the command again Ensure that no other session is using TFTP Can t allocate a connection request denied Meaning Not enough global memory to allocate a connection block can t find destination net ip address request denied Meaning The destination IP address cannot be reached Action Check that the remote system is still up and that the routing protocol is operating correctly CONFIG transfer aborted no ID string found Meaning The configuration file being received did not have the configuration file identification string in it Action Ensure that the file is a valid configuration file for your router could not allocate pkt buf for FGET OS request Meaning Buffer memory ran out so the Fget command could not be executed 17 126 Event Log M essages tftp TFTP and Fget Event Messages could not disable entity for FGET OS 4T Meaning In order to receive the operating system image we disable all the entities other than IP and the circuit over which the file will be transferred This frees up enough memory to store the image in memory before burning into non volatile memory In this case one of the configured entities named entity could not be disabled soBessop 6o7 WweAR coul
419. nt_mismatch contains the number of times a packet is dropped due to the transmit packet size field not being equal to the transmit packet fragment size field cerr contains the number of transceiver self test failures on circuit cct Some transceivers assert the collision signal during the interpacket delay period to verify the channel between the transceiver and the local area controller SONIC Such self tests are usually referred to as SQE Signal Quality Error or heartbeat A test failure defined as the absence of a collision signal within 2 0 us of the cessation of transmis sion may indicate transceiver malfunction or a faulty transmission path between the SONIC and the transceiver ST deferred_tx contains the number of deferred transmissions on circuit cct A deferred transmission indicates that the physical medium was busy the carrier sense signal was TRUE when the local area controller SONIC had a frame for transmittal In such an instance the SONIC waits for the carrier sense signal to go to FALSE pauses for an interframe spacing interval and then attempts to transmit the waiting frame seg UONBUWOjU quowumbeuep dis ret_rx contains the number of frames received by circuit cct that were later returned by the data link service DLS software Within the router software architecture DLS resides between the driver and application software It performs such services as multiplexing demultiplexing or encapsula
420. ntains the number of ZIP GETZONELISTRE PLY packets transmitted by circuit group ccg netinforeply_rx contains the number of ZIP NETINFOREPLY packets received by circuit group ccg netinforely tx contains the number of ZIP NETINFOREPLY packets transmitted by circuit group ccg reply_rx contains the number of ZIP REPLY packets received by circuit group ccg reply_tx contains the number of ZIP REPLY packets transmitted by circuit group ccg req_rx contains the number of ZIP REQUEST packets received by circuit group ccg req tx contains the number of ZIP REQUEST packets transmitted by circuit group ccg Management Information Base Variables atmib AppleTalk MIB Information Base atmib AppleTalk MIB Information Base The atmib information base contains variables that describe transmission and reception activities of the AppleTalk router The structure is the following atmib protocol stands for the specific AppleTalk protocol see subheadings vari ables listed below The pathname is constructed as follows atmib protocol vari able The variables are listed alphabetically under each protocol AppleTalk Echo Protocol AEP aep_Reply_tx contains the total number of AEP REPLY packets transmitted by the AppleTalk router aep_Req_rx contains the total number of AEP REQUEST packets received by the AppleTalk router Datagram Delivery Protocol DDP ddp_bad_cksum contains the total number of AppleTalk packets drop
421. o request packet If an integer is not included the packet is sent once wait optional is how many seconds to wait for a response If a second integer is not included the response must be received in five seconds to be successful Examples ping 15 3 0 99 Sends it once and waits 5 seconds ping 15 3 0 99 5 Sends it 5 times and waits 5 seconds ping 15 3 0 99 1 30 Sends it once and waits 30 seconds 16 18 Using the Network Control Language Managing Router Operations and Resources Print Outputting a Display Command to a File or Printer Use NCL s Print command to redirect the output of any NCL command that displays data on the console screen to a printer or afile Each line of output is terminated with carriage return and line feed You can use Print with the commands Help Time and Date with no arguments Summary Browse Config Crash Stamp Log List Get and commands beginning with Rget as shown for the syntax below Printer output If your console is a terminal or aPC emulating a terminal and has a printer attached switch on your terminal emulators function for logging output to the printer such as on HP 700 series terminals when the command output waits before beginning Then switch off the printer logging function when the output waits at the end File output If your console is a PC invoke your terminal emulator function for capturing output in a local file when the command output waits before beginning
422. o assign a Network list to a filter refer to Dest Net low and Source Net low Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering AppleTalk source or destination networks when creating a Network list Enter the AppleTalk network number in this field and leave the Network high field blank if you are filtering a single AppleTalk source or destination network Enter the lowest AppleTalk network number in this field and enter the highest network number in the Network high field if you are filtering a range of AppleTalk source or destination networks For additional information refer to Network high earlier in this chapter To learn how to assign a Network list to a filter refer to Dest Net low and Source Net low Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering AppleTalk source or destination nodes when creating a Node list Leave this field blank and enter the AppleTalk node identifier in the Node low field if you are filtering a single AppleTalk source or destination node a Enter the highest AppleTalk node identifier in the range if you are filtering a range of AppleTalk source or destination nodes Node ID Node Lists Node low Precedence Options AppleTalk Parameters Parameters and Options For additional information refer to Node low later in this chapter To learn how to assign a Node list to a filter refer to Dest Node low and Source Node low
423. o reduce buffer requirements Insufficient memory for operation Meaning The router cannot provide sufficient memory for EGP operations Action Consider reducing the number of neighbors to save memory space Internal error Meaning EGP has encountered an unspecified error attaching to or detaching from a neighbor Invalid action Meaning EGP received a command that while otherwise valid was inappropriate to its current state 17 81 Event Log Messages egp Exterior Gatew ay Protocol Event Messages Invalid number of neighbors Meaning While checking its neighbor table EGP found too few or too many entries Action Modify the configuration to ensure that the number of neighbors is greater than 1 but less than 20 IP entity not available Meaning The IP entity is not available EGP cannot function in the absence of IP Action Check if IP routing has been disabled Check the configuration to verify IP router configuration parameters 17 82 Event Log M essages egp Exterior Gatew ay Protocol Event Messages Table 17 1 Error Codes Code Explanation 320 Interface not found 321 Requested resource unavailable 322 Router out of memory 323 Router out of buffers 324 Necessary parameter unspecified 325 Option or command not supported 326 Invalid output parameter 327 Connection not established 328 Connection already exists 329 Connection closing 32a Invalid operation for state
424. o send and receive Link Quality Report LQR packets When desired link quality is re established the Network Control Protocols will be brought up again Too many channels to aggregate max set to X Meaning The router configuration has too many channels to aggregate The router will set the channel number to X Action Correct the router configuration Too many circuits configured for slot XX Meaning The configuration contains more than four frame relay interfaces for a single slot The slot number of the error is included as XX Action Modify the configuration so that there are fewer frame relay interfaces for slot XX too many packets lost link unreliable Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit the number of packets lost either by the system or by the remote station exceeded the allowed number of lost packets as determined using the Desired Link Quality parameter All Network Control Protocols will be brought down by the system The system will continue to send and receive Link Quality Report LQR 17 53 Event Log Messages cct Circuit Event Messages packets When desired link quality is re established the Network Control Protocols will be brought up again Too many V 25 bis maps defined limit d Meaning Too many V 25 bis map records have been defined The maximum number allowed is 255 Action Check your configuration file and reduce the number of configured items Too many V 35 circuits
425. o that node If you omit the name public is used If you include a name the address must also be included Example rgetd 15 2 1 94 Displays the DECnet router configuration table for the node with IP address 15 2 1 94 Name Stat Cost Hello Prior I F EtherlG up 4 15 127 1 Token1G up 3 15 64 2 The fields in the table are as follows m Name lists the DEC net circuit groups a Stat contains the current status up or down of Name Cost contains the cost associated with Name Costs are set by the circuit group s Cost configuration parameter Hello contains the interval in seconds between DEC net Hello messages This interval is set by the circuit group s Hello Timer configuration parameter a Prior contains the relative priority of the router Priority is set by the circuit group s Router Priority configuration parameter a IF lists the sequential number the router assigned to the network interface that corresponds to the circuit group for Name Using the Network Control Language Accessing Bridging and Routing Tables Rgetda Displaying the DE Cnet Router Level 2 Routing Table Use NCL s Rgetda command to format and display the DE Cnet router level 2 inter area routing table for a local or remote HP router Syntax rgetda X X X X community X X X X optional is the IP address of the local or remote router in dotted decimal notation If you omit this field an IP address on the local router will be used
426. o this map Inbound or Outbound phone number shows the phone number for aline connection on this map Using the Network Control Language Controlling IP Mapped Circuits for V 25 bis Connection time this connection instance shows the amount of time the map has been connected for the currently alive connection Non mapped data shows whether such data is ALLOWED or DISALLOWED for the currently alive connection refer to the discussion above on page 16 87 Hold down time left shows the amount of time this map will remain in the hold down state 9T spuewuop TON 16 91 Command Fget Fput 16 92 Using the Network Control Language Using TFTP To Transfer Operating Code Configuration and NCL Display Using TFTP To Transfer Operating Code Configuration and NCL Display Two NCL commands work in conjunction with the Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP and IP routing to provide TFTP server and cli ent capability Using the commands on this router you can download the router s operating code or configuration from another router or host on the network and can copy its operating code or configuration to a host or server for storage and later downloading You can also redirect the output of any NCL command that displays data on the console screen to a file on another host or server These network transfers operate over any of the router s network interfaces LAN or point to point The commands available in this categ
427. o use a Node list to establish the upper and lower range of destination node identifiers For additional information refer to Dest Node high earlier in this chapter F or more information about Node lists refer to Node high and Node low later in this chapter Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering a datagram based on the contents of its destination socket field Options Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter AppleTalk destination sockets Leave this field blank and enter the AppleTalk socket number in the Dest Sock low field if you are filtering a single AppleTalk destination sockets Enter the highest AppleTalk socket number in the range if you are filtering a range of AppleTalk destination sockets Leave this field blank and enter the name of the Socket list in the Dest Sock low field if you want to use a Socket list to establish the upper and lower range of AppleTalk destination socket numbers For additional information refer to Dest Sock low later in this chapter For more information about Socket lists refer to Socket high and Socket low later in this chapter Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering a datagram based on the contents of its destination socket field Options Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter AppleTalk destination sockets a Enter the AppleTalk socket number in this field and leave the Dest Sock high f
428. ocket Enter the lowest XNS socket number in this field and enter the highest socket number in the Source Socket high field if you are filtering a range of XNS source sockets Enter the Socket list name in this field and leave the Source Socket high field blank if you want to use a Socket list to establish the upper and lower range of socket numbers For additional information refer to Source Socket high earlier in this chapter For more information about Socket lists refer to Socket high and Socket low earlier in this chapter Identifies a specific destination XNS network in an internet All XNS networks are identified by a 32 bit network number assigned by the local network administrator Type in the network number in an eight character hexadecimal format 11 IPX Protocol Parameters 11 2 IPX Protocol Parameters Overview Overview DEFAULT_CONFIG Configuration Editor System 1 Software 1 Lines 4 Circuits 4 Circuit Groups 4 Bridge 1 DoD Internet Router 9 DECNET IV Routing Service B SNMP Sessions B 10 Xerox Routing Service B 11 IPX Routing Service B lt _ Access to IPX parameters 12 AppleTalk Router B 13 X 25 Network Service B 14 V 25 bis Network Mapping 8 8 COO OS OU IN Enter Selection B for Previous Menu Figure 11 1 Access to IPX Parameters IPX Parameters Enable use of the Internet Packet Ex
429. of ANSI T 1 617 not supported by HP Access methods Management Information Base Variables cct Circuits Information exmib fr dictble entry active cct 36 26 1 1 2 cct where cct indicates the circuit addr States that address format are in use on this frame relay interface There are four possible values Q921 1 specifies use of the first frame relay address format with support for a 13 bit DLC with no DE FECN or BECN bit support It is mostly obsolete with two byte support only Q922M arch90 2 specifies use of March 1990 draft of CCITT specification Q922 with support for an 11 bit DLCI with no DE bit Q922N ovember90 3 specifies use of November 90 draft of CCITT specification Q922 with support for all of Q922November90 plus a control byte in the extended address format Q9222 4 specifies use of the final draft of CCITT specification Q922 with support for all of Q922November90 plus a control byte in the extended address format Access methods xmib fr dictble entry addr cct 36 26 1 1 3 cct where cct indicates the circuit addrlen States the address length in octets to be used over this interface By agreement all PVCs within a given interface must use the same encoding and encoding length for the DLCI addresses In the case of Q922 format the length indicates the entire length of the address including the control portion exmib fr dictble entry addrlen cct 36 26 1 1 4 cct where cct i
430. of bytes transmitted during echo sessions sess cur contains the current number of echo sessions sess tot contains the total number of echo sessions since the router last booted tx_bytes contains the total number of bytes received during echo sessions Management Information Base Variables egp EGP Information Base egp EGP Information Base The Exterior Gateway Protocol egp information base contains variables that describe the transmission and reception of messages by the EGP protocol The structure is the following egp vari ables listed below The pathname is constructed as follows ST egp vari able The variables are listed alphabetically bad_asn contains the number of received EGP messages that con tained an unrecognized autonomous system number in the EGP header bad_cod contains the number of received EGP messages that con tained an unrecognized value in the Code field of the EGP header seg UOnBUWUOjU quowbHeuep bad_hel contains the number of unexpected Hello neighbor reacha bility messages received by EGP A Hello message is unexpected when received from a passive peer bad_ihu contains the number of unexpected Hear You neighbor reachability messages received by EGP An I Hear You message is unexpected when received in the absence of a prior Hello message bad_stt contains the total number of received EGP messages that contained an unrecognized value in the Status field of the EGP hea
431. of incomplete frames received by circuit cet An incomplete frame is identified by failure to set the end of packet bit in the receive message descriptor lack_resc_error_rx contains the number of times circuit cet lost frames because of insufficient buffer space late_colln_tx contains the number of late collisions on circuit cet A late collision is one detected after the transmission of at least 64 bytes In such an instance the local area controller SONIC doesnot retransmit the frame Rather it terminates the transmission increments this counter and transmits the next frame in its transmit queue Icar_tx contains the number of instances of carrier loss on cet Loss of carrier indicates that the input receive enable signal went FALSE during a controller initiated transmission mac_addr contains the 12 digit hexadecimal representation of the 48 bit station address used by circuit cct merr contains the number of memory errors A memory error indi cates that the local area controller SONIC after becoming bus master failed to receive a ready signal within 25 6 us of asserting a memory address on the data address bus A memory error disables the SONIC octets_rx_per_sec contains the number of octets that this circuit has received in the last second Management Information Base Variables cct Circuits Information Base octets_tx_per_sec contains the number of octets that this circuit has transmitted in the last second oc
432. og file This value overrides the Connect retry count parameter configured for v 25 bis under the Circuits menu Options Default Use Circuit defined count Range 1 to 30 VL Connect wait time Sets how long to wait after trying to make a call for the actual connection to be sec established If the connection is not established within the specified time the router drops DTR and retries the call Retry means to bring the DTR line back up This pattern repeats until either the router makes the connection or the specified number of retries is reached This value overrides the Connect wait time parameter configured for v 25 bis under the Circuits menu SJIPULLd sq GCA Options Default Use Circuit defined time Range 1 5 10 15 20 30 60 120 255 Infinity Hold down time Hold down time sec is used when there is a failure to establish a v 25 bis connection for this virtual circuit After a connection failure retrys have been exhausted the IP map cannot be re used until the hold down time has passed This prevents a circuit from continuously retrying on a remote that it cannot reach at present The resolution of this parameter is in seconds between 0 and 720 seconds or you can select Leave map down on failure In this case the map cannot be used until you execute the NCL Enipmap command Default 10 Range 0 720 Leave map down on failure 14 3 IP Next Hop Remote Station Number Subaddress VC inactivity time
433. om load balancing and disables Host ID load balancing the router evenly distributes IPX network traffic among all circuits within a circuit group to carry all network traffic packets between the source and destination Note In some cases random load balancing can interfere with Novell burst mode NLM Sets the cost for each router hop Standard IPX RIP implementations assign a cost of 1 to each hop Default 1 Enables or disables the RIP listen function RIP Listen specifies whether the IPX router adds routes received in RIP updates from neighboring routers to its own internal routing table Default Yes Enables the RIP listen function Disables the RIP listen function Enables or disables the RIP supply function RIP Supply determines whether the IPX router transmits periodic RIP updates Default Yes Enables the RIP supply function Disables the RIP supply function Sets the cost for the relay to the next hop Determines whether the router can exclude or include RIP and SAP updates sent to a neighbor that were already learned by the neighbor Default Yes Include RIP and SAP updates already learned by a neighbor Exclude RIP and SAP updates already learned by a neighbor 11 14 SAP driven RIP supply Server Name No Yes Server Type Hex Socket high Options IPX Protocol Parameters Parameters and Options Decreases the amount of RIP traffic advertised by the IPX router over specified interface
434. ommand The value contained in this variable should be 0 as should the value of test_cmd_tx test_rsp_tx contains the number of 802 2 Logical Link Control LLC Test responses issued on circuit cct Test responses reply to Test commands and verify the LLC to LLC transmission path The value contained in this variable and the value contained in text_cmd_rx should be equal tx_cct_ring_cnt This statistic shows the number of packets in the circuit s transmit ring The protocols dump packets whose forwarding decision has been made into the transmit rings 1 per circuit The drivers pull the packets out of the transmit rings and queue them to the network interface device for transmitting on the media This statistic is valid on HP series 200 or 400 routers and for interface modules on HP series 600 routers tx_dma_drops_ These are the number of transmit packets dropped by an interface module due to local port module packet memory conges tion that is a lack of local packet buffers This occurs when the output link on the interface module cannot keep up with the rate at which packets are being sent to it by the routing engine unrecog pdu_ contains the number of unrecognized 802 2 Logical Link Control protocol data units PDUs received by circuit cct An unrecog nized PDU is one whose control field indicates other than a UI Unnum bered Information frame an XID Exchange Identification frame or a Test frame xid_cmd_rx contains the
435. ommand on the remote system 6 Disable TFTP after completing the transfer dis tftp on this router 9T spuewuop TON 16 93 Using the Network Control Language Using TFTP To Transfer Operating Code Configuration and NCL Display F get Loading the Operating Code or Configuration Use NCL s Fget command with TFTP to download router operating code or aconfiguration from another HP router on an attached network using TFTP The routers must have IP routing and TFTP configured and enabled See the TFTP security notes on page 16 94 Note The following limitations apply to the source of operating code downloaded from one router to another using F get Destination Router Version Source Router J 2540A or 2540B B J 2540A or J 2540B only 27289B or J 2543A A 27289B or J 2543A only 27285 86 87 88 89 90A A 27285 86 87 88 89 90A only J 2530A A J 2530A only Syntax fget x X xX X os file download router operating code fget X X X X config file download router configuration X X X X isthe IP address of the remote router or host in dotted decimal notation fileis one of the following on the remote node os operating code on the router config configuration on the router filename isthe name of the configuration or operating code file on the remote host Examples fget 15 3 0 97 os os fget 15 3 0 97 config config In response you will be informed of the progress and successful or unsuccessful completion of the transfer
436. ompatibility with UNIX BSD 4 1 Disables checksum processing Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering a UDP or TCP destination port Set the Protocol parameter to Ignore to disable the filtering of UDP and TCP ports Leave this field blank and enter the destination port number in the UDP TCP Dest Port low field if you are filtering a single UDP or TCP destination port Enter the highest port number if you are filtering a range of UDP or TCP destination ports Leave this field blank and enter the name of an IP port list in the UDP TCP Dest Port low field if you want to use an IP port list to establish the lower and upper range of UDP or TCP destination ports For more information refer to UDP TCP Dest Port low later in this chapter To learn how to create a Port list refer to Port low and Port high earlier in this chapter Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering a UDP or TCP destination port Set the Protocol parameter to Ignore to disable the filtering of UDP and TCP ports a Enter the port number in this field and leave the UDP TCP Dest Port high field blank if you are filtering a single UDP or TCP destination port Enter the lowest port number in this field and enter the highest destination port number in the UDP TCP Dest Port high field if you are filtering a range UDP or TCP ports f you want to use an IP port list to establish a range of UDP or TCP destinat
437. on for configuring PROCOMM PLUS to not look for CD to be on high If you do not change the setting as described above PROCOMM PLUS generates a No Carrier error message 16 99 9T spuewuuop TON 16 100 Using the Network Control Language Using ZModem to Transfer Configuration and NCL Display 8 Press Esc three times to return to the router s Main menu see figure 1 2 9 Select the Network Control Language Interpreter in the router s Main menu The procedure to download the configuration or NCL command display to a PC host file at the NCL prompt is shown by the syntax and examples on the following pages Using the Network Control Language Using ZM odem to Transfer Configuration and NCL Display Syntax zput config filename overwrite format transfer router configuration zput NCL command filename overwrite format store display command output filename is the name of a file on the remote PC host to store the output from this router NCL command isan NCL display command string on this router Possible commands are listed above and described earlier in this chapter If the command has parameters and thus includes a space then enclose the command string in double quotes overwrite optional specifies whether to overwrite any existing file of the same name as filename either of the following 0 the default prevents overwriting 1 allows overwriting format optional selec
438. on rejected IPCP 4T Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit the remote station has rejected the IP Control Protocol IPCP No IP traffic may occur over the link until the remote station is ready to accept the IP Control Protocol remote station rejected IPXCP s pess Ww 601 WweAR Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit the remote station has rejected the IPX Control Protocol IPXCP No IPX traffic may occur over the link until the remote station is ready to accept the IPX Control Protocol remote station rejected LCP Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit the remote station has rejected the Link Control Protocol LCP Link initialization cannot continue until the remote station is ready to accept the Link Control Protocol remote station rejected UPAP Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit the remote station has rejected the User Password Authentication Protocol UPAP Link initialization cannot continue until the remote station is ready to accept the User Password Authentication Protocol Action If UPAP is not considered necessary then modify the configuration to disable UPAP remote station s login attempt failed Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit the remote station failed in its attempt to login to the system The remote station s User ID or Password or both were incorrect Action The remote station s User ID and or Password in the configuration may be modified if desired so that th
439. onal information refer to Dest Network high earlier in this chapter F or more information about Network lists refer to Network Number high and Network Number low later in this chapter Sets the high boundary of the range for filtering an XNS packet based on the contents of its destination socket field Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter XNS destination sockets a Leave this field blank and enter the XNS socket number in the Dest Socket low field if you are filtering a single XNS destination socket Enter the highest XNS socket number in the range if you are filtering a range of XNS destination sockets Dest Socket low Effect Options Xerox Network Systems XNS Router Parameters Parameters and Options Leave this field blank and enter the name of the Socket list in the Dest Socket low field if you want to use a Socket list to establish the upper and lower range of XNS destination socket numbers For additional information refer to Dest Socket low later in this chapter For more information about Socket lists refer to Socket high and Socket low later in this chapter Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering an XNS packet based on the contents of its destination socket field Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter XNS destination sockets Enter the XNS socket number in this field and leave the Socket Host high field 5 bl
440. onal information refer to Network Number low later in this chapter To learn how to assign a Network list to a filter refer to Dest Network low and Source Network low Specifies the network portion of the SAP Service Advertising Protocol filter pattern Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering IPX source or destination networks when creating a Network list a Enter the IPX network number in this field and leave the Network Number high field blank if you are filtering a single IPX source or destination network Enter the lowest IPX network number in this field and enter the highest network number in the Network Number high field if you are filtering a range of IPX source or destination networks For additional information refer to Network Number high earlier in this chapter To learn how to assign a Network list to a filter refer to Dest Network low and Source Network low The name of the NETBIOS target NETBIOS names consist of up to 16 characters and can include any keyboard character except the tilde The backslash can be entered only as If a character cannot be entered from the keyboard it can be entered in two digit hexadecimal form as hh where hh is a two digit hexadecimal value Note Matching is case sensitive J OE s Server is not equivalent to joe s server Identifies the host address of the next hop router used to reach
441. onfigure the token ring circuit and line CCT cct Token Ring line record missing Meaning This token ring line is not completely configured There may be some corruption of the configuration file Action Reconfigure the token ring circuit and line CCT cct Token SRA Programming Failure Meaning A failure was detected while trying to program the source route accelerator chip Action There may be a hardware failure Contact your HP support provider CCT cct Too many lines assigned to the Token connector Meaning There can be only one line configured per token ring connector Action Ensure that each line in the configuration file has a unique token ring connector name 17 61 Event Log Messages dev Device Event Messages Connected module is non link nn Meaning The adapter card cannot be identified by the driver These IDs are listed in table A 1 in the hw Hardware Information Base section in chapter 18 Action Verify the adapter card hardware Connector nn not on this module Meaning The configuration record reflects a non existent physical connector Action Modify Connector in the line record in the configuration Connector out of range Meaning The configuration contains an invalid Connector parameter Action Use the Configuration Editor to identify and replace the invalid Connector parameter Ethernet CAM load failed Meaning SONIC hardware fault Action HP series 200 or 400 ro
442. onse packet is received from the destination station This situation can occur if the network is re configuring due to a link failure or if the router was rebooted SR sr_is_table out of space Meaning SR sr_ring full Meaning The source routing intermediate station table is out of space The Sr_is_table is a table that contains source destination pairs of station addresses It contains pointers to the RIF table The sr_ring data structure used to contain outgoing source routed packets is full No other source routed packets will be sent out until the ring has been emptied SR TF forward_ring full Meaning SRT out of buffers Meaning 17 100 The forward_ring data structure is used to contain outgoing source routed packets that have been filtered through traffic filters This data structure is now full No other source routed packets that need to be filtered through traffic filters will be sent out until the ring has been emptied No packet buffer was available to allocate for the source routing transparent SRT bridge to process an all routes explorer ARE frame or a Spanning tree explorer STE frame Event Log M essages line Lines Event Messages line Lines Event Messages 4T Connector nn not on this module soBessop 601 WweAW Meaning The configuration record reflects a non existent physical connector Action Modify Connector in the line record in the configuration Invalid
443. onsistent Token Ring circuit assigned to multiple lines Meaning A circuit has been assigned to more than one line on this router Proper operation requires that a circuit be configured to only one line Action Check the lines configuration to ensure that the token ring circuit name is assigned to only one token ring line 17 66 Event Log M essages dev Device Event Messages Too many Ethernet circuits configured x Meaning The configuration contains more Ethernet circuit records than can be accommodated Action Modify the configuration to ensure that no more than the maximum E thernet 802 3 circuit records are assigned soBessop 6o7 WweAR Too many lines assigned to Ethernet connector Meaning The same Ethernet 802 3 line has been assigned to multiple physical connectors Action Modify the configuration so that only a single line is assigned to each connector Too many lines assigned to V 35 connector Meaning The configuration contains an excessive number greater than two of line records for a single connector Action Modify the line configuration to ensure that no more than one line record references a specific physical connector Too many Token Ring circuits configured Meaning There can be no more than one token ring circuit configured for each port on the router More than one circuit has been configured for a token ring port Action Reconfigure the token ring circuit s to no more than on
444. onzero 154 VC timeout because of idleness in call between X 25 and AHIP hosts 155 Destination DTE uses standard X 25 service 156 Invalid protocol ID in calls between X 25 and AHIP hosts 157 Error occurred while opening connection at the AHIP source 160 PVC endpoints are incompatible 161 NAS reselection was completed while the local DCE was waiting for a RESET CONFIRMATION from the local DCE 162 No response by DTE after attempt to bring up virtual circuit 163 PVC is up and restart is complete 164 Network caused PVC error 165 CPS aggregation deadlock was detected 166 Local DCE received an invalid packet while waiting for a response to a call request from the remote DTE 167 Connection closed because of network error Code Reserved for Netw ork Specific Information 168 Cannot intercept fast select 169 Cannotintercept RPOA 170 Cannot intercept X 75 call 171 Too much data is intercepted call 172 Bad NAS address 173 Invalid facility for normal CLEAR packet 174 Invalid local reselection address 175 Invalid remote local reselection address 176 Reselection request with fast selection 177 Too much data in reselection request 178 Reselection request NUI is greater than fast select 179 Cannot renegotiate fixed facilities 17 145 4T s pess Ww 601 344 17 146 Event Log Messages X 25 Event Messages Table 17 3 Diagnostic Field Codes Continued Code Network Specific information Continued
445. oo low to be processed That is the router will drop the Ls Req and Ls Update packets from the neighbor whose state is below Exchange in the following list Full Loading Exchange Exch Start 2 Way Init Attempt Down LS Update Newer self gen LSA Meaning The OSPF entity has received a self generated link state advertisement that appears to be newer than the internal copy LS Update Unknown nbr Meaning A link state update has been received from an unknown neighbor LS Update Unknown type Meaning The OSPF entity has received an unknown link state update type OSPF Area mismatch Meaning The OSPF entity discerns that one of its interfaces has been mismatched with a configured area OSPF Auth key area key Meaning There is a mismatch between the authentication key specified in the packet and the configured value 17 108 Event Log M essages ospf OSPF Event Messages OSPF Bad intf area id 4T Meaning The interface area identification specified in this packet does not match the one configured for this OSPF interface Or the packet was received on an interface belonging to another area s pess Ww 601 344 OSPF Bad OSPF checksum Meaning The checksum calculated for this packet does not agree with the value specified in the packet OSPF Bad OSPF version Meaning The version of OSPF as specified in this packet is incompatible with the version supported by the OSPF entity
446. option for Quality Connect Retries Link Idle Timer of Service causes these six other Modulus Window Size parameters to appear Their descriptions are listed alphabetically in this chapter Remote Address Accepts a unique decimal value from 00 to 99 Be sure to reverse local and remote address values when you configure the device at the other end of the PPP circuit Default 07 Range 00 to 99 Part Dictionary of Configuration Parameters Global and Session Parameters Global and Session Parameters Overview Overview DEFAULT_CONFIG Configuration Editor ele Access to Global and Session Parameters System 1 Software 1 Lines 4 Circuits 4 Circuit Groups 4 Bridge 1 DoD Internet Router B DECNET IV Routing Service SNMP Sessions 8 18 Xerox Routing Service B 11 IPX Routing Service B 12 AppleTalk Router B 13 25 Network Service B 14 V Z5 bis Network Mapping 8 SOOO NON UT UY IN Enter Selection B for Previous Menu Figure 1 1 Access to Global Parameters in the Configuration Menu Global Parameters These specify how the router initializes its services Page Global Parameters 1 4 Auto Enable 1 4 Automatic Reboot 1 5 Daylight Time Rule 1 8 Screen Refresh Rate 1 9 System Contact 1 9 System Name 1 9 System Location 1 9 Timezone Global and Session Parameters Overview Session Parameters Define the interface between the
447. or re arrange traffic so that not as many circuits are queued waiting for an available line Higher speed ISDN lines may also help 17 25 Event Log Messages cct Circuit Event Messages Data pkt received on dow ned connection Meaning Action The adapter sent data packets on a link that was not connected The DSR line was down This is not expected when the router is in manual adapter mode Check the adapter configuration Make sure that it raises DSR when the phone call is established DCE set DSR TRUE before DTE sent XXX Meaning Action The router was about to send a v 25 bis command XX X0 when the terminal adapter unexpectedly pulled up DSR This indicates that the router and adapter are out of synchronization during a V 25 bis exchange The router will drop DTR and re attempt the connection if the retry count permits No user action required The router will try to re syncronize the connection If this happens frequently check the adapter configuration DCE set DSR while sending CFI Meaning Action While the router was waiting for the connection time to expire before retrying connection establishment the terminal adapter unexpectedly pulled up DSR This indicates that the router and adapter are out of synchronization during a V 25 bis exchange The router will drop DTR and re attempt the connection if the retry count permits No user action required The router will try to re syncronize
448. or this field nonBroadcast 1 for those networks that do not support multicasting and broadcast 2 for those that do Management Information Base Variables cct Circuits Information Base exmib fr dictble entry multcast cct 36 26 1 1 10 cct where cct indicates the circuit pollint Is the number of seconds between successive status enquiry messages The default value is ten seconds exmib fr dictble entry pollint cct 36 36 1 1 5 cct where cct indicates the circuit Frame Relay Circuit Table Variables ccttbl The circuit table contains information about the various connections PVCs that are presently defined within the frame relay interface The frame relay MIB variables in alphabetical order for the circuit table are becn Is the number of frames received from the network indicating backward congestion since the circuit was created exmib fr ccttbl entry becn cct ddd 36 26 2 1 5 cct ddd where cct indicates the circuit and ddd indicates the dlci crtd Is the value of sysUpTime when the circuit was created whether by the data link connection management or by a set request exmib fr ccttbl entry crtd cct ddd 36 26 2 1 10 cct ddd where cct indicates the circuit and ddd indicates the dlci dici Isthe data link connection identifier for this circuit exmib fr ccttbl entry dlci cct ddd 36 26 2 1 2 cct ddd where cct indicates the circuit and ddd indicates the dlci fecn Isthe number of frames received
449. or unneeded ports or protocols SR Sr_es_table out of space Meaning Action The sr_es_table the source routing end station table is out of space It contains indexes into the station address table madr_table for destination nodes that communicate through token ring interfaces directly attached to this router It also contains pointers to the RIF table which provides the routing information for the destination nodes The maximum number of sr_es_table entries supported by the 2 M byte processor card is 1K Upgrade the processor card to 5 Mbytes of memory to allow 4K entries 17 51 Event Log Messages cct Circuit Event Messages SR Sr_is_srf_rif_insert no rif entry Meaning A specifically routed frame was received but the appropriate entry in the source routing intermediate station table sr_is_table does not contain a routing information field for the destination station The packet is dropped SR Sr_is_table out of space Meaning SR sr_ring full Meaning The sr_is_ table the source routing intermediate station table is out of space It contains indexes into the station address table madr_table for source destination pairs of nodes It also contains pointers to the RIF table which provides the routing information for the source destination nodes on the network The SR_ring data structure used to contain outgoing source routed packets is full No other source routed packets will be sent out
450. ore information about Host lists refer to Host Number high and Host Number low earlier in this chapter Source Network high Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering an IPX packet based on the contents of its source network field Options Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter IPX source networks Leave this field blank and enter the IPX network number in the Source Network low field if you are filtering a single IPX source network Enter the highest IPX network number in the range if you are filtering a range of IPX source networks Leave this field blank and enter the name of the Network list in the Source Network low field if you want to use a Network list to establish the upper and lower range of IPX source network numbers For additional information refer to Source Network low later in this chapter For more information about Network lists refer to Network Number high and Network Number low earlier in this chapter Source Network low Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering an IPX packet based on the contents of its source network field TT Options Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter IPX source networks a Enter the IPX source network number in this field and leave the Source Network high field blank if you are filtering a single IPX source network a Enter the lowest IPX network number in this field and enter the highe
451. ories on the AppleTalk Router Statistics screen are the following NAME Receive Forward Drop TOTAL Lists each AppleTalk circuit group by name Lists the number of AppleTalk packets received on the circuit group Lists the number of AppleTalk packets transmitted Lists the number of received AppleTalk packets dropped by the AppleTalk Router Lists the total for each of the above counts for all AppleTalk circuit groups ST SONSNEIS SU823 19S Using the Statistic Screens Bridge Statistics Screen Bridge Statistics Screen The Bridge Statistics screen is available if the bridge service is enabled in your configuration This screen summarizes bridge traffic volume for each circuit group SAMPLE_CONFIG 6 Jan 1991 28 44 33 Bridge Statistics NAME FRAMES Receive Forward Flood Drop gt 1 etherig 419 2 B 419 Z tokenlg i a a B 3 wanlg 7 7 7 B 4 wanzg a a B a TOTAL 419 B B 419 PRESS r for reset Down Up lt to exit Figure 15 2 Bridge Statistics Screen 15 6 Using the Statistic Screens Bridge Statistics Screen Categories on the Bridge Statistics screen are the following NAME Receive Forward Flood Drop TOTAL Lists each individual circuit group by name Lists the number of frames received by the circuit group Lists the number of received frames that were forwarded by the bridge Forwarding requires that the bridge learned the destination
452. ork high earlier in this chapter For more information about Network lists refer to Network Number high and Network Number low earlier in this chapter Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering an XNS packet based on the contents of its source socket field Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter XNS source sockets a Leave this field blank and enter the XNS socket number in the Source Socket low field if you are filtering a single XNS source socket Enter the highest XNS socket number in the range if you are filtering a range of XNS source sockets 10 13 Source Socket low Target Net 10 14 Options Xerox Network Systems XNS Router Parameters Parameters and Options Leave this field blank and enter the name of the Socket list in the Source Socket low field if you want to use a Socket list to establish the upper and lower range of XNS socket numbers For additional information refer to Source Socket low later in this chapter For more information about Socket lists refer to Socket high and Socket low earlier in this chapter Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering an XNS packet based on the contents of its source socket field Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter XNS source sockets Enter the XNS socket number in this field and leave the Source Socket high field blank if you are filtering a single XNS source s
453. ormation Base Accessing a Foreign Management Information Base Two NCL commands work in conjunction with the SNMP agent and the IP routing application to provide access to the enterprise specific section of the MIB of any remote node other than an HP or Wellfleet router that provides a standard SNMP MIB implementation You must use a complete MIB pathname with these commands The commands available in this category are the following Function Display the value of an individual M IB variable from a remote foreign node page 16 52 Display the value of a branch of MIB variables from a remote foreign node page 16 53 These commands are detailed below They display their output on the console screen To output the display to a printer or file instead of the console screen place the command syntax as shown below for each command within the Print command 9T spuewuop TON 16 51 16 52 Using the Network Control Language Accessing a Foreign Management Information Base Rget Displaying the Value of a Foreign Variable Use NCL s Rget command to display the value of an individual variable from a foreign enterprise specific section of the MIB of a remote node Syntax rget identifier X X X X community identifier is the complete object identification path identifying a specific MIB variable X X X X optional is the IP address of the remote foreign node in dotted decimal notation If you omit this field an
454. ort list a Enter the IP port in this field and leave the IP Port high field blank if you are filtering a single IP port Enter the lowest IP port number in this field and enter the highest IP port number in the IP Port high field if you are filtering a range of IP ports For more information refer to IP Port high earlier in this chapter Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering a packet based on the contents of its IP source field IP Source low LAN Address Length List Name Load Balancing Options Options Internet Protocol IP Parameters Parameters and Options Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter an IP packet based on the contents of its IP source field Leave this field blank and enter the IP source address in the IP Source low field if you are filtering a single IP source address a Enter the highest IP source address in this field if you are filtering a range of IP source addresses a Leave this field blank and enter the name of a IP Address list in the IP Source low field if you are establishing a range of IP source addresses with a filter list For more information refer to IP Source low later in this chapter To learn how to create an IP Address list refer to IP Address low and IP Address high earlier in this chapter Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering a packet based on the contents of its IP source field a Lea
455. ory are the following Function Initiate a TFTP read request from a specific host or router for the configuration or operating system page 16 95 Initiate a TFTP write request to a specific host or to an HP Router CR for the configuration or Operating system or display command output page 16 96 These commands are described beginning on page 16 95 Using the Network Control Language Using TFTP To Transfer Operating Code Configuration and NCL Display TFTP Security Features The router provides some security measures to control access to and use of the TFTP facility Initial TFTP connection requests are made on the well known User Datagram Protocol UDP port 69 Access to TFTP on a specific network interface can be blocked therefore by constructing a TCP UDP port filter to drop incoming datagrams destined for port 69 In addition TFTP does not auto enable in the default state While you can configure the TFTP Auto Enable parameter to be Yes this option may not be desirous in environments where security is a concern Use the following procedure to transfer objects operating code configurations or NCL displays to or from a system on which TFTP is not auto enabled 1 Telnet to the system 2 Login 3 Access the Network Control Language Interpreter from the Main menu 4 Use NCL s Enable command to enable TFTP en tftp on this router 5 Do the transfer using the F get or Fput command or other TFTP c
456. ot fall within the range established by the matching set of low and high filter parameters Ignore Match Host lists Host high Options Host low Options Host Number Netw ork Number high 10 8 Xerox Network Systems XNS Router Parameters Parameters and Options Applies no filtering action if the contents of the packet field falls within the range established by the matching set of low and high parameters Applies the filtering action drop accept log if the contents of the packet field falls within the range established by the matching set of low and high parameters Displays parameters for setting the lower and upper boundaries of the range for a Host list For more information refer to Host low and Host high Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering XNS source or destination hosts when creating a Host list Leave this field blank and enter the XNS host number in the Host low field if you are filtering a single XNS source or destination host Enter the highest XNS host number in the range if you are filtering a range of XNS source or destination hosts For additional information refer to Host low later in this chapter To learn how to assign a Host list to a filter refer to Dest Host low and Source Host low later in this chapter Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering XNS source or destination hosts when creating a Host list
457. ou reconfigure the in service router to match the network range of the AppleTalk router however you must restart all network nodes and routers Event Log Messages at AppleTalk Event Messages Cfg No config summary record Meaning There is aserious problem in the router s configuration file affecting the system configuration and not just the AppleTalk configuration In this case the CFG_ SUMMARY record is missing Action Ensure that the router s configuration is valid Cfg No BOOTLOAD record Meaning There is aserious problem in the router s configuration file affecting the system configuration and not just the AppleTalk configuration In this case the BOOT_LOAD records are missing Action Ensure that the router s configuration is valid Cfg No config summary record Meaning There is aserious problem in the router s configuration file affecting the system configuration and not just the AppleTalk configuration In this case the CFG_SUMMARY record is missing Action Ensure that the router s configuration is valid Cfg No circuits configured Meaning No circuits are configured for AppleTalk The configuration may be corrupted Action Use Quick Configuration or the Configuration Editor to add one or more AppleTalk circuits Cfg No entity records Meaning There is aserious problem in the router s configuration file affecting the system configuration and not ju
458. oundary of the range for filtering a 802 2 LLC frame based on the contents of its source service access points SSAP field Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter a frame based on the contents of its SSAP field Leave this field blank and enter the SSAP in the SSAP low field if you are filtering a single source service access point Enter the highest DSAP in the range if you are filtering a range of source service access points Leave this field blank and enter the name of a SAP list in the SSAP low field if you want to establish the range of source service access points with a filter list For more information refer to SSAP low earlier in this chapter To learn how to create a SAP list refer to SAP low and SAP high earlier in this chapter Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering a 802 2 LLC frame based on the contents of its source service access point SSAP field Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter a frame based on the contents of its SSAP field Enter a SSAP in this field and leave the SSAP high field blank if you are filtering a single source service access point Enter the lowest SSAP in this field and enter the highest SSAP in the SSAP high field if you are filtering a range of source service access points Enter the name of a SAP list in this field and leave the SSAP high field blank if you are establishing a range of source service access
459. oup ccg rdr_rx contains the number of RTMP ROUTE DATA REQUEST packets received by circuit group ccg req rx contains the number of RTMP REQUEST packets received by circuit group ccg routing tbl_overflow contains the number of times circuit group ccg tried unsuccessfully to store a new routing tuple a target network and a hop count in the AppleTalk routing table rsp_tx contains the number of RTMP RESPONSE packets transmitted by circuit group ccg ver_mismatch contains the number of RTMP DATA packets received by circuit group ccg that were not for AppleTalk Phase 2 Zone Information Protocol ZIP geticlzones rx contains the number of ZIP GETLOCALZONES packets received by circuit group ccg geticlzones tx contains the number of ZIP GETLOCALZONES packets transmitted by circuit group ccg geticlzonesreply rx contains the number of ZIP GETLOCALZONES REPLY packets received by circuit group ccg geticlzonesreply_ tx contains the number of ZIP GETLOCALZONES REPLY packets transmitted by circuit group ccg getnetinfo_rx contains the number of ZIP GETNETINFO packets received by circuit group ccg ST seg UOnBUWOjU quowbHeuep 18 8 M anagement Information Base Variables at AppleTalk Information Base getnetinfo_tx contains the number of ZIP GETNETINFO packets transmitted by circuit group cog getzonelist_rx contains the number of ZIP GETZONELIST packets received by circuit group ccg getzonelistreply tx co
460. ource high Effect Protocol UDP TCP Dest Port low high Effect UDP TCP Source Port low high Effect Action 1 User Defined Fields Header Offset Length Effect 1 Values Low Value hex High Value hex A Parameter Finder J pu 4 JTopue eed A Parameter Finder 7 DoD Internet Router Continued 2 Network Interface Definition Continued 1 Traffic Filters Continued 2 Next Hop Assignment Next Hop Address Drop if Next Hopis Down 3 Static Routes Internet Address Type Static Route Static Adjacency Adjacent Host Type Static Route Subnet Mask Next Hop Cost Preference Propagate to RIP Propagate to EGP Propagate to OSPF M ake route conditional on an alternate circuit group Type Static Adjacency DLCI Type Adjacent Host LAN Address Subnet M ask Encapsulation 4 OSPF Auto Enable Router ID AS Boundary SPF Hold Down Timer 1 Areas Area ID Authentication Type Stub Area A 18 7 DoD Internet Router Continued 4 OSPF Continued 1 Areas Continued 1 Network Summaries IP Address Network Map 2 Interfaces Circuit Group Name Password 1 Interface Definition Interface Type IP Address Metric Interface Type Broadcast 1 Broadcast Definition Hello Interval Dead Interval Retransmit Interval Priority Interface Type Point to Point 1 Point to Point Definition Hello Interval Dead Interval Retransmit Interval Interface Type Non Broadcast Multi Access 1 Non Broadcast M ulti Access
461. outer to match the default zone name of the AppleTalk router however you must restart all network nodes and routers soBessop 6o7 344 Cfg invid zone name cfg d for ccg Meaning Action The circuit group specified by ccg has been configured as a seed port The directly connected network is serviced not only by this seed but also by another seed router already in service The zone name lists conveyed by these seed routers are inconsistent While each list contains the same number of zone entries the lists are not identical One of the seed routers must be reconfigured to ensure the consistency of the zone name lists If you reconfigure the AppleTalk router to match the zone name list of the in service router no further changes are necessary If you reconfigure the in service router to match the zone name list of the AppleTalk router however you must restart all network nodes and routers Cfg netw ork range incorrect for ccg Meaning Action The circuit group specified by ccghas been configured as a seed port The directly connected network is serviced not only by this seed but also by another seed router already in service The network ranges conveyed by these seed routers are inconsistent One of the seed routers must be reconfigured to ensure the consistency of the network ranges If you reconfigure the AppleTalk router to match the network range of the in service router no further changes are necessary If y
462. output command type Quick Rboot X X X X community 16 2 Function Repeat the last NCL command page 16 4 Send an AppleTalk Echo Protocol request to another AppleTalk node page 16 4 Reboot the router page 16 5 Display the entire current configuration in Configuration Editor format page 16 6 Display the entire current configuration in machine readable format page 16 6 Display the router s shutdown history page 16 7 Set or display the router s current date and time page 16 7 Disable a protocol service slot or other configuration entity page 16 8 Invoke the Configuration Editor without leaving NCL page 16 8 Enable a protocol service slot or other configuration entity page 16 9 Leave NCL and return to the Main menu page 16 10 Get help for NCL commands page 16 10 Lists the following page 16 11 The event log messages generated since the last boot Warning Performance and M ajor event log messages only Allmessages in the current event log Lists up to 1000 lines Only messages that contain the specified text string Invoke the automatically updating Event Log without leaving NCL page 16 13 Disable and re enable display paging mode for the console page 16 14 Assign change or remove password protection on the router page 16 15 Send an Internet Control Message Protocol echo request to another node page 16 18 Direct NCL display command output to a printer or file
463. ow 6 15 MAC source high 6 15 MAC source low 6 15 Major event log 1 6 Make route conditional 7 18 manage object 16 31 Managed objects table 16 32 Management information base See MIB Management Priority 7 18 Management Type ANSI Annex D 4 19 Circuits 4 18 LMI Local Management Interface 4 19 Unsupported 4 19 manager password See password map object identifcation 16 36 Max Age 6 16 6 21 Max channels to aggregate 4 19 A 8 Max Conns 13 8 Max Hops 6 16 Max Idle Time secs 13 8 Max Link Latency ms 4 19 4 20 Max Link Latency X 25 13 9 Max Queue Size 13 9 Max Relay Hops 7 19 Max Retransmissions 7 19 Max Area 8 9 Max Bcast End nodes 8 9 Max Cost 8 9 Max Hops 8 9 Max Nodes 8 9 Max Visits 8 10 Maximum Packet Size 4 20 mem 16 32 Menu path A 2 Metric 7 19 mgr 16 32 MIB 16 32 16 36 variables 16 31 foreign 16 51 remote 16 48 Min Channels to Aggregate 4 20 Min Frame Spacing 4 20 13 9 Min Idle Time secs 13 9 Minimum connect duration secs 4 21 Minimum Frame Spacing 4 21 Mode 7 19 Mode normal or end node 7 19 Mode time protocol 7 19 modem 1 7 Modem Conncetion Time 1 7 Modem Disconnection Time 1 7 Modem Lost Receive Ready Time 1 8 Modulus 4 21 4 28 Monitored Events 4 22 More 16 6 16 14 MTU Discovery Option 7 19 MTU Size 13 9 MTU probe reply 7 19 multicast address 4 5 4 16 Multicast S
464. owing commands produce the same result log cct log cct log cct Using the Network Control Lang uage Managing Router Operations and Resources Logi Invoking the Automatically Updating Event Log Use NCL s Logi command to switch to the event log view as if you had chosen Event Log from the Main menu The function of Logi is to allow you to go to the event log without leaving NCL Refer to chapter 17 for information on interpreting the contents of the event log If you need to learn how to use the event log refer to the User s Guide When you use the key left cursor to exit Event Log you will return to the NCL prompt rather than to the Main menu In contrast to the Log command Logi allows you to stay in the event log until you exit and automatically updates the end of the log with the new events that occur Syntax logi 16 13 9T spuewuop TON 16 14 Using the Network Control Language Managing Router Operations and Resources Page Toggle Page Mode Use NCL s Page command to enable or disable page mode With page mode enabled the default output is displayed on the console one page twenty lines at a time With page mode disabled output is displayed continuously Syntax page More Continuing the Display When page mode is enabled as it is by default and more than twenty lines are required to display all output for an NCL command you will see MORE at the botto
465. ox XNS Information Base inunknownprotos contains the number of IDP datagrams discarded because of an incorrect or corrupted value in the Protocol Type field in the IDP header outdiscards contains the number of valid output IDP datagrams discarded because of insufficient router resources lack of buffer space outnoroutes contains the number of IDP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination outrequests contains the number of IDP datagrams generated by local IDP user protocols including Error Management Information Base Variables x25 X 25 Information Base x25 X 25 Information Base The x25 information base contains variables that describe frame level and packet level transmission and reception activities across each X 25 circuit it also contains variables that describe packet level transmission and reception activities across each X 25 point to point dedicated switched virtual circuit The structure is the following x25 cct an X 25 circuit name type either frame or pkt variables the circuit frame or packet level variables listed below see subheading SVC stands for an X 25 virtual circuit name see subheading variable s theX 25 virtual circuit variables listed below The pathnames are constructed as follows x25 cct type vari able x25 svc vari able The variables are listed alphabetically under the different branches on the following pages 18 105 ST
466. p Standard RIP implementations assign a cost of 1 to each hop If you increase this RIP increment the upper boundary set by RIP Network Diameter beyond which a network is declared unreachable is more rapidly attained sIUL Led di 090 01d 3U 7U Default 1 Determines the maximum number of hops for a IP datagram as it moves through an internet from source to destination Standard Internet usage limits hops to a maximum 15 However if every router within your internet can be configured to accept the identical number of hops you can increase the RIP Network Diameter up to a maximum of 127 7 25 RIP Listen RIP Supply Router ID Source Route Token Ring Stub Area 7 26 No Yes No Yes Internet Protocol IP Parameters Parameters and Options Default 15 Maximum 127 hops Note It is strongly recommended that you accept the default value of 15 for RIP Network Diameter Proper operation of RIP requires that every router within the network use the same network diameter value Hosts also use the RIP network diameter to determine reachability Determines whether the IP router adds routing information received in RIP updates from neighboring routers to its internal routing table Default Yes Prevents the addition of received routing information to the internal routing table Allows the addition of received routing information to the internal routing table Note To enable Default Route Listen set
467. pecified by LQM Time secs To avoid declaring link failure in the light of a possibly single lost link quality report packet the multiprotocol router waits until five link quality report periods elapse without the receipt of a link quality report packet before declaring the link down For example if LQM Time secs is set to a value of 3 the multiprotocol router declares the link down after a 15 second interval between the receipt of link quality report packets Upon declaring the link down Point to Point closes all active network NCP and data link layer LCP connections If LCP Auto Restart is set to Yes it then attempts to re establish the LCP connection If LCP Auto Restart is set to No Point to Point makes no attempt to re establish the LCP connection thus leaving it up to the remote Point to Point peer to restart LCP Assigns the interface management mode The between the multiprotocol router and the Frame Relay network is generally defined by one of two commonly implemented standards Both standards generally specify notification procedures for adding or deleting PVCs indications of the availability or unavailability of PVCs and verification of link integrity Default ANSI Annex D Circuit Parameters Parameters and Options ANSI Annex D Displays a screen with parameters for specifying interface management procedures LM Unsupported Max channels to aggregate Max Link Latency ms 0 none defined in Anne
468. ped by the AppleTalk router because the packet contained an incorrect DDP checksum value ddp fwd contains the total number of AppleTalk packets forwarded by the AppleTalk router ddp_hop ct_exceed contains the total number of AppleTalk packets dropped by the AppleTalk router because the packet s hop count was too large 18 9 ST seg UOnBUWOjU quowumbeuep 18 10 M anagement Information Base Variables atmib AppleTalk MIB Information Base ddp_rx contains the total number of AppleTalk packets received by the AppleTalk router ddp _total_drop contains the total number of AppleTalk packets dropped by the AppleTalk router ddp_tx contains the total number of AppleTalk packets transmitted by the AppleTalk router ddp_unknown_netwk contains the total number of AppleTalk packets dropped by the AppleTalk router because the destination network was unknown ddp_upper_prot contains the total number of AppleTalk packets sent to an upper layer protocol by the AppleTalk router Name Binding Protocol NBP nbp_breq_rx contains the total number of NBP BROADCAST REQUEST packets received by the AppleTalk router nbp_fwdreq_rx contains the total number of NBP FORWARD REQUEST packets received by the AppleTalk router nbp_fwdreq_tx contains the total number of NBP FORWARD REQUEST packets transmitted by the AppleTalk router nbp_Ikup_tx contains the total number of NBP LOOKUP packets transmitted by the AppleTalk router Routing
469. points with a filter list STP Priority Table Age Interval Options Options Bridge Parameters Parameters and Options For more information refer to SSAP high earlier in this chapter To learn how to create a SAP list refer to SAP low and SAP high earlier in this chapter Sets the bridge priority for the spanning tree algorithm Default 32768 Skip this field if you have not enabled the spanning tree algorithm If you have enabled the algorithm STP Priority supplies the most significant 16 bits of the unique 64 bit bridge identifier used by the algorithm to identify the root bridge the bridge with the best priority The smaller this value the more likely it is that the bridge will be the root Choose one of the following options 9 1 1023 3 2047 y 7 4095 oi 15 8191 g amp 31 16383 i 2 63 32767 E 127 32768 default g 255 32769 511 65535 When assigning values to the spanning tree parameters Hello Time Max Age and Forward Delay you might want to use the values listed in table 6 1 page 6 19 Sets a time interval in minutes for aging the learning bridge entries in the forwarding table Default 60 Disable 0 0 5 30 60 default 120 180 240 300 The Table Age Interval controls how frequently the learning bridge entries are checked for removal from the bridge forwarding table Each time a frame is forwarded to a station its entry in this table is time stamped If th
470. quired circuit records No lines configured Meaning No lines are configured for the circuits on the router or on the indicated slot Action Configure one or more lines for the router or indicated slot No Token Ring circuits Meaning One or more circuits designated by the Circuit Name parameter in the line record has not been configured 17 65 Event Log Messages dev Device Event Messages Action Modify the configuration to ensure that it includes circuit records for all circuits No Token Ring circuits configured Meaning This is a possible error condition in that no circuits have been configured for a router having one or more token ring ports None of the circuits will be used Action Check your network topology to see if any of the token ring circuits should be configured Pass thru protocol enabled on cctcct driver LLAN local address RLAN remote address Meaning The synchronous pass through protocol is enabled on cct The configured local and remote station addresses are shown also Rx FRMR on circuit cct Frame hh hh hh hh hh Meaning Circuit cct running LLC has received a frame reject frame hh hh hh hh hh is the first five bytes of the frame in hexadecimal format SYNC circuit assigned to multiple lines Meaning One or more line records contains references to the same point to point circuit Action Modify the line configuration to ensure that all line and circuit records are c
471. r FIFO buffer is full when the link level controller was ready to input data peak_frames_rx contains the peak number of frames that this circuit has received in any given second since the last reboot peak_frames tx contains the peak number of frames that this circuit has transmitted in any given second since the last reboot ST peak_octets_rx contains the peak number of octets that this circuit has received in any given second since the last reboot peak_octets tx contains the peak number of octets that this circuit has transmitted in any given second since the last reboot seg UOnBUWOjU quowbHeuep rcv_desc_cnt contains the current number of receiver data buffers available to the link level controller rejects rx contains the count of supervisory REJ Reject frames received by circuit cct A REJ frame is a negative acknowledgment and requests the retransmission of specified Information frames rejects tx contains the number of supervisory REJ Reject frames transmitted by circuit cet A REJ frame is a negative acknowledgment and requests the retransmission of specified Information frames runts rx contains the aggregate number of frames of insufficient length received by circuit cct rx_peak_rate contains the peak data receive rate in bits per second rx_rate contains the current data receive rate in bits per second tl_tos contains the number of T1 timeouts The T1 timer measures the interval between command t
472. r lists the network address in dotted decimal notation 9T Physical Addr lists the station also called physical or MAC address that matches the IP address IF lists the sequential number the router assigned to the network interface spueuauo5 TON 16 41 16 42 Using the Network Control Language Accessing the Internet M anagement Information Base Rgeti Displaying the MIB IP Address Table Use NCL s Rgeti command to format and display the Internet MIB IP address table for a local or remote network node Syntax rgeti X X X X community X X X X optional is the IP address of the local or remote node in dotted decimal notation If you omit this field an IP address on the local router will be used community optional is the name of the SNMP community that grants access to that node If you omit the name public is used If you include a name the IP address must also be included Example rgeti 192 32 1 94 Displays the MIB IP address table for the node whose IP address is 192 32 1 94 IP Address Net Mask Beast IF 192 32 1 94 255 255 255 224 T 1 192 32 1 194 255 255 255 224 1 2 The fields in the table are as follows IP Address lists the network address in dotted decimal notation Net Mask lists the subnet mask in dotted decimal notation associated with that IP address The subnet mask is an IP address with all the network bits set to 1 and all the host bits set to 0 Bcast list
473. r range of DECnet destination areas For additional information refer to Dest Area low later in this chapter For more information about Area lists refer to Area high and Area low earlier in this chapter Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering a DE Cnet packet based on the contents of its destination area field Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter DE Cnet destination areas a Enter the DECnet ID of the destination area in this field and leave the Dest Area high field blank if you are filtering a single DE Cnet destination area a Enter the DECnet ID of the lowest destination area in this field and enter the DECnet ID of the highest destination area in the Dest Area high field if you are filtering a range of DECnet destination areas Enter the Area list name in this field and leave the Dest Area high field blank if you want to use an Area list to establish the upper and lower range of DECnet destination areas For more information refer to Dest Area high earlier in this chapter For more information about Area lists refer to Area high and Area low earlier in this chapter Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering a DE Cnet packet based on the contents of its destination node field Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter DE Cnet destination nodes Leave this field blank and enter the DE Cnet ID of the destination node in
474. r the last 2 seconds false_buserrs contains the number of false bus errors seen by the CPU It should normally contain 0 ready tasks contains the total number of processes currently ready to run spurrious ints contains the total number of spurious interrupts received by the CPU It should normally contain 0 total_tasks contains the total number of existing operating system processes It cannot be reset 18 89 18 90 M anagement Information Base Variables snmp SNMP Information Base snmp SNMP Information Base The Simple Network Management Protocol snmp information base contains variables that describe the transmission and reception of User Data Protocol UDP datagrams delivered to or originated by the SNMP management agent The structure is the following snmp vari ables listed below The pathname is constructed as follows snmp vari able The variables are listed alphabetically snmpbadcommunity contains the number of incoming requests dropped by the SNMP management agent because either 1 the commu nity name was unknown or 2 the originating host was not a member of a known community snmpbadtype contains the number of incoming requests dropped by the SNMP management agent because the protocol data unit PDU specified an invalid operation code snmpinpkts contains the number of User Data Protocol UDP data grams delivered to the SNMP management agent snmpoutpkts contains the number of User Dat
475. r whose port descriptor includes a network range and default zone name and possibly an optional zone name list In the case of a network serviced by multiple AppleTalk routers only a single router need be configured as the seed with an explicitly assigned network range The other AppleTalk routers servicing the network can be configured as nonseed routers Nonseed routers acquire the correct network information network range and zone names by receiving RTMP DATA and ZIP datagrams transmitted by the seed router In the case of a network serviced by a single AppleTalk router the router must be configured as a seed router Default No Assigns the AppleTalk router as a nonseed router This completes the configuration of one circuit group for AppleTalk routing If you select this option the console prompts for traffic filters Assigns the AppleTalk router as the seed router for the network Results in the following seed router parameters Default ZoneName Network Max Network Network Min Note More than one router on the same network segment can be configured as seed router to create a redundant networking topology All the seed routers must be configured with the identical network number range and zone name data Displays a screen with parameters for creating a Socket list For information about creating a Socket list refer to Socket low and Socket high later in this chapter For information about assigning the Socket li
476. ram if the next hop is unreachable Default No Allows IP to consult its routing table and provide an alternate route for the datagram Drops the datagram Determines whether a packet is dropped or relayed filtered based on the contents of a packet field and a range established by a matching set of low and high parameters The packet field and corresponding low and high parameters are listed in the following table Internet Protocol IP Parameters Parameters and Options Packet Field IP Parameters IP Destination IP Dest low and IP Dest high IP Source IP Source low and IP Source high Default Ignore Don t Match Applies the filtering action drop accept log if the contents of the packet field do not fall within the range established by the matching set of low and high filter parameters Ignore Applies no filtering action if the contents of the packet field falls within the range established by the matching set of low and high filter parameters Match Applies the filtering action drop accept log if the contents of the packet field falls within the range established by the matching set of low and high filter parameters Encapsulation Type Used with the Adjacent Host type of static route Assigns one of three encapsulation types Default Ethernet Ethernet Standard Ethernet 2 0 encapsulation for hosts that support Ethernet Required for point to point network interface or any type of X 25 interface
477. ransmission and the receipt of a response If a response is not received within this interval the link level controller increments this counter and then retransmits the command with the P bit set to require an immediate response 18 17 18 18 M anagement Information Base Variables cct Circuits Information Base total_rx_error contains the total number of receive errors on circuit cct This value equals the sum of bad_frames_rx frams_incomp_rx frmr_frames_rx lack_resc_error_rx oflo_rx rejects_rx and runts_tx total_tx_error contains the total number of transmission errors which is the sum of uflo_tx latency_tx and tx_congestion tx_congestion contains the total number of packets dropped due to congestion which is the sum of hipri_congestion normpri_con gestion and lowpri_congestion tx_peak_rate contains the peak data transmission rate in bits per second tx_queue_len contains the number of octets of all priorities currently queued to the circuit This statistic is used as a parameter for controlling latency when Max Link Latency is configured for the circuit tx_rate contains the current data transmission rate in bits per second uflo_tx contains the total number of underflows on circuit cet An underflow occurs when the transmitter portion of the link level control ler truncates a frame because of late receipt of data from memory xmt_desc_cnt contains the current number of frames awaiting transmission by t
478. rdless of the address field length Q 9222 encoding provides for forward explicit congestion notification FECN backward explicit congestion notification BECN discard eligibility DE and address field extension EA within the second byte of the address field s79 wIe1ed N2119 Q922 March Defines a 11 bit DLC and drops the DE bit from the second byte of the address field 4 13 Circuit Parameters Parameters and Options Q922 November Identical to Q922 encoding except in the extended forms three byte and four byte address fields Q922 November encoding lacks a control indicator D C bitin the least significant byte Yes Disables the circuit when a connect failure occurs No Allows the circuit to continue operating when a connect failure occurs Echo Request Time sec Sets the interval in seconds between the transmission of Point to Point echo Events for Error Extended 32 bit CRC request packets The default time zero seconds disables echo requests When PPP Echo Request Times is enabled set to a not zero value the router sends a Point to Point echo request with every packet and expects to receive a reply from the destination to confirm arrival of the packet The link between the router and destination is considered down if the destination fails to echo a reply after five echo request times elapse The router automatically attempts to restart the link control protocol if the link goes down and the LCP restart op
479. re listed alphabetically alloc_bytes contains the number of currently allocated bytes alloc_seg cnt contains the number of currently allocated memory segments free_bytes contains the number of available unallocated bytes free_seg cnt contains the current number of free memory segments A free memory segment is an unused contiguous memory block of greater than 16 bytes Generally an increase in the number of free memory segments indicates an increase in memory fragmentation slab_cnt contains the current number of discretely managed memory areas Each slab is further broken down into smaller contiguous areas called segments total_bytes contains the number of currently installed bytes Management Information Base Variables mgr Manager Information Base mgr Manager Information Base The System manager mgr information base contains a single control object whose function is to generate system management and entity enabling messages NCL s List and Get commands provide no additional information regarding the mgr information base 18 83 ST seg UOnBUWOjU quowumbeuep 18 84 M anagement Information Base Variables mib Internet MIB mib Internet MIB This IP routing information base the mib branch within the private enterprise section contains the same variables as the standard Internet MIB section as defined in Internet Request for Comments RFC 1156 The variables in the private ente
480. reater than or equal to the value selected for the Network Min parameter CL Jle1 ddy SJIPUL Ld 12 11 Network Min Netw ork high Network low Node high 12 12 Options Options Options AppleTalk Parameters Parameters and Options Functional when Seed Router set to Yes Operates in conjunction with Network Max to specify the range of network numbers available to nodes on the directly connected AppleTalk network In order to increase the number of nodes residing on a local network AppleTalk Phase 2 mandates that the seed router provide a range of network numbers which are then made available to network nodes Network nodes can then randomly generate a network number within the provided range just as they randomly generate a node identifier This Network Min parameter specifies the lowest network number for the range Default 0 port is treated as a nonseed router Disable 0 Range 1 to 65279 Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering AppleTalk source or destination networks when creating a Network list Leave this field blank and enter the AppleTalk network number in the Network low field if you are filtering a single AppleTalk source or destination network Enter the highest AppleTalk network number in the range if you are filtering a range of AppleTalk source or destination networks For additional information refer to Network low later in this chapter To learn how t
481. remote device by means of the TFTP rrqin contains the number of received TFTP READ REQUEST packets Opcode l rrqout contains the number of transmitted TFTP READ REQUEST packets Opcode 1 rxmits contains the total number of TFTP packets retransmitted by the router 18 97 18 98 M anagement Information Base Variables tftp TFTP Information Base wrgin contains the number of received TFTP WRITE REQUEST packets Opcode 2 wrqout contains the number of transmitted TFTP WRITE REQUEST packets Opcode 2 Management Information Base Variables timep Time Protocol Information Base timep Time Protocol Information Base The timep information base contains variables that count two Time Protocol events The structure of the information base is the following timep vari ables listed below The pathname is constructed as follows timep variable The variables are listed alphabetically requests contains the number of times the Timep server received a request retries contains the number of times the Timep client retries obtaining the time 18 99 ST seg UOnBUWOjU quowumbeuep 18 100 M anagement Information Base Variables timer Timer Information Base timer Timer Information Base The timer information base contains variables that describe the scheduling and issuance of router generated timers The structure of the information base is the following timer slot always 1 for an
482. rent manager password if a manager password exists mgr is the current manager password required if assigned to remove either password The console displays Enter current password current is the password currently set for the type you selected The console screen displays Enter new password J ust press Return without typing anything else The console displays Enter new password again J ust press Return again to confirm 9T spuewruop TON 16 17 Using the Network Control Language Managing Router Operations and Resources Ping Sending an ICMP Echo Request Message Use NCL s Ping command to send an Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP echo request message to a specific IP address as a network layer test of the reachability of the node Ping does not support loopback pinging this router or broadcast addresses This router must have IP routing configured After transmitting the request message to the node the router waits for a response If it is received within the specified or default interval the console displays a message indicating that the target is alive If an echo response is not received within the specified or default interval the console displays a message indicating that the target did not respond Syntax ping X X X X count wait X X X X is the IP address of the target node in dotted decimal notation count optional is the number of times to repeat the ech
483. ress J pu 4 JTO pureed A Parameter Finder 10 Xerox Routing Service 10 Xerox Routing Service Host Number Auto Enable 1 Lists 1 Network Lists List Name 1 List Members Network Number low Network Number high 2 Host Lists List Name 1 List Members Host low Host high 3 Socket Lists List Name 1 List Members Socket low Socket high 3 Packet Type Lists List Name 1 List Members Packet Type low Packet Type high A 26 10 Xerox Routing Service Continued 2 Network Interface Definitions Network Number Circuit Group RIP Supply RIP Listen RIP Interface Cost Checksums On Source Route Token Ring RIP and SAP split horizon Random load balancing 1 Traffic Filters Precedence Dest Network low high Effect Dest Host low high Effect Dest Socket low high Effect Source Network low high Effect Source Host low high Effect Source Socket low high Effect Packet Type low high Effect Action 3 Static Route Definitions Target Net Next Hop Host Next Hop Net RIP Table Cost A Parameter Finder J pu 4 JTO pureed A Parameter Finder 11 IPX Routing Service 11 IPX Routing Service Auto Enable 1 Lists 1 Network Lists List Name 1 List Members Network Number low Network Number high 2 Host Lists List Name 1 List Members Host low Host high 3 Socket Lists List Name 1 List Members Socket low Socket high
484. rietary protocol and can be used only between HP or certain Wellfleet routers When enabled the port s Net Fail LED indicates the loss of connectivity even if no packets are transmitted since the messages are sent regularly Also when the router is reset and nothing is connected to the port or if carrier detect is lost the Net Fail LED turns ON and the circuit is brought down A Warning event message is also recorded Default Inactive Disables remote signal and sense so the loss of the connection is not detected unless LLC type 2 is enabled LA Note Inactive is the required choice for a circuit connecting to an HP Remote Bridge HP 28674A Enables Remote signal and sense with the effects noted earlier For more information refer to Remote signal amp sense timeout sec This option only works if Quality of Service is set to LLC1 SJIPUL Led N41 4 25 Remote signal amp sense timeout sec Circuit Parameters Parameters and Options Sets the timeout range for the Remote signal amp sense feature Smaller values allow quicker detection of disabled lines and larger values reduce the amount of line bandwidth needed Default 50 60 Range 5 6 to 165 198 seconds Note For the specified circuit set Remote signal amp sense timeout sec to the same value in both routers connected to the circuit Otherwise the line between the two routers may be unintentionally disabled Remote Station Number Accepts the
485. rmediate station table Sr_is table does not contain a routing information field RIF for the destination station The packet is dropped SR max hops exceeded in explorer frame Meaning The maximum number of hops was exceeded in an all routes explorer ARE frame or a spanning tree explorer STE frame The maximum number of hops for a source routed packet is seven The packet cannot be forwarded and must be dropped SR max hops exceeded in Specifically Routed Frames Meaning The maximum number of hops was exceeded in a specifically routed frame SRF The maximum number of hops for a source routed packet is seven The packet cannot be forwarded and must be dropped SR outcg cg for SRF Meaning The specifically routed frame SRF is being forwarded out the same interface on which it was received This can occur if the Loop Detection Time is set too low or if the network is reconfiguring due to a link failure of if the router is rebooted 17 98 Event Log M essages lb Bridge Event Messages SR out of buffers 4T Meaning An attempt was made to allocate a packet buffer to flood an All Routes Explorer ARE packet out of a particular interface However no packet buffer was available The ARE cannot be flooded out of the interface s pess oWw 601 343 SR possible ARE loop Meaning A possible All Routes Explorer ARE loop has been detected This can occur if the Loop Detection Time is set too low if t
486. rmining which portion of the IP address identifies the subnetwork Subnetworks called subnets are two or more physical networks sharing a common network field the NIC as signed portion of the 32 bit IP address If the interface does have subnets then enter the 32 bit subnet mask in dotted decimal notation Suppresses the reporting of SNMP authentication failures to the configured trap community An authentication failure is the receipt of an SNMP request from an unknown community This feature informs the network manager of unauthorized attempts to access the router via SNMP Default Yes Enables SNMP authentication trapping SNMP traps the authentication failure and alerts the network management station Disables SNMP authentication trapping the network management station is not alerted about unauthorized attempts to access the router via SNMP Enables the further specification of external routes Within OSPF external links advertisements a 32 bit External Route Tag field is attached to each route The contents of this field are not used by OSPF but can be used by source and destination routers f you want to filter the contents of the External Route Tag field enter the field contents in eight digit hexadecimal format Leave the field blank if you do not want to filter the contents of the field Assigns a specific interface for receiving EGP RIP or OSPF updates when creating a EGP RIP or OSPF import route filter
487. rprise section have different names but have the same identification codes following the private enterprise prefix 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 1 1 as the router variables in the standard MIB section NCL s Rgets and Rgetms commands are the most efficient means to obtain the values of variables within the standard Internet MIB Rgeta Rgeti and Rgetr can be used to retrieve specific MIB addressing and routing tables List and Get however can be used to obtain the pathnames variables and their values from this mib branch within the private enterprise section See chapter 15 for these commands Management Information Base Variables name Name Information Base name Name Information Base The name information base contains variables that describe the operations and structure of the name server The structure is the following name slot always 1 for an HP Series 200 or 400 router 1 to 5 on an HP Router 650 vari ables listed below ST The pathname is constructed as follows name slot vari able The variables are listed alphabetically alias cnt contains the number of aliased objects added to the name server table This variable should always contain 0 seg UOnBUWUOjU quowbHeuep create_cnt contains the number of objects added to the name server table cur_cnt contains the current number of objects in the name server table cur_mem_used contains the current number of bytes occupied by
488. rs drop or forward a frame based of its source and destination addresses MAC level filters can filter source addresses only destination addresses only or some specified combination of source and destination addresses You can construct MAC level source and or destination filters for any of the four supported encapsulation methods E thernet 802 2 LLC 802 2 SNAP or Novell 6 7 9 sSI JULIed pug Bridge Parameters Parameters and Options Ethernet Prepares Ethernet filters Ethernet filters drop a frame on the basis of its Ethernet type Ethernet filters filter Ethernet type values only or some specified combination of Ethernet type values in conjunction with MAC level source and destination addresses 802 2 LLC Prepares of 802 2 LLC filters 802 2 LLC filters drop or forward a frame on the basis of its destination and or source service access points 802 2 LLC filters filter only source service access points SSAP only destination service access points DSAP some combination of SSAP and DSAP values or some specified combination of SSAP DSAP values in conjunction with MAC level source and destination addresses 802 2 SNAP Prepares of 802 2 SNAP filters 802 2 SNAP filters drop or forward a frame based on the protocol or Ethernet type 802 2 SNAP filters filter only protocol ID values only Ethernet values some combination of protocol ID and Ethernet type values or some specified combination of protocol D Ethernet type valu
489. s Connect retry count Connect wait time sec 4 10 Determines the number of times to try to reconnect an idle LLC2 connection After the Retry Time period elapses the router broadcasts control messages based on the value set for the Retry Counter and waits for a response from the remote end of the circuit If an acknowledgment is not returned the router repeats the loop the number of times set here for Connect Retries Default 0 infinity Range 0 9999 Sets the number of times the router tries to establish a connection if the initial call attempt fails The range is 1 try only once for each available phone number to 30 For example if you set Connect retry count to 3 the router makes up to three call attempts for each outbound phone number you provide by cycling through the set of provided phone numbers three times If the router is unsuccessful in establishing a connection the internal record of connect attempts is reset to zero and an error log message is sent to the error log file Default 3 Range 1 to 30 Sets how long to wait after trying to make a connection call for the connection to be established If the connection is not established within the specified time the router drops DTR and retries the call In this case retry means to bring the DTR line back up This pattern is repeated until either the router make the connection or the specified number of retries is reached Default 60 Note If a call fails
490. s and Event Filter Level 9 5 6 Ssuo oUueieg que6y dNNS 10 Xerox Network Systems XNS Router Parameters 10 2 Xerox Network Systems XNS Router Parameters Overview Overview DEFAULT_CONFIG Configuration Editor System 1 Software 1 Lines 4 Circuits 4 Circuit Groups 4 Bridge 1 DoD Internet Router 9 DECNET IV Routing Service B SNMP Sessions B 1 Xerox Routing Service B Access to XNS parameters 11 IPX Routing Service B 12 AppleTalk Router B 13 X 25 Network Service B 14 V 25 bis Network Mapping 8 8 COO OS OU IN Enter Selection B for Previous Menu Figure 10 1 Access to XNS Parameters XNS Parameters Enable use of the Xerox Network Systems Internet Transport Protocols XNS suite for establishing routing over Ethernets and across point to point lines Page XNS Parameters 10 4 Action 10 4 Auto Enable 10 4 Circuit Group 10 Checksums On 10 5 Dest Host high 10 5 Dest Host low 10 5 Dest Network high 10 6 Dest Network low 10 6 Dest Socket high 10 7 Dest Socket low Continued on next page Xerox Network Systems XNS Router Parameters Overview Page XNS Parameters Continued from preceeding page 10 7 Effect 10 8 Host lists 10 8 Host high 10 8 Host low 10 8 Host Number 10 8 Network Number high 10 9 Network Number low 10 9 Network lists 10 9 Network
491. s SAP driven RIP supply works in conjunction with any SAP filters that you may have enabled on an interface to determine which servers are advertised by the interface f SAP driven RIP supply is configured on the interface then only networks containing at least one server are advertised by this interface Networks that do not contain a server are not advertised f a SAP filter is also configured on the interface then only those networks containing servers that match the SAP filter are advertised by this interface Default No Disables the SAP driven RIP supply function Enables the SAP driven RIP supply function Assigns the server name portion of the filter pattern Server Name can be any valid Novell server name up to 48 characters in length Any keyboard character with the exception of the tilde character can be used a f Server Name contains 48 characters the node sets the final character to NULL hexadecimal 00 when matching against actual server names f Server Name contains less than 48 characters it is left justified and the remaining characters are NULL filled Name matching is performed up to the first NULL character Note Server name matching is case sensitive Technology Suite Router is not equivalent to Technology suite router Specifies the server type portion of the filter pattern Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering IPX source or destination sockets when creating a Socket list
492. s for different current settings of Modulus The options are Modulus Setting Windows Size Options 8 7 1 0r3 128 1 3 7 15 31 63 127 Circuit Parameters Parameters and Options Xcvr Signal Polling Enables the transmission of periodic self addressed messages by the router software Messages are sent at 5 second intervals to verify proper transceiver operation on the LAN port When signal polling is enabled the port s Net Fail LED indicates the loss of the transceiver connection even if no packets are being transmitted since the signal polling messages are sent regularly Also when the router is reset and nothing is connected to the port the Netfail LED turns ON An event message with the severity level of the warning is also recorded Default Inactive Yes Enables the transmission of periodic self addressed messages No Disables the transmission of periodic self addressed messages LA SJIPULLed N41 4 29 Circuit Group Parameters 5 2 Circuit Group Parameters Overview Overview System 1 Lines 4 Bridge 1 woONOMAUNE Configuration Editor Software 1 Circuits 4 Circuit Groups 4 DEFAULT_CONFIG Access to Circuit Group Parameters DoD Internet Router DECNET IV Routing Service B SNMP Sessions B 10 Xerox Routing Service B 11 IPX Routing Service 12 AppleTalk Router 9 13 X 25 Network Service B 14 V 25 bis Network Mapping B Enter
493. s no parameters Displays these additional parameters Baud Rate Bit Char Connection Inactivity Time Event Filter Flow Control Modem Connection Time Modem Disconnection Time Modem Lost Receive Ready Time Parity Screen Refresh Rate Session Mode Stop Bits Terminal Note A smaller set of parameters are displayed if you later toggle to Telnet Session Mode Sets the router to match the type of terminal emulation supported by the remote device connected to the Console port Default VT 100 ANSI terminal emulation VT 100 terminal emulation Sets the local time offset from GMT Grenwich Mean Time for the time protocol which automatically sets the clock when the router boots 1 9 Software Parameters Software Parameters Overview Overview DEFAULT_CONFIG Configuration Editor System 1 Software 1 _ Access to Software Parameters Lines 4 Circuits 4 Circuit Groups 4 Bridge 1 DoD Internet Router B DECNET IV Routing Service SNMP Sessions 8 18 Xerox Routing Service B 11 IPX Routing Service B 12 AppleTalk Router B 13 25 Network Service B 14 V Z5 bis Network Mapping 8 SOOO NON UT UY IN Enter Selection B for Previous Menu Figure 2 1 Access to Software Parameters in the Configuration Menu Software Parameter Enables the application modules the bridging and specific routing services on the router You must enable each
494. s not expired for the outbound connection so the router will try again Action Connection timeout retry in progress Meaning Action CTS has come up Meaning CTS has gone down Meaning Action DATA Available Meaning Event Log M essages cct Circuit Event Messages Check other event messages to see why the connection failed 4T An outbound connect attempt has timed out waiting for the terminal adapter to respond The retry count has not expired so the router will try again s pess Ww 601 344 Check the connection between the adapter and the router Also check the terminal adapter documentation to be sure it is configured properly Increase the Connection Time parameter as necessary The terminal adapter has brought up the Clear To Send line The terminal adapter has brought down the Clear To Send line Check other events logged for futher information and check any terminal adapter logs if available The data has become available so a connection will be attempted Data pkt clipped for use in V 25bis Meaning Action Severe packet shortage A queued V 25 bis packet was reused in order to establish the V 25 bis connection in hope of freeing more queued packets This should only happen if many P mapped circuits are waiting to come up If this only occurs infrequently it may be acceptable depending on the applications To solve this add more V 25 bis circuits to the pool
495. s only X 25 Point to Point service add the number of dedicated switched two way virtual circuits provided for by your X 25 subscription agreement to the value assigned to Low SVC LCN and then decrease the result by 1 f you are configuring only X 25 DDN X 25 PDN and or X 25 Switch service on the current slot use the following formula to calculate High SVC LCN Internet Address IP Address X 25 Service Parameters Parameters and Options High SVC LCN 254 N Low SVC LCN 1 T where N is the number of LAPB circuits on the slot 254 N is the integer quotient of 254 divided by N Low SVC LCN is the value assigned to the Low SVC LCN parameter sSJIpPUL LLd N S SZ X If you are configuring a combination of X 25 DDN X 25 PDN or X 2 5 Switch service in conjunction with X 25 Point to Point service use the following formula to calculate High SVC LCN High SVC LCN 254 V N Low SVC LCN 1 where Vis the number of X 25 Point to Point service dedicated virtual circuits and PVCs on the slot N is the number of LAPB B circuits on the slot 254 V N is the integer quotient of 254 V divided by N Low SVC LCN is the value assigned to the Low SVC LCN parameter Enter the value of High SVC LCN within the range 0 to 4095 as calculated above then press Return Note Because the LCN range for the physical link determines the number of virtual connections that can be established the values assig
496. s than 16 characters Default 34 Default 33 Default 33 Sets the bandwidth in Hz for each channel making a connection The total bandwidth available for a connection is a cumulative value of the Per channel bandwidth parameter setting multiplied by the number of channels For further bandwidth information refer to the instruction manual with your adapter or contact your service provider Default Not Used Ignores the per channel bandwidth 56K 64K 384K 1536K Accepts the network assigned DLCI value in decimal format used in the unlikely absence of Annex D of LMI network management services When the Management Type parameter is set to Unsupported you must manually configure all Frame Relay Permanent Virtual Circuits PVCs by configuring the DLCI parameter Value used in the address field of the HDLC packet Conventionally one end of a HP Point to Point circuit is assigned an address of 03 and designated as DCE the other end of the circuit is assigned an address of 01 and designated as DTE LA Default Auto Allows the router to automatically sense the HP Point to Point address of the remote device and to set the local HP Point to Point address accordingly SJIPUL Led N2119 4 23 DCE DTE Circuit Parameters Parameters and Options Note The remote device must be either an HP router configured as a HP Point to Point circuit for an HP Remote Bridge DCE is the required choice for a circuit connectin
497. s the number of message or packet buffers allocated when the router booted min contains the smallest number of message or packet buffers available since the router booted Management Information Base Variables buf Buffers Information Base miss contains the number of times that the router was unable to obtain either a message buffer or a packet buffer Failure to obtain a buffer indicates that all buffers were busy This parameter is directly related to min If miss is greater than 0 min must equal 0 Conversely if miss equals 0 then min must be greater than 0 size contains the size of the message or packet buffer in bytes Refer to the footnote on page 18 2 18 13 ST seg UOnBUWOjU quowumbeuep 18 14 M anagement Information Base Variables cct Circuits Information Base cct Circuits Information Base The circuits cct information base contains variables that describe transmission and reception activities across each LAN and point to point circuit The structure is the following cct cct stands for the circuit name usually indicating circuit type see subheadings vari ables for each type of circuit as listed below The pathname is constructed as follows cct cct variable The variables are listed alphabetically under each type of circuit WAN Circuits This subsection describes variables common to all WAN circuit types For variables specific to certain WAN circuit types refer also to the
498. s the number of packets forwarded by circuit group cegin accordance with global destination address filters specified by the configuration Management Information Base Variables lb Bridge Information Base fwd_load_bal contains the number of packets forwarded by circuit group ceg in accordance with load balancing options specified by the configuration fwd_mcast_addr contains the number of packets forwarded by circuit group cegin accordance with global multicast address filters specified by the configuration fwd_protocol contains the number of packets forwarded by circuit group cegin accordance with global or local protocol filters specified by the configuration ST max_hops contains the value assigned to the Max Hops configuration parameter on the Bridge Circuit Group Parameters Screen Refer to the Max Hops parameter in chapter 6 recv contains the number of packets received by circuit group ceg recv_cfg contains the number of configuration BPDUs received by circuit group ccg seg UONBUWOjU quowumbeuep recv_tcn contains the number of topology change notification BPDUs received by circuit group ccg srbcast_fwd contains the total number of all paths broadcasting routing and spanning tree broadcast routing frames forwarded on circuit group ccg srbcast_rx contains the total number of all paths broadcasting routing and spanning tree broadcast routing frames received on circuit group ccg srf_dropnotinroute cont
499. s the value of the least significant bit in the IP broad cast address for that IP address In most cases the broadcast address type all Os or all 1s can be determined by examining a single bit In the event of an explicitly assigned broadcast ad dress however this single bit is not significant IF lists the sequential number the router assigned to the network interface Using the Network Control Language Accessing the Internet Management Information Base Rgetms Displaying the Values of a MIB Variable Class Use NCL s Rgetms command to display the values of the variables in a branch of the standard Internet MIB for either a local or remote network node You can also use Rgetms to display the values of Internet standard MIB variables on this local router Rgetms defaults the standard Internet MIB portion of the complete pathname iso org dod internet mgmt mib or 1 3 6 1 2 1 Syntax rgetms identifier X X X X community identifier is the object identification path identifying a branch of Internet MIB variables defined in RFC 1156 Do not include the path to the Internet MIB 1 3 6 1 2 1 since itis assumed X X X X optional is the IP address of the local or remote node in dotted decimal notation If you omit this field an IP address on the local router will be used community optional is the name of the SNMP community that grants access to that node If you omit the name public is used
500. s where possible Internal clock being generated Meaning This router is providing a clock because a modem eliminator cable was detected with the clock source end attached to this router Action If there are problems with the link ensure that the router on this end of the cable is configured for internal clock source and the router on the other end of the cable is configured for external clock source Invalid Configuration Meaning A Point to Point configuration that does not use auto detect is being used and is incompatible with the remote device Action Use auto detect to configure the Point to Point WAN circuit on either the local or the remote device Invalid message type XXX found Meaning For the indicated frame relay circuit a management message was received with an unknown or invalid message type Valid values are 0x7D Status 0x75 Status Enquiry 0x7B Status Update XXX identifies the message type that was found 17 32 Invalid MFS dflt 2 Meaning Action Invalid N2 dflt 16 Meaning Action Event Log M essages cct Circuit Event Messages 4T The configuration record for circuit cct contains a faulty value in the Minimum Frame Spacing field The system has defaulted to a value of 2 Modify Minimum Frame Spacing in the configuration s pess Ww 601 u44 The configuration record for circuit cct contains a faulty value in the Retry Counter N2 field The system has defaul
501. sabled When the global Auto Enable parameter is set to Yes the setting of the XNS specific Auto Enable parameter determines whether the XNS router is automatically enabled Default Yes Disables XNS routing Enables XNS routing if the global Auto Enable parameter is also enabled Identifies the circuit group providing an interface between the router and the XNS network Enables or disables checksum processing When check summing is enabled the router verifies the Internet packet checksum when the packet arrives at the router and generates a new checksum when relaying the packet to its destination Check summing is ordinarily be enabled for the XNS protocol Default No Xerox Network Systems XNS Router Parameters Parameters and Options No Disables check summing Yes Enables check summing Dest Host high Sets the high boundary of the range for filtering an XNS packet based on the contents of its destination host field Options Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter XNS destination hosts Leave this field blank and enter the XNS host number in the Dest Host low field if you are filtering a single XNS destination host Enter the highest XNS host number in the range if you are filtering a range of XNS destination hosts OT a Leave this field blank and enter the name of the Host list in the Dest Host low ox field if you want to use a Host list to establish the upper and lower range of XNS g dest
502. scheme all interfaces on the network must have sufficient memory resources to handle 32 bit encapsulation An interface with sufficient memory resources to handle 32 bit encapsulation can unpack packets with 16 bit and 32 bit encapsulation An interface that supports only 16 bit encapsulation cannot unpack 32 bit encapsulated packets Refer to Multicast Support on page 4 22 Accepts the broadcast address for an SMDS circuit Sets the number of unacknowledged heartbeat polling messages to be consecutively counted before declaring the SMDS circuit down due to lack of communication with the DSU Default 6 messages Note If DXI version 2 1 is selected Use DXI v3 2 set to No this parameter is ignored Sets the number of seconds to wait between sending heartbeat poll messages to the DSU Default 10 Specifies the 10 digit SMDS address SMDS addresses mirror the North American Plan NANP Specifies the interval between F ull Status Inquiry messages transmitted by the router to the Frame Relay network The Full Status Inquiry messages requests the Frame Relay network to respond with a Full Status Report listing all PVCs the PVC state active or inactive and whether the PVC is new or previously established Default 6 Note The default response 6 configures the multiprotocol router to send a Full Status Inquiry message every 6 polling intervals that is if the polling interval is 10 the router sends a Full Status Inqu
503. see the actual values of the variables described on page 16 34 Syntax list identifier identifier optional is the pathname identifying any MIB branch from the router s highest level objects to a specific variable See the Managed Objects Table on page 16 32 and in chapter 7 of the User s Guide for a list of those objects You can use the asterisk as a wild card at the end of your identifier It specifies the entire branch from the object specified in front of the asterisk List displays all the MIB branches that descend from the branch you identify as shown in figure 16 31 If you omit the identifier entirely List displays all of the router s highest level objects A pathname can be a sequence of names for objects on contigu ous levels of the hierarchy which mirrors the hierarchical structure of the information base The component names are separated by periods Some components such as slot number are enclosed by square brackets such as the level below buf in figure 16 31 in this case the period in front of the left bracket is omitted An example is buf 1 pkt size A pathname can also be specified by equivalent numbers called object identification codes in place of each name in the path The Examples section of the List command below describes how to discover and use object identification codes for MIB identifiers 16 35 9T spuewuop TON Using the Network Control Language
504. ss high Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering a frame based on the contents of its MAC level source address field Options Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter a frame based on its MAC source address 6 15 Max Age Max Hops Offset 6 16 Bridge Parameters Parameters and Options Options Enter the MAC source address in this field and leave the MAC source high field blank if you are filtering a single MAC source address Enter the lowest MAC source address in this field and enter the highest MAC source address in the MAC source high field if you are filtering a range of MAC source addresses Leave this field blank and enter the name of the MAC Address list in the MAC source low field if you are establishing a range of MAC source addresses with a filter list For more information refer to MAC source high To learn how to create a MAC Address list refer to MAC Address low and MAC Address high Sets the maximum length of time the bridge stores configuration information The bridge declares a line down if it does not receive a BPDU for Max Age seconds After declaring the line down the bridge sets the port state to Listen If you have not enabled the spanning tree algorithm skip this field If you have enabled the spanning tree algorithm consult table 6 1 Suggested Spanning Tree Parameter Values page 6 19 to determine an appropriate value for Max Age
505. st network number in the Source Network high field if you are filtering a range of IPX source networks sSJ PULLed 030 01d Xdi a Enter the Network list name in this field and leave the Source Network high field blank if you want to use a Network list to establish the upper and lower range of source network numbers For additional information refer to Source Network high earlier in this chapter For more information about Network lists refer to Network Number high and Network Number low later in this chapter 11 17 Source Route Token Ring No Source Socket high Options Source Socket low 11 18 Options IPX Protocol Parameters Parameters and Options Enables or disables source routing over token ring media for the interface you are defining Because the HP Router PR does not have a token ring port this option should always be set to No Default No Disables token ring source routing Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering an IPX packet based on the contents of its source socket field a Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter IPX source sockets Leave this field blank and enter the IPX socket number in the Source Socket low field if you are filtering a single IPX source socket a Enter the highest IPX socket number in the range if you are filtering a range of IPX source sockets a Leave this field blank and enter the name of the Socket list in
506. st the AppleTalk configuration In this case one or more ENTITY records are missing Action Ensure that the router s configuration is valid 17 8 Cfg number zone names incorrect for ccg Meaning Action Event Log M essages at AppleTalk Event Messages 4T The circuit group specified by ccg has been configured as a seed port The directly connected network is serviced not only by this seed but also by another seed router already in service The zone name lists conveyed by these seed routers are inconsistent each list contains a different number of zone entries s pess Ww 601 344 One of the seed routers must be reconfigured to ensure the consistency of the zone name lists If you reconfigure the AppleTalk router to match the zone name list of the in service router no further changes are necessary If you reconfigure the in service router to match the zone name list of the AppleTalk router however you must restart all network nodes and routers Cfg NULL zone name cfg d for ccg Meaning Action The AppleTalk router has configured a null zone name for the circuit group specified by ccg The value entered for the Zone Name parameter was invalid Configure a valid zone name for the circuit group specified by ccg Cfg too many zone names cfg d for ccg Meaning Action More than ten zone names have been added to the zone name list associated with the circuit group specified by c
507. st to a filter refer to Dest Sock low and Source Sock low Socket high Socket low Options Options Source Net high Source Net low Options AppleTalk Parameters Parameters and Options Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering AppleTalk source or destination sockets when creating a Socket list Leave this field blank and enter the AppleTalk socket number in the Socket low field if you are filtering a single AppleTalk source or destination socket Enter the highest AppleTalk socket number in the range if you are filtering a range of AppleTalk source or destination sockets For additional information refer to Socket low later in this chapter To learn how to assign a Socket list to a filter refer to Dest Sock low and Source Sock low Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering AppleTalk source or destination sockets when creating a Socket list Enter the AppleTalk socket number in this field and leave the Socket high field blank if you are filtering a single AppleTalk source or destination socket Enter the lowest AppleTalk socket number in this field and enter the highest socket number in the Socket high field if you are filtering a range of AppleTalk source or destination sockets For additional information refer to Socket high earlier in this chapter To learn how to assign a Socket list to a filter refer to Dest Sock low a
508. state last_out_tx_pkts Is a 32 bit state variable storing the value of the Out Tx Packets Ctr from the last received Link Quality Report packet In other words last_out_pkts indicates the total number of packets transmitted by the remote peer station since the LCP reached the open state last_in_rx_bytes Is a 32 bit state variable storing the value of the In Rx Bytes Ctr from the last received Link Quality Report packet In other words last_in_rx_bytes indicates the total number of bytes received by the peer remote station since the LCP reached the open state last_in_rx_bytes last_in_rx_pkts Is a 32 bit state variable storing the value of the In Rx Packets Ctr from the last received Link Quality Report packet In other words last_in_rx_pkts indicates the total number of packets received by the peer remote station since the LCP reached the open state pppLinkQualityE ntry pppLinkQualityTable1 Provides Link Quality Management information about a particular PPP link Management Information Base Vari cct Circuits Information Token Ring Circuits adpt_bad_dio_ par contains the number of times the token ring adapter detected a bad parity value on data passed to the adapter through a direct I O access adpt_dma_rd_abort contains the number of times the token ring adapter aborted a direct memory access read operation This could be caused by excessive parity errors excessive bus errors or the expira tion of a 10 second timer
509. state machine error Action Contact your HP support representative Bad cct type configured Meaning The circuit type configured is not a valid type It can only beone of mw Ether 802 3 802 5 FDDI HP Point to Point a LAPB PPP SMDS Frame relay V 25 bis adaptor a Manual adapter PPP over V 25 bis Action Use the Configuration Editor to select a circuit type Bad QofS configured for cct type Meaning The Quality of Service configured for this circuit is not possible with this type of circuit The valid possibilities are Circuit Type QOS Possibilities Ether 802 3 LLC 1 datagram 802 5 LLC 1 datagram FDDI LLC 1 datagram HP Pointto Point LLC 1 datagram LLC 2 reliable Auto LAPB X 25 PPP LLC 1 datagram SMDS LLC 1 datagram Frame relay LLC 1 datagram V 25 bis adapter LLC 1 datagram M anual adapter LLC 1 datagram PPP over V 25bis LLC 1 datagram 17 69 Event Log Messages dis Data Link Services Event Messages Action Reconfigure the circuit CGM misconfigured Meaning DLS was unable to notify the upper layer protocols that the circuit has come up The Circuit Group Manager module is not active Action Disable the circuit and re enable it via NCL If the symptom persists call your HP support representative Clock recovered Meaning The router has detected that data has been transmitted on the WAN circuit that had previously lost its clock signal Service has been restored
510. stem assigned interface number that identifies the circuit group Action First use NCL s Get command in the form get cct X to obtain the circuit group name along with associated statistics Then verify and or reconfigure the circuit group No msg buffers for alarms CG Meaning The Appletalk router cannot obtain a message buffer to create its circuit group timer Action Contact your HP support provider No msg buffers for RTM P background alarm Meaning The Appletalk router cannot obtain a message buffer to create its RTMP background timer Action Contact your HP support provider No msg buffers for RTMP validity alarm Meaning The Appletalk router cannot obtain a message buffer to create its RTMP validity timer Action Contact your HP support provider 17 13 Event Log Messages at AppleTalk Event Messages No msg buffers for ZIP background alarm Meaning The Appletalk router cannot obtain a message buffer to create its ZIP background timer Action Contact your HP support provider Rcv d zone name s on port cannot distribute Meaning A list of zone names received on port could not be sent to the other ports running AppleTalk Zone name table full Meaning The AppleTalk router cannot add a zone name to its zone name table the table contains its maximum of 256 entries Action Check your network topology HP s AppleTalk router implementation allows a maximum of 256 zones o
511. stic Screens Per Second Statistics Screen Per Second Statistics Screen The Per Second Statistics screen summarizes traffic volume per second for each circuit on the router DEFAULT_CONFIG Per Second Statistics NAME RX Bytes Frames TX Bytes Frames gt 1 wan21 i l a B Z ether41 256 4 355 4 TOTAL 256 4 355 4 PRESS r for reset Down Up lt to exit Figure 15 8 Per Second Statistics Screen 15 18 Using the Statistic Screens Per Second Statistics Screen Categories on the Per Second Statistics screen are the following NAME RX Bytes RX Frames TX Bytes TX Frames TOTAL Lists the circuit name s Lists the number of bytes per second of data received by the circuit Lists the number of frames per second received by the circuit Lists the number of bytes per second of data transmitted by the circuit Lists the number of frames per second transmitted by the circuit Lists the total for each of the above counts for all circuits ST SONSNEIS SU828 19S 15 19 15 20 Using the Statistic Screens XNS Router Statistics Screen XNS Router Statistics Screen The XNS Router Statistics screen is available if the XNS routing service is enabled in your configuration This screen summarizes traffic volume for each XNS network interface SAMPLE_CONFIG 7 Jan 1991 19 56 89 Xerox Router Statistics NAME PACKETS Receive Transmit Deliver Dropped gt
512. stics screens NCL commands the Event Log and the MIB variables refer to the User s Guide This manual addresses the entire range of parameters and other soft ware features found in Hewlett Packard routers including features that are not found on all router models Thus for some routers such as the HP Router PR J 2540 certain features described in this manual are not available in the router For information on the features available in your router refer to the release notes you received with the router or most recent software upgrade Audience This guide is intended for network mangers and other technicians who install configure and manage routers Organization Part Dictionary of Configuration Parameters logically groups the Configuration Editor parameters into chapters according to the options in the Configuration menu Each chapter contains an alphabetical listing of the indicated parameters along with their corresponding options and descrip tions The individual chapters are a Chapter 1 Global and Session Parameters a Chapter 2 Software Parameters a Chapter 3 Lines Parameters a Chapter 4 Circuits Parameters a Chapter 5 Circuit Group Parameters a Chapter 6 Bridge Parameters a Chapter 7 Internet Protocol IP Parameters a Chapter 8 DE Cnet Parameters a Chapter 9 SNMP Parameters Operator s Reference Preface a Chapter 10 Xerox Network Syste
513. system information Debug Installation and diagnostic information Default Show All Events Sends all event messages Drop All J ust M AJ OR Not INFO PERF and M AJ OR Show All Events Flow Control None XON OFF Robust XON XOFF Modem Connection Time Options Modem Disconnection Time Global and Session Parameters Parameters and Options Sends no event messages T Sends major event messages only Sends major performance and warning event messages Sends major and performance event messages Sends major performance warning and information event messages sSIJULILed UOISSES pue jeqojD Enables XON XOFF flow control and sets the type of XON XOFF flow control for connect sessions made through the router Console port XON XOFF flow control is a software method of controlling flow control negotiation and CTS RTS is the hardware method of controlling flow control negotiation The flow control negotiation method used by the remote device must match the router setting Default XON XOFF Disables XON XOFF software flow control and uses CTS RTS hardware flow control instead Enables XON XOFF software flow control Enables XON XOFF software flow control and sends out periodic XON signals when the flow of data stops and the router expects to receive more data checksum failure For example the remote connection might have dropped lost an XON signal sent by the router and could be waiting for the arriv
514. t 16 8 E ffect 6 9 8 8 10 7 11 9 12 10 Don t Match 12 10 Ignore 12 10 IP 7 10 Match 12 10 EGP connections 7 6 Enable 16 9 enabling software modules 1 4 encapsulation 4 14 7 11 Encapsulation Type 7 11 11 9 Ending day 1 6 Ending month 1 6 Ethernet 6 8 Ethernet Type high 6 9 Ethernet Type low 6 10 Ethernet V2 format 6 7 Event Filter Level 1 6 9 3 event log 16 11 17 2 Event Log message levels 1 6 Events for Error 4 14 Exit 16 10 exmib 16 32 explorer frames 16 84 explorer frames 6 6 Export Action 7 11 export route filter 7 20 Extended 32 bit CRC 4 14 external clock source 3 3 F F 1047 80002 cable 16 100 factory default 15 3 FDDI bridge type 3 3 file NCL command output 16 100 print to 16 19 upload 16 99 filter rule 6 5 filter priority values 6 17 filtering frames 6 9 filtering IP 7 17 filters in bridging 6 7 Flood Interval sec 6 10 flooding 15 7 Flow Control 1 7 Flow Control Parameter Negotiation Flow Crtl 13 6 Forward Delay 6 10 6 21 Forwarding Table Size 6 11 6 20 forwarding table bridge 6 19 frame relay address field 4 13 frame relay DCE 4 5 Frame type See Encapsulation type frames bridged 6 5 From Autonomous System 7 12 From Gateway 7 12 From Interface 7 12 From Peer 7 12 From Protocol 7 12 full status inquiry messages 4 15 13 6 Index 9 xepul 10 Index G General
515. t 0 seconds Disable 0 Range SJIPULLd N2119 4 17 Options Management Type 4 18 Circuit Parameters Parameters and Options Link quality monitoring a Point to Point initial configuration option described in RFC 1172 is the process where Point to Point determines the frequency and magnitude of data loss across the circuit With link quality monitoring enabled both ends of a Point to Point circuit can exchange Link Quality Report packets These packets serve two functions First they provide a keep alive indication to let the local end know that the remote Point to Point peer is operational Second link quality report packets contain a series of counters providing dynamic information on the number of octets and data link frames received and transmitted f you do not want to enable link quality monitoring or if the remote Point to Point peer does not issue link quality report packets enter 0 f you do want to enable link quality monitoring LQM Time secs sets the maximum time interval in seconds between link quality report packets generated by the remote end of the Point to Point circuit Failure to receive a link quality report packet within the expected interval indicates Point to Point link failure Note The remote Point to Point peer is free to generate link quality report packets more rapidly than specified by the LQM Time secs parameter However it must generate packets at least as frequently as s
516. t high earlier in this chapter To learn how to assign a Socket list to a filter refer to Dest Socket low and Source Socket low Source Route Enables or disables source routing over token ring media for the interface being Token Ring defined Source route functionality allows the XNS router to transmit and receive frames over a token ring network extended with source routing bridges For the HP router TR this option can be set to either Yes or No depending on whether or not you want to use the token ring capability Default No 10 11 No Yes Source Host high Options Source Host low Options Source Network high 10 12 Xerox Network Systems XNS Router Parameters Parameters and Options Disables source routing over token ring media Enables source routing over token ring media Note If the router does not have a token ring port always set this parameter to No Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering an XNS packet based on the contents of its source host field a Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter XNS source hosts Leave this field blank and enter the XNS host number in the Source Host low field if you are filtering a single XNS source host a Enter the highest XNS host number in the range if you are filtering a range of XNS source hosts a Leave this field blank and enter the name of the Host list in the Source Host low field if you want to use
517. t high field if you are filtering a range of AppleTalk source networks Enter the Network list name in this field and leave the Source Net high field blank if you want to use a Network list to establish the upper and lower range of source network numbers For additional information refer to Source Net high earlier in this chapter For more information about Network lists refer to Network Number high and Network Number low later in this chapter Source Node high Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering a datagram based on the contents of its source node field Options Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter AppleTalk source nodes Leave this field blank and enter the AppleTalk node identifier in the Source Node low field if you are filtering a single AppleTalk source node Enter the highest AppleTalk node identifier in the range if you are filtering a range of AppleTalk source nodes Leave this field blank and enter the name of the Node list in the Source Node low field if you want to use a Node list to establish the upper and lower range of AppleTalk source node identifiers For additional information refer to Source Node low later in this chapter For more information about Node lists refer to Node high and Node low earlier in this chapter Source Node low Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering a datagram based on the contents of its
518. t Number Note Any option listed below is available regardless of whether the router you are configuring has the corresponding port type If the router does not have a particular port type do not select the corresponding option Default CSMA CD Specifies an Ethernet 802 3 LAN port For additional information refer to the Connector parameter Specifies a Token Ring 802 5 ring port Results in these additional parameters Connector Ring Interface Lines Parameters Parameters and Options SYNC Specifies a synchronous WAN port Results in these additional parameters Connector Clock Speed Clock Source FDDI Specifies an FDDI dual attach port For additional information refer to the Bridge Type parameter X 25 Directs the router to use the link level control associated with X 25 This should be set in conjunction with a circuit type of LAPB X 25 Ring Interface Specifies the type of token ring service when the Physical Access Method is set to Token Ring Default 16 Mbps 4Mbps 16 Mbps 16 M bps ETR sSJ PULLed soul Circuit Parameters Circuit Parameters Overview Overview DEFAULT_CONFIG Configuration Editor System 1 Software 1 Lines 8 Access to Circuits Parameters Circuits 4 Circuit Groups 4 Bridge 1 DoD Internet Router DECNET IV Routing Service B SNMP Sessions B 10 Xerox Routing Service B 11 IPX Routing Service 12 AppleTalk Router 9 13 X 2
519. t Window and Pkt Size serve as the defaults across the circuit Note If you disable flow control assure that the X 25 DCE has also disabled flow control Additionally assure that the values selected for Pkt Window and Pkt Size match those of the DCE Enables flow control negotiation With flow control enabled the window and packet size are negotiated on a physical circuit basis Results in the following two parameters Negotiated Pkt Window Negotiated Pkt Size Accepts the group number of the port assigned to the PDN subscription service Appears only when the Closed User Group parameter is set to Yes The Group Number must be the group number associated with the port used to connect with the PDN subscription service Default 0 Range 0 to 99 Sets the maximum LCN for a permanent virtual circuit PVC The calculation of High PVC LCN is identical to High SVC LCN For additional information refer to the High SVC LCN parameter Note PVC LCN ranges and SVC LCN ranges must not overlap Sets the maximum LCN for a switched virtual circuit SVC The router supports up to 32 dedicated SVCs used for X 25 Point to Point service for each LAPB connection and up to 254 VCs per slot SVCs and PVCs Upon initialization the router first allocates dedicated SVCs and PVCs to X 25 Point to Point service it then makes the remaining LCNs available on an equal basis to X 25 PDN X 25 DDN or X 25 Switch services f the LAPB circuit support
520. t in the Dest Net low field if you want to use a Network list to establish the upper and lower range of AppleTalk destination network numbers For additional information refer to Dest Net low later in this chapter For more information about Network lists refer to Network Number high and Network Number low later in this chapter Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering a datagram based on the contents of its destination network field Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter AppleTalk destination networks Enter the AppleTalk network number in this field and leave the Dest Net high field blank if you are filtering a single AppleTalk destination network Enter the lowest AppleTalk network number in this field and enter the highest network number in the Dest Net high field if you are filtering a range of AppleTalk destination networks Enter the Network list name in this field and leave the Dest Net high field blank if you want to use a Network list to establish the upper and lower range of destination network numbers For additional information refer to Dest Net high earlier in this chapter For more information about Network lists refer to Network Number high and Network Number low later in this chapter Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering a datagram based on the contents of its destination node field Leave this field blank if you
521. t remote init parameters Meaning The router issued a status request that was not responded to after ten attempts that were spaced at ten second intervals Action Check that the host is running the Zmodem protocol 17 153 18 Management Information Base Variables 18 2 M anagement Information Base Variables This chapter provides descriptions of all variables contained in the enterprise specific management information base MIB on the router Routers from Hewlett Packard use the Wellfleet private enterprise branch of the MIB iso org dod internet private enterprises wellfleet commServer wfmib or 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 1 1 At the next level down are the router s highest level MIB branches This appendix is divided into a section for each of those branches organized alphabetically The hierarchical structure of those branches and their variables are described in each section The variables at the end of each branch are listed alphabetically To construct the pathname to the variable for use in NCL s List and Get commands separate the names of each level in the structure with periods For example get cct wanl frames_rx_ok m Foraname surrounded by square brackets omit the period preceding it For example get alarm 1 set_cnt Square brackets are commonly used to indicate a slot number for certain pathnames To learn more about accessing the MIB Refer to the User s Gui defor e Instructions on how to
522. t_port cct physical port number viewing from left to right and from top to bottom Circuit Group Table cgr_indx cgt contains circuit group number cgr_name cgt contains circuit group name such as WAN1G Bridge Table Ib_indx index index Ib_cgr_num index circuit group number 18 49 18 50 M anagement Information Base Variables config Configuration Information Base AppleTalk Table at_indx interface AppleTalk interface index at_cgr_num interface AppleTalk interface index at_if_addr interface address for interface DECnet Table drs_indx interface DECnet interface number drs_cgr_num interface circuit group number adrsif_addr interface address for interface IP Table ip_if_indx interface interface num ip_cgr_num interface circuit group number ip_if_addr interface IP address for interface XNS Table xrx_if_indx interface XNS interface number xrxX_cgr_numx interface circuit group number xrx_if_addrx interface XNS address for interface Management Information Base Variables config Configuration Information Base IPX Table px_if_indx interface PX interface number ipx_cgr_numf interface circuit group number ipx_if_addr interface address for interface 18 51 ST seg UOnBUWOjU quowumbeuep 18 52 M anagement Information Base Variables dev Device Information Base dev Device Information Base The dev information base contains a sin
523. tabase as follows LS ASE LS NET LS RTR LS SUM ASB LS SUM_NET LS STUB Describes a route to a destination network external to the AS Originated by the AS border router Describes all routers attached to the network including the designated router itself Originated by the network s designated router Describes state and cost of the router s links to the area Originated by each router in an area Describes a route to an AS boundary router Originated by the area border router 9T Describes a route to a destination network belonging to the AS but outside the area Originated by the area border router Describes a default route for a stub area Each area border router originates a default summary link into the area spuewuop TON 16 75 16 76 Using the Network Control Language Managing the Open Shortest Path First Protocol a Link ID is the object attached to the router s link The value de pends on the Type as follows LS ASE LS NET LS _RTR LS SUM_ASB LS SUM_NET LS STUB The destination IP network number The designated router s IP interface address The neighbor s OSPF router ID The AS boundary router s OSPF router ID The destination Pnetwork number The default destination 0 0 0 0 Advrtr lists the OSPF router ID of the advertisement s originator which is given for the Type fields above originated Age lists the time in seconds since this link state advertis
524. tablishment timed out Meaning Call received but not all modem lines came up in the time allotted by the Modem Connection Time configuration parameter All lines have been dropped incoming call Meaning Initiating connection establishment lost CD RR signal Meaning Carrier Detect or Receiver Ready A modem line has been lost for longer than the time set for the Modem Lost Receive Ready Time configuration parameter Therefore all modem lines are dropped modem disconnected 17 120 Event Log M essages rok Router Operating Kernel Event M essages lost DSR DM signal Meaning Data Set Ready or Data Mode line dropped and modem disconnected momentary drop in CD RR line Meaning Carrier Detect Receiver Ready line lost for less than the time set for the Modem Lost Receive Ready configuration parameter Action Check the phone lines 17 121 4T s pess Ww 601 343 Event Log Messages SMDS Event Messages SMDS Event Messages This section contains an apphabetical list of event messages generated by the SMDS managed object Each message is followed by an explanation of the message contents and a recommended action if any is required bad configuration file Meaning SMDS detected an inconsistency in the configuration Action Modify the configuration illegal packet received Meaning A packet was received that did not conform to standard SMDS format The packet was dropped No further
525. tandards Organization s Open Systems Interconnect OSI reference model Supports Phase IV DE Cnet Page DECnet Parameters 8 4 Action 8 4 Area 8 4 Area high 84 Area low 8 5 Area Max Cost 8 5 Area Max Hops 8 5 Auto Enable 8 6 Bcast Routing Timer Conti nued Next Page DECnet Parameters Overview Page DECnet Parameters Continued From Previous Page 8 6 Circuit Group Name 8 6 Cost 8 6 Dest Area high 8 7 Dest Area low 8 7 Dest Node high 8 8 Dest Node low 8 8 Effect 8 9 Hello Timer 8 9 List Name 8 9 Max Area 8 9 Max Bcast End Nodes 8 9 Max Cost 8 9 Max Hops 8 9 Max Nodes 8 10 Max Visits 8 10 Node 8 10 Node high 8 10 Node low 8 11 Number of Routers 8 11 Packet Type high 8 11 Packet Type low 8 11 Precedence 8 12 Remote Area 8 12 Remote Node 8 12 Remote WAN Address 8 12 Router Priority 8 12 Source Area high 8 12 Source Area low 8 13 Source Node high 8 13 Source Node low 8 14 WAN Protocol 8 3 8 SJIPUL Led 2 2uUd340 Action Area Area high Area low 8 4 Drop Accept Options Options DECnet Parameters Parameters and Options Parameters and Options Determines the disposition of DE Cnet packets meeting the conditions set for a filter Default Drop Discards a packet meeting the filter rule Relays a packet meeting the filter rule Determines the DE Cnet ID number of the local area
526. tate variable indicating the number of bytes that were received on the inbound link during the last period in_rx_pkts Is a 32 bit state variable indicating the number of packets that were received on the inbound link during the last period in_tx_bytes Isa 32 bit state variable indicating the number of bytes that were transmitted on the inbound link during the last period In other words in_tx_bytes indicates the number of bytes the remote peer station transmitted during the last period 18 35 18 36 M anagement Information Base Variables cct Circuits Information Base in_tx_Iqrs Isan eight bit state variable indicating the number of Link Quality Report LQR packets that the remote peer remote station had to transmit so that the local end could receive exactly one LQR The in_tx_lqrs variable defines the length of the period over which in_tx_packets in_tx_bytes in_rx_packets and in_rx_bytes were measured in_tx_pkts Isa 32 bit state variable indicating the number of packets that were transmitted on the inbound link during the last period In other words in_tx_pkts indicates the number of packets the remote peer station transmitted during the last period last_out_tx_bytes Is a 32 bit state variable storing the value of the Out Tx Octets Ctr from the last received Link Quality Report packet In other words last_out_tx_bytes indicates the total number of bytes transmitted by the remote peer station since the LCP reached the open
527. te of the port module after power on selftest Action Reboot the router Port Module slot slot unexpected sw ap Meaning The port module in the specified slot has been removed without adhering to the hot swap procedure Unexpected router behavior may occur Action Reboot limit exceeded on slot slot Meaning The port module has exceeded the maximum number of reboot attempts within a short period of time and will not be restarted The router software has detected a continous reboot loop Action Manually restart the port module by enabling it from NCL For example if areboot limit is indicated for slot 4 you can try to manually enable it by executing this NCL command enable dev 4 If the reboot limit condition persists contact your HP support provider Rebooting Slot slot Meaning The port module in the specified slot is being rebooted 17 115 Event Log Messages pm Port Module M anager Event M essages Selftest failed on slot slot Meaning The port module in the specified slot of an HP Router 650 has failed selftest Action Determine the source of the failure by using the procedure described under Card Slot Failure During Self Test in the Troubleshooting chapter of the router installation manual If the test indicates failure of either the slot or the port module contact your HP service provider Selftesting Port Module slot s ot Meaning The port module in the specified
528. ted Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit the peer remote station sent a packet with a PPP protocol value of YY hex but the system does not support PPP protocol YY soBessop 6o7 WweAR Providing LLC1 service Meaning The circuit named in the object field of the event message is enabled and providing LLC1 service Providing LLC2 service to remote Meaning The circuit named in the object field of the event message is enabled and providing LLC2 service PVC XXX added Active Meaning For the indicated frame relay circuit a PVC has been added in the active state This is due to a full status message or an update status message from the management interface XXX is the DLCI associated with the newly added PVC PVC XXX added Inactive Meaning For the indicated frame relay circuit a PVC has been added in the inactive state This is due to a full status message or an update status message from the management interface Usually this indicates that the station at the other side of this connection is not active XXX is the DLC associated with the newly added PVC PVC XXX deleted Meaning For the indicated frame relay circuit the PVC indicated by the given DLCI XXX has been deleted Deletion may occur because a PVC status IE was not present in the full status message or because it has been explicitly deleted 17 41 Event Log Messages cct Circuit Event Messages PVC XXX received xoff indication
529. ted to a value of 16 Modify Retry Counter N2 in the configuration Invalid QOS Setting to LLC1 Meaning Action The Quality of Service parameter was not configured as LLC1 unreliable datagram Presently LLC1 is the only quality of service supported for frame relay Therefore the Quality of Service parameter has been automatically modified to be LLC1 Modify the configuration so that the Quality of Service parameter is LLC1 Invalid shift parameter XXX Meaning A management packet was received with an unrecognizable shifting parameter This applies only to those interfaces running ANSI Annex D All information elements must be encoded using locking shift 5 Any other shifting parameters will be flagged as an error and data following will be discarded Invalid STATUS message received Meaning For the indicated frame relay circuit the status message returned from the frame relay switch is not properly formatted That is the report type and keep alive sequence exchange messages were not found in the proper order 17 33 Event Log Messages cct Circuit Event Messages IPCP is down Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit a packet was received which did not conform to standard PPP format The packet was dropped Nofurther action is necessary IPCP is up Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit IP Control Protocol IPCP is up IP packets may now be sent and received on the link IP next hop X X
530. telephone number used by the terminal adapter when dialing Retry Counter N2 Retry Timer T1 Send CIC onall allowed INC s out to reach the remote router This number can be up to 20 digits long depending upon your terminal adapter You may also be able to include some or all of the following symbols in the number string lt lt gt gt PT amp If you leave this field blank the router operates as a V 25 bis receive only unit Determines the number of possible retransmissions of the same frame after the Retry Timer T1 interval elapses Default 16 seconds Sets the time interval in seconds between issuing a command and receiving an acknowledgment In the absence of an acknowledgment the router retransmits the command when the T1 Timer elapses Default 3 Note This default is the recommended setting for the HP Remote Bridge connection The bridge and HP router should have the same setting Controls whether to send a connect incoming call CIC command in response to any incoming call indication Set this parameter to Yes only if your adapter requires a CIC command Default No Yes Enables the transmission of a CIC command No Disables the transmission of a CIC command 4 26 Server Password Server User ID Slot Number Subaddress Use DXI v3 2 Use Heartbeat Poll No Yes Circuit Parameters Parameters and Options Here are the required CIC settings for some V 25 bis devices
531. ter has detected the loss of the carrier signal on the WAN circuit The circuit is no longer in service Action Check cable connections check any modems CSU DSUs and the line itself No cct record for FDDI CCT cct Meaning No line has been configured for this FDDI circuit Action Configure a line for this FDDI circuit QOS addr addr addr Compression compression Meaning Dynamic Link Establishments has negotiated the parameters for this end of the WAN link as shown 17 72 SR sr_es_find Madr_table out of space Meaning Action Event Log M essages dis Data Link Services Event Messages 4T The table that stores station addresses of end nodes on a token ring network is full The router uses a Least Recently Used policy to replace entries in this table so no connectivity is lost The replacement of entries may only affect the forwarding performance to those nodes that have been replaced In this case the router must relearn them soBessop 6o7 WweAW You may want to increase the F orwarding Table Size parameter in the bridge configuration SR Sr_es_table out of space Meaning Action The table that stores adjacent node source routes for token ring interfaces is full The router uses a Least Recently U sed policy to replace entries in this table so no connectivity is lost The replacement of entries may only affect the forwarding performance to those nodes who have been replaced In
532. tets rx_ok contains the number of octets bytes received without error by circuit cct octets tx_ok contains the number of octets bytes transmitted without error by circuit cct oflo_rx contains the total number of overflows on circuit cct An overflow occurs when the local area controller SONIC could not keep pace with flow of incoming data and lost part or all of an incoming frame ST peak_frames_rx contains the peak number of frames that this circuit has received in any given second since reboot peak_frames tx contains the peak number of frames that this circuit has transmitted in any given second since reboot seg UONBWuOjU quowmbHeuep peak_octets_rx contains the peak number of octets that this circuit has received in any given second since reboot peak_octets tx contains the peak number of octets that this circuit has transmitted in any given second since reboot to_long error_rx contains the number of frames received by circuit cct that exceeded 1518 bytes in length this count does not include the 64 bit frame preamble and synchronization bits total_rx_error contains the total number of receive errors on circuit cct This value equals the sum of alig_error_rx fcs_error_rx frams_incomp_rx lack_resc_error_rx oflo_rx and to_long_error_rx total_tx_error contains the total number of transmit errors on cir cuit cet This value equals the sum of babl_error_tx bufferr_tx excessv_collin_tx late_colln_
533. tgoing TCP segments that were dropped because they exceeded the MTU rx_bytes contains the number of bytes received by the router while connected to a remote terminal by means of Telnet sess cur contains the current number of Telnet connections The router supports a maximum of two simultaneous Telnet sessions sess tot contains the number of Telnet connections since the router last booted tx_bytes contains the number of bytes transmitted by the router while connected to a remote terminal by means of Telnet Management Information Base Variables tftp TFTP Information Base tftp TF TP Information Base The Trivial File Transfer Protocol tftp information base contains variables that describe file transfers between the router and a remote device The structure is the following tftp vari ables listed below n the interface number assigned by the router The pathnames are constructed as follows ST tftp vari able n The variables are listed alphabetically aborted contains the number of TFTP sessions that were prematurely terminated seg UOnBUWOjU quowbHeuep errin contains the number of received TFTP ERROR packets Opcode 5 errout contains the number of transmitted TFTP ERROR packets Opcode 5 filesin contains the number of files successfully transmitted to the router from a remote device by means of the TFTP filesout contains the number of files successfully transmitted by the router to a
534. the circuit in auto detect mode message and indicates the Quality of Service parameter setting in the local router for the indicated circuit Pkts rcvd while waiting for outbound data Meaning The router was waiting for outbound data so that it could establish a connection when inbound data was received from the adapter Action Check the router configuration In manual adapter mode the router should only initiate a connection outbound when set up to enable on data available If this is the side that should initiate the call check the adapter configuration so that it doesn t auto answer Physical level error Meaning The LAN controller or link level controller has detected a Level 1 physical media error Action Verify hardware integrity Pool cct must enable on data avail Meaning V 25 bis pool circuits must be configured to enable when data is available This is a warning to the user of the misconfiguration The circuit will be used as if set up to enable when data is available Action Check your configuration file and correct the V 25 bis circuit misconfiguration possible loop back has been detected Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit PPP detected a possible line loopback ppp bad configuration file Meaning PPP detected an inconsistency in the configuration 17 40 Event Log M essages cct Circuit Event Messages Action Modify the configuration 4T protocol 0xYY not suppor
535. the AppleTalk router zip_reply_tx contains the total number of ZIP REPLY packets transmitted by the AppleTalk router zip_req_rx contains the total number of ZIP REQUEST packets received by the AppleTalk router zip_req_tx contains the total number of ZIP REQUEST packets transmitted by the AppleTalk router 18 11 18 12 M anagement Information Base Variables buf Buffers Information Base buf Buffers Information Base The buffers buf information base contains variables that describe the router s use of two types of global memory buffers message buffers which facilitate internal process to process communication and packet buffers which facilitate external communications by temporarily storing incoming or outgoing data packets The structure is the following buf slot 4 type stands for either msg or pkt both containing the same variables vari ables listed below The pathname is constructed as follows buf slot type variable The variables are listed alphabetically corrupted contains the number of times a corrupted buffer was deleted free contains the number of message or packet buffers available for internal VME transfers or external transfers respectively Because router operations and application software modules impose some over head on global memory buffers the number of buffers available for data transfers is less than the total number of buffers allocated when the router boots init contain
536. the EGP to advertise static routes Determines whether the static route is advertised by the RIP protocol Default Yes Prevents the RIP from advertising static routes Allows the RIP to advertise static routes Note The RIP Supply parameter enables the RIP advertising function If RIP is enabled RIP Supply is set to Yes the setting of the Propagate to RIP parameter determines whether an individual static route is advertised If the RIP Supply parameter is not enabled RIP Supply is set to No and the Propagate to RIP parameter is no longer functions Determines whether the static route is advertised by the OSPF protocol Default Yes Prevents the OSPF from advertising static routes Allows the OSPF to advertise static routes Enables or disables traffic filtering to and from UDP TCP ports Default Ignore Ignore Disables filtering of UDP TCP ports L sI3UL Led di 090 01d 3U 7 23 Proxy ARP Receive Broadcast UDP TCP Yes No Internet Protocol IP Parameters Parameters and Options Enables filtering of UDP ports and displays additional parameters on the screen Enables filtering of TCP ports and displays additional parameters on the screen Note For more information about the parameters appearing on the screen when selecting UDP or TCP Enables or disables the Proxy ARP protocol Proxy ARP lets the IP router respond on a local interface to ARP requests for a host on a remote network This respons
537. the NCL prompt Hotswapping in the HP Router 650 If there is a conflict between a slot configuration in the configuration file and the hardware installed in that slot when Summary is invoked such as when you have hotswapped an interface module but have not yet reconfigured the router you will see a screen similar to the one shown on the next page 9T spuewuop TON 16 25 Using the Network Control Language Managing Router Operations and Resources HP J243 A Router 658 DEFAULT_CONFIG 1 Jan 1991 15 49 54 Do you wish to continue viewing with conflicting data y n E DEE EEE DE IE HEIE HE DE DE HE DE DE E DE E DE DE DE DE DE E E HE DE DE DE DE DE E DEE E DE DE DE EIDE DE DEDE E DE DE DE IED DE DE E KHE E DE DEDEDE HE PEED DEED CONFIGURATION CONFLICT ALERT H i The NCL Summary command has detected replacement of one type of port module Continue Exit prompt with another type This change has yet to be reflected in the configuration file so the slots listed below will display conflicting data The following slot s are in conflict Answer yes to view your current configuration with the conflicting data or answer no to exit Summary Figure 16 1 The Conflict Alert Screen for Summary in the HP Router 650 a f you enter y for Yes you will then see the configuration with the conflicting information a f you enter n for No the router exits from Summary and displays the NCL prompt Note
538. the Ring Interface parameter setting correctly for your medium Can t configure 16 M bps token interface Meaning You have configured 16 Mbit s service on a 4 Mbit s medium Action Reconfigure the Ring Interface parameter setting correctly for your medium Carrier Detect lost on WAN Meaning Carrier Detect has been lost on the indicated WAN 17 22 Event Log M essages cct Circuit Event Messages Carrier detected on WAN 4T Meaning Carrier Detect has been received either initially or after being lost on the indicated WAN port Circuit has been brought down soBessop 6o7 WweAR Meaning This is indicates that the V 25 bis circuit has been brought down Action See other logged events for futher information Circuit has been brought up Meaning The V 25 bis circuit has been brought up circuitin auto detect mode Meaning Occurs whenever the device or remote device reboots and detects the WAN auto detect parameters Circuit reset complete Meaning The circuit indicated in the object field of the event message has completed resetting Clock lost Meaning For either LLC1 or LLC2 Quality of Service transmission progress on the chip has stopped for the idle period See also Clock recovered below Clock recovered Meaning Transmission progress is again being made See also Clock lost above 17 23 Event Log Messages cct Circuit Event Messages config
539. the count of unnumbered DISC frames transmitted by X 25 circuit cct DISC frames terminate the DCE DTE link dm_rx contains the count of unnumbered DM Disconnected Mode frames received by X 25 circuit cct DM frames indicate that the sending node is logically disconnected dm_tx contains the count of unnumbered DM Disconnected Mode frames transmitted by X 25 circuit cct DM frames indicate that the send ing node is logically disconnected Management Information Base Variables x25 X 25 Information Base frmr_rx contains the aggregate number of FRMR Frame Reject frames received by X 25 circuit cct FRMR frames report specific error conditions frmr_tx contains the aggregate number of FRMR Frame Reject frames transmitted by X 25 circuit cct FRMR frames report specific error conditions ignore_rx contains the aggregate number frames received on X 25 circuit cct that were not processed generally because of insufficient length or because of a faulty address field containing values other than 01 or 03 ST info_rx contains the number of Information frames received by X 25 circuit cct frames carry user data packets info_tx contains the number of Information frames transmitted by X 25 circuit cct frames carry user data packets seg UONBUWOjU quowumbeuep lev2_down contains the number of times that X 25 circuit cct went down in accordance with X 25 frame level protocol lev2_up contains the number of t
540. thin the range established by the matching low and high parameters Applies the filtering action drop accept log if the contents of the frame field falls within the range established by the matching low and high filter parameters Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering a Ethernet frame based on the contents of its Ethernet Type field Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter and Ethernet frame based on the contents of its Ethernet Type field Leave this field blank and enter the Ethernet Type in the Ethernet Type low field if you are filtering a single Ethernet Type 6 9 Ethernet Type low Flood Interval sec Forward Delay 6 10 Bridge Parameters Parameters and Options Options Options a Enter the highest Ethernet Type in the range if you are filtering a range of Ethernet Types Leave this field blank and enter the name of a Ethernet Type list if you want to establish the range of Ethernet Types using a filter list For more information refer to Ethernet Type low later in this chapter To learn how to create an Ethernet Type filter list refer to Type low and Type high later in this chapter Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering a frame based on the contents of its Ethernet Type field Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter an Ethernet frame based on the contents of its Ethernet Type field Enter the Ethernet Type i
541. this chapter To learn how to create an IP Address list refer to IP Address low and IP Address high earlier in this chapter Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering a packet based on the contents of its IP destination field Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter IP packets based on the contents of their IP destination field Enter the IP destination address in this field and leave the IP Dest high field blank if you are filtering a single IP destination address Enter the lowest IP destination address in this field and enter the highest IP destination address in the IP Dest high field if you are filtering a range of IP destination addresses Enter the name of an IP Address list in this field if you want to establish a range of IP destination addresses with a filter list For more information refer to IP Dest high earlier in this chapter To learn how to create an IP Address list refer to IP Address low and IP Address high earlier in this chapter Sets the upper boundary of the port range when creating an IP Port list Leave this field blank and enter the IP port in the IP Port low field if you are filtering a single IP port Enter the highest IP port in the range in this field if you are filtering a range of IP ports For more information refer to IP Port low later in this chapter Sets the lower boundary of the port range when creating an IP P
542. time interval between initialization of the router engine module and the module in slot objectid slot contains the authoritative identification of the card plugged into slot Entity_Table Example get chassis entity_table entry enti ty_table vari able1 descr 1 contains a textual description of the HP Router 650 function 1 contains the generic function provided by the HP Router 650 index 1 contains the entity number for the HP Router 650 Name 1 contains the local name by which entity i is known objectid 1 contains the authoritative identification of the HP Router 650 Management Information Base Variables chassis Chassis Information Base timestamp 1 should always be 0 Slotmap_ Table Example get chassis slotmap_table entry slot sZo 1 entity slot 1 contains the entity number for slot on the HP Router 650 ST slot slot 1 contains the slot number for slot on the HP Router 650 Sensor_Table These variables report the status of the power supply fan and internal temperature in HP Router 650 chassis seg UOnBUWOjU quowbHeuep Example get chassis sensor_table entry sensor_table vari abld sensor descr sensor contains a textual description of the sensor failures sensor contains the number of times the sensor s status has changed to BAD index sensor contains the sensor index number for sensor number sensor contains a unique number for similar sensors objectid s
543. ting system code fput X X X X config filename transfer router configuration fput X X X X NCL command filename store display command output 9T X X X X isthe IP address of the remote node in dotted decimal notation filename isthe name of a file on the remote node to store the output from this router Some TFTP servers on remote nodes require that the file already exist spuewuop TON 16 95 16 96 Using the Network Control Language Using TFTP To Transfer Operating Code Configuration and NCL Display NCL command isan NCL display command string on this router Possible commands are listed above and described earlier in this chapter If the command has parameters and thus includes a space then enclose the command string in double quotes Examples fput fput fput fput 153 15 3 15 3 15 3 0 0 0 0 97 os rok 97 config account cfg 97 browse pricfg txt 97 rgetr 10 1 2 1 public pritable txt In response you will be informed of the progress and successful or unsuccessful completion of the transfer All protocols and links on the router remain enabled Note Command Zget Zput Note Using the Network Control Language Using ZM odem to Transfer Configuration and NCL Display Using ZModem to Transfer Configuration and NCL Display With an IBM compatible personal computer PC host connected to the router s console port two NCL commands use the Zmodem protocol to do the follo
544. tion Mode 7 6 Address Mask Reply 7 7 Address Resolution 7 8 Allow Router to Accept Files 7 8 Area ID 7 8 AS Boundary Conti nued Next Page Internet Protocol IP Parameters Overview Page IP Parameter 7 8 ASB Flood 7 8 Authentication Type 7 9 Auto Enable 7 9 Circuit Group 7 9 Connection Close Time Out 7 9 Conditional Circuit Group 7 9 Cost 7 9 Dead Interval 7 10 Default Route Listen 7 10 Default Route Supply 7 10 Dest IP Address 7 10 DLCI 7 10 Drop If Next Hop is Down 7 10 Effect 7 11 Encapsulation 7 11 Export Action 7 12 From Autonomous System 7 12 From Gateway 7 12 From Interface 7 12 From Peer 7 12 From Protocol 7 13 Global Broadcast 7 13 Header 7 13 Hello Interval 7 13 Hello Timer 7 13 High Value hex 7 14 Host Cache 7 14 Import Action 7 14 Interface Type 7 15 Internet Address 7 15 IP Address 7 15 IP Address high 7 15 IP Address low 7 15 IP Dest high 7 16 IP Dest low Conti nued Next Page 7 3 L sPULHLd dl 1090 30 1q PUJI 7 4 Internet Protocol IP Parameters Overview Page IP Parameter 7 16 IP Port high 7 16 IP Port low 7 16 IP Source high 7 17 IP Source low 7 17 LAN Address 7 17 Length 7 17 List Name 7 17 Load Balancing 7 18 Local ASN 7 18 Local Address 7 18 Low Value hex 7 18 Make route conditional on an alternate circuit group 7 18 Management Priority 7 19 Max Relay Hops 7 19 Max Retransmissions
545. tion deencapsulation DLS can return frames for numerous reasons many of which are application specific for example because of unknown internal service access points ISAPs because of user specified filtering requirements contained within the configuration or because of lack of enabled entities for example IP IPX etc dis_ring_cnt contains the current number of packets received by circuit cct and currently in transit to data link service DLS excessv_colln_tx contains the number of excessive collision errors on circuit cct An excessive collision error occurs when the local area controller SONIC has detected collisions on the medium in 16 successive attempts to transmit a frame After 16 unsuccessful transmis sion attempts the SONIC drops the frame increments this counter and transmits the next frame on its transmit queue 18 31 18 32 M anagement Information Base Variables cct Circuits Information Base fcs_error_rx contains the number of frames received by circuit cet that contained an erroneous checksum frames _rx_per_sec contains the number of frames that this circuit has received in the last second frames _tx_per_sec contains the number of frames that this circuit has transmitted in the last second frames _rx_ok contains the number of frames received without error by circuit cct frames tx_ok contains the number of frames transmitted without error by circuit cct frams_incomp_rx contains the number
546. tion is enabled Default 0 Range Works in conjunction with Monitored Events parameter to define a quality of service metric for the Frame Relay DCE DTE connection Default 3 Range 1 to 10 The Events for Error and Monitored Events parameters work together to form aj out of k relationship for measuring circuit reliability If the number of faulty status exchanges Status Inquiry Link Integrity Verification Full Status Inquiry and or Full Status Report messages in a continuous sequence of k events Monitored Events equals or exceeds j Events for Error the interface is declared down While the connection is down status exchanges continue Oncej consecutive status exchanges are transferred without error the connection is restored to the active state Determines the error detection scheme for encapsulated packets Point to Point or SMDS circuits can use either a 16 bit standard or 32 bit extended encapsulation scheme and a corresponding cyclic redundancy check CRC to detect errors in the encapsulated packet Point to Point Default No SMDS Default Yes Yes Enables extended 32 bit encapsulation and CRC 4 14 No Enables standard 16 bit encapsulation and CRC General multicast DLCI Group Address Heartbeat Down Count Heartbeat Polling Interval Individual Address Intervals Between Full Polls IP Address LAN Address Circuit Parameters Parameters and Options Note To use the 32 bit encapsulation
547. tions DECnet Parameters Parameters and Options Note All routers within the extended Phase IV network must be configured with the same Max Area and Max Nodes values Determines packet lifetime by specifying the number of times a packet can pass through the DE Cnet router Such a limitation prevents a corrupted packet or a packet whose destination node has somehow become unreachable from continuously traveling through the network This setting must be equal to or greater than Max Hops Default 63 Range 1 to 63 Identifies the DE Cnet ID number node number of the router Default 1 Range 1 to 1023 Note DECnet Phase IV uses the Area and Node parameters to derive a unique MAC level address for the DE Cnet Phase IV router DE Cnet first derives a 16 bit binary address by appending Area expressed as a 6 bit binary value to Node expressed as a 10 bit binary value DECnet then swaps the bytes and converts the resulting 16 bit binary value to 4 digit hexadecimal AA 00 04 the Digital Equipment Corporation vendor code 00 a pad to ensure a 12 digit hexadecimal address Thus node 32 in area 256 equates to the MAC address AA 00 04 00 00 81 Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering DE Cnet source and destination nodes when creating an Node list Leave this field blank and enter the DE Cnet ID of the node in the Node low field if you are filtering a single DE Cnet destination or source node a Enter the DECnet I
548. to understand why the transfer was terminated 17 152 Event Log M essages zmodem Zmodem Event Messages Transfer terminated due to timeout 4T Meaning Indicates that the router did not receive a Zmodem message from the host for 10 seconds This message also occurs if the host did not respond to the router when it attempted to connect using the Zget command Zget tries for up to 70 seconds before timing out soBessop 6o7 WweAW Action Check the host configuration Unable to allocate memory for read Meaning The buffer space required for the Zmodem protocol configuration read is not currently available This indicates that all the router memory is tied up in other tasks or in the routing table This error can occur only with the Zget command Action Wait for the router traffic load to decline then try again Unable to connect to remote Meaning The router issued an initialization response and did not receive a valid header The packet may have been corrupted during transmission Action Check that the host is running the Zmodem protocol Also check the serial line for a poor connection or source of noise Unable to execute command to create output Meaning The information requested in the Zput command could not be gathered This error can occur only with the Zput command Action Check for proper syntax try to display the data on the console without using Zput Then try Zput again Unable to ge
549. tonomous system Assigns a specific gateway for receiving RIP updates Enables gateway identification Disables gateway identification Assigns specific interface for receiving RIP updates Enables the identification of specific interfaces Disables the identification of specific interfaces Enables the identification of a specific router from which EGP updates are received Leave this field blank if you wish the EGP import route filter to be universal that is applicable to all foreign EGP routers Enter the source routers IP address in dotted decimal notation if you want the filter to apply to a specific source of EGP updates Assigns the source for routing information Default RIP Assigns EGP Exterior Gateway Protocol as the source for routing information Assigns RIP Routing Information Protocol as the source for routing information Assigns OSPF Open Shortest Path First Protocol as the source for the routing information Global Broadcast Internet Protocol IP Parameters Parameters and Options Determines whether the router accepts or discards a global broadcast message a message with an IP destination address consisting entirely of 1 digits Default Yes No Allows the router to discard global broadcast messages effectively disabling the Yes Header After Network Network Hello Interval Options Hello Timer Options High Value hex Routing Information Protocol RIP Note Routers use
550. tor menu path A 2 parameters finding A 2 configuration changing 16 21 configuration download 16 100 configuration remote 16 20 Conflict Alert 16 26 Connect inactivity time sec 4 10 Index 5 xepul 6 Index Connect Retries 4 10 Connect retry count 4 10 4 12 14 3 Connect wait time sec 4 10 14 3 Connect when 4 11 Connection Close Time Out 7 9 Connection ID 13 5 Connection Inactivity Time 1 5 connector 3 3 3 4 connector name default 3 4 console port connecting 1 5 Cost 6 7 7 9 8 6 Crash 16 7 crash software 1 4 CUG Closed Users Group 13 5 D Data is available or on incoming calls 4 11 Data Link Layer Protocol 4 11 4 25 data link layer 4 2 datagram field 12 10 DDP type 12 10 destination network 12 10 destination node 12 10 destination socket 12 10 source network 12 10 source node 12 10 source socket 12 10 Date See Time daylight savings time 1 5 Daylight Time Rule 1 5 DCE frame relay 4 5 DDN Defense Data Network 13 10 DDP Type high 12 6 DDP type low 12 7 DDP type field 12 10 DDP Type Lists 12 6 AppleTalk 12 10 Debug event log 1 6 decnet 16 32 DECnet multicast DLCI 4 11 DE Cnet parameters Area high 8 4 Area low 8 4 Area Max Cost 8 5 Bcast Routing Timer 8 6 Circuit Group Name 8 6 Dest Network low 8 7 Dest Node high 8 7 Max Area 8 9 Max Bcast End nodes 8 9 Max
551. ts the file formatting required by the host either 0 the default ends lines with carriage returns and line feeds CR LF as needed by most PCs 1 ends lines with line feeds only LF Examples zput config interl cfg zput rgetr 10 1 2 1 public pritable txt In response a status window temporarily appears to monitor transfer data and progress 9T spuewruop TON 16 101 Note 16 102 Using the Network Control Language Using ZModem to Transfer Configuration and NCL Display When the download is completed a flashing COMPLETED message appears briefly in the status window Then the window closes and control returns to the NCL prompt If the PC host does not respond within approximately 60 seconds after you execute Zput the command times out and control returns to the NCL prompt If the Auto downloading parameter described under Preparation above has not been set to on then to complete the download you must press the key and follow the instructions in the resulting window For more information refer to the PROCOMM PLUS User Manual For information on Zput event messages refer to the Zmodem event messages on page 17 149 17 Event Log Messages 17 2 Event Log Messages How To Use This Chapter How To Use This Chapter The event log is a first in first out buffer in RAM Each entry is a single line composed of five fields severity date time object event message I 0
552. twork area maxvisit contains the maximum number of times a packet can pass through the same router nmaxcst contains the maximum node to node transit cost nmaxhop contains the maximum number of hops that a packet can transit from source to destination node contains the router s DE Cnet node number state contains the router state 1 indicates that the router is enabled and forwarding packets 2 indicates that the router is disabled Interface Specific cost contains the relative circuit cost assigned to the interface cname contains the name of the circuit group that enables the DECnet interface htime contains the time interval between DECnet hello packets index contains the router assigned interface number numrtr contains the number of routers associated with the interface rprior contains the router priority state contains the interface state 1 indicates that the router is enabled and forwarding packets 2 indicates that the router is disabled Management Information Base Variables dis Data Link Services Information Base dis Data Link Services Information Base The Data Link Services information base contains variables that access the data link statistics for configured circuits The structure is dls cct name circuit name vari ables listed below ST The pathnames are constructed as shown in the following examples dis vari able dis cct namevari able re_rx_dma_ring_cnt This stat shows the num
553. tx deferred_tx lcar_tx and uflo_tx tx_congestion contains the number of times a buffer wasn t available to transmit a frame 18 33 M anagement Information Base Variables cct Circuits Information Base uflo_tx contains the total number of underflows on circuit cet An underflow occurs when the transmitter portion of the local area controller SONIC truncates a frame because of the late receipt of data from memory 18 34 Management Information Base Variables cct Circuits Information Base PPP Industry Standard Point to Point Protocol Circuits The PPP information contains the PPP MIB Link Quality Table and PPP circuit event messages The PPP MIB variables for the Link Quality Table are organized under exmib ppp link_quality_table entry and are separate from the general WAN Circuits variables page 18 14 Use NCL s List command to display all or a part of the ppp information base and use NCL s Get command to obtain the value of any variable within the information base ST The structure is the following exmib 3 ppp f link_quality_table entry S vari ables listed below R cct stands for the PPP circuit number The pathname is constructed as follows exmib ppp link_quality_table entry variable cct or 36 18 4 1 variable cct The variables are listed alphabetically index Isa unique value for each PPP link interface The index value is the circuit number of the PPP circuit in_rx_bytes Is a 32 bit s
554. type of channel management Default Not Used Disable Management Turns off the channel management capability in a terminal adapter with configured channel management Use this value only when your terminal adapter has channel management capability that you don t want it to use Delta Management Causes a terminal adapter with channel management capability to use the maximum bandwidth allowed for channel management Refer to the manual for your terminal adapter for more information Minimal Management Causes a terminal adapter with channel management capability to use a minimal portion of its channel bandwidth for channel management Refer to the manual for your terminal adapter for more information 4 6 Circuit Parameters Parameters and Options Not Used Tells the terminal adapter to operate on its preprogrammed channel management parameters Refer to the manual for your adapter Use this option if your terminal adapter doesn t have v 25 bis extension features or hasn t been configured to use them Circuit Name Identifies the circuit for the associated connector The default startup and default Quick Configuration set this parameter to the name of the Connector This name should also appear on your network map In HP Series 200 and 400 routers the default circuit name includes the circuit type and related port number 1 4 For example ETHER1 The first 802 3 Ethernet port configured WAN2 The second WAN port configured In HP
555. uently it may be acceptable depending on the applications To solve this add more V 25 bis circuits to the pool or re arrange traffic so that not as many circuits are queued waiting for an available line Higher speed V 25 bis lines may also help illegal packet received Meaning For the indicated PPP circuit a packet was received that did not conform to standard PPP format The packet was dropped No further action is necessary Initialization Error SIFSTS XXXX Meaning Initialization of the token ring device has failed indicating a possible hardware or operating system failure Action Note the code number in the event message and contact your Hewlett Packard representative insufficient mem on cctX for cct Meaning There is no system memory available for the given V 25 bis circuit cct to be allocated This circuit is not available for use 17 31 Event Log Messages cct Circuit Event Messages Action Reduce the overall size of memory resoures allocated by the configuration For example reduce table sizes on other configuration parameters where possible insufficient mem on cct X for phone Meaning There is no system memory available for the given V 25 bis circuit cct to allocate storage for phone numbers This circuit is not available for use Action Reduce the overall size of memory resoures allocated by the configuration For example reduce table sizes on other configuration parameter
556. ufficient memory to allocate the routing table Action Reduce the Routing Table Size parameter to place a lesser demand on memory at_zone_name_tbl_alloc out of memory Meaning The AppleTalk router cannot obtain sufficient memory to allocate the zone name table Action Reduce the Routing Table Size and AARP Mapping Table parameters to place a lesser demand on memory Cfg cannot get dfit zone name for ccg Meaning This message is generated only if the circuit group specified byccgisa nonseed port After a nonseed port establishes contact with a seed router it issues a query to obtain the network s default zone name This message is generated if the port fails to receive a response to its query Action No action is required The nonseed port repeats its query until it obtains the default zone name 17 5 Event Log Messages at AppleTalk Event Messages Cfg cannot get zone name list for ccg Meaning This message is generated only if the circuit group specified byccgisa nonseed port After a nonseed port obtains the default zone name from a seed router it issues a query to obtain a list of zone names associated with the network This message is generated if the port fails to receive a response to its query Action No action is required The nonseed port repeats its query until it obtains the list of associated zone names Cfg dflt zone name must be cfg d for ccg Meaning The circuit group specified by c
557. uit group ccg because the destination network was unknown ddp_upper_protocol contains the number of AppleTalk packets sent to an upper layer protocol by circuit group ccg Name Binding Protocol NBP nbp_breq_rx contains the number of NBP BROADCAST REQUEST packets received by circuit group ccg nbp fwdreq_rx contains the number of NBP FORWARD REQUEST packets received by circuit group ccg nbp fwdreq tx contains the number of NBP FORWARD REQUEST packets transmitted by circuit group ccg nbp_Ikup_tx contains the number of NBP LOOKUP packets transmitted by circuit group ccg Routing Table Maintenance Protocol RTMP cable range _conflicts contains the number of times an RTMP DATA packet received on circuit group ccg contained a routing tuple a target network and a hop count with a network range that overlapped a routing entry in the AppleTalk routing table data_rx contains the number of RTMP DATA packets received by circuit group ccg data_tx contains the number of RTMP DATA packets transmitted by circuit group ccg Management Information Base Variables at AppleTalk Information Base network_type_conflicts contains the number of RTMP DATA packets received by circuit group ccg whose routing tuples a target network and a hop count conflicted with network entries in the AppleTalk routing table nonextended_netwk contains the number of nonextended routing tuples a target network and a hop count received by circuit gr
558. ule Transmits SAP Service Advertising Protocol advertisements among those servers meeting the filter rule sSJ PULLed 030 01d Xdi Drops those servers not meeting the filter rule for SAP advertisements and does not advertise those services out of the interface Enables or disables the IPX router The IPX specific Auto Enable parameter works in conjunction with the global Auto Enable parameter to enable or disable the IPX application software when the node boots When the global Auto Enable parameter is set to No the IPX router as are all other application software modules is unconditionally disabled If you have set the global Auto Enable parameter to No You will subsequently need to enable the IPX router manually with the NCL Interpreter after the node boots 11 5 Circuit Group No Yes Deliver NETBIOS Bcasts to net Dest Host high Dest Host low No Yes Options IPX Protocol Parameters Parameters and Options When the global Auto Enable is set to Yes the IPX router as are all other application software modules is conditionally enabled the IPX router can be enabled or disabled by setting the IPX specific Auto Enable parameter Default Yes Disables the IPX router You will need to re enable the IPX router manually with the NCL Interpreter after the node boots Enables the IPX router Identifies the circuit group providing a connection between the node and IPX network Enabl
559. umber in this field and enter the highest packet type number in the Packet Type high field if you are filtering a range of IPX packet type numbers a Enter the list name in this field and leave the Packet Type high field blank if you are creating an IPX Packet Type filter and want to establish the range of packet type numbers with a filter list TT For additional information refer to Packet Type high earlier in this chapter Assigns a priority value to the filter the higher the precedence the greater the priority You can construct up to 31 filters per interface The Precedence value is used when an in coming packet meets several filter rules In such an instance the filter rule with the highest priority precedence is applied to filter the packet S19 UWIe1ed 030 01d Xdi Default 1 Range 1 to 31 Note When two filters have equal precedence the first configured filter takes precedence over the second filter Provides two methods for managing IPX network traffic across circuits in a circuit group Random load balancing Host ID load balancing Default No Enables Host ID load balancing the router selects a circuit to carry all network traffic packets between the source and destination systems 11 13 RIP Interface Cost RIP Listen RIP Supply RIP Table Cost RIP and SAP split horizon Yes Yes No Yes No No Yes IPX Protocol Parameters Parameters and Options Enables rand
560. umber of RESET REQUEST packets transmit ted by X 25 virtual circuit svc A RESET REQUEST packet sets the send and receive packet sequences to 0 and generates aRESET INDICATION packet at the remote end of the circuit rnr_rx contains the number of RNR Receiver Not Ready packets received by X 25 virtual circuit svc An RNR packet denotes a busy condition indicating a temporary inability to accept DATA packets from the remote end of the circuit rnr_tx contains the number of RNR Receiver Not Ready packets transmitted by X 25 virtual circuit svc An RNR packet denotes a busy condition indicating a temporary inability to accept DATA packets from the remote end of the circuit ST rr_rx contains the number of RR Receiver Ready packets received by X 25 virtual circuit svc An RR packet either indicates the readiness to receive DATA packets or acknowledges the receipt of DATA packets seg UOnBUWUOjU quowumbeuep rr_tx contains the number of RR Receiver Ready packets transmit ted by X 25 virtual circuit svc An RR packet either indicates the readiness to receive DATA packets or acknowledges the receipt of DATA packets DDN and PDN Virtual Circuit Variables X 25 DDN and PDN service maintain a set of variables identical to those in the previous section However they are ephemeral These variables can be accessed only for currently established DDN or PDN virtual circuits Access the event log to identify currently established
561. undary of the IP address range when creating an IP Address list a Enter the IP address in this field and leave the IP Address high field blank if you are filtering a single IP address L a Enter the lowest IP address in this field and enter the highest IP address in the IP Address high field if you are filtering a range of IP addresses For more information refer to IP Address high earlier in this chapter To learn how to apply a IP Address list to a filter refer to IP Dest low and IP Source low Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering a packet based on the contents of its IP destination field sI3UL Led di 090 01d 2U49 UU Leave this field blank if you do not want to filter an IP packet based on the contents of its IP destination field Leave this field blank and enter the IP destination address in the IP Dest low field if you are filtering a single IP destination address Enter the highest IP destination address in this field if you are filtering a range of IP destination addresses Leave this field blank and enter the name of a IP Address list in the IP Dest low field if you are establishing a range of IP destination addresses with a filter list IP Dest low IP Port high IP Port low IP Source high 7 16 Options Options Options Internet Protocol IP Parameters Parameters and Options For more information refer to IP Dest low later in
562. upper boundary of the range for filtering a DDP Type packet based on the contents of its DDP Type field or sets the upper boundary for one range in a DDP Type list Leave this field blank and enter the DDP Type in the DDP Type low field if you are filtering a single DDP Type Enter the highest DDP Type in the range if you are filtering a range of DDP Types AppleTalk Parameters Parameters and Options Enter the list name in the DDP Type low field and leave this field blank if you are creating an DDP Type filter and want to specify one or more ranges of DDP Types with a DDP Type list For additional information refer to DDP Type low later in this chapter Note The creation of DDP Type filters and DDP Type lists is similar the DDP Type low and DDP Type high parameters are used to establish a range for filtering packets For more information about creating a DDP Type list refer to DDP Type Lists earlier in this chapter DDP Type low Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering a DDP Type packet based on the contents of its DDP Type field or sets the lower boundary for a DDP Type filter list Options Enter the DDP Type in this field and leave the DDP Type high field blank if you are filtering a single DDP Type Enter the lowest DDP Typein this field and enter the highest DDP Type in the DDP Type high field if you are filtering a range of DDP Types Enter the list name in this field an
563. upport 4 22 N N2 13 10 name 16 32 NCL commands 16 2 NCL ERR invalid 16 5 16 15 Negotiated Pkt Size 13 10 Negotiated Pkt Window 13 10 Neighbor ID 7 20 neighbor reachability 7 21 net fail LED 4 29 17 56 Net Hop Host 10 9 net mask 16 42 NET2 13 10 NetBIOS Resource Name 11 12 Index 15 xepul 16 Index Network 12 11 Network Address 7 20 Network lists 10 9 11 11 12 10 12 11 Network Mask 7 20 Network Max 12 11 Network Min 12 12 Network Number 10 9 11 11 Network Number Hex 11 12 Network Number high 10 8 11 11 Network Number low 10 9 11 12 12 12 Next Hop 7 20 Next Hop Address 7 20 Next Hop Host 11 12 Next Hop Net 10 9 11 12 Node 8 10 Node high 8 10 12 12 Node low 8 10 12 13 Node Address 9 3 9 4 Node Address SNMP 9 3 Node ID 12 13 Node Lists 12 10 12 13 Non Local ARP Source 7 20 Non local ARP 7 20 Normal ARP 7 21 Novell 6 8 Number of Routers 8 11 0 object identification codes 16 35 16 36 Offset 6 16 7 21 operating code 16 96 operating code version 16 21 operating code download 16 93 16 95 operating code version 16 95 OSI multicast DLCI 4 23 OSPF 16 32 backbone 7 20 commands 16 72 Hello packets 7 13 interface type 7 14 prerequisite 7 10 Ospf Intf 16 74 Ospf Errs 16 73 Ospf Lsdb 16 76 Ospf Nbrs 16 78 Ospf Rtab 16 80 Ospf Tq 16 82 Outgoin
564. uration without using the Configuration Editor duplicate ip address Meaning Multiple network interfaces have been configured with the same IP address Action Modify the configuration to ensure the uniqueness of interface addresses entity already disabled Meaning An already disabled IP has received NCL s Disable command entity already enabled Meaning An already enabled IP has received NCL s Enable command entity disabled Meaning IP has been disabled in response to NCL s Disable command 17 87 Event Log Messages ip IP Event Messages entity enabled Meaning IP has been enabled in response to NCL s Enable command entity reset Meaning IP has reinitialized filters configured Meaning IP has configured source address destination address and or TCP UDP port filters global broadcasts will not be received Meaning The Global Broadcast parameter has been set to No Action If you want to receive global broadcasts modify the configuration to set the value of Global Broadcast to Yes If you do not want to receive global broadcasts no action is required icmp ip address unreachable host Meaning IP has received an Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP Destination Unreachable message from i p address The message contains a Code field value of 1 indicating that the IP host designated by i p address is unreachable icmp ip address unreachable net Meaning IP
565. urce routing Enable source routing by entering a value between 0 and FFF hexadecimal Note You must enter LAN ID in hexadecimal format for each node running Release 5 70 software or later All nodes on a token ring must have equivalent LAN IDs Enables the bridging service in the router to automatically learn the addresses of the nodes communicating through the service and on which side of the bridge each node is located The bridge learns the node addresses from the source address field in each packet it receives It learns which side the node is on by noting which port receives the packet The bridge adds entries to the bridge address table for each new address it sees Default Yes Enables automatic learning of the source address and location from which bridged packets are received Disables Learning Bridge operation Sets the length of the bit pattern of a filtered field when creating a user defined filter Accepts the name of aMAC address list Ethernet Type list SAP list or Protocol 1D Organization Code list Time period for detecting a loop in the network When the bridge receives an all routes explorer packet ARE for a particular source destination pair a time stamp is stored in the appropriate entry in the Source Routing Intermediate Station table If the bridge receives another ARE for the same source destination pair before the loop loop detection timer expires a loop exists in the network and the bridge drops th
566. urce socket Source Sock low and Source Sock high Default Ignore Applies the filtering action drop accept log if the contents of the datagram field do not fall within the range established by the matching low and high filter parameters Applies no filtering action if the contents of the datagram field falls within the range established by the matching low and high filter parameters Applies the filtering action drop accept log if the contents of the datagram field falls within the range established by the matching low and high filter parameters Displays a screen with options for creating a DDP Type list Network list Node list and Socket list Each option on the screen displays a set of matching low and high parameters for creating a list The screen options and corresponding low and high parameters are listed in the following table List Type Parameters DDP Type DDP Type low and DDP Type high Network Network low and Network high Node Node low and Node high Socket Socket low and Socket high List Name Network Lists Netw ork Network Max AppleTalk Parameters Parameters and Options Note Lists can simplify the process of creating filters For example you could enter the name of a Node list in the Dest Node low field rather than creating a range of nodes to filter by entering a range of nodes in the Dest Node low and Dest Node high fields Lists save time when you need to fi
567. ured for Appletalk In this example you would either delete the Appletalk on the local PPP link or add Appletalk to the peer PPP link s router soBessop 6o7 WweAW Server has logged in to remote station Meaning The PPP Password Authentication Protocol PAP has successfully logged into the peer PPP PAP Server s login attempt failed Meaning The PPP Password Authentication Protocol PAP was unsuccessful in logging into the peer PPP PAP Action Check the PPP PAP password configurations too many bytes lost link unreliable Meaning The PPP link is unreliable because too many bytes have been lost This is measured only when running LQM too many packets lost link unreliable Meaning The PPP link is unreliable because too many packets have been lost This is measured only when running LQM 17 119 Event Log Messages rok Router Operating Kernel Event Messages rok Router Operating Kernel Event Messages These event messages are generated by the system variable rok the router operating kernel Boot count nnn Meaning The router has been booted nnn times connection dropped due to inactivity Meaning No console input has been received for the time set for the Connection Inactivity Time configuration parameter The modem has been hung up or the terminal has been logged out connection established Meaning Console connection is made using a terminal or modem connection es
568. use pathnames and the List Get and Reset commands e A quick reference to the full set of MIB commands Located under Accesesing the Management Information Base and in subsequent sections in chapter 7 of the User s Guide a Refer to chapter 16 Using the Network Control Language in this manual for a detailed description of each MIB command Series 200 and 400 routers always use 1 where a slot number is required For the HP Router 650 2 through 5 may be used where a slot number is required The actual number used for a Router 650 corresponds to the slot in which the desired variable occurs Management Information Base Variables alarm Alarm Information Base alarm Alarm Information Base The alarm information base contains variables that describe the scheduling and issuance of router generated alarms The structure is the following alarm slot 4 vari ables listed below ST The pathname is constructed as follows alarm slot variable The variables are listed alphabetically cancel_cnt contains the number of alarms cancelled by the router prior to the expiration of the alarm timer seg UONBWuOjU quowmbHeuep expire_cnt contains the number of alarm related interrupts Such an interrupt is generated when the alarm timer reaches zero race_cnt contains the number of simultaneous occurrences of the expiration of the alarm timer and the cancellation of a previously scheduled alarm s
569. uter Replace the router HP Router 650 Replace the interface card Ethernet circuit assigned to multiple lines Meaning The same Ethernet circuit has been assigned to multiple lines Action Modify the configuration to ensure that circuits are assigned to only one line 17 62 Event Log M essages dev Device Event Messages Ethernet Port carrier sense lost 4T Action Check the transceiver and connection to router port Ethernet Port failed self test soBessop 6o7 WweAR Meaning Hardware error Action HP series 200 or 400 router Replace the router HP Router 650 Replace the interface card Ethernet Port transmit failure Action Check the LAN cable and connection to the transceiver on port Frame Relay enabled on cct XXX Meaning The synchronous driver has enabled the support for frame relay on cct XXX At this point the management interface is also initialized for cct XXX if it has been configured Internal clock must be the same for ports WAN1 amp WAN2 Meaning On an HP Router 650 synchronous lines using connectors WAN1 and WAN2 share the same clock signal generator Thus when using internal clocking on WAN1 and WAN2 the Clock Speed parameter in the lines configuration must have the same value for both connectors The Clock Speed parameter is meaningless when Clock Source for the line is set to External Action Reconfigure both lines to have the same clock speed Intern
570. uter and remote hosts over token ring networks 17 90 Event Log M essages ip IP Event Messages SR sr_es_find Madr_table out of space Meaning The MAC address table Madr_table is out of space The station address table contains station addresses that are used for both end station ES source routing over IP as well as intermediate station IS source routing over the bridge SR Sr_es_table out of space Meaning The source routing end station table is out of space The Sr_es tableisa table that contains destination station addresses It contains pointers to the RIF table too many networks configured for this circuit group Meaning A single network interface has been configured with more than 16 networks Action Modify the configuration for not more than 16 networks in a single circuit group 17 91 4T soBessop 6o7 WweAR Event Log Messages ipx IPX Router Event Messages ipx IPX Router Event Messages These event messages are generated by the the system variable ipx the IPX router CG ccg Del Rt to dest netvia next hop net next hop Meaning ccg is the name of the circuit group the route was learned on dest net is the destination network the route referred to next hop net is the directly connected network that was to be used to get to the next hop router next hop is the IPX address of the router that was the next hop for traffic destined for dest net CG ccg Del Srv server
571. utomatically updating view of the event log use the Logi command see page 16 13 Before using one of the Log commands make sure that page mode is enabled as it is by default so that the events are displayed one screen at a time with a prompt for MORE Page mode and how to get more screens are described on page 16 14 9T Refer to chapter 17 for how to interpret the events listed You will not use the accessing commands described in that chapter however you will use NCL s accessing commands described in the More section on page 16 14 Syntax spuewuop TON log log filter 16 11 Note 16 12 Using the Network Control Language Managing Router Operations and Resources log string log a log a filter log a string Examples of Log string log mgr Displays all messages in the event log since the last boot that have the string mgr log rok Displays all messages in the event log since the last boot that have the string rok log a mgr Displays all messages in the event log that have the string mgr log a rok Displays all messages in the event log that have the string rok The string used with Log is not case sensitive In a log string command you can use a double quote instead of a single quote if you prefer and can omit the closing quote mark if it is convenient For example all of the foll
572. vailable in Hewlett Packard routers For information on how to operate the statistics screens refer to the User s Guide The range of statistics available in most Hewlett Packard routers includes AppleTalk Router statistics page 15 4 Summarizes for each AppleTalk router circuit group how many packets received forwarded and dropped Bridge statistics page 15 6 Summarizes for each bridging circuit group how many frames received forwarded flooded and dropped Buffers Usage statistics page 15 8 Provides information on buffer allocation and use Circuit statistics page 15 10 Summarizes for each individual circuit how many bytes and frames were received and transmitted and how many frames contained errors DE Cnet Router statistics page 15 12 Summarizes for each DECnet router circuit group how many frames received forwarded and dropped DoD IP Router statistics page 15 14 Summarizes for each IP router network interface how many datagrams received forwarded handled within the router and dropped IPX Router statistics page 15 16 Summarizes for each IPX network interface how many datagrams received forwarded handled within the router and dropped Per Second statistics page 15 18 Summarizes for each circuit the number of bytes and frames transmitted and received per second XNS Router statistics page 15 20 Summarizes for each XNS network interface how many datagrams received forwarded handled within the
573. value err_rx_mac_status Contains a count of receive frame indication errors those that are not parity or overrun errors err_rx_overrun Contains the number of circuit overruns An overrun occurs when the FDDI receive circuitry cannot keep pace with the incoming flow of traffic err_rx_parity Contains the number of receive frames with parity errors err_tx_abort Contains the number of transmit frame aborts err_tx_underrun Contains the number of circuit underruns An underrun occurs when the F DDI transmit truncates a frame because of late receipt of data from memory frames_rx_oc Contains the number of error free frames received frames _rx_per_sec Contains the number of frames that this circuit has received in the last second frames_tx_ok Contains the number of error free frames transmitted frames _tx_per_sec Contains the number of frames that this circuit has transmitted in the last second ieee_addr Contains the address of the station in IEEE format ioe_mov_ FSI experienced an internal memory overrun error mac_mla_ Contains the MAC s 48 bit long address mac_ring op States whether the ring is operational or not mac_ring_op_cnt Contains the number of times the FDDI ring changes states Management Information Base Variables cct Circuits Information Base missed_cmd_ Contains a count of commands issued to the FSI that were missed not executed missed_crf Contains a count of commands not executed because the
574. ve this field blank if you do not want to filter IP packets based on the contents of their IP source field a Enter the IP source address in this field and leave the IP Source high field blank if you are filtering a single IP source address Enter the lowest IP source address in this field and enter the highest IP source address in the IP Source high field if you are filtering a range of IP source addresses Enter the name of an IP Address list in this field if you want to establish a range of IP source addresses with a filter list For more information refer to IP Source high earlier in this chapter To learn how to create an IP Address list refer to IP Address low and IP Address high earlier in this chapter The 48 bit station address also called the physical or Ethernet or MAC address of the adjacent host Enter the 12 digit hexadecimal number Sets the bit length of the filtered field when creating a user defined filter Accepts the name of the IP address list or IP port list Used to balance the network traffic load if more than one circuit is in a circuit group Default No 7 17 L sPULLd dl 020 01d PUHI No Yes Local ASN Local Address Low Value hex Options Make route conditional on an alternate circuit group No Yes Management Priority High Low 7 18 Internet Protocol IP Parameters Parameters and Options Disables load balancing When disab
575. ved on the link X PPP FR High Pri Tx congestion Meaning When PPP is configured over slow WAN links lt 64K the PPP control packets have priority over any data packets This message is reported when these high priority control packets can t be sent over the link due to congestion This message is reported on the first instance of dropping a packet due to congestion and the first time a packet is dropped after the tx_congestion or total_tx_error statistic is reset X PPP FR Low Pri Tx congestion Meaning When PPP is configured over slow WAN links lt 64K the PPP control packets have priority over any data packets This message is reported when the lower priority data packets can t be sent over the link due to congestion This message is reported on the first instance of dropping a packet due to congestion and the first time a packet is dropped after the tx_congestion or total_tx_error statistic is reset 17 59 Bad module ID Meaning Action CCT cct Bad board id Meaning Action Event Log Messages dev Device Event Messages dev Device Event Messages These event messages are generated by the system variable dev in one of the following formats depending on the router model you are using Series 200 and 400 dev device event message Router 650 dev slot number device event message The adapter card module ID cannot be identified by the driver These IDs are listed
576. w 11 12 Next Hop Host 11 12 Packet Type high 11 12 Packet Type low 11 13 Precedence 11 13 Random load balancing 11 13 RIP and SAP split horizon 11 14 RIP Listen 11 14 RIP Supply 11 14 12 Index SAP driven RIP supply 11 15 Socket low 11 16 Source Route Token Ring 11 18 Source Socket low 11 18 IPXWAN 11 11 isdn 16 33 See v 25 bis K L key 16 32 LAN Address 4 15 7 17 LAN ID Hex 6 13 latency 4 19 Ib 16 32 Ibmib 16 32 LCO Auto Restart 4 17 LCP Active Open 4 17 LCP connection 4 17 Learning Bridge 6 13 Length 6 13 7 17 line charges minimizing 4 21 Lines menu A 5 Link Idle Time T3 4 17 link verification 4 5 List 16 35 List Members 12 10 List Name 6 13 7 17 8 9 11 11 12 11 List Name 11 11 LLC2 connection 4 10 LMI 4 23 LMI Local Management Interface 4 19 LMI switch 4 19 Load Balancing 7 17 Local Address 7 18 Local ASN 7 18 Local DTE Address 13 8 Log 16 11 16 32 LOG BOTTOM 16 19 Logj 16 13 Logout 16 15 16 27 Loop Detection Time Hex 6 13 Low LCN 13 6 13 7 Low PVC LUN 13 8 Low SVC LCN 13 8 Index 13 xepul 14 Index Low Value hex 6 13 7 18 Lower Circuit Name 13 8 LQM Time 4 18 LQM Time secs 4 17 M MAC address See also stati on address MAC Address high 6 14 MAC Address low 6 14 MAC data link header 6 14 MAC dest high 6 14 MAC dest l
577. w instance map entry or other variable The pathnames are constructed as follows isdn adapter ccttbl variable cct or 49 1 1 variable cct isdn mapping ipmapping variable instance or 49 2 1 variable instance The variables are listed alphabetically under two branches V 25 bis Adapter bandwidth cct contains the maximum bandwidth allowed for an outbound connection This value is only used when the V 25 bis exten sions are set for per channel bandwidth and maximum channels to aggregate Value per channel Bandwidth Max channels to aggregate cctname cct contains the name configured for this circuit such as WAN1 Management Information Base Variables isdn ISDN V 25 bis Information Base ccttypelcct contains the circuit type defined in the V 25 bis circuit group definition either Circuit Group Member Backup Member Pool Member Or Misconfigured Circuit connecttime cct contains the value indicating the time in seconds that the current V 25 bis connection has been alive If there is no current connection then this value indicates the total time that the last connection was up If a connection has never been established the value is 0 index cct contains the circuit number for this V 25 bis circuit This variable is used with the index number for the first circuit to find all the circuit numbers for use in the other variables ST lasterror cct contains the last two ASCII character errors issued b
578. was booted the value is set to Never used IP Mapping ip_networks IP addr for hop contains the IP network map to the circuit Each IP address accessible for this hop is a separate index the instance within the square brackets ipmapcctname map contains the actual circuit name associated with the map This indication is valid only when the map state is Connecting or Connect In other states the variable contains No circuit mapped ipmapconndrop map contains the number of packets dropped for this map while the map was connecting and during the connected state ipmapconnectnum map contains the number of separate successful calls made on behalf of this map ipmapconnecttime map contains the amount of time this map has been in the connected state that is total connect time for the map ipmapdowndrop map contains the number of packets dropped for this map while the map was going down This occurs when packets are queued to be sent and either the user disables the map or the connection is lost during data transfer ipmaprcvpkt map contains the number of packets successfully received for this map Management Information Base Variables isdn ISDN V 25 bis Information Base ipmapstate map indicates the state of the IP map The possible states are the following disconnected means the map is disconnected the circuit is available disabled means the circuit has been disabled by NCL s Disipmap command
579. wer range of destination socket numbers IPX Protocol Parameters Parameters and Options For additional information refer to Dest Socket high earlier in this chapter F or more information about Socket lists refer to Socket high and Socket low later in this chapter Effect Determines whether packets are dropped or relayed filtered based on the contents of packet fields and a range established by a matching set of low and high filter parameters The matching high and low router parameters and corresponding packet fields are listed in the following table Packet Field IPX Parameters Destination Host Dest Host low and Dest Host high Destination Network Dest Network low and Dest Network high Destination Socket Dest Socket low and Dest Socket high Source Host Source Host low and Source Host high Source Network Source Network low and Source Network high Source Socket Source Socket low and Source Socket high Packet Type Packet Type low and Packet Type high Default Ignore Don tMatch Applies the filtering action drop accept log if the contents of the applicable packet field do not fall within the range established by the matching low and high filter parameter TT Ignore Applies no filtering action if the contents of the applicable packet field fall within the range established by the matching low and high filter parameters oe ox 8 Match Applies the filtering a
580. where cct indicates the circuit type Is the type of error that was last seen on this interface The fol lowing values are valid for this field e unknownErr 1 receiveShort 2 receiveLong 3 illegalDLCI 4 unknownDLCl 5 ImiProtoE rr 6 ImiUnknownlE 7 ImiSequenceE rr 8 ImiUnknownR pt 9 exmib fr errtbl entry type cct 36 26 3 1 2 cct where cct indicates the circuit E thernet 802 3 alig error_rx contains the number of non aligned frames received by circuit cct A non aligned frame does not end on a byte boundary babl_error_tx contains the number of babbles on circuit cet A babble occurs when the transmitter portion of the local area controller SONIC transmits an Ethernet or IEEE 802 3 frame containing more than 1518 bytes this byte count does not include the 64 bit frame preamble and synchronization bits In such an instance the transmitter completes sending the entire frame and increments this counter buferr_tx contains the number of transmit buffer errors A transmit buffer error indicates corruption of the transmit descriptor ring associated with circuit cet Usually such corruption takes the form of a break in the data chain a series of pointers to multiple buffers that contain consecutive portions of a lengthy frame A transmit buffer error disables the transmitter portion of the local area controller SONIC Management Information Base Variables cct Circuits Information Base byte_c
581. wing Copy a router configuration to the PC host for storage a Copy a router configuration from the PC host to the original router or to other routers a Copy the displayed output of certain NCL commands into a PC host file The PC must be emulating a VT100 or ANSI terminal and can be connected either directly or using a modem to the router s console port Also the PC must be running a Zmodem compatible terminal emulation program such as PROCOMM PLUS This section describes the use of NCL commands with the PROCOMM PLUS terminal emulation program version 2 01 You can use other PC host versons of Zmodem However the exact procedure for invoking them depends on how each is implemented and is likely to differ from the procedures shown on the following pages The commands available in this category are the following Function Copies a router configuration from a file on the console PC to the router page 16 99 Copies NCL command output or the router configuration from the router to a file on the console PC page 16 100 These commands are detailed below 9T Recommended Hardware Connections For the correct cable for either a direct or a modem connection between the PC host and the router refer to the information on console cables in the installation guide for your router spuewuuop TON PROCOM M PLUS is a product of Datastorm Technologies Inc 16 97 Note 16 98 Using the Network Control Languag
582. work Service B 14 V 25 bis Network Mapping 8 8 COO OS OU IN Enter Selection B for Previous Menu Figure 9 1 Access to SNMP Parameters SNMP Parameters Enable the Simple Network Management Proto col SNMP agent which allows the router to respond to queries from a network manager and to report certain router events such as reinitializa tions and disabled interfaces Page SNMP Parameters 9 3 Community Name 9 3 Event Filter Level 9 3 Node Address 9 4 Send Event Messages As Traps 9 4 Session Mode 9 4 Session Type Community Name Event Filter Level Node Address Options Options SNMP Agent Parameters Parameters and Options Parameters and Options Serves as a password for network managers application entities in SNMP terminology to have access to the SNMP agent on this router The SNMP application running on the network management node configures one or more community names the node may use in its queries to agents Each query uses one name Other nodes may be configured to use the same community name A community may have members in common with other communities and may be a subset or superset of other communities Most network management schemes use the community name Public Some schemes set up other specific community names f you have SNMP network management stations on your extended network enter one of the community names used Public or another specif
583. x D to ANSI Standard T1617 1991 Results in these additional parameters Alarm Timer Bandwidth Reservation Events for Error Intervals Between Full Polls Monitored Events Multicast Support Permanent Virtual Circuits Poll Interval The Local Management Interface option displays a screen with parameters for defining a set of vendor generated enhancements to the original Annex D procedures Results in these additional parameters Alarm Timer Bandwidth Reservation Events for Error Intervals Between Full Polls Permanent Virtual Circuits Poll Interval Monitored Events Multicast Support Specifies no management interface between the multiprotocol router and the Frame Relay network In the instance all PVCs must be manually configured Note Two other parameters Annex D Switch and LMI Switch are intended to support test debug environments where two Hewlett Packard or Wellfleet multiprotocol routers are directly connected To use these parameters configure one router as a DTE with ANSI Annex D or LMI specified as the Management Type and the other router as DCE with Annex D Switch or LMI Switch specified as the Management Type Both options display additional parameters For more information refer to Provide Update Status Maximum Poll Interval secs Monitored Events and Events for Error Sets the upper limit for the number of channels your terminal adapter uses to make a connection For further channel information
584. xt hop IP X X X X Meaning Action A duplicate IP next hop entry has been configured in the IP to V 25 bis mapping configuration X X X X is the IP address of the duplicate Remove the duplicate entry If not removed the first entry is used and the second entry will be ignored V35 circuit record missing Meaning Action A circuit has not been configured Modify the configuration to ensure that it includes circuit records for cct Wrong sequence number on MI enquiry Meaning For the indicated frame relay circuit the other side of the frame relay interface is issuing status enquiry messages with keep alive sequence numbers that are not as expected That is this sequence number is more than one greater than the last one we received 17 57 Event Log Messages cct Circuit Event Messages X High priority transmit congestion Meaning This message is reported when the data packets that were prioritized as high can t be sent over the WAN link due to congestion This message is reported on the first instance of dropping a packet due to congestion and the first time a packet is dropped after the tx_congestion or total_tx_error statistic is reset X Latency cap XXX bytes XXXms XXXbps Meaning This reports the calculated number of maximum bytes that will be queued to the given WAN circuit The numbers in parenthesis are the configured values for Max Link Latency and Clock Speed that were us
585. y Meaning A status request of the packet level interface has generated an error 17 139 Event Log Messages X 25 Event Messages read error xx occurred in state xx Meaning A read of the packet level interface has generated an error switch call xxx to xxx Meaning An incoming Call Request has been switched switched call reset s ot n cir clearing code diag diagnostic Meaning A virtual circuit has been reset switched VC clear requested Meaning A switched virtual circuit is being cleared switched VC close timeout detected retrying slot n Meaning An internal close request has been lost between slots virtual cctis already disabled Meaning NCL s Disable command was issued for the already disabled virtual circuit vi rtual cct virtual cctis already enabled Meaning NCL s Enable command was issued for the already enabled virtual circuit vi rtual cct virtual cctis disabled Meaning Indicates that virtual circuit vi rtual cct is disabled virtual cctis enabled Meaning Indicates that virtual circuit vi rtual cct is enabled and ready to establish or receive a call 17 140 Event Log M essages X 25 Event Messages Table 17 2 Cause Field Codes Code DCE generated 1 Number busy 3 Invalid facility request 5 Network congestion 9 Out of order 11 Access barred 13 Notobtainable 17 Remote procedure error 19 Local procedure error 21 RPOA out of
586. y its 48 bit XNS host address You must acquire the host number often identical to one of the station MAC addresses actually being used on that router which may be reset from the user configured host number or factory configured station address by various other options and protocols Type the XNS host address in 12 character hexadecimal format Assigns a network number to the next router in the hop sequence Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering XNS packet type numbers when creating a Packet Type filter or Packet Type list Leave this field blank and enter the XNS packet type number in the Packet Type low field if you are filtering a single XNS packet type number 10 9 OT SJIPULLed oy SNX Packet Type low Options Precedence RIP Interface Cost RIP Listen No 10 10 Xerox Network Systems XNS Router Parameters Parameters and Options Enter the highest XNS packet type number in the range if you are filtering a range of XNS packet type numbers a Enter the list name in the Packet Type low field and leave this field blank if you are creating an XNS Packet Type filter and want to create a range of packet type numbers with a filter list For additional information refer to Packet Type low later in this chapter Sets the upper boundary of the range for filtering DE Cnet packet type numbers when creating a Packet Type filter or Packet Type list a Enter the XNS packet type number i
587. y the terminal adapter If no error has been set then it contains None lastloglcct 1 contains the last V 25 bis event message for this circuit seg UOnBUWOjU quowbHeuep phonenum cct contains the last phone number called on outbound connections and the last phone number received on inbound connections On manual connections this value is set to Unknown On inbound connections where the receive number is not passed it is also set to Unknown If no connection has been established since the router was booted the value is set to Never used state cct indicates the state of this V 25 bis circuit one of the following Current outbound means the connection was opened in the outbound direction and is currently open Current inbound means the connection was opened in the inbound direction and is currently open Previous outbound means the last connection was opened in the outbound direction and is currently closed Previous inbound means the last connection was opened in the inbound direction and is currently closed Never used means no V 25 bis connection has been established since the last time the router was booted 18 71 18 72 Management Information Base Variables isdn ISDN V 25 bis Information Base subaddr cct contains the last subaddress sent on an outbound connection or received on an inbound connection If not known the value is set to Unknown If no connection has been established since the router
588. ype low field if you are filtering a single DE Cnet packet type number Enter the highest packet type number in the range if you are filtering a range of DECnet packet type numbers a Leave this field blank and enter the name of a Packet Type list in the Packet Type low filed if you want to establish a range of packet types using a filter list For more information refer to Packet Type low later in this chapter Sets the lower boundary of the range for filtering DE Cnet packet type numbers when creating a Packet Type filter or Packet Type list Enter the packet type number in this field and leave the Packet Type high field blank if you are filtering a single DE Cnet packet type number a Enter the lowest packet type number in this field and enter the highest packet type number in the Packet Type high field if you are filtering a range of DECnet packet type numbers a Enter the name of a Packet Type list in this field and leave the Packet Type high field blank if you want to establish the range of Packet Types using a filter list For more information refer to Packet Type high earlier in this chapter 8 Assigns a priority value to the filter the higher the precedence the greater the priority You can construct up to 31 filters per DE Cnet circuit group The Precedence value is used when an incoming packet meets multiple filter rules In such an instance the filter with the highest priority is applied

HP 200 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents